(logo)
(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Open Source Books | Project Gutenberg | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Children's Library | Additional Collections

Search: Advanced Search

Anonymous User (login or join us)Upload
See other formats

Full text of "A grammar of the Greek language"

The Students Greek Grammar. 



GRAMMAE 

OF THE 

GKEEK LANGUAGE. 

.By DR GEOKGE CUETIUS, 

rBOrESBOE IN THE tTNITEESITY OP LEIPZIG. 

TRANSLATED UNDER THE REVISION OF THE AUTHOR. 
EDITED 

By WILLIAM SMITH, LL.D., 

OLABSIOAL EXAMIIIES IN THE UNIVEKSITY OF LONDON, AND EDITOB OF THE 0LAS8I0AL 
AND LATIN DICTI0NAEIE8. 



For to^^^e qp Colleges a>4^ High - Schools. 



NEW YORK: 

HAKPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS, 
franklin square. 

18 7 2. 



5^/^J^ 






f XL 






EDITOK'S PREFACE. 



The Greek Grammar of Dj;. Curtius is acknowledged 
by the most competent scholars, both in this country and 
in Germany, to be the best representative of the present 
advanced state of Greek scholarship. It is, indeed, almost 
the only Grammar which exhibits the inflexions of the lan- 
guage in a really scientific form; while its extensive use 
in the schools of Germany, and the high commendations 
it has received from practical teachers in that country, are 
suflicient proof of its excellence as a school-book. It is 
surprising to find that many of the public and private 
schools in this country continue to use Grammars which 
ignore all the improvements and discoveries of modern 
philology, and still cling to the division of*the substantives 
into ten declensions, the designation of the Second Perfect 
as the Perfect Middle, and similar exploded errors. Dr. 
Curtius has stated so fully in his Preface the principles on 
which this Grammar is constructed, that it is unnecessary 
to say more by way of introduction. It only remains to 
add that the translation has been made from the fifth edi- 
tion of the original work (1862), with the author's sanction, 
and that the proof-sheets have enjoyed the advantage of 
his final correction and revision. 

An abridgment for the use of the lower forms is pub- 
lished simultaneously with the present work. 

w. s. 

London, March. 1863. 



Su f^ 



FROM THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE. 



The fact that within a few years the present Grammar 
has found its way into a large number of schools in various 
countries of Europe seems to me a satisfactory answer to 
the question whether a thorough knowledge of Greek is 
attainable by the method I have adopted. Much, there- 
fore, of what I thought it necessary to state on the first 
appearance of the book does not now require to be repeat- 
ed; but I consider it incumbent upon me to make some 
observations upon the objects and the use of the Grammar, 
•ancT I beg to recommend these to the careful consideration 
of teachers. 

Few sciences have within the last half century been so 
completely reformed as the science of language. . Not only 
has our insight into the nature and history of human speech 
been greatly advanced, but— and this is justly regarded as 
a matter of still greater importance — quite a different 
method in treating language in general has been discov- 
ered, after a new era had been opened up by the philo- 
sophical inquiries of William von Humboldt, and the his- 
torical investigations of Francis Bopp and Jacob Grimm. 
No one, unless he desires to exclude schools from the prog- 
ress thus made, and to confine, them to the mechanical 
repetition of imperfect and antiquated rules, will probably 
doubt that the new knowledge, the principles of which 
have stood the test of nearly half a century, ought to exer- 
cise its influence on the teachino^ of lano-uasre. 

If the teaching of a language in our schools is intended 



VI PREFACE. 

to lead not only to a thorough understanding of the mas- 
ter-works of literature, but at the same time to cultivate 
and stir up the youthful mind by independent exertion, 
and by occupation with a subject so immensely rich, and so 
harmoniously quickening the most different mental powers 
as language, such teaching can not possibly continue to 
keep aloof from the progress of scientific inquiry, which is, 
unfortunately, still the case in many places. The teaching 
of Greek, however, seems to be specially called upon to 
make a commencement. The modern science of language 
has, indeed, exercised its influence on every part of gram- 
mar, but none has been more affected by it than the first, 
commonly called the accidence. In Latin, scientific in- 
quiry into the structure of the forms has not yet reached 
the same completeness as in Greek. The structure of the 
Latin language is less transparent, and we miss so many 
aids which we possccS for the Greek in the high antiquity 
of its literature and in its dialects. A scientific treatment 
of the structure of the Latin language in schools is, more- 
over, a matter of great practical difficulty, on account of 
the early age at which the elements must necessarily be 
learned. We ought not, however, on this account, to sep- 
arate the teaching of Latin from all contact with scientific 
inquiry, the influence of which can show itself with advan- 
tage, at least, in a more suitable arrangement and distribu- 
tion of the matter. Granting, therefore, that our boys, as 
heretofore, must commit to memory a large portion of Latin 
forms ; granting that the most important object in learning 
Latin consists, perhaps, more in the acquisition of fixed 
laws of syntax, which obviously form the principal strength 
of the Latin language, the case of the Greek is different. 
' The Greeks are justly called an artistic people, and the 
Greek language is the most ancient work of art which they 



PREFACE. Vll 

have reared upon a very primitive basis. The student, 
who approaches the Greek after he has already gone 
through a considerable preparation by the study of Latin, 
ought to be impressed with the idea that the structure of 
this language is one of the most marvelous productions of 
the intellectual powers acting unconsciously. Every thing 
lies here clear before us : the sources of our knowledge are 
more varied, and the necessity of analyzing the given forms 
is rendered so absolute, even on account of the Homeric 
dialect, that this analysis has, in fact, never been entirely 
wanting, and after the first appearance of Buttmann, in 
1782, made considerable progress. The attempt, therefore, 
to connect in a still higher degree the practice of the school 
with the spirit of science, can here point to numerous 
precedents ; and it is, no doubt, mainly owing to this cir- 
cumstance that it has met with so favorable a reception. 
My object has been to produce a consistent system, a care- 
ful selection, and a clear and precise exposition, rather 
than an entirely new system. 

In selecting and expounding the results of scientific in- 
quiry, I have always kept in view the idea that the book 
was intended for practical use in schools. The first requi- 
site, therefore, was not to admit any thing which is beyond 
the sphere of the school, to explain only that which is nec- 
essary, and to admit only that which is absolutely certain ; 
for a school-book must speak categorically, must exclude 
all matters of mere opinion, and has no space for discussion 
and inquiry. It is, however, perfectly indifferent whether 
a result has been obtained by special researches into the 
Greek language or by the more general inquiries of com- 
parative philology. 

I was farther obliged to admit only those things which 
find their explanation in the Greek language itself, or at 



Vlll PKEFACE. 

most in a comparison with the Latin ; but even within 
these limits I have confined myself to such innovations as 
really aiFord an important insight into the structure of the 
forms, whereas all that belongs to philological learning and 
many other things have been passed over because they 
seemed unnecessary. Among such superfluous innovations 
I include especially all changes of terminology, and the 
entire alteration of whole parts of grammar which are often 
still less necessary, but to which formerly too much impor- 
tance used to be attached. 

The new technical terms I have introduced have gen- 
erally been approved of, and the principle stated in my 
Preface to the first edition, though not followed with pe- 
dantic consistency, " if possible, to put significant names in 
the place of dead numbers," as, for e, (/., A Declension, O 
Declension, instead of First and Second Declension, will 
scarcely be found fault with, for a name with a meaning at 
once gives a piece of information, and therefore facilitates 
learning. Doubts have been raised only about the expres- 
sions strong and -z^^^^^l', which I have employed to distin- 
guish the two Aorists and Perfects. I am as well aware 
now as I was at the first that, from the point of view of 
scientific inquiry, much may be said against the expressions, 
but I nevertheless feel that I can not give them up. For 
the old designation by numbers is unsatisfactory, unless 
we are prepared for its sake either to sacrifice a more con- 
sistent arrangement of the verb, or to mislead the pupil by 
calling the Aorist which is treated of first the second, and 
first the one with which he is made acquainted afterward. 
But a common name to distinguish the two forms of the 
Aorist Active Middle and Passive, and of the Perfect 
Active, is indispensable in a system of Greek Grammar. 
An innovation had here become necessary, for both neg^ 



ative and positive reasons. The expressions strong and 
weak have this advantage — that, after being introduced by 
Grimm into his German Grammar, they have also been 
adopted by English grammarians ; and, though I use them 
not quite in the same sense, they are easily intelligible. 
It will surely not be difficult to make a pupil understand 
that those forms are called strong which spring from the 
root, as it were, by an internal agency, and loeak those 
which are formed by syllables added externally, especially 
as he may easily compare the English tahe^ took, and love^ 
loved. I still know of no designation which, with so few 
disadvantages, oifers so many advantages as this, and I shall 
retain it until a better one is suggested ; and, after all, in 
necessary innovations, it is often more important that men 
agree than on what they agree. 

The fact that the most essential changes I have made in 
the arrangements of the subjects — as, for example, the strict 
adherence to the system of Stems in all the inflexions, and 
especially the ilivision of the verb according to temporal 
Stems — have met with the approval of practical teachers, 
has been to me a source of great gratification, it being a 
clear proof that the demands of scientific inquiry are by no 
means so much opposed to a right system of teaching as 
is still imagined by many. The arrangement of temporal 
Stems is made less upon scientific than upon didactic 
grounds, in such a manner that kindred forms are joined 
together, and due regard is paid to the progress from that 
which is easy to that which is more difficult. 

The chapter on the formation of words, though somewhat 
enlarged, has, for the same reasons, still been kept very brief. 
But, in treating of the verbs, I have directed attention to 
the formation of verbal nouns : in treating of the verbs of 
the different classes, I have always directed attention, by a 

1* 



PREFACE. 



number of characteristic examples, to the application of the 
different Stems in the formation of words. By this means 
the learner has an opportunity, during the study of his 
grammar, of making himself acquainted with a number of 
words, and I have no doubt that teachers will give their 
sanction to this arrangement. 

In regard to Syntax, the positive results of recent lin- 
guistic inquiries are as yet less numerous. In this part of 
the Grammar, therefore, I follow the principle of stating 
the essential idioms of the Greek language with the utmost 
possible precision and in the utmost logical order. Only 
in some chapters, especially in that on the use of the tenses, 
does my system present considerable differences from the 
usual one. All minute disquisitions, conjectures, and more 
or less probable theories — among them especially the ever- 
repeated theory about the original local meaning of the 
cases, with which I can not agree at all — have been rigor- 
ously excluded. In this part, also, I have never neglected 
to compare the phenomena of the Greek language with the 
corresponding ones of Latin, and occasionally also of En- 
glish, where this could be done with brevity and advan- 
tage ; for as the usage of a language must be mainly com- 
prehended by a feeling of language, I imagine that every 
appeal to a Latin usage already embodied with our feeling 
of language, or to an English usage familiar to us from 
childhood, advances our knowledge much more than philo- 
sophical definitions or technical terms of vague or various 
meanings. For the same reason, I every where attach 
great importance to an accurate translation of a Greek 
idiom into English or Latin. I need hardly guard myself 
against the opinion that I considered such a translation to 
be a philosophical explanation of a linguistic phenomenon. 
A real explanation is beyond the problem of a Grammar. 



PREFACE. XI 

I scarcely need repeat here that the present book is not 
intended, like an Elementary Grammar, to be committed 
to memory paragraph by paragraph ; but, in teaching, a 
suitable selection, according to the degree of the pupil's 
advancement, should be made by the teacher. By a dif- 
ference in type I have myself, at least partially, indicated 
this. 

It may be remarked in general that the first business 
every where is that of memory, and only when the actual 
forms, with the aid of the paradigms, have been committed 
to memory, analysis may be added. First knowledge, then 
understanding : this ought to be the leading principle ; 
but, as I have said in another place, " Memory can neither 
accurately grasp the great variety of Greek forms nor re- 
tain them, unless it be supported by an analyzing and com- 
bining intelligence, which furnishes, as it were, the hooks 
and cement to strengthen that which has been learned, 
and permanently to impress it upon the mind." If details 
learned at different times and carefully committed to mem- 
ory, during a subsequent repetition variously combine with 
one another and form various groups ; if, then, many things, 
at first sight strange, appear to the pupil in the light of a 
law pervading the language, such insight is certainly not a 
mere support of memory, but animates the desire to learn, 
and incites to exercise the power of thought in a variety 
of ways. The present book offers to teachers abundant 
opportunities for such exercises, and acquires its highest 
efficacy under the guidance of thinking teachers who are 
truly familiar with it, and take a delight in its subjects. 
That the book has actually found such teachers has been 
proved to me in various ways, and caused me sincere grat- 
ification. G. C. 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



INTRODUCTION. 

THE GREEK LAI^GUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS. 

FIRST PART.— ETYMOLOGY. 

I. Letters and Sounds. 

CHAPTER I. 

THE GREEK CHARACTERS. 

A.Letters § 1-9 

B. Other Characters 10-16 

C. Accents 1 7-23 

D. Punctuation 23 

CHAPTER II. 

THE SOUNDS. 

A. The Vowels 24-29 

B. The Consonants 30-34 

CHAPTER III. 

COMBINATIONS AND CHANGES OF SOUNDS. 

A. Vowels in Combination 35-39 

B. Other kinds of Vowel Changes 40-43 

C. Consonants in Combination with one another 44-54 

D. Other Changes in the Middle of a Word 55-62 

E. Changes of Sound at the End of a Word •. 63-69 

CHAPTER IV, 

DIVISION OP SYLLABLES AND THEIR QUANTITY. 

A. Division of Syllables 70-73 

B. Quantity 74-78 

CHAPTER V. 

ACCENTS 79-99 



XIV CONTENTS. 

II. Inflexion. 
A. Inflexion of Nouns and Pronouns. 

CHAPTER VI. 
declension of substantives and adjectives. 
First Principal (or Vowel) Declension. 

A. The A Declension §112-113 

{commonly called the First Declension?) 

1. Feminines 114-119 

3. Masculines 130-123 

B. The O Declension 134-131 

{commonly called tJie Second Declension.) 
Attic Declension 133-133 

Second Principal (or Consonant) Declension 135-143 

{commonly called the Third Declension.) 

1. Consonant Stems : 

a. Guttural and Labial Stems 144-145 

6. Dental Stems 146-149 

c. Liquid Stems 150-153 

2. Vowel Stems : 

a. Soft Vowel Stems 154-158 

h. Diphthong Stems 159-161 

c. O Stems 163-163 

3. Stems suffering Elision : 

a. Sigma Stems 164-167 

5. r-Stems 168-169 

c. r-Stems 170-171 

Irregularities in Declension 174-177 

Case-like Terminations •. 178-179 

CHAPTER VII. 

OTHER INFLEXIONS OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

A. Gender .*. 180-191 

B. Comparison 193-300 

C. Adverbs of Adjectives 301-304 

CHAPTER VIII. 

INFLEXION OF PRONOUNS 305-319 

CHAPTER IX. 

THE NUMERALS 320-234 



CONTENTS. XV 

B. Inflexion of Verbs. 
General Remarks §225-230 

LIST OF PAEADIGMS. Tabic. 

Elfiijlam -.- I. 

Synopsis of Xv w, Iloose (exhibiting the meanings of the Tenses) II. 

VERBS IN Q. 

A. Vowel Stems : 

1. Uncontracted, Xuw .'. . III. 

2. Contracted, Tiixdoj, ttoiew, dovXou) .- IV. 

B. Consonant Stems : 

1. Guttural Stems, TrXkw, ^eyyw, rdaffu) V. 

2. Dental Stems, ^pivdofiai, ttciOw, KOfiiK(o VI. 

3. Labial Stems, 7r£/i7rw, Xei'ttw, KaXinrTio VII. 

4. Liquid Stems, dspcj, dyyeXXw, cnrdpio VIII. 

VERBS EN MI. 

First Class, tLOijui, didiofit, 'larrjin IX. 

Second Class, Mkwhi X. 

CHAPTER X. 

FIRST PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION, OR VERBS IN Q. 

I. The Present-Stem : 

A. Inflexion of the Present-Stem : . . . § 231-233 

B. TheAugment 234-242 

C. Contracted Verbs 243-244 

D. Distinction of the Present -Stem from the Verbal 

Stem 245-253 

n. The Strong Aorist-Stem 254-257 

m. The Future-Stem 258-266 

IV. The Weak Aorist-Stem 267-271 

V. The Perfect-Stem 272 

1. Perfect Active 276-282 

2. Pluperfect Active -• 283 

3. Perfect Middle and Passive 284-289 

4. Pluperfect Middle and Passive 290-2^1 

VI. Forms of the Strong Passive Stem 292-295 

VII. Forms of the Weak Passive Stem 296-299 

Verbal Adjectives 300 

Verbs which leave their Stem- Vowel short 301 



XVI CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER XI. 

SECOND PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION, OR VERBS IN MI. 

Preliminary Remarks § 302-304 

1. First Class 305-317 

2. Second Class 318-319 

CHAPTER XII. 

IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION . 320-327 

Anomalies in Signification 328-330 

Outlines of the Accentuation of Verbal Forms 331-333 

Peculiar Verbal Forms of the Ionic Dialect 334 D.-338 D. 

III. Derivation. 
CHAPTER XIII. 

A. Simple Berivatwes 339-340 

1. The most important Suffixes for forming Substan- 
tives 341-349 

2. The most important Suffixes for forming Adjectives. . 350-352 

3. Derivative Verbs 353 

B. Compound Derivatives ': 

1. Form of the Combination 354-358 

2. Meaning of Combination 359-360 



SECOND PART.— SYNTAX. 
Preliminary Remarks 361 

CHAPTER XIV. 

NUlteER 'and GENDER 362-367 

CHAPTER XV. 

THE ARTICLE 368-391 

CHAPTER XVI. 

. USE OF cases: 

A. Nominative • 392-393 

B. Vocative 394 

C. Accusative 395-406 

D. Genitive 407-428 

E. Dative 429-443 



CONTENTS. XVll 

CHAPTER XVII. 

THE PREPOSITIONS § 444 

General View of the Prepositions . 448 

1. Prepositions which take only One Case 449-457 

2. Prepositions which take Two Cases 458-461 

3. Prepositions which take Three Cases 462-468 

CHAPTER XVIII. 

THE PRONOUNS 469-475 

CHAPTER XIX. 

THE KINDS OF VERBS 476-483 

CHAPTER XX. 

USE OF THE TENSES 484 

1. The forms for the Incomplete Action 486-491 

2. The forms for the Indefinite (Aorist) Action 493-498 

3. The Future 499-501 

4. The forms for the Complete Action 502-506 

CHAPTER XXr. 

USE OF THE MOODS. 

A. In Simple Sentences : 

1. Indicative 507 

2. Subjunctive 508-513 

3. Optative 514-517 

4. Imperative 518 

B. In Compound Sentences : 

Connexion of Sentences with one another 519-524 

1. Dependent, Declarative, and Interrogative Sentences 525-529 

2. Sentences expressing a purpose. 530-533 

3. Conditional Sentences 534-550 

4. Relative Sentences 551-555 

5. Temporal Sentences 556-558 

CHAPTER XXII. 

THE INFINITIVE. 

1. Use of the Infinitive in general 559-566 

2. The Case of the Subject and Predicate with the Infinitive 567-572 

3. The Infinitive with the Article 573-574 

4. The Infinigve with av 575-576 

5. THe Infinitive instead of the Imperative 577 



XVlll CONTENTS. 



CHAPTER XXIII. 

ON PARTICIPLES. 

1. Attributive Use § 578 

2. Appositive Use 579-583 

3. The Participle with an Absolute Case 584-586 

4. Supplements to Participles 587-588 

5. The Predicative Participle 589-594 

6. The Participle with av 595 

7. Verbal Adjectives 596 

CHAPTER XXIV. 

SOME PECULIARITIES IN RELATIVE SENTENCES.. 597-605 

CHAPTER XXV. 

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES 606-611 

CHAPTER XXVI. 

THE NEGATIVES. 

1. Use of Simple Negatives. 612-618 

2. Several Negatives combined 619-621 

3. Some Negative Phrases 622 

CHAPTER XXVII. 

THE PARTICLES. 

A. Conjunctions 623 

1. Copulative Conjunctions 624-625 

2. Disjunctive " 626-627 

8. Adversative " 628-630 

4. Comparative " 631-682 

"'5. Declarative " 683 

6. Temporal " 634-685 

7. Causal " 686 

8. Inferential « 687 

9.Final " 638 

10. Hypothetical " 689 

11. Concessive " 640 

B. Emphatic Particles 641-643 

Page 

English Index - - . . 353 

Greek Index - 357 



THE 

STUDENT'S GREEK GRAMMAR. 



raTRODUCTION. 

THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS. 

The Greek language is the language of the Ancient 
Hellenes (^EXXr^veg), the inhabitants of Greece, with all 
its islands and numerous colonies. It is related to the 
languages of the Indians, Persians, Romans, Slavonians, 
Lithuanians, Germans, and Celts. These are all sister- 
languages, and together form the Indo-European family. 

The Greeks were early divided into races, each of which 
spoke a different dialect. The chief dialects of the Greek 
language are the ^olic, Dorfc, and Ionic. At first each 
race employed its own dialect both in poetry and in prose. 

1. The Ionic dialect was spoken by the Ionic race, es- 
pecially in Asia Minor and Attica, in numerous islands, 
and in the Ionic colonies. It was the first of the dialects 
developed by poetry, and produced three diiferent but 
nearly related dialects, viz. : 

a) The Old-Ionic or JE^pic dialect, which is preserved 
in the poems of Homer and Hesiod as well as of their fol- 
lowers. 

h) The New-Ionic dialect, which we know chiefly from 
the history of Herodotus. 

Ob8. — The Old and New Ionic dialects are also designated by the 
common name lonic^ as distinguished from the Attic. 

c) The Attic dialect, in which are written the numerous 
works in poetry and prose produced at Athens in the time 



2 INTRODUCTION. 

of her glorj. The principal writers of the Attic dialect 
are — the tragedians ^schylus, Sophocles, Euripides, the 
comic writer Aristophanes, the historians Thucydides and 
Xenophon, the philosopher Plato, the great orators Lysias, 
Demosthenes, and ^schines. Through the importance 
of Athens in Greece, and the excellence of the Attic lit- 
erature, the Attic became the chief dialect of the Greek 
language. 

Obs. — A less important distinction i^ made between the earlier and 
later Attic writers. .The tragedians and Thucydides belong to 
the earlier Attic, and the remaining authors to the later. The 
language of Plato is intermediate between the two : that of the 
tragedians has also many other peculiarities. 

2. The ^OLic dialect was spoken by the 2Eolians, par- 
ticularly in Asia Minor, Boeotia, and Thessaly. Alcaeus and 
Sappho wrote in this dialect. 

3. The Doric dialect was spoken by the Dorians, chief- 
ly in Northern Greece, in the Peloponnesus, in Crete, and 
in the numerous Doric colonies, especially Sicily and Lower 
Italy. Doric is essentially the dialect of Pindar's lyric 
poems and* Theocritus's bucolics (herdsman's poetry). The 
choruses in the tragedies also contain some Doric forms. 

4. After Athens ceased to be the leading city in Greece, 
the Attic dialect still remained the language of educated 
Greeks. But it soon began to degenerate from its primi- 
tive purity and excellence, and thus, from the third century 
before Christ, the common Greek dialect {{] koivyj ^laXtKroc) 
was distinguished from the Attic. 

On the boundary-line between the older Attic and the 
common Greek dialect stands the great philosopher Aris- 
totle. Among later authors, the most important are — the 
historians Polyhius^ Plutarch^ Arrian, Dion Cassitts ; the 
geographer Strabo ; the rhetoricians Dionysius of Hali- 
carnassus and Lucian. 



^^ 0^ Tfl-i 



ItriTIVBESIf 1 
ETYMOLOGY. 

I. LETTERS AND SOUNBS. 



Chap, 


. L- 


-The Greek Characters. 


' . 




A. Letters, 


« 


§ 1. The Greek letters are. the following: 


Large Character. Small Character. Name. 


Pronunciation. 


A 


a 


> Alpha 


a (short or long). 


B 


ft 


Beta 


b. 


r 


y 


Gamma 


g- 


A 


8 


Delta 


d. 


E 


£ 


Epsilon 


e (only short). 


Z 


z 


Zeta 


z. 


H 


V 


Eta 


e (only long). 


e 


e 


Theta 


th. 


I 


I 


Iota 


I (short or long). 


K 


K 


Kappa 


k. 


A 


X 


Lambda 


1. 


M 


/^ 


Mu i 


m. 


â–  N 


V 


Nu '; 


n. 


iS 


I 


Xi 


X. 





o 


Omikron 


o (only short). 


n 


TT 


Pi 


P- 


p 


9 


Rho 


r. 


s 


(^y 


q Sigma 


s. 


T 


T 


Tau 


t. 


Y 


V 


Upsilon 


•B (short or long). 


<E> 


i> 


Phi 


ph. 


X 


X 


Chi 


eh. 


^ 


^ 


Psi 


ps. 


a 


tJ 


Omega 


o (only long). 



4 LETTERS. § 2. 

§ 2. For 5 there is a double sign in the small character: 
o- at the beginning and in the middle, and g at the end of 
a word. Hence (rvv, aeiw, ^cav, but rrovog, Kepag. In 
compound words g may also stand at the end of the first 
word in the compound : wpog-Epxofjiai, ^vg-j^arog. 

§ 3. From the names of the first two letters arose the 
expression " Alphabet." The characters of the Greek al- 
phabet do not essentially differ from those of the Latin 
and of modern languages. All come from the alphabet of 
the Phoeilicians. 

In regard to pronunciation, the following points are to 
be observed: 

§ 4. All Greek letters are always pronounced alike. 
But 7 is an exception, since, before y, k, x^, or ^, it is 
pronounced n^. Hence in Latin it is represented by n : 
Tiyyb) is pronounced tengo ; o-uy/caXw, synghalo ; \6y\r\y 
longchl; (^top^iy^, jphorminx. 

§ 5. ? is pronounced like the English z. It is of very 
different origin in different cases. Compare imdZwv (for 
fiiyiwv) from fiiyag ; ^wyoy with Latin jugum, English 
"goke^ etc. 

§ 6. ^ we pronounce as f, but probably the Greeks pro- 
nounced the J9 and h separately ; hence pJi^ not f^ is used 
in Latin for 0: (luXocro^iaf jphilosojphia ; ^LXoKT^rrig, Phi- 
loctetes. 

§ 7. we pronounce like the English th. 

§ 8. Of the diphthongs, ai and u are both pronounced 
as ei in height ; oi, as oy in l>oy ; au, as ou in sour ; ov, 
as ou in tour ; vi, as wi in wing; ev and rjv, as eio vs\ few. 
The iota subscriptum {underwritten) is not pronounced in 



§ 3. Dialects, ^The Greek language had in the most ancient times 
another letter, /, which was called Digamma (^t'yaft/xar=" double gam- 
ma") from its form, and Vau {Pav) from its pronunciation. It was 
pronounced like the Latin ti : Polvog, wine z=zltat. vinum. At a later 
time it was written only by the ^olians and Dorians. 



§ 14. OTHKK Cn^}^.^^^^^^ 

a, rjy to. It is not written under, but after capitals, as At, 
Hi, £2<, but still remains unpronouncecl. 

§ 9. When two vowels, usually pronounced together, are 
to be pronounced separately, the latter has over it a diaere- 
sis (Smt/o£o-fc'=<^^i>«^««^^'^^): thus TTuig is pronounced ^<2-^>/ 
avTTvog, a-iojpnos. 

B. Other Characters. 
§ 10. Besides the letters, the Greek language has also 
the sign ', which is placed over the initial vowel to which 
it belongs, and represents the h: e^ is pronounced hex; 
aira^, hapax. This sign is called spirit us asper, "rough 
breathing." 

§ 11. For more exact distinction, the Greeks also mark 
those initial vowels which have not this breathing with the 
sign \ i. e., the sjpiritus lenis, " gentle breathing." This 
sound indicates only the raising of the voice which is nec- 
essary for the pronunciation of a vowel when no consonant 
precedes : Ik is pronounced eJc ; ayw, ago. 

§ 12. In diphthongs the breathing stands over the second 
vowel: ovToq — hoittos ; ei^ov = eidon. But when the first 
vowel is in large character, the breathing stands before it : 
"AiZriQ= Hades; '£li^fi=Ode. 

§ 13. Every initial p has the spiritus asper over it: 
/oai//(j)Soc> f'ivfj.a. In Latin the aspirate is written after 
the p : rhapsodies, rheuina. When two /o's come together 
in a word, ' is usually placed over the first, and ' over the 
second : Wvppoq — Pyrrhus ; KaWippor] = CalUrrhoe. 

Obs. — Many write tlie double q without any breathing: TlvppoQ\ 
KaXKippuT], 

§ 14. As in Latin, so in Greek, the sign ~ over a vowel 
denotes that the vowel is long, "^ that it is short, and - that 
it is sometimes one, sometimes the other. In Greek they 
are used only with the vowels a, /, v, since f, rj, o, w, are 
distinguished by their form. 



6 ACCENTS. § 15. 

§ 15. The sign ' at the junction of two words indicates 
the omission of a vowel or diphthong, and is then called 
an wpostroj)he : irap Ikeivi^ for irapa eKdvoj, with that one/ 
jLiri ^yu) for fxri syw (ne ego). 

§ 16. The same sign has the name coronis (Kopwvig) 
when it stands over the junction of two words contracted 
into one : tovvojulu for to ovofia, the name / Kayadog for 
icat ayaOog, and good. It indicates that a crasis {Kpamg, 
mixtu7'e) or contraction of two words has taken place, and, 
like the breathing, stands over the second vowel of a diph- 
thong : TavTo for to auro, the same. 

C. Accents. 

§ 17. The Greeks also indicate the tone or Accent 
(wpogij^^ia) of words. The sign ' over a vowel is called 
the acute accent {b^ua irpogi^dia), that is, the sharp or 
raised tone : Xoyog, rourwy, wapa, htpog. The syllable 
thus marked must be raised above the rest. 

A word having the acute accent upon the last syllable is 
called oxytone (o^vtovov): irapa y uiri, (damXevg. 

A word having the acute accent upon the last but one is 
called paroopyto?ie {TrapoE,vTovov) : Xiyio, (l>aiv(jJ. 

A word having the acute accent upon the last but two 
is called proparoxytone (TrpoTrapo^vTOvov) : XiytTai, uTrtTe 

§ 18. Obs. — A proparoxytone, having a long vowel or diphthong in 
the second syllable of the word, ought to be pronounced so as to 
give the accent on the third syllable, and yet preserve the length 
of the second syllable : jSefBijKa should be pronounced hebeka ; 
cLTTofSaive, apohaine. 

§ 19. The sign ' over a vowel is called the grave accent 
{fiapua TTpogoj^ia). It indicates a low tone, that is, that 
a syllable is not raised in tone. Thus in airoj^alvt, the 
last two might have the grave accent. The marking of 
them, however, would be superfluous, the absence of the 
acute being a suiBScient guide. All Avords without an 



§ 23. PUNCTUATIOX. 7 

accent on the final syllable are therefore called harytone 
{^apvTOva) : Xeyw, trepog. 

§ 20. The sign \ however, also denotes a subdued acute, 
and occupies the place of an acute in every oxytone not 
immediately followed by a pause : otto, from^ but aTro 
TovTovyfrom this; (^amXevg^a kijig,hutj5a(n\svQ lyivtro, 
he hecame king. Oxytones, therefore, retain their accent 
unchanged only at the end of a sentence. 

§ 21. The sign " over a vowel is called the circuwflex 
accent (Trt/oto-Trw/ztyrj irpoqui^ia), from its shape. The cir- 
cumflex is a combination of the acute and the grave, '\ 

A word having a circumflex on the last syllable is called 
jperisjyoinenon {irspKrirwiui^vov) : ayaOoTg, crKiag. 

A word having a circumflex on the last syllable but 
one is called properispome?ion (TrpoTrEpicrirwiuLevov) : ^cOyt, 

§ 22. In diphthongs, the accent, like the breathing (§ 12), 
is put over the second vowel : (pavyei, tovto. 

When the circumflex accent and the breathing meet upon 
the same vowel, the accent is placed over the breathing: 
ovTog, riOogf "^Qrog. The acute, in a similar case, stands to 
the right of the breathing : aye, ip\ofiaif "Iwv. 

Obs. — The acute is placed between tlie two points of a diaeresis (9), 
aXhoQ^ but tlie circumflex over them, irpaisvai. 

i 
D. Punctuation. 

§ 23. For the purpose of dividing sentences and periods, 
the Greeks employ the comma and the full-point. For 
the sign of interrogation they use the semicolon : rt uirag ; 
what did yoio say 9 For the colon or semicolon they 
place a point at the upper part of the line : Ipiortj vfiag ' 
Ti iTTonjaaTE ; I ask you : what did you do f kairipa i]v ' 
TOTS rjXOev ayyeXog, it was evening ; then a messenger 
came. 



8 VOWELS. § 24. 

Chap. II. — The Sounds. 

A. The Vowels. 

§ 24. The Greek language, like the Latin, has ^nq^ vow- 
els, of which the first four are like the Latin, a^ e^ o, i. 
But instead of the Latin u, the Greeks have v (pronounced 
nearly like the French u and the German it). 

§ 25. The vowels, apart from the distinction of long and 
short, are divided into two classes — the hard and the soft 
vowels : a, 6, r?, o, w, are hard ; v, i, soft. 

§ 26. From the union of hard and soft vowels together 
arise di/phthongs {^i(l)Ooyyoi, i, e., double-sounds). They 
are: 

av, from a and v. ov, from o and v. 

Of, " o " I. 

27. The union of long hard vowels with i produces the 



â– > 


ti 


a 


a 


I, 


s 


(( 


t 


a 


V. 


» 


a 


£ 


(( 


^ 



§ 24. Dialects.'— The Dialects, in many words and forms, admit dif- 
. ferent vowels from those usual in the Attic dialect. Thus : 

1. The Ionic (Epic and New-Ionic) dialect prefers rj for Attic 
d : Att. Oojpd^, Ion. Oiopi]^, hreastplate ; Att. dyopa^ Ion. dyopri^ mcirket ; 
Att. vavQ^ Ion. vr]VQ^ ship ; but Ion. iiwa\i^p'n] for Att. fiE(Tt]fil3pia, mid- 
day. 

2. The Boric^ on the contrary, prefers d : Att. dtjfiog, Dor. ddfiog, 
people ; Att. /xrjrijp, mother, Dor. ixdrjjp (comp. Latin mdter) ; Dor. 'AQdva 
for 'A9r]vd, goddess Athena, even in Attic poets. 

3. The Ionic dialect often changes e to «, and o to ov : Att. ^hog. 
Ion. ^tivog, foreign ; At. 'ivsKa, Ion. uveku, on account of; Att. ]idvog, Ion. 
fiovvog, alone ; Att. ovofia, Ion. ovvo/xa, name. Rarely o to oi, or a to at : 
Att. riyvoTjae, lon. -qyvohim, he Tinew not. 

§ 26. Dialects. — The Kew-Ionic dialect has moreover the diphthong 
wu, which, however, only comes in place ,of av in the other dialects. 
Oojvfia for Oav/na, iDonder ; tiovrov for iavrov, of himself : ojv must be 
pronounced as ou. 



§ 33. CONSONANTS. 9 

spurious diphthongs a, r?, (j>, in which the underwritten 
iota is not heard. (Compare § 8.) 

§ 28. The Greek language also combines v with i, but 
only before vowels: fivla, a fly. 

§ 29. We farther distinguish the obscure o-sound (o, w), 
the medium a-sound (a), and the clear e-sound (t, t^), and 
the more obscure v from the clearer i. 

m 
B. TJie Consonants. 

§ 30. The consonants are divided : I. According to 
the position in the mouth where they are produced, 
i. e., according to their organ {opyavov, " instrument"), 
into : 

1. Gutturals (throat-sounds), k, 7, x* 

2. Dentals (teeth-sounds), r, S, 0, v, X, p, o-. 

3. Labials (lip-sounds), tt, /3, 0, ji. 

§ 31. II. According to ihe'ir power, that is, whether they 
can be pronounced with or without a vowel, into ; 

§ 32. 1. Mutes (mutaa) : 

(a.) hard (tenues), k, t, tt. 

ih.) soft (mediae), 7, S, /3. 

{c.) aspirated (aspirata?), x, 0, (p. 

Ohs. — The aspirated consonants contain each a 7iard consonant 
with the rough breathing, % therefore = k' (kh) ] 9=zr (th) ; 0= 
X (ph). 

§ 33. 2. Vocals (semivocales) : 

(a.) Liquids (liquida)), X, p. 

{h.) Nasals (nasales), 7 (7 before gutturals, § 4), v, fi, 

{c.) Sibilant (sibilans), o- (c). 



§ 32. Dialects. — In the Ionic dialect the aspirates often lose the 
breathing : Uko^xui for Attic ^kxo^ai^ accept ; avnc, for Attic avQiQ^ 
again. The New-Ionic sometimes transposes the breathing : KiQuiv 
for Attic xiTh}v., tunic ; IvOev-ev for Attic evreuOev. 

A2 



10 VOWELS IN COMBINATION. § 34. 

§ 34. The dovhle consonants belong to both kinds : 
5, ;//, 2 : for ^ = k(j, ■^ — tto-, 2 = ^, with a soft sibilant 
(§ 5). 

Obs. — K(s only occurs in compounds with k: tKawKio, I rescue. 



Chap. TIL— Combinations and Changes of 
Sounds. 

A. Vowels in Combination. 
35. In the inner part of a word not all vowels may 



§ 34. Dialects. — A peculiarity of the Greek language is the want 
of the breathing v. The v^ however, was not altogether wanting ; 
for — 

1. The digamma (§ 3, D.) occurred in the Homeric dialect in 
the beginning of the following words : dywixi, Ireak ; liXiQ^ numer- 
ous ; aXitTKoixai, am caught; dva^, ruler ; dvatrauj, rule; dv^dv(>y^ jjlease ; 
dpaide, tender; drrrv, city; tap, spring [««?']; tBvoQ, swarm, people ; 
tiKom, twenty [Doric PiKan, Latin 'viginti]', eIku), yield; €»\w, p7'ess ; 
eKTjTi, icillingly ; tKvpog, father-in-law ; tKwv, willing; tXTrojuai, hope; 
the pronominal Stem i (to, sui), toiKu, appear; iirog, icord ; eIttov, 
spoTce ; tpyov, worh ; tpyoj, close in; tppu), go on; Ipvcj, draic ; ipku), 
shall say ; iaQriQ, clothing; el/jia, dress (Stem Peg, Latin vestis) ; trrjg, 
relative; tiSvg, agreeable; "iXiog, city Ilios ; laog, equal; oIkoq, house; 
olvog, wi7ie (pimim). On the operation of the digamma, see § 63, D., 
75, D. 

2. The / in the middle occurred in o{g, sheep, from oPig (Latin ovis) : 
vr}-6g,ofthe ship, from vdPog (Latin nams). Gen. of vav-g. 

3. The Dorians and JGolians retained the digamma at the begin- 
ning of many words : ^ol. Pkrog, year. Dor. Pi^wg, own. 

4. In Homer, at the beginning of many words, e stands for P. te, 
him, self; luKoai, ticenty ; itar}, equal; tedvov, marriage-gift =^ 'i^vov. 

§ 35. Dialects. — The Dialects vary much in regard to the combi- 
nations of vowels. The £Jpic and New-Ionic leave many syllables 
uncontracted : tv = eu, icell ; dtofiai =z olofiai, I thinTc ; Trd'ig =. Traig, 
doy ; voog = vovg, sense; (piXkrfTe =z ipiXijTs (ametis) ; uskcdv =z dKwv, 
Some of the forms usually uncontracted are, on the 



^ 37. VOWELS IN COMBINATION. 11 

combine. The dissimilar vowels pair Avith one another 
best: 

1. The soft generally remain unchanged before the hard 
vowels : ao<^ia, vnsdom / Xvw, I loosen / \avw, I slumfiber j 
vu^ it rains ; ivvoia, benevolence. 

2. Hard vowels hefore soft ones become diphthongs : 
£u, 6u, good ; iraigy Traig, l)Oy ; yivu, yivei, to trie race, 

Ohs. — Diphthongs sometimes lose tlieir second part before vowels : 
^ov-6q becomes j3o-6g (hov-is) ; Kai-oj^ kol-o), hum. Compare §§ 160, 

248, Oh. 

§ 36. Similar (§ 25) vowels can not well stand together, 
and hence, when they meet, are often contracted according 
to the following laws : 

1. Two similar vowels melt into one long vowel : \aag 
becomes Xaq, stone j ZrjXow, ZrjXu), T a7n zealous; Xiiog, 
XToc, (^ Chian ; (piXirjre, (piXriTE, ametis, in which cases g 
and rj, o and w, are similar. 

Still it must be observed that e f usually become u, and 
o o become ov : Trofee, ttoUi, do / ttAooc, ttXcuc, passage hy 
sea. Vowels before a similar one beginning a diphthong 
disappear: ttXoov, tt\ov, of a passage ; oiKiu, oiku, dwells ; 
^i\iyy (l)iXy, arnet. 

§ 37., 2. Dissimilar vowels form a compound in which 



contrary, contracted in these dialects: IpoQ^^upog^ lioly ; (idxjagzzz 
(Sonffag, one wlw has called. 

2. The abbreviation in the diphthongs ending in v is explained by 
this letter first becoming P, and then being quite dropped (compare 
§ 34, D., 2) : ^ov-6g—(ioP-6g [hov-is]— (io-6g.- 

§ 37. Dialects. — 1. The Dialects supply many exceptions. Thus, in 
New-Ionic especially, eo and eov are contracted into ev, not into ov : 
TToisofiev, TToieujufv, we make ; Trodovm, Troievm, they make. 

2. In the Ionic dialect, ao (rjo) often changes to ew : 'Arps/^ao, 'ATpeL- 
de(o, of Atrides ; 'iXaog, 'iXeajg, merciful, a before w is often changed 
into the thinner sound e : TlocraSewv = UotreLddiov, Att. UoaEidiov, the god 
Poseidon. 

3. In Doric, ao^ au), are contracted into d : 'ATpddao =z 'Arpeica, Uo- 
(Kiddojv â– =. Xlotrei^dv, Q(.do)v (dearum) = Q^dv. 



12 



VOWELS IN COMBINATION. 



38. 



a) the obscurer vowel overpowers the clearer (§ 29). 
Thus from 



ao comes (X) m Tifxaofiev^ 



TinojfiEv, we honor. 
vujSvvog, painless, 
aiduj, pudorem. 
Kr}Xu)Te, ye may de jealous. 
yevovQ, of the race. 
tr]\ov, be jealous, 
tlldr), song. 
Tifio), he honored, 
fiiov, surely not. 
Xpy(Tov, of the golden. 
Xpvool^ the golden. 
KnKoig^ thou art jealous. 
olvovQ, abounding in wine. 



■when the ti rejDresents the lengthening of « 



§ 38. h) When the medium a-sound and clearer e-sound 
meet, the first in order gains the upper hand : 



T]0 


a 


(t) 


' vri-odvvog 


oa 


u 


U) 


' aiSoa, 


or] 


u 

• 


<jj 


' Kr]\6r]TE^ 


£0 


u 


ov 


' ykvEog^ 


. 06 


a 


ov 


' ^^\0€, 


aoi 


a 


V 


' aoi^}7, 


aov 


a 


0} 


' TLjxdoVj 


t]OV 


u 


10 


' /ir) oiiv, 


iOV 


u 


ov 


" X|0w(7£oy, 


eoi 


a 


01 


' XP^f^^oi, 


oei 


u 


01 


' KrjXoeiQ, 


a 


a 


ov 


" oivoeic, 


Obs. — oei 


become 


OV -when tl 


(§ 42). 









ae become 


a in de/cwv, 


d»ca>v, unwilling. 


art " 


a 


' TlfldtJTE, 


Tifidre, honoretis. 


aei " 


^ 


' d£(^W, 


^dit), I siiig. 


ay " 


?f 


' rifidyg, 


rifi^g, honores. 


Ea 


»7 


' *>, 


r)p, spring. 


eai " 


^ 


' Xveai, 


Xvy, thou art loosened. 


vat " 


y 


' XuTjat, 


Xvy, solmris. 



Obs. — In the contractions of an and eai, sometimes ai takes the 
place of ^, €1 that of y. So from deiKrjg, unjit, comes alicfjg ; from 
deipo), I lift up, comes alpu) ; from Xveat comes Xvei (with Xvy). 
Exceptions, §§ 130, 183, 243 (nfidv), 244. 

§ 39. Another mode of treating vowels which meet to- 
gether is called Synizesis {GvviZ,r]Gig, i. e., sinking). It con- 
sists in the first vowel being written but not pronounced 
as a vowel : Qz6q — as one syllable. 



§ 39, Dialects. — Synizesis is frequent in Homer, especially after t : 
UrjXrfiddeu), of Felides ; xp^<^^oig, aureis ; vea,navem; also TroXiag, cities ; 
uySoog, the eighth. 



§ 43. OTHER VOWEL CHANGES. 13 

B. Other Tcinds of Vowel changes. 

§ 40. Another change of the vowels consists in their 
being lengthened. Two kinds of lengthening are distin- 
guished, viz. : 

1. Organic lengthening^ i. e., that which is required by 
inflexion or derivation. By organic lengthening — 

a generally becomes »/, rt/zaw, / Jumor, Fut. n/tz/trw. 

always " w, ^r]\6(x)^ I am jealous, " KijXuxru). 
€ " " rj, TTodu), I TUaJce, " Troirjau). 

1 either " 7, riio, I Jionor, " rro-w ; 

or " £1, St. Xltt, Pres. XetTrw, I leave : 

sometimes " oi, " Xitt, Adj. Xoi-koq, remaining, 

V either " i", Xya», / loose, Fut. \v(r^>) ; 

or . " tv, St. 0yy, Pres. <pevyu}, IJlee. 

§ 41. O&s. — After e, t, and p, a is changed to d instead of r} : law, 
/ leave, alloic ; fut. l6.(Sii) ; St. /a, Ileal ; iuTpoQ, physician ; St. bpa, 
see; opd^ia, a view. The Attic dialect is altogether ai^erse to the 
combinations £j], ir], pr], and frequently puts ed, id, pd in their place. 

§ 42. 2. Co7)ipe7isato7'2/ lengthening, i. e., that which is 
used as a compensation for lost consonants. By it a, even 
when £, I, or p does not precede, is often changed to a : 
Trac, every, from -n-a-vr-g — £ generally becomes ft : ufii, 
Iain, from la-fii (§ 315) — o generally becomes ov : di^ovg 
for §f So-vr-c [Lat. r/a-?i-5] — t always becomes 7, and v 
always v : ^eiKvC-g for §£fKvu-vr-c^ showing. 

Obs. — Exceptions, in which e becomes r], and o becomes w, are given 
in § 147, and in which a becomes ?? in § 270. 

§ 43. The three short hard vowels often interchange in 
one and the same Stem, when, generally, t is regarded 
as the Stem -vowel: Tpiirw, I ttorn ,' tr pair ov, I turned j 

§ 40. Dialects. — The extension of v to ov appears in eiXriXovOa, am 
come, from Stem IXvO (§ 327, 2). 

§ 41. Dialects. — The Old and New-Ionic dialect does not avoid the 
combinations erj, irj, and pr] : IHrj = Attic Irsd, willow ; lijrpog = Attic 
iarpog, physician ; TrsLprjao/xai =: Attic Trupdaofiai, I will try. 

The Doric dialect, on the contrary, regularly lengthens a into a : 
Ti^dffoj =: Tifitjau), I will honor (§ 24, D., 2). _^ 



14 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. § 44. 

TpoTTog, turning / Stem y^v^g, Nom. yivoq, race [compare 
Lat. generis, Nom. gen ws] ; (pXtyu, I hum / ^Xo^, flame. 

r\ also is at times changed to w : apy]yM,I help j apwyog, 
helper. 

C. Consonants in cornbinatiofi with one another. 

% 44. Consonants, in regard to their combination, are 
subject to still greater limitation and change than the 
vowels. Those which are dissimilar (comp. §§ 32, 33) 
agree hest with one another, especially the mutes with the 
liquids. 

That discordant consonants may continue together, they 
are either made more like one another (assimilated) or more 
unlike (dissimilated). The essential laws for the necessary 
changes of consonants are the following : 

§ 45. 1. Before micte dentals (§§ 30, 31), only conso- 
nants of other organs which are of the same order (that is, 
both hard, both soft, or both aspirated, § 32) can stand ; 
consequently, the only allowable combinations of sounds 
are — icr, ttt, yS, /3S, x^^ 0^- 

When a different mute stands before the dental, through 
inflexion or derivation, it must be assimilated to the order 
of the latter. Consequently — 

K^ and x^ become yS. tt^ and <pS become [3d. 

ic9 " y9 " x^' 7r9 " [39 " <p9. 

yr " xr " KT. /3r " ^r " ttt. 

Therefore — 

7r\EK-9riva^ becomes TrXex^^vat, from Tr\eK(o,Itceave. 
Xey-Tog " Xe/crof, " Xeyio, I say 

[lectus instead of leg-tus]. 
\ey-9r]vat " \Ex9rjvai, â–  " Xeyw, / say. 

Sex-Tog " dsKTog, " Sexo/^aL, I receive 

[tractus instead of trah-tus, from tralw]. 
TV7r-9t]vai " TV(p9i]vaij from rvTrruj, I strike. 

ypa^-Tog " ypuTTTog, " ypd<pio, I icrite. 

ypa(p-dr}v " ypd[3driv, " " " 

05s.— The preposition k, out of (Lat. ex), remains unchanged in all 
combinations : iK9emg, casting out ; tKdpourj, running out. 



§ 48. CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. 15 

§ 46. 2. Before mute dentals, mute dentals to be audible 
are changed into o- {Dissimilatio^i), Therefore — 
TT^ St, and 9r become or. 
Te,d9, " 99 " (t9: hence 
, dvvT-TOQ becomes dwaTog, accomplished^ from dvvTix)^ I accomplish. 
4^-Tiov " ^(TTEov, canendum est, " ^du),Ising. 

7rei9-9t]vai " Trei(T9fjvai, to he persuaded, " 7r€i0a», I p&rsuade. 

§ 47. 3. Before /x a guttural becomes y, a dental a, a 
labial jul. Therefore — 

SiujK-ixog becomes diujyfiog, persecution, from ^twKw, I pursue. 
/36-/3pfx-/iat " I3kl3peyfiai, I have deen wetted, from (3psx(o, I wet. 
id-fjiev " co-zLtej/, 'Z/)6 ^Tioic, from ol^a, / ^/ioz(). [2)U8h. 

rjvvT-naL " yvvajxai, I have l)een perfected, from dvvTO), I accom- 

7rs-7rH9-fievog " TreTrutTfisvog, persuaded, from. TrEi9(t),I piersuade. 
KOTT-fiog " K0fiii6g,a strilcing,ivoioii K6Tz-T(x},Istrike\summus,ivou\. 

sup-mus]. 
Te-Tpi(i-fiai " TSTpifiixai, I have heen imhhed, from rpiiSoj, I rub. 
â– ypa<}>-ixa " ypdfifia, letter, from ypd<p(o, I icrite. 

Obs. — Sometimes in derivation the gutturals and dentals remain 
unchanged : uKfirj, hloom; pv9fi6g, 7novement, rhythm; dpi9^6g, nwiv- 
ber. 

The jDreposition Ik leaves its k unchanged : tKfidcrcrio, I wipe out. 

§ 48. 4. Before o-, as a hard consonant, y and ^ become 
K, and ft becomes ir {Assimilation) : jco- is then written 5, 
and TTo- \//. Therefore — 

dy-<T(D becomes dK-crio, written a^-w, / sJiall lead, from dyio, I lead [rexi 

instead of 7'e^-s^, from reg-o~\. 
hx-<yofiaL " hK-(rofxai, written Si^o/xaL, I shall receive, from ^kxofiai, 

I receive [traxi instead of trah-si, from, trah-o]. 
Tpi(i-(TM " • Tpi7r-(TU), written rpiipw, I shall rub, ti-om Tplf3io, I rub 

[scripsi instead of scrib-si, from scrib-o']. 
ypa<i>-(TO} " ypuTT-ffio, written ypdxpco, I shcdl write, from ypdcp-aj, I 

write. 
Obs. — It is clear from § 34 that every k and tt with <r must become 



§ 47. Dialects. — The changes of dentals and gutturals before ft is 
frequently omitted in Ionic: iK-fxevog, favorable, from St. ik (iKdvoj, I 
come) ; dKcfxti^vog, pointed, from St. uk (Lat. acuo) ; dvTfxr], breath ; ddfufi, 
smell, from St. od (o^w) [od-or], Att. da-firj ; 1S-/jisv, we Tcnow = Att. Itr-fiev; 
Ke.Kopv9iikvog, equipped, from St. Kopv9 {Kopvacroi) = Att. KSKopvafisvog. 



16 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. § 49. 

I and \p: hence TrXeK-acj becomes TrXe^w, from ttXsko), I weave ; 
XeiTT-cru) becomes Xei\po), from XetTrw, I leave. 

§ 49. 5. The dentals, when standing separately before <t, 
are dropped without compensatioii ; in like manner v dis- 
appears before Z,. Therefore — 

dwT-mg becomes dvvcng, accomj^lishment, from dvvTu), I accomplish. 
i^d-<Tofiai " i](TOfiai, Iwhall rejoice^ from ijdofiai, I rejoice [laesi for 

laed-si, from laed-o]. 
KopvO-ai " Kopvai, to the helmets^ from Kopvg^ Gen. K6pv-9oQ^ helmet. 
5aifiov-ffi " datixom, to the dwmons, from daifiojv, dceinon. [yoJce. 
avv-Kvyog " av^vyog, yoJced together, from avv, together, and ^vySv, 
Hence a before another c is lost : Teixea-cn becomes re/'xe-ffi, to walls 
(from r€t%of , wall) ; ka-ao^ai, t-aofiai. 

Obs. l.—v is not always dropped before <t or ?• in composition. In 
the preposition kv, the v remains for the sake of clearness : iv- 
araZ^io, I trickle in; ivKevyw/xi, I harness. The v in ttuv, all, every, 
and TrdXiv, again, either remains michanged or is assimilated to 
the following a : irdvao(pog, aU-icise ; iraXifftrvrog, from iraXiv- 
avTog, starting hack The v in (tvv, with, is dropped before ^ or c 
with a consonant following : cv^vyog (see above) ; avtTrrjfia, sys- 
tem ; it is assimilated before a simple a : avaaiTiov, from avv-mnov, 
common mml. 

2. Sometimes v remains unchanged before <t in the 2d Pers. Sing, 
of the Perf Mid. : Tre-^av-crai, thou Imst appeared. 

3. In exceptional cases, compensatory lengthening (§ 42) takes place 
when a single v is omitted : for instance — 

ci) In some Kominatives Sing. : fieXd-g, MacJc, for p,eXav-g. 

h) In the 3d Pers. Pliir. of the chief tenses, where o- has taken 
the place of r : Xv-ov-m, they loosen, instead of Xv-ov-ai (orig- 
inally Xv-ov-Ti) (§ 60). 

c) Often in derivation : yepovaia, senate, instead of yepovna, from 
St. yepovT, Nom. yspojv, old man. 

§ 50. 6. The comhinations vr, v0, vS, ar# likewise omit- 
ted before o-, but cause a compensatory lengthening (§ 42) : 

TravT-ai becomes Tram, to all, from St. ttuvt-, Nom. 7rd-g. 

Ti9evT-g " TiOeig, putting, " " riOevT. 

yepovT-at " yspovcn, to old m£n, " " yepovr, Nom. yspwv. 



§ 49. Dialects. — Homer often assimilates a mute to the fallowing a : 
7ro(T(7t=Att. TToai for 7rod-<n (pedibus). He often preserves one a before 
another : la-o-o/nai, I shall he. 



§ 51. CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. 17 

, (to those } r. ^, 

dEiKvvvT-ai becomes hiKvmiA^j^^ shoicl' ^^â– '^^ Shkwvt, !Nom. detKvv-Q. 

a^,v^-a<o " ^^^'^^-^^Zathm]^'' " ^'^^^^^ Pres. ^7rix.^a>. 

TrevO-aofxai " Treiaofiai^IsMUsu^er, " " 7r€v0, Pres. 7ra<Txa>. 

Ods. 1. — j/r disappears, without compensation, in the Dat. Plur. of 

Stems of Adjectives in svr, Nom. ei-g : St. xapt€i/r, Nom. x«|Otetc, 

Dat. Pkir. xapte-cri for xajOtevr-fri. 
2. — Of j/0 before or, v remains in 'iXfiiv-g, tape-icorm, instead of t\- 

jxivQ-g, Stem tXfiivO : Tipw-g^ the city Tiryns^ instead of 'Ti.pvvQ-Q^ 

Stem TipvvO. 

§ 505. In later Attic a is readily assimilated to a preceding p : Old 
Att. x^pf^ovr]<Tog, New Att. x^ppovrjaog, peninsula ; Old Att. QapaCj^ 
New Att. Oappu)^ I am courageous. 

§ 51. 7. V remains unchanged before mute dentals; it 
becomes the nasal y before gutturals (§ 4), ju before labials, 
and is assimilated before liquid consonants : 

avv-TiOrjiJii, I put together^ is unchanged. 

<7yv-KaXea>, / call togeth£r^ becomes o-yy/caXew. 

cvv-xpovoQ^ contemporaneous^ " crvyxpovog. 

tv-TTupog^ experienced^ " t/xTreipog, from Iv and te7 pa, 2^'oof [so 

in-peritus becomes im-peritus]. 
tv-\//vXOf , inspirited, " tfx\pvxog, from tv and ^wx*)? ^^^• 

ev-jxerpog, metrical, " tfifierpog, from tv and fthpov, measure 

[so in-modicus becomes im-raod- 

icus]. 
avv-peoj, IJiow together, " avppaio, from auv and psw, I flow [so 

con-ruo becomes cor-ruo]. 
avv-Xeyu), I collect, " o-yXXeyw, from cruv and Xeyw, / p'a^A^r 

[so con-ligo becomes col-ligo]. 

0&8. 1. — V in the preposition Iv remains unchanged before p : tv- 

pvBfiog, rhythmical. 
2. — V is combined with p by means of ^ in av-^-p6g. Gen. of dvj7|0, 

man. So is /[* Avith p by /3 in nEcrij/x-li-pia, midday, instead of 

HS(Tr}fi(e)pia (jieffog and rjfiepa, compare" § 61, c). 



§ 51. Dialects. — In the Epic dialect j3 is often inserted between ft 
and p, and between p, and X : pk-p.-^-\ioKa, I Imxe gone, from Stem /loX, 
by metathesis (§ 59). /* before X or p becomes /3 at the beginning of 
a word : j3Xw-(t/cw, / go, Present of the Stem poX ; (Sporog, mortal, for 
UpoTog, from the Stem fxpo or /iop \mor-ior, mortuus sum'l. 



18 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. § 52. 

§ 52. 8, Hard mutes (tenues) unite with a following 
rough hreathmg (spiritus asper) into aspirates (x, Q, (p) : 
hence^ 

t-rr' (fcTTi) and rjfiepa, day, become e<pf]ixepog,for a day. 
deK (dsKo) " r)ix8pa,day, " hxhix^poQ^for ten days. 

ten 
avT {avTi) '"'' virarog, consul, " dvQinrarog, proconsul. 

§ 53. 9. At the end of a word, when the following word 
begins with a spiritus asper, the hard mute is changed into 
an aspirate : 

ovx ovrog, not this, for ovk ovtoq. 

a((t i(TTiag,from the hearth, " cltt' (a7r6) hriaQ. 

KaO' rjfiepav, by day, " kut {Kara) ijukpav. 

Obs. — If another hard mute stands before the one to be aspirated, 
the first must also be aspirated (§ 45): tTrrd and i)}ikpa form 
i^9r}ixepoQ,for seven days; vvktu and dXrjv become vvxO' oXrjv, totam 
noctem. 

§ 53b. 10. Two syllables immediately following one an- 
other can not both begin with aspirates in the following 
cases : 

a) In reduplication the corresponding hard mute takes 
the place of the aspirate : 

Ke-xiopn^a for x€-xw|07?/ca, I have proceeded, from xojplw, I proceed. 
TL-9riixi " Qi-drjixi, I put. 

TTB-^vKa " ^E-^vKa, I have become. 

h) The Aorists Passive of the verbal Stems 0£ {ridrifii, 
I put), 6v {Ovtjf I sacrifice), adopt the same modification ; 
i'Ti-Qr]v,I was put, for e-Oe-Or^v ; l-rv-Orfv, I was sacrificed, 
for l-Ov-Orjv. (Compare §298.) 

c) In the Imperative of the First Aorist- Passive (§ 297), 
on the contrary, the second aspirate is changed to a tenuis : 
(Tw-6ri-Ti, he saved, for au)-6r}-9i. 

d) Isolated instances are : o/xttcy^? embrace, for aji^^^ao ; 
lKi\Hpia, for i')(jE\upia, armistice, from t\^iv, to hold, and 
X^ip, hand. 

§ 52 and 53. Dialects. — The aspiration is omitted in New Ionic : 
l7rr)fiepoQ,J'or a day; dTrirjfii, I send away ; ovk ov-ojq :=^ ovx ovtoq, not so; 
air ov,from the time when, Att. d(p' ov. 



% 55, OTHER CHANGES OF SOUND. 10 

Ois. — Sometimes tlie spiritus asper is changed to the lenis, be- 
cause the following syllable begins with an aspirate : ti-^pa, till, 
for 6-0|oa, from the relative Stem 6 (§ 213, 217), t'xw for s^w, from 
St._*x(§327,6). 

§ 54. Some Stems beginning with r change this letter 
to 6 when an aspirate at the end can not be retained (§ 45). 
This happens : 

, a) In the Substantive Stem Tpi^, whose Nominative is 
Opi^f hair, Dat. Plur. 6piE,L The other cases are regu- 
lar, formed from the Stem rpix (Gen. rpixog, Nom. Plur. 

rplx^g), 

V) In raxyq, quick, whose comparative is Ocktcfljv for 
TaxKj^v (§ 57 ; compare § 198). 
c) In the following Verbal Stems : 

Ta(i>, Pres. OdTTToj^Ihury, Fut. 6d\l/io, Aor. Pass. trd^TjVj Subs. 

^ TUipdc, grave. 



Tpe<p, '^ rpe^oj, I nourish, 


" 9pe\pu}, Subs. Opefifia, cattle. 


mx, " rpsxoj,Irun, 


" Ope^ofiai ) 


Tpv(p, " epvTTTOj, I rit^ to 2nec€s, 


" Op^cj [ (§ 260). 


TV(p, " Tv<p(o, I smoJce, 


" GvxPoj ) 



Obs. — In the Passive First Aorist (§ 296), and in the Infinitive of 
the Perf. Mid., the aspirate of the Stem remains unchanged, yet 

• the initial tenuis is aspirated, because the Stem-consonant is 
not felt to be necessarily an original Aspirate, as it might have 
been modified by the influence of the 9 after it (§ 45) : t9pe(p9T]v, 
Te9pd<])9ai. 



D. Other changes of Consonants and Vowels in the 
middle of a Word. 

§ 55. Important changes of sounds are produced by the 
modifications of the soft vowel i in connection with conso- 
nants (compare §§ 186, 198, 199, 250-253). Frequently, 
for instance, 

1. I after v or |0 is put a syllable farther back, where it 
forms a diphthong with the preceding vowel. Hence, 



20 OTHER CHANGES OF SOUND. § 56. 

â–  TEivcj, from TEv-iio, I stretch, St. rev [tendo]. 

ixaivofiai, " ftav-iofiai, I rage, " fiav. 

dfiEivojVj " dfi£v-i()jv, better, " dfiev. 

KEipoj, " KEp-iu), I shear, " Ksp. 

SoTEipa, " dorep-ia, the giver, fern. " Sorep {Sorfip, gi^er). 

Xslpojv, " xejO-ioiv, worse, " xejo. 

§ 56. 2. ( is assimilated to a preceding X : 

fiaXXov, from fiaX-iov, TTwre, from fidXa, much. 
iiXXonai, " dX-iofiai, I spriTig, St. dX [salio]. 
dXXoQ, " aX-iog, another [alius]. 
(TTeXXu), " oreX-tw, / send, St. oreX. 

§ 57. 3. Gutturals (r and less frequently) coalesce 
with a following i to era- (New Att. tt) : 

rjaawv, from ifK-nov, less, St. ifK, SUperL riKiara. 

ep^(7(Ta, " ep(^K-ia, Thracian, fem. (masc. Qp^K)t St. e/o^cK. 
rdaaii), " ray-iw, / arrange, St. ray. 

cXdo-ffwj^, " tXax-twv, smaller, " tXax, superl. iXaxtoroc. 

Kprjaaa, " K|Oj;r-ia, Cretan, fem. (masc. Kpi?^), St. KpT/r. 
Kopvaaix), " KopvQ-iu), I arm,^ St. KopvO {Kopvg, helmet^. 

§ 58. 4. 3 and sometimes y coalesce with a following t 
to S. 

e^ofiai, from id-iofiai, I sit, St. t^ (ro (Sog,the seat). 
KpdK(t), " Kpay-iuj, I cry, " /CjOay (Perf. Kk-Kpdy-a). 

Other changes of Sounds are : • 

§ 59. 1. Transposition (lUETaOemg), ^Yhlch most frequent- 
ly occurs with A, p, also with fx and v : 

Opdaog, together with Odpaog, loldness. 

Opuxricio, from the St. 9op, I spring, Second Aorist tOopov. 

l3e-(3Xr]-Ka, " jSaX, I have thrown, " " tjSaXov. 

Te-Qvij-Ka, " Oav, I am dead, "â–  " tQavov. 

"â– urj-aig, " Tefi,aciit, Vres. TEfxvu), I cut. 

Obs. — In the last four examples the vowel is moreover lengthened. 

§ 59. Dialects. — Transposition is more frequent in the Homeric dia- 
lect (compare § 295, D.) : KuprEpSg and Kparepoc, strong ; KdpTKrrog z= 
Att. KpdrKTTog, the strongest, from Kparog, strength; rpaTr-dofiw (compare 
§ 295, D.) for Tapir-donEv, we desire to rejoice, St. TEpir {Tkpirofxai). So 
also in iSpaKov, I saw, St. SepK (SepKOfiai) ; tirpaQov, I destroyed, St. irtpO 
(TrepOoj). Homer: drapTrog =: Att. drpuTrog, path. -^ 



§ 62. OTHER CHANGES OF SOUND. 21 

§ 60. 2. The weakening of single consonants. The most 
important weakenings are : 

d) The very frequent one, especially before t, of r to or : 

avaiaQr]<Jia^ want of feeling^ for dvaiaOrjria, from dvaiaOTjTog, without 

feeling. 
^dai for ^avTi, they say. 

On the rejection of v and the compensation for it, which 
frequently occur in this case, see § 49, Ohs. 3, cy compare 
§ 187. 

li) The weakening of initial or before vowels to the spir- 
itus asper: 

vQ, swine, together with avg. Compare Lat. su-s. 

'i-(TTr}-fii for m-arrj-fii, I place. Compare Lat. si-sto (§§ 308, 327, 5, 6). 

§ 61. 3. The entire rejection of sounds. The following 
cases are important : 

a) (T is rejected where it would have to stand between 
two consonants in inflexion : 

y^ypd^-Qai for y£ypa(p-(T9ai, to he written, St. ypatp, Pres. ypd^oj. 
TtTv^-Oe " re-Tvrp-aOe, he ye struck, " tvtt, " rvTrru). 

h) (T between two vowels is very often rejected : 

\eye-ai, Xeyy (§ 38), for Xeyeaai, tJiou art said, St. Xey, Pres. Xsyco. 
edvva-o, ISvvoj, for tdvvatro, thou couldst, Pres. ^vvafiai. 
yeve-oQ for yevetrog, of the race, St. y e v e tr (§ 166). 

c) The rejection of a vowel between consonants in the 
middle of a word is called syncojpe (o-uyicoTrr)) : \--KT-6-ixr\v 
for f-7r£r-o-/zr]v, I flew, St. tt £ r (§ 326, 34). Compare § 51, 
Ols. 2. 

§ 62. 4. The doiibling of a consonant. This is rare, 

§ 60. Dialects. — The Dorians retain r : <pavTi=(pd(Ti(v), they say. The 
older Att. less frequently : rfj/xepov = (rrjfiEpov, to-day. 

§ 61. Dialects. — Syncope is more frequent in Homer : nVre for riTrore, 
why ever f why ? IkskXeto = t-KE-KsXeTo, he called, St. keX. 

§ 62. Dialects. — In Homer simple consonants are readily doubled ; 
the mutes more rarely: ottttw^ == Attic '67riog,7iow; ottttoToc = Attic 
uTToloc, qualis ; orn =: Attic on, tJmt ; the vocal consonants often: 



22 CHANGES AT THE END OF WORDS. § 63. 

when it has not arisen through the assimilations men- 
tioned above (§§ 47, 505, 51, 56). The liquid p is the 
most frequently doubled : tpplxpa for eplipa, I hicrled / 
apprjKTog for a-pr^KTog, not breakable. The aspirates can 
be doubled only by the corresponding tenuis: Ba/cxoc, 

E. Changes of Sowid at the end of a Word. 

§ 63. When a word ending in a vowel is followed by 
another beginning with a vowel, whether accompanied by 
a spiritus lenis or asper, there is a hiatus. The Greeks 
very often suffer the hiatus in prose ; but frequently the 
hiatus is avoided, especially if the first word is a shorter 
one and of itself of little importance. This is done in 
thi^ee ways, that is, either by elision (rejection of the final 
vowel), or by crasis (contraction of the two vowels), or by 
synisesis (collapse of two syllables into one). 



IXXa^e =: Attic £Xa/3€ , lie took ; ^iXonfiei^rjg = Attic ^i\oixHdr]c, readily 
smiling; HwriTog =i Attic ev-vtjto^, well-woven ; cxraov =^ Attic b<Tov,7iow 
great ; vkicvam = Attic veKvm, to the corpses ; 67riaa<o = Attic oTrtVw, 
dach On the contrary, Homer sometimes has a single p where 
the Attic has double : wKvpoog = MKvppoog, swift-Jlowing. Often also 
both forms are usual together : 'AxtXewf and 'AxtWeyf, 'Odvaevg and 
'Odvaaevg. 

§ 63. Dialects. — The Homeric dialect admits the hiatus in many 
cases : the most important are : 

1. The hiatus is only apparent in words with the digamma : Kara 
oIkov for Kara PoTkov, at Jwme. 

2. It is allowed after weak vowels in forms with which elision is 
not usual : TfaiU oiraaaw^ Tie gave to the son. 

3. It is softened by a pause or a cgesura after the first short syllable 
of the third foot : KaOrjao, kfK^ d' eTriTreiOeo nvQip^ sit down, and obey my 
word ; tmv ot «^ lykvovro Ivl /leyapoKri, of which six were horn to him in 
the chambers. 

4. A long vowel or diphthong before another in the thesis be- 
comes short, and causes only an improper or weak hiatus : 'ArpeTdai 
re Kal dXXoi kvKvrjfiideg 'Axaioi, Ye Atridm and ye other well-greaved 
Achoeans " " . Compare § 75, D., 2. 



^65. ELISION. — CRASIS. ^3 

§ 64. 1. Elisio7i^ or the rejection of the final vowel, 
of which the apostrophe (§ 15) is the sign, occurs only 
with short final vowels, but never with v ; most frequent- 
ly at the end of dissyllabic prepositions, conjunctions, and 
adverbs : Itt avT(J[), with ?dm, for Itti avT(^ ; ouS' l^vvaro, 
he could not even^ aXX' f/XOtv, hict he ca'me , less fre- 
quently at the end of nouns and verbs : ot iravr uqa^- 
yiXXovTeg, i. e., ol navra elgayjiXXovregf who reported the 
whole. 

Obs. 1. — The prepositions Trep/, round^ dxpi and fiexpi, till, and the 
conjunction on, that, never suffer elision. 

2. In compounds also the elision occurs, without, however, being 
indicated by the apostrophe : iTr-epxofiai, from tTn-kpxonai, I come 
up; but Trepdpxofiai, I go round. 

3. On the change of consonants occurring with elision (e^* rjukpq), 
see § 53. 

§ Q6. 2. Crasis {Kpaaig, mixing) is governed, on the 



§ 64. Dialects. — Elision is much more frequent with the poets than 
in prose ; thus, not only e and i even in nominal and verbal forms 
are elided, but also the diphthongs ai and oi, in the verbal termina- 
tions fiai, cat, rai, aOai, and in the forms /ioi and roi. In Homer, i in 
oTi, tJmt, is also sometimes elided. 

A change of the final vowel, occurring only in poets, is the apocope 
{aTTOKoiri]). It is the rejection of a short final vowel before a word 
beginning with a consonant. The apocope is frequent in Homer with 
the prepositions ava, Kara, irapa, and with the conjunction apa, note, 
seldom with airo and vtto : it takes place in compounds as well as 
at the meeting of two separate words. The v of av{a) then suffers 
the changes described in § 51 ; the r of Kar(a), the tt of a7r(6) and 
i'7r(6), are made like the following consonant : dvdverai = dvaSvsTai, 
emerges; kcltt tteSiov := Kara. 7re9iov, on the plain; KaXXi7r£=zKaT8\i7re,left 
dehind; irap9ETx>z=zTrapiQEro,put before; dTnrefi^pet^z aTroTrtfi^pei, will send 
away; KardavCiv = KaraOavelv, die. 

§ 65. Dialects. — Crasis in Homer is very rare, but very frequent in 
the Attic poets: e. g., ov^ = 6 l^, KwdvpsTai = Kal oSvpsTai, and laments; 
S)va^ ■=■ u) ava^, Icing ; ^wttocoi = koL ottoooi, and how many. — Herod. 
a>XXoi=oi aXKoL, the rest. The loss of a short initial vowel is sometimes 
indicated by the apostrophe (§ 15): firi yw r= /x^ tyw, ne ego; ijdii 
'Upx^'rai = i]Sr) lUpx^T^^h ^^ ^ already coming out. 



24 SYNIZESIS. § 66, 

whole, by the laws given for contraction (§ 36-39). It 
occurs chiefly after forlns of the article, of the relative 
pronoun (especially 6, quod, and a, quce), after the prep- 
osition TTpo, for, hefore, Latin pro, and the conjunction 
Kaiy and. The syllable produced by crasis is necessarily 
long. The sign of crasis is the coronis (§ 16) : rayaOa, 
bona, from ra ayaOa ; raXXa, from ra aXXa, the other things; 
Tovvofia, the name, from ro ovofxa ; ravro, the same, for to 



Obs. 1. — The rou<?li breatliinor of the article or relative maintains 
its place in spite of crasis : dvr]p^ tlie inan^ irregular for 6 avryp, in 
which case the coronis disappears ; in Oolfidnov, from to ifidnov, 
the dress, the spiritus asper has changed r into Q (§ 52) ; so also 
Odrepov, irregular for ro ezEpov, tlie other. 
â–  2. The new syllable, formed by crasis, has i subscript only when i 
is the last of the contracted vowels: kuI tv,and i/i, becomes kuv, 
but Kui elra, and then, becomes k^tu. 
On the accent with crasis, § 89. 

§ 66. 3. Synizesis (sinking, compare § 39) occurs at the 
meeting of two words only after a long vowel, especially 
after the conjunctions iwdy as, ?}, or, r\, num, iii],not, and 
after f-yw, I : l-rrCi oh, as not ; fxrj^Woi, ne alii/ eyioyvy I 
not. It is perceptible only in the poets, who reckon the 
two syllables as one. 

§ 67. -No Greeh roord ends in any consonant except the 
vocal ones, v, p, and q (^, ^). The only exceptions are : 
the negative ouk (before consonants oxi) and the preposition 
f/c, o\it (^Z* (before vowels e^), which attach themselves so 
closely to the following word that their k can hardly be 
looked upon as final. 

When any other consonant, except these three, appears 
at the end of a word, it is usually rejected : 

;.aXt, hmiey {mel), for ^.X.r (Gen. /.^er-oc) ) ^ ,^ § ^^^j^ 

aS)fia,Oody, acjfiaf (Gen. au)fiar-og) ) 

tjaav, they were, " i^aavT (compare Lat. erant). 



§ 68. MOVABLE CONSONANTS. 25 

But mute Dentals in this case are often changed into 
vocal g: 

irpoQ for TTpor, from Trport, to (Horn.). 
Uq " ^00, " SoQi, give. 
Tspag " TEpar, Gen. Tspar-oQ, miracle. 

§ 68. Certain words and forms have, after a short vowel 
at the end, a movcbble v {y If^ikKvaTiKov). This v is used 
before words which begin with a vowel — by which the 
hiatus is avoided — and before longer pauses. Poets em- 
ploy it also before consonants, especially at the end of the 
word, to make it more sonorous. 

The words and forms which have a movable v are the 
following : 

1. The Dat. Plur. in ai{y)\ nacnv t^wKa, I gave to all; 
but nam ^oku. ovtixjq uvai, to all it seems to he so. 

2. The designations of place in (n(y) : ^AOrjvrjcriv rjv, he 
was at Athens; but 'AOrfvriai to^s tyiverOfthis happened 
at Athens. 

3. The single words iiKO(n{v), twenty; iripvmiy), last 
year; and 7ravTa7rao-f(v), entirely; ukoglv av^pig, twenty 
men ; but eiKom yvvaiKeg, twenty women. 

4. The third person Sing, in i.{y) : ecrtomv avrovg, he 
saved them; but co-wo-e rovg 'AOrjvaiovg, he saved the 
Athenians. 

5. The third person Plur. as well as Sing, in crt(v) : XI- 
yovmv IV, they sjpeah well, but XiyovGi rouro, they say this; 
^uKvvmv iKeXdEf he points there, but ^siKvvaL tov av^pa, he 
points out t%e man. 



§ 68. Dialects. — To the words which have a movable v there are 
added in Homer the adverbs of place in Bi.{y) : dvf.v9i{v)^from afar; 
'7rdpoi9e(v),from iefm'e, formerly ; the particles Ke{v), perhaps^ and vv(v), 
now. 

The New-Ionic dialect, which admits the immediate succession of 
vowels, omits the movable v. On the k in ovk before a spiritus asper, 
§ 53, D. 

B 



26 . DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. § 69. 

§ 69. Obs. 1. — In like manner, ov, not^ takes k only before vowels, 

which becomes % before the spiritus .asper (§ 52) : ov ^rjm, Tie says 

not; ovK. avTog, not he himself; ovx ovrojQ^ not so. The k appears 

also in ovKkn and firjicen, no more. 
3. Ik, out of, is t^ before vowels (Lat. ex) : tK Trjg ttoXewq, out of the 

city; 1% cLKpoTToXeiog, out of the acropolis or castle; UXkyio,! speak 

out; lUXeyov, I spoke out. 
3. "Without any definite reason, the words ovnog, thus (adverb of 

ovTog, this), dxpig, i^^xp^^i ^^^h ^^^1 frequently lose their final g ; but 

TToXKaKig, many times, loses it only in the poets. 



Chap. IV. — Division of Syllables and their 
Quantity. 

A. Division of Syllables. 

§ 70. The Syllables (<7uXXaj3?7, collectiori) in Greek words 
are divided according to the following rules. Every vowel 
which stands before another, but does not form a diph- 
thong with itj or collapse with it by synizesis (§ 39), is 
reckoned a separate syllable : l-arpog, physician, trisyl- 
labic. 

§ 71. A consonant which stands between two vowels 
belongs to the second syllable: t-^u, has ; ov-rog, this ; 
i-Ka-v6gf capable. 

Two or more consonants usually belong to the fol- 
lowing vowel : a-TrXouc? simple ; a-pi-are-pog, on the left 
hand; t-ay^ov , I had ; a-fiv6gylamb ; l-xdp6g, inimical ; 
likewise double consonants : o--^o-fiai, I shall see ; t-X,iii, 
I place. • 

§ 72. Exceptions, l. Liquids and nasals join the pre- 
ceding vowel : ap-juaf carriage / aSf X-^oc? brother ; Kay- 
XaZii), I laugh ; cV-^ov, within ; aii-(^ii), both., ambo. [iv 
only join the following vowel : Ka-juvu), I suffer. 2. When 
a consonant is doubled, the first belongs to the preceding, 
the second to the following syllable: \ir-"Kog, horse ; j5a\- 
\(t), I throw / Yivp'pog. The same takes place when aspi- 



§ 76 QUANTITY. * 27 

rates follow the corresponding tenues : 'AT-Oig, Baic-xoc, 

§ 73. Compounds are divided into the elements out of 
which they are formed: avv-ixMyl hold together j l^-aydj, 
I drive out. 

B. Quantity 

§ 74. With regard to the quantity (length or shortness) 
of syllables, the same rules, in general, hold good for the * 
Greek as for the Latin. An important exception, how- 
ever, consists in one vowel before the other not needing to 
be short in Greek : ^wr), penance ; Xaoq, jpeople ; jSlXrt'ov, 
better. Nor do the special Latin rules for final syllables 
hold good in Greek. 

§ 75. A syllable is long hy nature when it contains 
a long vowel or diphthong : hjiug, you ; K/orvw, / decide y 
a^w, / sing. The recognition of quantity in Greek is ren- 
dered much easier by the characters ; do/mog, roo7n, house / 
^w/xa, house ; in other cases by tlffe accent (§§ 83, 84) ; 
the rest can be learned only by practice and from the 
lexicon. 

Obs. — Every contracted syllable must, of course, be long : a/cwv, uvr 
willing m dsfcwv, \p6Q â– =â–  iepoc, Jwly. 

§ 76. A syllable is long hy position when a vowel is fol- 



§ 74. Dialects. — Diphthongs and long vowels are very seldom short- 
ened before vowels in the same word: Horn. oIoq (qualis'^^, and jSe- 
fiXrjai, with short rj. 

§ 75. Dialects. — 1. The quantity of the common vowels is very un- 
certain generally, but especially in Hom. 'tcj/xEv, let us go ; "Apsg, 'Ap^g, 
Ares, Ares. 

. 2. A final syllable ending in a long vowel or diphthong in Homer 
and the tragic choruses is shortened before a following vowel : oIkoi 
taav, they were at home ("""'); r)fikvri Iv, sitting in ('"""). Compare 
§ 63, D. 4. But those words which began with digamma (§ 34, D.) 
leave a preceding vowel long in Hom. : KaXXet re an'X/3wv kuI el/namv 
(""" ")? glittering with beauty and garments. 



28 * QUANTITY. § 77. 

lowed by two or more consonants, or a double consonant, 
whether — 

a) both consonants or the double consonant stand in the 
same word ; ya^iia^joy (" ") ; I^iq, mien (" ") ; Katxrw/j (" ") ; or 

h) the first concludes the first word, and the rest begin 
the second : 0f 6c ^f , ^ut God C " ") ; Iv rovrb^, meanwhiU 
(— ); or 

c) both or the double consonant stand at the beginning 
of the second word: ra Krj)juara, the goods (""''''); 6 Z^dvy 
the living one (" "). 

Obs. — When the vowel thus placed is already long by nature, this 
must be indicated in the pronunciation: the a in irpdvaM^I act^ 
sounds diflferently from that of raffcroj, I arrange, though both 
words make a spondee in verse ; that in fidXXov different from 
that of KotWog, leauty, though both form a trochee. 

§ 77. When a vowel short by nature stands before a 
mute with A, p, v, jx following, the syllable may be long or 
short : riKvov, child (- '') ; rv(^\6gy Hind (- ^ ; ri ^pag, what 
art thou doing (- ') ? 

The syllable, however, is necessarily long in the follow- 
ing cases : 

§ 78. a) when the mute stands at the end of the first, 
the liquid or nasal at the beginning of the second word ; 
£K vYiCJVf out of the ships ( ) ; and in compounds in which 
the mute belongs to the first element : kXlyw, / sjpeak out 

h) when a soft mute (j3, 7, ^) is followed by X, ju, or v\ 
/3t/3Xoc, look (â–  ") ; Tajfia, task (â–  '') ; ix'^^^y snake (^'^\ 

§ 77. Dialects. — In Homer, a mute with \, p, v, [i following, almost 
regularly makes position : t'ikvov tI KXaisic, child, why tceepest thou 
( ) ? 'vTTvoQ TravdafidTiop, all-svibduing sleep ( ). Nay, even 

X, p, V, fi, at the beginning of words, have often the power of length- 
ening the short final vowel of the preceding word : Ka\r]v re fityaXrjv 
re, a leautiful and great ( - - - -)^ ^ in the Stem hi {hlaai),fear^ 
and in ^r]v, long, has the same effect. 



§83. ACCENTS, 29 



Chap. Y. — Accents. -• 

§ 79. The general rules for the accentuation of words 
are the following : 

1. Every word onust have 07ie, and can never have more 
than g7ie principal accent, which is called simply the ac- 
cent : TroXvTT pay luocrvvt), husy occupation / airaparjKivaaTog, 
unj>repared. On the designation of words according to 
the accent, see §§ 17, 19, 21. 

* § 80. 2. There are two kinds of accents, the sharp ac- 
cent or the ctciote (o^eta), and the lengthened or the cir- 
cumflex {7r£pi(nrwij.ivri), On the mode of using both, see 
§§ 17, 21. 

§ 81. 3. The acute may be upon long or short syllables, 
the circumflex only upon such syllables as are long hy 
nature: ^?>,\iywylsay; \i]yijj,I cease ; Ka\6q,heautiful j 
a\r\QnQ,true ; avOpwirog, man/ Ktifxevog, lying / KtLTat,he 
lies; (Tbjfiafhody; ev,welL 

§ 82. 4, The acute accent can be only on one of the last 
three syllables, and on the last but two only when the last 
is short : clttolkoq^ colonist,h\it not airoiKov (Gen.); tXeyov^ 
I said, but not tXcyrjv, I was said, 

§ 83.» 5. The circumflex can be only on one of the last 
two syllables, and on the last but one only when the last 
is short by nature: avKov,flg,h\xt not gvkov (Gen.); awfia^ 
'body, but not atofiaTog (Gen.) ; irpa^ig, act, but not irpa^u^ 
(Norn. Plur.). 

Obs. 1. — When the last syllable is long by position, it does not 
hinder the circumflex from being on the last syllable but one : 
avXdK, furrow, Gen, avXdicog, but it does when it is long by na- 
ture as well as by position : 9Mpd^, h^east-plate, Gen. Qwpdicog. Com- 
pare § 145. 

2. Exceptions to 4 and 5 will be adduced separately in the chap- 
ters on inflexions. It is specially to be observed that most of 



30 ACCENTS. § 84. 

the exceptions occur with the final syllables in at and oi : ajroiKoij 
although 01 is long ; yvtofiai, opinions ; TvnT^Tai^ he is struck. Com- 
pare §§ 108, 132 D. 3, 133, 157, 229, 268. 

§ 84. 6. A last syllable but one, when long by nature, 
can have no other accent but the circumflex if the last is 
short by nature: (^>^vye,flee,i\oi (pevye; rtpxov, I reigned, 
not i]pxov ; ^Xt ?, of the same age, not riXi^ (Ge«. r'lXiKog) ; 
KparXvog, not Kparivog. It may, however, be without an 
accent : elire, speak / avOpomog, 7nan. 

Obs. 1. — Apparent exceptions, such as wore, so that, iy^e, this, are ex- 
jilained in § 94. • 

2. So fixed is the rule, apart from these cases, that the quantity of 
the final syllable, or of the last but one, may often be inferred 
from the accent: Wi (t), ffo ; Trpwra [ prima, 'Nom.FluT.] (a); yv- 
vaiKUQ (a), women, Ace. Plur. ; yvwixag (a), opinions, Ace. Plur. 

§ 85. 7. Compound words have the accent on the last 
part but one of the word, as far as is possible according to 
§ 82, etc. : airiOi, go away ; a(ln\oq, friendless ; (juXoywog, 
friendly to women / aTroSoc, gi've hack / iraptvOec, put in 
hesides. (Compare § 359, Ohs. 2.) 

§ 86. The accent of a word is variously altered by the 
changes which a word undergoes, as well as by the con- 
nexion of a word with others in a sentence. That is : 

1. Every oxytone subdues its sharp tone when followed 
by another word, so that the grave takes the place of the 
acute. (Compare § 20.) 

§ 87. 2. In a contraction in the middle of a word, the 
syllable produced by contraction acquires no accent if 
none of the syllables to be contracted had it : jLveog, ye- 
vovg, of the race ; rifiak, Tina, honor. The accent of a con- 
tracted last syllable but one is manifest of itself from the 
general rules on accent; hence rifiCiVT^gy honoring (Nom. 
Plur.), from Tiij,aovTeg,TiiuiwvT(i)v (Gen. Plur.), from Ti/maov- 
rwv (according to §§ 83 and 84). A contracted final syl- 
lable has 



§ 91. ACCENTS. 31 

d) the circumflex, when the first of the imcontracted 
syllables was accented : rifxaei, rijuia, lie honors / \pv(yiovy 
Xpvaov, of golden ; • 

V) the acute, when the last was accented ; laTawq, iaruyq, 
standing. 

§ 88. 3. With elision (§ 64), oxytone prepositions and 
conjunctions entirely lose their accent ; all other kinds of 
words throw it upon the previous syllable as acutes : W 
avTt[}, on /mn = eTr\ avrc^ ; ouS' l^vvafn]v , I could not even=z 
ov^e b^vvdiurjv; u^i '0^v(Tavg,Iam Odysseus — uixi 'OSuctevc; 
t-KT riaav, there were seven — iina y]<jav. 

§ 89. 4. With crasis (§ Q6) the accent of the first word 
is lost: Taya9a,hona=Ta ayaOa ; Ooljuariovythe dress = to 
ifxariov. Only when paroxytones change the first sylla- 
ble by crasis into one long by nature, this receives a cir- 
cumflex : TO. aXXa, alia, gives raXXa ; to tpyov, the work, 
Tovpyov. 

On the changes of the accent in declension, see §§ 107-109; on the 
accent of verbs, see §§ 239, and 331-333.. 

§ 90. The dissyllabic prepositions, with the exception 
of a^0t, avTi, ava, ^la, when placed after the noun or verb 
to which they belong, throw their accent on to the first 
syllable : tovtwv nipt, about those {irhpX tovtiov) ; in like 
manner, when used adverbially, they include the substan- 
tive verb, as Trapa = 7rape(TTi, it is there, near; lEvi = tv£(7Ti, 
it is therein, is possible. This drawing back of the accent 
is called anastrophe. Compare § 446. 

§ 91. Some words of one and of two syllables unite so 
closely with the preceding word that they throw their ac- 
cent on to it. Such words are called enclitics {eyKXiTiKoi 



§ 90. Dialects. — Prepositions, whose final syllable is lost by elision, 
have not the accent even when they occupy the position indicated 
in § 90. Homeric ryai Trap elvdereg x^XKevov, among them I forged niiie 
years long. 



32 ENCLITICS. § 92. • 

Xi^aiQf i, e.^ inclihing words), and the throioing hack of the 
accent is called inclination, 

§ 92. The following are enclitics : 

1. The indefinite pronoun riq, ti, some one, something, 
through all forms (§ 214). 

2. The three personal pronouns, in the forms fxov, juoi, 
fie, mei, mihi, me/ (xoVf aoi, ctI, tui, tihi, te ; ou, oT, f, sui, 
sihi, se ; a(^hiiv, to them two ; and a^iaii^^, to them, 

3. The â–  Indicative Present of uixi, I am, and of <^r\iii, 
inquam, with the exception of the second Pers. Sing, d 
and (^7jg, 

4. The indefinite adverbs ttov or iroQi, somewhere ; tti], 
somehow; noi, somewhither; irodiv, from somewhere'; 
-K or k, sometime ; Truyq, somehow ; TrM,yet. 

5. The particles yi, quidem ; ri, and; roi, truly ; vvv 
or vi), now ; Hom. kLv or K.iyjperhaps,I suj>j)Ose ; pa (apa), 
then; Hom. dr)v, truly; irep,very; and Se (meaning to- 
ward, and as a demonstrative appendage). Compare § 212. 

§ 93. These words throw their accent back on the pre- 
ceding word, in the following manner : 

a) A preceding oxytone leaves its sharp tone unsubdued 
(§ 20), and this then serves also for the enclitic : a'^a^ov 
Ti, something good ; avrog (prjcriv, he himself says. 

h) After Siperispome the accent of the enclitic is entirely 
lost : opw Tivag, I see some ; vo lariv, it is well ; ti/uw <t£, 
I honor thee, 

c) After a jparoxytone, enclitics of one syllable entirely 
lose their accent ; but those of two syllables retain their 
accent on the last syllable: ^tXoc p.ov, my friend ; Xoyoc 
Tiq, a speech ; but Aoyot nviq, some speeches, Xoywv rtvwv 
(Gen. Plur.). 



§ 92. Dialects. — The Ionic additional form of eZ = ele, is enclitic, so 
also (jf^'iaq (Ace. Plur.), them^=^K\X. (T<pdg, and fiiv,Mm, Tier, § 205, D. 



97. ENCLiT<iUHIVEESr m 

c 

d) Prqparoxytones and jprope^^^omes retain their ac- 
cent, but receive also from the following enclitic another 
accent as acute on the last syllable, which remains unsub- 
dued : avOpwTTog rig, a man ; ^i^aioi elcriv, they are firm ; 
Gwiia yt, the hody at least ; iraX^ig rivecy some hoys. 

e) Atona (§ 97) receive the accent of following enclitics as acutes : 
ov (prjmv, he says not ; ojq re, and how. 

§ 94. Ohs. — Several words of one syllable form orie word with en- 
clitics following : thus, wgre, so that ; elre, sive ; ovte, neque ; firfTe, 
neque ; oIoqte, capable ; oqtiq, whoever ; yroi, truly; Kairoi, and yet ; 
to this also belongs the ^s mentioned in § 92, 5 : oSe, this one ; 
ohaSe, homewards. These words form partly apparent exceptions 
to §§ 79 and 84. 

§ 95. f) When several enclitics follow one another, each 
throws its accent upon the preceding : a rig /mot (priai Trort, 
if any one ever says to me. 

§ 96. The enclitics in certain cases retain their accent 
(become orthot07ied), viz. : 

1. when an enclitic forms the first word in the sen- 
tence, and therefore has nothing on which to throw its 
accent : nvlg \iyovai, some say. This position, however, 
is rare. 

2. when an enclitic is made emphatic: al \iyii),1 7nean 
you — no one else ^ u tanvyifit is really so. When tort 
denotes exist, he allowed, jpossihle, it retains the accent, 
and that, too, on the last syllable but one : cort 0foc? there 
is a God ; ouk ianv, it is not allowed, not jpossihle. Com- 
pare § 315, Ohs. 2. 

3. After elision: ravr Icrri xpev^ri, this is false=Tavra 

4. Enclitics of two syllables, in the case mentioned 

§ 93, c. 

§ 97. Atona, i. e., words without accent, also csilled pro- 
clitics, or inclining forward, are several words of one syl- 

B 2 



34 ATONA. ^ § 98. 

lable, which have so little independence that, in regard to 
accent, they combine with the following word. 
They are the following : 

1. of the article, the forms 6, ??, o\, m ; 

2. the prepositions, Iv {in^ with the Dat.), Iq or ^iq {into, 
with the Ace), Ik or a^, out of; 

3. the conjunctions, d, if and wg, how, that ; the latter 
also in its use as preposition to y 

4. the negative ov or ouk (oi>\). 
Obs.-^ovxi-, a more emphatic oy, is always accented. 

§ 98. Atona receive the accent only in two cases, viz. : 
a) when they are at the end of a sentence, and ^Jierefore 

have no following word on which they can rest : <^?7c ») ov ; 

do you say so or not f so always wc when placed after the 

word with which a comparison is made: ^eoc wg,liJce a 

god, Horn. ; 

h) when followed by an enclitic, which throws back its 
accent : ov (firjcn, he says not. Compare § 93, c, 

§ 99. The following particles are distinguished accord- 
ing to the accent : »i, tha7i, or, and ^, truly, or interroga- 
tive, Lat. num / apa, then, consequently, and apa as an in- 
terrogative ; vvVf now, and enclitic vv{v), now, particle of 
transition ; ojg, how, and log, so / ovkovv, therefore, and 
ouKouv, not therefore. 



§ 100. DECLENSION. 35 

II. IISTFLEXIOK 

A. INFLEXION OF NOUNS AND PRONOUNS. 



Chap. YI. — Declension of Substantives and 
Adjectives. 

§ 100. Inflexion is the change which nouns, pronouns, 
and verbs undergo to indicate their relation in a sentence. 

A distinction must be made in inflexion between Stem 
and Termination. Stem is the fixed part, Termination 
the changeable part which is appended to the Stem to in- 
dicate the different relations. 

The inflexion of nouns and pronouns is called Declen- 
sion. As the nominal and pronominal Stems are modified 
according to Cases, the terminations added to them are 
called Case-endings. The form which arises from a case- 
ending being added to a Stem is called the Case-form. 
Thus TTpayiiaT-oQ is a case-form of the Stem rrpayfiar, 
formed by means of the case-ending -oc. 

Great care must be taken not to confound the Stem and 
the Nominative case. The Nominative is itself a case- 
form, often quite different from the Stem. Thus the Nom- 
inative of the Stem irpayfiar is irpayfxa, thing. Aoyoc, 
speech, is the Nominative of the Stem X070, which appears, 
for example, in the compound word \oyoypd(l)o-g, a loriter 
of speeches.* 

The Greeks distinguish in the Declension : 

1. Three Numhers : the Singular for one, the Dual for 
two, the Plural for several; 

2. Five Cases : Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusa- 
tive, Vocative. The Dual has only two case-forms, one for 
the Nom., Ace, and Yoc, the other for the Gen. and Dat. 
In the Plur., the Yoc. is always like the Nom. 

3. Three Genders : Masculine, Feminine, Neuter. 

* The Stem will always be left unaccented. 



36 GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. § 101. 

§ 101. The gender is known : 

1. From certain general characteristics of sex, in which 
the Greek language almost entirely coincides with the 
Latin. Besides the rule founded in the nature of things, 
that the designations of male persons are masculine, those 
of females feminine, the following rules are to be observed : 

§ 102. a) The names of rivers and winds (gods of rivers 
and winds), and Tnonths (6 ixi]v, the month), are masculine : 
6 Evpwrag, the River Eurotas j 6 Zf^ujooc, the west wind j 
6 'E/caro^jSatwv, the month Ilecatombceon. 

§ 103. h) The names of t7'ees, lands (17 yf/, the land), 
islands {y\ vfjo-oc, the islaTid), and most cities^ are femi- 
nine : 7} ^pvg,the oak; i] ' ApKalia, Arcadia ; 17 AeVjSoc, 
the island of Leshos / /? KoXo^wv, the city of Coloj)hon. 
Most abstract substantives also, i. e.^ those which denote a 
condition, relation, act, or property, are feminine : 17 iXirig, 
hope / 17 viKti, mctory ; 17 BiKaiocrvvr^f righteousness ; 17 
rax^rrjc, quickness. 

§ 104. c) Many names o^ fruits are neuter : to ctvkov, the 
fig ; most diminutives also, both of masculine and feminine 
words : ro yepovriov, dimin. of 6 yeptov, the old man / ro 
yvvaiov, dimin. of r) yvvi), l^^ vsoman. Farther, every name 
and word which is adduced merely as a word : to avOpMirog, 
the name '' man f'' to ^iKaiocrvvt}, the idea of righteous- 
ness f'' and the names of the letters, to aXcpa, to my pa. 

§ 105. 2. From the ending of the Stem the gender is 
known according to §§ 113, 125, 137-140. 

3. In Declension, the Neuter may be distinguished from 
the Masculine and Feminine, Jbr all Neuters have 

a) no Accusative or Vocative distinct from the Nom. 

h) no g as case-sign of the Nom. Sing. 

c) the ending a in Nom. Ace. and Yoc. PI. 

§ 106. The Greek language, like the English, employs 
the definite Article. The forms of the Article are the 
following : 



109. 



ACCENT IN DECLENSION. 



37 





Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 




Singular. 










Nom. 





V 


TO 


the. 


Qen. 


TOV 


Trig 


TOV 


of the. 


Bat. 


Ti^ 


â– ^y 


T(^ 


to the. 


Ace. 


TOV 


Trjv 


TO 


the. 


Dual. 










N.A. 


TOJ 


TO. or Thi 


TU) 


the. 


G.D. 


Tolv 


TCLIV or TOlv 


TOXV 


of or to the. 


Plural. 










Nom. 


01 


ai â–  ^^ TOi 


the. 


Gen. 


tG)V 


TUIV 


tCjv 


of the. 


Bat. 


toIq 


Toig 


TO~ig 


to the. 


Ace. 


TOVQ 


Tag 


TO. 


the. 



The following general rules on accentuation apply to all 
the declensions of substantives. 

§ 107. a) The accent remains unaltered on the syllable 
on which it stood in the Nominative as long as the gen- 
eral laws of accent allow : avOptoTroQ, man, avOpwire (Yoc.) ; 
avKoVfJig, (TVKa (Nom. Plur.). Exceptions, §§ 121 and 142, 
181,2. 

h) But when the original accentuation becomes impos- 
sible by the length of the final syllable or by increase at 
the end, the accent is shifted only as near to the end of the 
word, and is changed only as much, as is absolutely neces- 
sary : avdpisJTToq, onan, avQpwirov (Gen. Sing.), avOpcjiroig 
(Dat. Plur.) ; (rCojuaf hody, awfiaTog (Gen. Sing.), cTMjuaTCJv 
(Gen. Plur.) ; tcTxoc, wall, rsixovg (Gen. Sing.). 

§ 108. c) The terminations oi and at are not considered 
long in regard to accent ; hence avOpwirot, yvtojuai (yvw^r?, 
opinion). 

^§ 109. d) The Genitives and Datives of all numbers, 
if the last syllable is long, can never have the acute upon 
this syllable, but only the circumflex : iroTafiov, Gen. Sing. 



38 THE A DECLENSION. § 110. 

of 7roTafi6t;,rive7' ; TijuyjDsit. Sing, of n/xtj, honor ; ttoSwv, 
Gen. Plur. of TTovg,foot ; iiy\voiv. Gen. Dual of p/v^ month, 

§ 110. Originally there was only a single declension, for 
which reason much has still remained common, which we 
shall put together below, § 173. But we distinguish Two 
Princvpal Declensions according to the ending of the 
Stems : 

1. the Fi7'st Principal Declension {vowel declension), 
which comprehends the Stems ending in a and o ; and 

2. the Second Principal Declension {consonant declen- 
sion), which compreh^^s the Stems ending in consonants, 
but also those in the soft ^wels i, v, in diphthongs, and a 
small number of Stems in o. 



First Principal Declension. 

( Vowel-declension,) 

§ 111. The first principal declension is subdivided into 
two, viz. : 

A. The A Declension, 

B. The O Declension. 

What is common to both is put together below, § 134. 

A. The A Declension 

{commonly called the First Declension). 

§ 112. The A Declension comprehends those words 
whose Stems end in a. In certain cases, however, this a 
becomes r]. Hence the A Declension of the Greeks cor- 
responds both to the A, or first, and to the E, or fifth. De- 
clension of the Latin lang-uaffe. 

§ 113. The A Declension contains only Masculines and 
Feminines. The two genders are most easily distinguishil 
in the Nom. Sing., in which the masculines take g, the 
feminines no case-ending. Hence the terminations of 



115. 



THE A DECLENSION. 



39 



the Nom. Sing, are in the feminine a, rj, in the masculine 
§ 114. 1. Feminines. 



Examples. 


X<^pa, Icind. 


y\a)(T(Ta, tongue. 


TifXT]^ honor. 


Stems. 


XOipa [terra] 


yX(o<T<ra 


tI ft a 


Singular. 








Nmn. 


xwjoa [terra] 


y\u)(j(Ta 


Tifiy) 


Gm. 


XWpUQ 


y\u}a<rr]Q 


Tifirjg 


Dat. 


Xd>pq. [terras] 


yXwacry 


Tifiy [re-i] 


Ace. 


X(opd-v [terra-m] 


yXaiaad-v 


Tifiri-v [re-m] 


Voc. 


XU)pd [terra] 


yXaxrad 


Tifir) 


Dual. 








N. A. V. 


X(opa 


yXwaffd 


Tina 


G.D. 


X(opaiv 


y\b}U<jaiv 


TijxaXv 


Plural. 








Nam. 


Xiopai [ten'se] 


yXwaaai 


Tifiai 


Gen. 


Xwpwv 


yXuxTcriov 


TlfiU>if%'' 


Dat. 


X<^paiQ 


yXaxraaiQ 


Tifidig 


Ace. 


X^pdg [terras] 


yXwaadg 


Tifiag 


Voc. 


XoJpai [terrse] 


yXwcraai 


Tifiat 



Examples for Declensicn. 

Bed, goddess. SS^a, ojnnion. yij, earth. 

(TKid, shadow. TTvXr], gate. yvojfir], opinion. 

(3ia,jorce. 

§ 115. In certain cases in the Singular, but never in the 
Dual and Plural, a becomes rj. Hence the following rules : 

1. In order to form the Nom. Sing, from the Stem, or 
from a given case-form of the Dual or Plural : 



§§ llC-117. Dialects. — 1. The Doric dialect nsi'cr changes a into tj: 
Tifid, Tifxag ; yXuJacra, yX^aadg. 

3. The Ionic dialect changes every long a in the Singular into t] : 
(TO017;, TTSTprj, jSamXdrjg, fxoipy. Short a is generally unchanged, as ^aai- 
Xeid, fioXpdv : but in abstract substantives in -eid, -oid, a is likewise 
changed into rj : dXi]9eiT], truth, Att. dXi^Oua ; EVTrXoir], good passage; and 
also in Kvharj, steam from fat, SkvXX?/. The d remains in Oed and some 
j)roper names. 

3. The Voc. of vvfuprj, young woman, is in Homer vvficpa. 



40 THE A DECLENSION-. § 116. 

cb) a remains in the Nom. Sing, after £, i, or jo (§ 41) : 
St. ao(^ia, Nom. Sing, crotpia, wisdom ; Dat. Plur. iriTpaig, 
Nom. Sing, irirpa, rock. 

h) a remains in the Nom. Sing, after o-, and after the 
double consonants X,, S, ^, a a (or r r), XX, as well as in the 
feminine designations in -aiva\ St. a ju a ^ a, Nom. Sing. 
cLfia^a, carriage; Gen. Plur. Xtaivoiv, Nom. Sing. Xiaiva, 
lioness. 

c) After other vowels and consonants a is generally 
changed into ri in the Nom. Sing. : St. j3oa, Nom. Sing. 
j3o//, cry ; Ace. Plur. yvwfxag, Nom. Sing, yvw^ij (opinion). 

More important exceptions are: to a) kto/ot;, girl; Kopprj, temple; 
^eipr], neck — to V) tparj, dew — to c) arod, hall; xp^^i color ; TuXfia, 
'boldness ; Siaira, mode of life. 

§ 116. 2. In order to form the other cases in the Singu- 
lar according to a given Nom. Sing. : 

a) If the Nom. Sing, ends in rj, this letter remains 
throughout the Sing. : ^iktj, justice, ciKr}g, ^iKy, ^iK-qv, ^ikt], 

h) If the Nom. Sing, ends in a, this letter remains always 
in the Ace. and Yoc. : a/uLa^a, a/uLa^av. 

c) If the Nom. Sing, ends in o, this letter remains also in 
the Gen. and Dat. when preceded by a vowel or /> (§ 41) : 
Nom. Sing. (T0<^m, wisdom, Gen. ao^iag ; Nom. Sing, aroa, 
colonnade, Dat. oro^t : also in some proper names with long 
a : Nom. Sing. Ar)Sa, Gen. Aii^ac ; and in jxva (contracted 
from fivaa), Gen. fivag, 

d) Otherwise a of Nom. Sing, becomes t) in Gen. and 
Dat. : Nom. Sing, fiovcra. Gen. juovcrrig ; Nom. Sing. ^laLTa, 
Dat. diaiTT}. 

§ 117. For thequantity of a in the Nom. and Ace. Sing., 
the general rule is : apurum (after vowels) and a after p is 
long, every other a is short : Oed, goddess / afxiXkayfight. 

The exceptions are generally shown by the accent (§ 84, Obs. 2). 
The most important are the fern, designations in -rpia and -ua : 
\paXTpta, female player ; (SaaiXeia, queen (but j3am\Eid, dominion) ; 
and several words with diphthongs in the last syllable but one, 
as <T<paipa, ball; evvoia, good will; /loXpa, fate. 



§120. 



THE A DECLENSION. 



41 



§ 118. The Gen. Plur. has the ending mv, which com- 
bines with the Stem a to form awv, contr. wv. This is the 
reason that the Gen. Plur. of ' all words in this declension 
has the circwnjlex : x^P^f X^P^^ j Xiaiva, XeatvCjv (Excep- 
tions, § 181. Compare § 123). 

§ 119. The Dat. Plur. originally ended in cr i, before 
which I is added to the a of the Stem. The aiai thus 
formed is usually shortened into a i g, but the original form 
is found even in Attic writers in poetry and prose. (Com- 
pare § 128, D.) 

§ 120. 2. Masculines. 



Examples. 


vedvidg, youth. 


TToXiTijc, citizen. 


'Epfirjg, god Hermes. 


Stems. 


vedvta 


TT oXIt a 


'Ep fiT] (from ' EjO/iea) 


Singular. 








Nom. 


vedvid-g 


TToXlTTJ-g 


'Epfiij-g 


Gen. 


vedviov 


TToXlTOV * 


'EpfJiov 


Dat. 


vmviq. 


TToXlTy 


'Epfiy 


Ace. 


veavia-v 


TToXlTIJ-V 


'Epfirj-v 


Voc. 


vedvid 


TToXlTa 


'EpM 


Dual. 








J^.A.V. 


vedvid 


TToXlTd 


'Epfid, statues of 
Hermes. 


O.D. 


redviaiv 


TToXiTaiv 


'Epfxaiv 


Plural. 








JVom. 


vedviai 


TToXTrai 


'Epfxal 


Gen. 


vEdvidv 


TToXlruiv 


'Epfxaiv 


Dat. 


veaviaiQ 


TToXiraig 


'Epfidig 


Ace. 


vedvidg 


TToXirdg 


'Epfidg 


Voc. 


VEaviai 


TToXXrai 


'Epfidl 



§ 118. Dialects. — 4. The -aujv of the Gen. Plur. is preserved in the 
Horn, dialect : KXimdiov (/cXter/a, tent), dyopdojv (dyopd, speech) ; but -siov 
also occurs, in which case e is generally lost by synizesis (§ 39) : ttu- 
aeiov, of all, fern. 

The Dorians contract -aiov into dv (§ 37, D. 3) : Oedv, dearmn. 

§ 119. Dialects. — 5. The Dat. Plur. in Ionic ends in -y(Ti(v), -yg (but 
also in the Attic -aig) : KXi(ny<n, Trkrpyg. 



42 THE A DECLENSION. § 121. 

Examples for Declension. 

rafiiag, treasurer. (TTpaTKOTije, warrior. dSoXhxvQ, idbbler. 

Nifc/ac, Nicias. iraiSoTpi^riQ^ wrestling- ' AXKi^iddrjQ. 

'Kpirrie, judge. master. 

§ 121. In the Masculines, as well as in the Feminines, 
when a vowel or p precedes, the a of the Stem remains 
and is long; after every other letter it becomes r) in the 
Nom. Dat. and Ace. Sing. 

Those words which in the Nom. Sing, end in rri-g, 
names of peoples, and compound words, have a short in the 
Voc. Sing. : TroXTra, Ilipaa (Nom. Sing, llipar]-^, Persian) ; 
y^wnirpa (Nom. Sing. ye(i)iuiTpr}-g, land-measxiver). The 
Voc. Eiairora (Nom. Sing. ^eaTroTrj-g, lord) draws back the 
accent, contrary to § 107, a, to the first syllable. All oth- 
ers have t) in the Vocative : Kpovidrj (Nom. Sing. Kpo- 
viSrj-g). 

§ 122. The Declension of the Masculines is distinguished 
from that of the Feminines : 

1. in the Nom. Sing, by g being added to the Stem ; 

2. by the Gen. Sing, ending in o u. 

Ohs. — The termination of the Gen. Sing, of the masculines is prop- 
erly -0, which, with the a of the Stem, foims -ao (see the Homeric 
dialect); by weakening a to e (§ 118, D.) and contraction (§ 37) 
arises ov : TroXirdo (ttoXitso), ttoXitov. 



§§ 121 and 122. Dialects. — 1. The Epic dialect in some words omits 
the Q of the Nom. Sing., in which cases the a remains short: 'nnroTd, 
horseman; vetpeXijyepsTdjClovd-gathei'er. (Comi^are Lai. poeta, scriba.) 

2. The Dorians also in the masculines put d for i], and contract a o 
into d. (§§ 34, D. ; 37, D. 3.) 

3. Homer has three forms in the Gen. Sing. : 
a) the original -do : 'Arpeiddo ; 

5) -eo) with the quantity transposed (where e is lost by synizesis, 
§§ 37, D., 39, D.) : 'ArpdSeoj. The accent remains unchanged, in spite 
of the w in the final syllable. The New-Ionic form is the same. 

c) -u) by contraction : 'Epfielio (N"om. Sing. 'Epfieid-g = Attic 'Epfirjg), 
^opiu) (Nom. Sing, ^opkdg). Compare § 37, a. 



§ 125. THE O DECLENSION. 43 

^oppcLQ (contracted from f3opm-g, north wiruT), contracts the original 
a o in the Gen. Sing., after Doric fashion, into d : j3oppd. The 
same takes place with some Doric and Roman proper names, 
and a few other words: 'EvXXag, Sulla ; 6pvi9o9rjpa£j fowler, Gen. 
Sing. a. 

§ 123. In the Dual and Plural the Declension of the 
Masculines is the same as that of the Feminines. 

Exceptions to the accentuation prescribed in § 118 are xpv<^tv-Q, 
usurer; tTrjmai, trade-winds, Gen. Plur. xpn<yT(t)v (xprjcrTuiv in the O 
declension, fi-om XjO?](Tr6e, good) and irrjmiop. 

B. The O Declension 

{commonly called the Second Declension). 

« 

§ 124. The O Declension comprehends those words 
whose Stems etid in o, together with a few whose Stems 
end in w (§ 132). It answers to the o- or Second Declen- 
sion in Latin. 

§ 125. The O Declension is the complement of the A 
Declension in regard to gender. It contains Masculines 
and Neuters., but only few Feminines. 

The termination of the Masculines and Feminines in the 
Nom. Sing, is o-q, that of Neut'ers o-v [Lat. u-s^ u-mP\, 

The Masculines and Feminines are declined alike ; the 
Neuters are distinguished from them (compare § 105) only 

by- . '. . 

1. The Nom. and Yoc. Sing, taking the Accusative end- 
ing V : Sw/oo-v (gift) \_donu-in\, 

2. The Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Plur. ending in a : '^dpa 

[dona']. 



44 



THE O DECLENSION. 



§126. 





§126 


• 




Examples. 


6 av9po)7ro-g, man 


ri 6d6-g, way. 


TO diopo-v, gift. 


Stems. 


dv9 pOJTTO 


6do 


S Ui p 


Singular. 








Mm. 


dvdpojTTo-Q [dominu-s] 


oSo-g 


dwpo-v [donu-m] 


Gen. 


dv9p(t)7rov 


odov 


diijpov 


Bat. 


dv9pu)7rq) [domino] 


6 dip 


diop(ii [dono] 


Ace. 


dv9pu)7ro-v [dominu-m] 


6d6-v 


Saipo-v [donu-m] 


Voe. 


dv9p(t)Tre [domine] 


ode 


dwpo-v [donum-] 


Dual. 








N.A.V. 


dv9pu)7rb) 


odo) 


Swpoj 


G.J). 


dv9pwTroiv 


odoXv 


dilJpoiv 


Plural. 








Worn. 


dv9poj7roi [domini] 


odoi 


Sdpa [dona] 


Gen. 


dv9p(o'!ro)v 


ddu)V 


ddjpojv 


Dat. 


dv9p(b7roiQ 


oColg 


dwpoig 


Ace. 


dv9pw7rovg [dOTTlino-s] 


bdovg 


duipa [dona] 


Voe. 


dv9pu)7roi [domini] 


odoi 


dwpa [dona] 



6e6g, God. 
vofiog, law. 
Kivdvvog, danger, 
ravpog^ Imll. 



Esamples for Declension. 
TTOTuiiog, river. 
TTovog^ trovMe. 
fiiog, life. 
9dvarog, death. 



(TVKOV, Jig. 
fiBTpov, measure. 
ifiaTiov, dress. 



§ 127. Ods. — The Feminines are partly known by the general rules 
already given (§§ 101, 103) : rj (prjyog, esculent oaJc; rj dfiTreXog, vine; 
, rj vijaog, island ; t} -qTreipog, continent ; K6piv9og. 
The following also are feminine : 

1. The names of different kinds of earth and stones: ^d^^og, sand ; 
Koirpog, dung; iv-^og^ chaTk ; 7r\iv9og, hrick ; (nrocog, ashes; 4^)}(pog, 
pebble ; jSdaavog, touch-stone. 

2. Different words for way: oS6g, KeXEv9og, drpairog, path ; dfia^irog, 
carriage-road. In the same manner, r) Td(ppog, dike, but 6 orerwTrof, 
narrow way. 

3. Words conveying the idea of a cavity: xv^og, chest of draicers; 
yvd9og, jaw ; KifiioTog, chest ; <Top6g, coffin ; \r}v6g, wine-vat ; Kupdo- 

^ TTog, hneading-trough ; Kdjxlvog, oven. 

4. Several adjectives used as substantives : rj didfxerpog (supply 
ypa/^HT], line), diameter; avyKXrjTog (supply fiovKi], council), meeting 
of the council. 



§ 130. THE O DECLENSION. 45 

5. Single words: /3t/3\oe, hook; pd(3dog, staff; StdXeKTog, dialect; 
v6(Tog, disease ; dp6(Tog, dew ; doKog, 'beam. Many designations of 
personal beings are common^ that is, with the same form they 
are masculine when they denote a male, feminine when they 
denote a female: 6 066^, god ; ^ 0£6e, goddess; 6 avOpiorrog and i) 
dv9p<jJ7rog. ^ 

§ 128. The ending of the Gen. Sing, is -o, which, with 
the o of the Stem, is contracted into ov (compare § 122) : 
avBp(i)iro-o = avOpwirov. 

§ 129. The Nominative form is sometimes used instead 
of the Vocative form : the Vocative of Oeog is always the 
same as the Nom. : w Oeog [Lat. deus] : a^e\(l)6g, brother, 
has aScX^t in the Vocative with the accent thrown back. 

Contracted Declension. 

§ 130. Several words which have £ or o before the last 
letter of the Stem may contract these vowels with the o. 
The rules of §§ 36 and 37 are here applied : fa, however, 
contrary to § 38, is contracted into a. 



§ 128. Dialects. — The Epic dialect in the Gen. Sing, has the older 
form 1 for the ending ; i o with o of the St. produces oio : dvOpcjTroio, 
TTiSioLo {m^io-v) afield. We also, however, find the Attic ov. 

Other Epic peculiarities are : -oav = oiv in the Gen. and Dat. Dual : 
wfiouv ((hfiog, shoulder) : — oiai(v) = oig in the Dat. Plur. : dv9pu)7roi(n{v), 
which is also New-Ionic, and is found even in Attic writers (compare 
« 119). 

§ 130. DinRts. — The Ionic dialect leaves the forms uncontracted. 



46 



CONTRACTED O DECLENSION. 



131. 



Examples. 


6 vov-g, sense 




TO 6<jTovv^ hone. 




Stems. 


V 00 




6 <TTe 




Singular. 










Nam. 


v6o-Q 


VOVQ 


6<tHo-v 


OGTOV-V 


Gen. n^ 


voov 


VOV 


offTeov 


6<TT0V 


Bat. 


VOl^ 


Vi^ 


ocrrsqt 


btJTif 


Ace. 


v6o-v 


vov-v 


0(TTeO-V 


0<JTOV-V 


Voc. 


voe 


VOX) 


oarko-v 


6(TT0V-V 


Dual. 










N. A. V. 


v6<o 


vw 


OffHlO 


6(TTb) 


G.D. 


VOOLV 


volv 


ocrrkoiv 


6(TT0Xv 


Plural. 










Norn. 


VOOl 


vol 


oarka 


OCTTO. 


Om. 


v6(t)v 


vG)V 


6(TTe(OV 


6(TTU)V 


Bat. 


vooig 


vdiQ 


offTtoig 


ocrrolg 


Ace. 


VOOVQ 


VOVQ 


6(TTea 


dtTTO. 


Voc. 


VOOL 


vol 


oarsa 


oara 



ttXouc, voyage. 



Examples for Declension. 

povQ^ stream. ddeX^idovQy 'brother's son. 



§ 131. Some irregularities of accentuation occur in the 
contraction, viz. : 

1. the Nom. Dual is made oxytone, contrary to § 87. • 

2. compound words leave the accent on the last syllable 
but one, also contrary to § 87 : TrcjOtVXtf), Dat. of irepiirXovg, 
circumiiavigation, for ir^pnrXiJ^, from -ow. 

3. the word Kavwv, hasJcet, is contracted into gkvouv, con- 
trary to § 87. 

On contracted adjectives, see § 183. 



Attic Declension. 

§ 132. A small number of words, instead of the short 
0-sound (o), have the long (w). This w at the end of the 



§* 131. Dialects. — A Gen. ending -o appears in Homer in Ilerew-o, 
Gen. Sing, from the Nominative n€r£w-c. 



134. 



ATTIC O DECLENSION. 



47 



Stem goes through all the cases, but at the same time takes 
the case-endings as far as possible. Most ^f these words 
have £ before w, and for -tw there also occurs the additional 
form -a o : vew-g, temple, together with vao-g ; Xsuj-g, people, 
together with Xa6-g (compare § 37, D.). This Declension 
is called the Attic. 

On adjectives in w-g, see § 184; on some words which 
fluctuate between this and the second principal declension, 
see § 174. 



Examples. 


6 vEU)-g, temple. 


TO dvu)yeu)-v, upper room. 


Stems. 


V e u) 


dvo) y eu) 


Singular. 






JVbm. 


V(.(x)-Q 


avwyeoj-v 


â– Gen. 


veu) 


dvioyeu} 


Dat. 


VSijJ 


dv(t)ye(p 


Ace. 


veu)-v 


av(oyEU)-v 


Dual. 






N. A. V. 


veto 


dvujyEOi 


a.D. 


ve.ij}V 


avioyEijiV 


Plural. 






Nom. 


VEl^ 


dvioyeu) 


Gen. 


veujv 


dvwyeiov 


Dat. 


vecpg 


avojyeqtg 


Ace. 


vewg 


dvojys(o 



Another example : Kd\o)g, rope. 

§ 133. The accentuation in these words has a twofold 
irregularity, viz. : 

1. €(u passes always for only one syllable in regard to ac- 
cent : Mf vaXewc, apparently contrary to § 82 ; 

2. even upon the Genitives and Datives, when they are 
accented, the accent is put, not as a circumflex, but as an 
acute, contrary to § 109. 

§ 134. The A and O Declensions, that is, the Yowel or 
First Principal Declension, have the following points, in 
common : 



48 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 135. 

1. the masculines have in the Nom. Sing, the ending -c. 

2. the masculines have in the Gen. Sing. (§§ 122, 128) 
the ending ~ov, 

3. all three genders have i subscriptum with a long vowel 
in the Dat. Sing. 

4. all three genders have -v in the Ace. Sing. 

5. all three genders have the Stem vowel lengthened in 
the Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Dual. 

6. all three genders affix -tv to the Stem vowel in the 
Gen. and Dat. Dual. 

7. all three genders have -wv in the Gen. Plur. 

8. all three genders affix -mv or g with preceding i to the 
Stem vowel in the Dat. Plur. 

9. the masculines and feminines affix -i to the Stem vowel 
in the Nom. Plur. 

10. the masculines and feminines affix -g (for vg) in the 
Ace. Plur., lengthening the Stem vowel to compensate for 
the V dropped (§42). 

The diiference, therefore, is only in the formation of the 
Gen. Sing, of the feminines and in the accentuation of the 
Gen. Plur. 



Second Principal Declension. 

Consonant-declension 
(commonly called the Third Declension), 

% 135. The Second Principal Declension comprehends 
all the Stems which end in consonants^ the soft 'vowels t 
and V, or diphthongs, and a small number of Stems in o 
(Nom. w). The Stem is best recognized in the Gen. Sing., 
where what remains after rejecting the termination o g may 
generally be considered as' the Stem : Gen. Xtovr-oc, St. 
XfQvr (Nom. Xewv, lion) ; Gen. (j)v\aK-og, St. 0vXaK (Nom. 
<pvXa^, guard). 



§ 139. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 49 

Hence, for the exact recognition of a word of this declension, not 
only the Nominative, but also the Stem or the Genitive is neces- 
sary : as, Nom. caig, St. ^air, or Gen. dairSg, meal [Lat. rex^ St. reg, 
or Gen. regis]. 

To the second principal declension correspond in Latin the third 
and fourth declensions. In it the case-endings iisually appear 
pure, i. e., not mixed up with the end of the Stem. 

The Stems ending in the soft vowels follow the third declension, 
because the soft vowels (§ 35, 1) can be used together with the 
vowels of the terminations : Gen. ttItv-oq (Stem ttitv^ Nom. Trirv-g, 
pine-tree). In the Stems ending in diphthongs, the v is some- 
times resolved into f : for example, the Stem (3ov (Nom. /3ou-f, 
ox) was originally in some forms (3oP (Latin hov), as Gen. (3oP^6g 
{=ih(yD-is). See § 35, Ods. The O Stems have probably lost a 
final consonant. 

§ 136. The Second Principal Declension comprehends 
all three genders. 

The Neuters may be recognized by the inflexion, accord- 
ing to § 105, from their having the Nom. and Ace. alike, 
and these cases in the Plur. always with the ending -a : 
(T(jJiuaT-a (St. (TWjuar, Nom. Sing, (rtofxa, hody). 

§ 137. For determining the gender from the Stem, the 
following are the most important rules : 

a) Mascioline are the Stems in su (Nom. cu-c), rrj/o 
(Nom. rr]p), rop (Nom. Ttjp), vr (with Nom. c or v pre- 
ceded by a long vowel), as well as most Stems in v (of 
various Nominatives) with a preceding long vowel: St. 
y paipev, Nom. ypacpevg, writer / St. and Nom. a-tjjTrjp, sa- 
vior; St. pr)Top, Nom. pr]Twp, orator; St. X £ o v r, Nom. 
\iwv, lion, leo ; St. and Nom. aywv, contest. 

§ 138. h) Feminine are all Stems in S (Nom. -Tc, -ac)? 
most in i (Nom. -l-q), those in o (Nom. -w or -w-c), and the 
names of qualities in r r? r (Nom. -rrj-c) : St. s X tt t ^, Nom. l\- 
TTig, liojpe ; St. TT o X f, Nom. ttoX^c, Gif'V y St. tt e 1 o, Nom. 
iruOwf persuasion ; St. t o- o r tj r, Nom. to-orijc^ equality. 

% 139. c) Neuter are the Stems in /xar (Nom. iia)^ the 
substantive Stems in q with Nom. o^ or aq, those in t or i» 
which append no q in the Nominative, and those in p pre- 

C 



50 



CONSONANT DECLENSION. 



§140. 



ceded by a short vowel in the Nom. : St. o- w ju a r, Nom. 

(T(oiua, hod?// St. y £ V £ c> I^om. yhog, genus / St. and Nom. 

yvpaQf <^g^ / St. and Nom. mvairi, irhustard ; St. and Nom. 

aoTw, ciUj ; St. and Nom. r]Top, heart, 

% 140. The following words must be noticed separately : 

77 yaGTr]p {j^t. y a a t e p), helly / 6 ttovq {St.7ro^),Jbot/ r] 

X^ip (St. x^tp)fhand / to ovq (St. (jjT),ear/ 6 irri^^yg (St. 

TT »7 X ^)' forearm ; ri ^piiv (St. /o § v), diajphragm^ mhid ; 

6 TTtXeKvg (St. TTcXcfcu), axe / 6 j^orpvg (St. j5oTpv\ 

bunch of grapes ; 6 <jTaxvg (St. (rrax^)) ^^^ of corn; 6 

a^i]^ (St. o-^ T^ »c), wasp ; 6 fxvg (St. jiv g), moitse [piles'] ; 

6 Ixdvg (St. I X v)ijish ; 6 a//jO (St. a £ />), a^V/ ro irvp (St. 

IT vp), fire; to vdwp (St. v^aT), water. 

Of two genders (common) are several names of animals, as : 6 and 
t) dXeKTpviov (St. dXe/cr/owov), coch and Ae7i/ o and ri vq or trvg 
(St. if or 0- v), swjme [sMs] ; 6 and r) al'^ (St. a i y), goat; 6 and r) /3oi;c: 
(St. /3ow), <?.»; and many names of persons: 6 and r) ttoXq (St. 
Traid), boy and ^iW; o and 77 daifnov (St. daiiJiov)^ god and ^06?- 
fZess; 6 and r; fiavnc, propTiet and prophetess. 

§ 141. The endings of the consonant declension are the 
following : 





Masculines and Femininss. . 


Neuters. 


Singular. 






Mui. 


g, or compensation by lengthening 


no ending. 


Gen. 


og 




Bat. 


I 




Ace. 


a or V 


no ending. 


Voc. 


no ending, or as in the Nom. 


u 


Dual. 






N.A.V. 


8 


, 


G.I). 


OIV 




Plural. 






Nom. 


fC 


a 


Gen. 


wv 




Dat. 


ci(v) 




Ace. 


ag 


a 


Voc— Nom. 


fe 


a 



§ 141. Dialects. — The Hom. dialect has otiv for oiv in Gen. and 
Dat. Dual (compare § 129, D.), iroS-oXiv, and in Dat. Vlwv. frequently 
eaa i(v) for a i(v) : '7r6d-e(T<Ti(v), seldom ea i(v) : a1y-E(Ti(i'). 



§ 143. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 51 

§ 142. The accent in the Second Principal Declension 
deviates from the rules laid down in § 107 in the following 
point : 

Words of one syllable accentuate the Gen. and Dat of 
all numbers on the case-ending (circumflex if the vowel 
be long, § 109) : ttoS-oc, ttoS-i (but -rro^-a), ttoSoTv, ttoSwv, 

TTOaL 

Exceptions. — 1. Participles, as: wv, being, ovTog; jSdg, going, l5dvTog 
— accentuate the Genitive and Dative of all numbers on the last 
syllable but one. 

2. Trdg, omnis, has iravToQ, TravH, but Trdvrojv^ 7ra.(TL(v). 

3. The words Traig, hoy; dfiwg, slave; 9iog,jacJcal; Tpwg, Trojan; to 
(putg, light ; rj <p(^g, Mister ; t) £^g, torch ; to ovg, ear; 6 arig, moth, 
are paroxytones in Gen. Plur. and Dual : â–  Kai^-_w u^ti(^-<>iv, Ooj-mv, 

. Tpoj-iov, ^(t)T-(jjVj (p(jjd-(Dv, d(^d-(DV, <jjT-oi,v, cE-wv (compare farther 

§ 177, or^^ 

4. The words which have become monosyllables by contraction : 
tjp = tap, spring (ver), ijpog, ripi. 

§ 142 &. In regard to the quantity, it must be observed that several 
monosyllables, in spite of the short Stem-vowel, are lengthened : 
St. TTod, Nom. Sing. 7rov-g,foot ; St. ttuvt, Nom. Sing. Neut. ttclv, 
every thing; St. irvp, Nom. Sing. Trvp, fire; St. av, Nom. Sing, avg, 
hoar. 

§ 143. The Stems of the Second Principal Declension 
are divided into three Classes with diiferent subdivisions : 

I. Consonant Stems. 

1. Guttural and Labial Stems. 

2. Dental Stems. 

3. Liquid Stems. 

IL Vowel Stems. 

1. Soft-vowel Stems. 

2. Diphthong Stems. 

3. o Stems. 

IIL Elided Stems. 

1. g Stems. 

2. r Stems. 

3. V Stems. 



52 



CONSONANT DECLENSION, 



144. 



I. Consonant Stems. 
144. 1. Guttural and Labial Stems, 
i. e., Stems in k, x> Jy tt, 0, /3. 



Examples. 
Stems. 


6 (pvXa^^ guard. 
<pvXdK 


ri ^Xsipj vein. 


Singular. 
Nom. V. 

Gen. 

Bat. 

Ace. 


(pvXa^ [dux] 
(pvXaK-oQ [duc-is] 
(pvXdK-X [duc-i] 
<pvXdK-d [duc-e-m] 


0X€i// [pleb-s] 
(pXef5-6g [pl5b-is] 
<}>Xe(3-i [pl6b-i] 
<l>Xe(3-d [plSb-e-m] 


Dual. 

NA.V. 
G.B. 


(l>vXdK-e 
<pvXdK-oiv 


^Xs^-e 
(pXel3-oXv 


Plural. 

N(m. V. 

Gen. 

Bat. 

Ace. 


(pvXdK-eg [du<?-es] 
(pvXaK-(ov [duc-um] 
<pvXaKi{v) 
tpvXdK-dg [duc-es] 


<pXel3-eg 
<pXs(3-ojv 

tl>Xe(3-dg 



Examples for Declension. 
'O fjLvpfir}^^ ant, St. fi v p fi rj k. j) <p6pfxiy^, ??/r6, St. <p o p fi i yy. 

Tj fidari^, whip, St. /* a o- r I y. 6 AiOio^p, .^Sthiopian, St. Ai9 lo tt. 

r) ^r]H, cough, St. f3r]X. 

§ 145. All these Stems are Masc. or Fem. The Nom. 
Sing, is formed by affixing g to the Stem : the g with the 
final consonant of the Stem forms 5, \p, as in the Dat. Plur. 
(§ 48). The Yoe. is always the same as the Nom. 

Ohs. — The Stem a X w tt e k has the vowel irregularly lengthened in 
the Nom. Sing.: dXwTnjH, fox ; while, on the contrary, the long 
vowel in the Stems ktjpvk, ^oivIk, is shortened in the Nom. ; 
Kripv^, herald ; ^olviS,, palm-tree, where the accent shows that the 
V and I are short by nature (compare § 83, Ob%. 1). rpix has Nom. 
Sing. 10 1 1, hair, Dat. Plur. 9pi^i(y) (compare § 54, a). 



§147. 



CONSONANT DECLENSION. 



53 



• § 146. 


2. Dental Stems, i, e., 


Stems in r. 


e,s,v. 


Examples. 


â– q XajXTraQ 


TO (Toifia 


6 yspLoi 


6 riySfiMv 


Stems. 


Xa fiTT a d 


<T w/A a r 


y e povT 


-qyefiov 




lamp. 


lody. 


old man. 


leader. 


Singular. 










Nom. 


XafiTrd-Q 


(ToJfia 


yep(x)v 


rjyEjxwv 


Oen. 


XaftTrdS-og 


(Tu)fidr-OQ 


yspovr-OQ 


Tjyefiov-og 


Dat. 


Xa/x7rdd-i 


au)fidT-i 


yepovT-X 


rjyefiov-X 


Ace. 


Xa/XTrdd-d 


aaifia 


ykpovT-a 


rjyefiov-d 


Voc. 


Xajiird-Q 


auifia 


ykpov 


I'lyeficjv 


Dual. 










N.A. V. 


XafiTrdd-e 


(TtofidT-e 


yspovT-e 


7)yep.6v-e 


Q.D. 


XafiTrdd-oiv 


aiofidr-oiv 


yep6vT-oiv 


tjyefiov-oiv 


Plural. 










N. V. 


Xafi7rdd-eg 


au)fidT-d 


yepovT-eg 


rjyefiov-eg 


Gm. 


XafX7rdd-b)V 


aujfidr-ojv 


ysp6vT-o)v 


Tjyeix6v-ojv 


Dat. 


Xafi7rd-(TL(v) 


(Tu)fid-cn(v) 


ykpov-(n{v) 


riyeix6-(n{v) 


Ace. 


XafiirdS-dg 


awfidT-d 


ykpovr-dg 


â– qy^p-ov-dg 



Examples for Declension. 
T) TTUTpi-g, native country^ St-Trarpid. 
TO ovofia, name^ St. 6v o fiuT. 
if vv^, night [nox for nocts], St. w kt [tioc^]. 
77 KUKOTTj-g, badness, St. k a k o r ij t. 
TO /uIXt, honey [mel], StfieXir. 
6 o^ovg, tooth [den-s for dent-s]^ St. odovr [dent]. 
6 deXcpig, dol2)hin, St. dsXiplv. 
o 7roifir]v, shepherd, St. tt o i fiev. 
6 "EXXtjj/, Hellen, St. 'E \ X j? v. 
6 aywv, contest, St. d y w v. 
Adjectives : 

7rkvT}-g, poor, St. TTEVJJT. 

aKOJv, neut. uKov, unwilling, St. aKovr. 

aTrpdyfiujv, neut. dirpayfiov, inactive, St. aTrpayfxov. 

§ 147. In the dental Stems, as in the Stems to be no- 
ticed below, the Xom. Sing. Masc. and Fem. may be formed 
in two ways, viz. : 

1. With Sigma affixed to the Stem. Before this sigma 



54 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 147. 

the consonants r, ^, 6, when they stand alone, disappear 
altogether (§ 49) : Aa/x7ra5-c, ^ajuira-g ; KopvO-g, Kopv-g, 
helmet ; but v and vr have the short vowels of the Stem 
lengthened by way of compensation (§ 42), so that a, t,. v 
become a, 7, £» ; but £ becomes e f, and o,ov'. -Kavr-g, 7ra-c, 
every; h-g,t1-g,one; oSovr-gyO^ov-g, tooth. 

Exceptions. — The monosyllabic Stem irod [ped] (§ 143 h) has tlie 
vowel lengthened exceptionally : rrov-g [Lat. j^e-s, i. e., ped-s] ; 
dafxapT lias Nom. Sing, r) ddfiap, spouse, for Sajxapg, because of its 
harshness. 

2. Without Sigma being affixed to the Stem ; but in its 
stead the Stem-vowel, in case it is short, is lengthened, so 
that by this lengthening (§ 42, Ohs.) e becomes 17, and 
o becomes 10: St. noLfxev, Nom. TToifii]v, shepherd; St. 
-nyefiov, Nom. rij£fjiu)v. If the Stem- vowel is long of 
itself, the Nom. Sing, is like the Stem : 6 aywy, contest. 

The r of the Stems in v r in this formation is rejected, 
according to § 67: yepovr, Nom. ysptjv (for yepwvT). 
The simple t of the Participial Stems in or is changed 
into g: St. XcX UK or, Nom. Sing. XeXukwc (for XeXvkwt), 
having loosened. 

Obs. 1. The vowel w shows that g is not a mere afl&x in XeXvkojc, one 
who has loosened. Compare xa|0i-c,/<2w?', St. x'^pi-'^- 

Ohs. 2. The Stems in 'd, 9, as well as those in avT, bvt, always 
form the Kom. Sing, with sigma ; but Stems of substantives in 
ovT and the Stems in v generally without g. 

§ 147 h. The Neuter has the pure Stem in the Xom. 
Ace. and Yoc. Sing. (§ 136), as far as the laws of sound in 
regard to final consonants (§ 67) admit it : \v%iv{j), loosened 
(see § 187), XeXu/coc (for X c X v »c o r) ; yaka, milk, from the 
Stem yaXaKT (Gen. yakaKT-og = Lat. lact-is). On ttuv 
(Stem iravr), see § 142 b. ■ . 

Obs. — On the Ace. Sing, in v, belonging to some Stems in it, i9, id, 
v9, vd, see § 15C. 



§ 149. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 55 

§ 148. The Vocative of masculines and feminines some- 
times has the pure •tem, as far as is possible : "ApTejuL (St. 
ApT e jLLid), A7av (St. Alavr), yipov (St. y e povr); some- 
times it is like the Nom. (necessarily so when the accent 
is on the last syllable) : rjysfxwv ; and in all participles even 
when the accent is not on the last syllable : Xiyijjv (St. 
Xeyovr), speaking. 

The Voc. irai, hoy, from the Stirai S, is specially to be 
observed. * 

0^8. — The Stems 'AttoXXwv, UoasidoJVj wliich are like the Nom., 
shorten the vowel and draw back the acqent in the Vocative : 
"AttoXXov, JlotreiSov. The accent is also draw^n back in many 
compound words : 'Aydfiefivov, ' ApiaroyuTov (§ 85). 

§ 149. The formation of the Dat. Plur. results from the 
laws of sound (§§ 49, 50). r, 3, Q, and simple v, are 
dropped before (ti(v) without leaving any trace; but vt 
is dropped with the previous vowel lengthened by way of 
compensation. 

Exception. — The adjectives (not participles) in evr admit no 
lengthening of the vowel by w^ay of compensation : St. % a p t e vr 
(Nom. Sing. xap'ffC, graceful^ Dat. Plur. x<ip'i^<^i^(y)- See Inflexion, 

§ 187). 



§ 148. Dialects. — The Vocative of the Stem dvaKx (Nom. Sing. 
ava^^ ruler) is in Homer dvd (shortened from dvaKv: compare the 
neuter ydXa, § 147 &) ; some Stems in v r lose the v in the Voc. : "ArXa 
for ''ArXar(r). 

§ 149. Dialects. — Homer forms the Dat. Plur. 7ro(rcr/(r) instead of 
7ro^-(ri(v), Ait. TToaiv {ttovq^ foot) \ the d being assimilated instead of 
being rejected. 



56 



CONSONANT DECLENSION. 



§150. 



§ 150. 


3. Liquid Stems, i. e. 


, Stems in X and 


P' 


Examples. 
Stems. 


6 (IXg 
salt. 


6 prjTiop 
prjTop 
orator. 


IXTITep 

mother. 


6 Orjp 

Orip 

game. 


Singular. 
Nom. 
Gen. 
Bat. 
Ace. 
'Voe. 


iiX-g [sal] 
a\-6g [sal-is] 
aX-i [sal-i] 
icX-a [sal-e-m] 

liX-g 


pnT(op 

phrop-og 

pr]TOp-i 

pr]Top-a 

prJTop 


firiTTjp [mater] 
firjTp-og [matr-is] 
prfTp-i [matr-i] 
fxrjTsp-a [matr-e-m] 
firjrep 


Onp 

9r]p-6g 
9r]p-i 
9fjp-a 
9np 


Dual. 

N. A. V. 

G.B. 


uX-e 
aX-olv 


6r]Top-e 
prjTop-OiV 


pr]T£p-e 
p.r]T'tp-oiv 


9np-e 
9r)p-oiv 


Plural. 
N. V. 
Gen. 
Bat. 
Ace. 


ciX-eg [sal-es] 
aX-wv [sal-um] 
aX-<Ti(v) 
llX-ag 


pr]TQp-eg 
prjTop-oJv 
pr)Top-ai{v) 
pf]Top-ag 


prjTep-eg [matr-es] 
p7)Tsp-wv [matr-um] 

pvrpd-<Ji{v) 
fiT)T(p-ag 


9np-eg 
9r]p-CJv 
9r}p-ai{v) 
9iip-ag 



Examples for Declension. 
TO vEKTap, nectar. 6 Kpari'ip, mixing^ug, St. Kparij p. 

6 ai9r}p, cether, St. al9 ep. 6 ^wjo, thief {fur), St. ({xo p. 

§ 151. The only Stem in X which forms the Nom. Sing, with sigma 
is dX ; all Masc. and Fem. Stems in p form the Nom. Sing, with- 
out sigma (§' 147, 3) ; hence with long Stem- vowels the Nom. 
Sing, is like the Stem ; short Stem-vowels, however, are length- 
ened, i. e., e into i/, o into w. 

The neuter has the pure Stem in the Nom. Sing. : to r/rop, heart. 
Only the monosyllabic Stem irvp lengthens the v: to itvp^fire 
(§143,&). 

§ 152. The Yoc. Sing, has the pure Stem : pryrop. The 
Stem (Tit)Tri p (Nom. (Tii)Tr]p, savior) shortens rj into e, and 
draws back the accent (compare § 148) : Yoc. (TtJTsp, 

§ 153. The Stems Trare p, fxrjrtp, Ovyars p, y a a rep, 

§ 150. Dialects. — )? llXg, -poet, the sea. 

§ 153. Dialects. — The e is often retained in the Gen. and Dat. by 
poets : fiTjTEpog ; while it is rejected in other cases : 9vyaTpa. Instead 
of aGi{v) in the Dat. Plur., there may be the iaai{v) mentioned, 
§ 141, D. : 9vyaTkpeaai{v). 



§154 



CONSONANT DECLENSION. 



57 



^r]fxr]Ti:p (Noms. TraT{]pf father j' fxriTtip, mother; OvyaTt^p, ^ 
daughter ; yacjTrip, helly ; Ar}iui]Tr)p), reject e in the Gen. 
and Dat. Sing. (§ 61, e). The first four throw the accent 
on the case-ending ; the last draws it back {Trarpog, At/^tj- 
rpog). The £ is accented where it appears : p.r]Tipa, in spite 
of fxr^np, except in the Voc, where the accent is drawn 
back r irdrEp, in spite of Trarrjp, but Ace. Sing. AtjfxriTpa. 
In the Dat. Plur. the syllable rLg^p-beeomeaJi^UQaetath^^ 
(§ 59) T pa: fjir)Tpa-<Ti(v)* 

Obs. — The Stem dtrrep (Nom. Sing, dcm'jp, star) belongs to these 
words only in the formation of the Dat. Plur. : d(TTpd(n(v). For 
dvrip (St. dvEp), see, under the irregular words, § 177, 1. 

II. Vowel Stems. 
§ 154. 1. Soft-vowel Sterns, i. e., Stems in i and v. 



Examples. 
Stems. 


r) TToXig, city. 

TToXl 


rj (Tuf , SOW. 

(TV 


TO dtJTv (dfTTv), city. 


Singular. 
Nom. 
Gen. 
Bat. 

Ace. 
Voc. 


iroXi-Q 
Tr6Xs-it)Q 
{TToXe-'i) ttoXei 

TToXl-V 
TToXl 


ffv-g 

(Tv-6g 

av-i 

av-v 

av-g 


atJTV 

d<rT£-og or darE-cjg 

{d(TT£-l) dOTU 
dCTV 

darv 


Dual. 

KA.V. 
G.B. 


TToXe-e 
TToXe-oiv 


<rv-e 

(TV-o1v 


{d(TTE-E) dffTT] 

dark-oiv 


Plural. 
N. V. 
Gen. 
Bat. 

Ace. 


{TToXE-eg) TToXeig 

TToXe-OJV 

7r6Xe-m(y) 
(TToXe-af) TToXeig 


(Tv-eg 

<TV-G)V 
(TV-ffi(v) 

(Tu-ag or (Tvg 


{d(TTe-a) dart} 

d(TT£-OJV 

d(TTe-cn(v) 
{dtTTE-a) dart] 



'^Xi^^ 



Examples for Declension. 

6 /3orpu-c, hincJi of grapes, ") 
ri TTiTv-g, pine-tree J > according to § 157. 

r 6 irrixv-g, fore-arm, ) 

ri^vvaiii-g, power I both according to § 157. 

r) ardm-g, party, J action, ) 
Adjectives, § 185. 

C 2 



58 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 155. 

§ 155. The Nom. Sing. Masc. and Fem. is always formed 
by Sigma. The Neuter Sing, as well as the Vocative 
Sing, of all genders has the pure Stem. Yet sometimes 
the^Nom. form is used for the Vocative, and this is the case 
jn all monosyllables. In the Ace. Sing. Masc. and Fem. v 
is affixed to the Stem. • 

On the lengthening of monosyllabic Stems, § 142 h. 
But this lengthening takes* place also in the Nom. and Ace. 
Sing, of some polysyllabic words. 

§ 156. Barytones in it, i^, tO, vd, v9 (Nom. i g, v g), form 
the Ace. Sing, generally by affixing v after rejecting the 
Stem-consonant : St. i pi^ (Nom. tpi-g, strife), Ace. epi-v ; 
St. Ko pvO (Nom. Kopv-Q, helmet), Ace. Kopv-v ; St. 6 pviO 
(Nom. opv'i-g, bird). Ace. opvl-v. Th^^Oxytones, on the 
contrary, always have a : l\7ri-g, hope, Ace. tXTrtSa ; kXeiq, 
hey, stands alone ; St. k X £ t 8, Ace. kKCiv (seldom jcXtt 3-a), 
Ace. Plur. icXtTc or icXftSac. 



Examples, 


. r) tpi-e, strife. 


r} t\7rt-f , Twpe. 


Stems. 


kpid. 


IXttiS. 


Singular. 


tpi-Q. 


tkiri-Q. 




tpid-og. 


l\7rid-0£. 




?pid-i. 


tXirid-i. 




epi-v. 


lX7rid-a. 



§ 157. Most Stems in i, as well as adjective and some 
substantive Stems In v, change their final vowel to t in 
Gen. and Dat. Sing., and in all the cases of the Dual and 



§ 156. Dialects. — The Ace. Sing, in a of dental Stems is more fre- 
quent in Homer : yXavKdJirid-a (yXavKw-mg, hright-eyed), tpid-a ; kXeiq is 
KXrjtg, Acc. KXrj'id-a. 

§ 157. Dialects. — The Ionic dialect leaves i unchanged : Gen. ttoXi-oc, 
Dat. TToXl (from xoXi-i), Nom. Plur. 7r6Xi-eg, Gen. ttoXi-wv, Dat. in Herod. 
7r6\i-(ri(v), Homer 7roXi-e0(n{v), Acc. iroXi-ag (Herod, also iroXig). Other 
additional forms of the Homeric dialect are : Gen. Sing. TroXrj-og, Dat. 
Sing. 7r6\€-i and ttoXtj-V, Nom. Plur. TroXrt-eg, Acc. Plur. 7r6Xr)-ag. 

The Stems in v have always o c in the Gen. Sing. The Dat. Sing, 
only is contracted : ttjjx". £vpv-g, droad, has the additional form evpia 
in the Acc. Sing. 



§ 158. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 59 

Plur. Before the ending of the Gen. Sing, this c remains 
unchanged ; in the Sterns^, however, in /, and in some sub- 
stantive Stems in v, £ is followed by w ^ (instead of og), 
called the Attic termination, which does not prevent the 
accent from being on the antepenult : iroXe-wg, ir^XiKe-wg 
(iriXeKv-g, axe). 

In the Dat. Sing. £ i is contracted into £ i, in the Nom. 
Plur. £ £ c and Ace. sag into £ i g, and £ a of neuter substan- 
tives into T]. Adjectives maintain the uncontracted form 
£a : aarii]y but yXu/cta. 

§ 158. The contraction of f £ to r? in the Nom. Ace. and 
Yoc. Dual is rare. The Gen. Plur. of Stems in l follows 
the accent of the Gen. Sing. : ttoXe-wv like ttoXs-wc- 

Most substantive Stems in v leave this vowel unchanged ; 
but others, like aarv, follow the analogy of Stems in i, and 
change v into f . u £ are sometimes contracted into v in the 
Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dual ; in the Ace. Plur. also we find 
tx^uc, with lyfiv-ag (lxOv-g,Jish), and o^pvgy Ace. Plur. of 
6(j)pv-gf eyebrow. 

£y\£Xu-c, eel^ retains v in the Sing. : Gen. £yx^Xi»-oc ; 
but changes it in the Dual and Plur. into £ : Nom. Plur. 
l'^\kkug. 

The adjective 'Icpi-g, acquainted with, St. Id pi, keeps 
its I unchanged through all the cases. 



§ 158. Dialects. — The Dat. IxQm is in Homer contracted into ixdWt 
In tlie Dat. Plur. a is sometimes doubled: vkKv-crai(y) with veicv-Ea(n(v) 
(yeKv-Qj corpse). 



60 



CONSONANT DECLENSION. 



159. 



§ 159. 2. 


Diphthong Stems, 


i. e., Stems 


in sv, aVf ov. 


Examples. 


6 (3a(TL\evQ 


i) ypavg 


6 and tj (3ovg 


Stems. 


/3a<Ti\€ V 


ypav 


(3ov 




Mng. 


old woman. 


ox or cow. 


Singular. 








Norn. 


l3a(n\Ev-g 


ypav-g 


fiov-g [bo-s] 


Oen. 


(3a(n\k-u)g 


ypd-6g 


/3o-of [bov-is] 


Bat. 


(J3a(n\s-i) (SaaiKei 


ypd-t 


/3o-f [bov-i] 


Ace. 


(3a(nXe-d 


ypav-v 


^ov-v [bov-e-m] 


Voc. 


(SaffiXev 


ypav 


(iov 


Dual. 








JV.A. V. 


/3a(TiXe-e 


ypa-e 


/3o-€ 


G.JD. 


l3amXe-oiv 


ypd-oTv 


(io-oXv 


Plural. 








iV. V. 


(J3a(n\e-eg) /3ao-t\r}e 
or (3a<n\uQ 


ypd-eg 


(36-eg [bov-es] 


Oen. 


(iaaCkk-ojv 


ypa-u)V 


(3o-wv [bo-um] 


Bat. 


l3a<nX€v-ai(y) 


ypav-(Ti(v) 


^ov-<Ti{p) 


Ace. 


(iacnXk-ag 


ypav-g 


(iov-g 



6 yov£v-g, parent. 



Examples for Declension. 

6 iepev-g, priest. 'OSvffaev-g, 'AxiXXeu-f . 



§ 160. All diphthong Stems affix c in the Nom. Sing, 
and cn{v) in the Dat. Plur. ; those in av and ov affix v in 
the Ace. Sing, to the full Stem. In the Yoc. Sing, the 
Stem appears pure. 

^ Before vowel case-endings, i. e., in all other forms, the v 
^f the Stem was changed into f (§ 34, D.) : j3o/'-oc [hov-is'], 
and then was entirely lost : |3o-oc [j3o-wv = ho-u7n'] (§ 35, 
D. 2). 

OU. — An isolated diphthong Stem is o i, Nom. oT-g, sheep [ovi-s] : 
olog, oil, olv; Plur. oleg, olutv, oi<Ti{v), olg. Compare § 34, D. 



§ 159. Dialects. — Homer has yprjvg for ypav-g, Dat. ypijt, Voc. yprjv or 
ypTjiJ ; from j3ov-g, Ace. Plur. (i6-dg, Dat. J36-e(T(n(v). The forms /3wc, 
Nom., (3a)v, Ace. Sing., are Doric. 

§ 160. Dialects. — Ionic oig (pvis) for olg. Gen. oiog, Dat. Plur. dt-effm or 
oeam, Acc. dig. 



§162. 



CONSONANT DECLENSION. 



61 



Some compounds of Trov-g, Jvot, form the Ace. Sing, 
like Stems in ov : Tpiwovg, three-footed., Ace. TpiTrow. For 
vaif'Q, see among the irregular words, § 177, 11. 

§ 161. The Stems in t v, moreover, have in the 
a) Gen. Sing., wg for o^. Compare § 157. 
h) Dat. Sing., c i always contracted for eV. 

c) Ace. Sing, and Plur., a is long and not contracted. 

d) Nom. and Yoc. Plur., etg contracted by older Attic 
writers into r/ g, by the later into c i g. 

e) Words which have a vowel before e v may be con- 
tracted also in the Gen. and Ace. Sing., and in the Ace. 
Plur. : St. Ue I paitv, Nom. Ilaipaiev-g, port of Athens^ 
Gen. Ilefjoatwc, Ace. Xlaipaia ; xou)-g, measure^ Ace. Plur. 
Xo5c. ^ 

Obs. — The Gen. in -e w e has arisen by transmutation of quantity 
(§ 37, D. 2) out of the Horn. r]og. Hence the length of the final 
syllable. In the same manner, the Ace. Sing, ea has arisen out 
of r\a : still ea is also found, like edg in the Ace. Plural ; eag is 
contracted by later writers into eig. 



162. 3. O Stems, i. e., Stems in o and w. 



Ste: 





Examples. 
Stems. 


?7 7ni9u), persicasion. 
TreiOo 


6 ijptogj Tiero. 
rjpu) 


4 


Singular. 
Norn. 
Gm. 
Dat. 

Ace. 
Voc. 


TraOco 

(TTEiOo-og) iruBovg 
(irEiOo-i) TTElOol 
(ireiQo-a) TreiOib 
ireiOol 


Tjpio-g 
iipu)-og 
rjpoj-i 

ijpu)-a ijpu) 
rjp(o-g 


Plur. T/jOW-fc 
rjpcj-ojv 
Vipui-aiiy) 
ijpdj-ag or 
Vpujg 




Dual and Plural of TruQto are 
formed as in the o declension. 


Dual ijpoj-e 
rjpw-oiv 



§ 161. Dialects. — The Epic dialect lengthens the e of Stems in cv 
into T) before vowels : (3am\r}-og, (SamXij-i, (SacriXij-a, (SaaiXri-eg, (SaaiXri-cjv, 



62 CONSONANT DECLENSION. §163. 

Examples for Declension. 
r) rixoi (St. 7)xo), echo. 
KaXv\pw, Ar]Ta), dfxoj-Q (St. d fiio), slave, 

firjTpio-g (St. /xTjTpu)), avunculus. 

§ 163. The Stems in o, all feminine, form the Nom. Sing, 
without sigma, except the Stem al^o, Ndm. Sing. al^a)-g, 
sha7ne, Ace. al^oj. The Ace, which is like the Nom., is 
oxytone (contrary to § 87) : Tnidw, not neiOoj. 

The Vocative ends in o t ; all other cases are contracted. 
The Ace. of Stems in oj usually remains uncontracted. 
The Stem I w, Nom. r; tw-g, dawn, has Gen. Sing, tio, Dat. 
£(j> (according to § 132), Ace. I'w (from 'iwa). 

Obs. — Several Stems in o v follow the above declension in some of 
their forms : drjdojv, nightingale^ Gen. arj^ovQ, with di)UvoQ ; e/fcwv, 
image, Gen. ukovq (compare §171). 



dpicrrrj-Effmiv) (dpiffTev-g, prince) ; still there are Genitives also in € o e 
and BVQ ('0^u(7€we), Datives in tV, e t, and Accusatives in e a, 7/ : Tvdi). 
The New-Ionic dialect leaves e frequently uncontracted : jSamXk-eg. 

§ 163. Dialects. — Homer extracts ijpco'i into 7/py, Mivioa into' MtVw. 
The old and poetic form fo^&-f is rjoj-g (St. ^ o), declined like aido)-g. 
Some proper names in a> in the Kom. Sing, have in the New-Ionic 
dialect an Ace. in ovv : ArjTovv, 'lovp. 



165. 



CONSONANT DECLENSION. 



63 



III. Elided Stems, i. e.^ Stems which reject the final 
consonant in certain forms. 



§164. 


1. S Stems, i. e., Stems which elide sigma. 


Examples. 


TO yevog, race. 


M. evyevfjg, N. evyeveg, of good family. 


Stems. 


ysveg 


ev y ev eg 


Singular. 




, 


Nom. 


yevog [genus] 


M. evyevrjg N. evyev'eg 


Om. 


(ysve-og) yevovg 


(evyeve-og) evyevovg 


Bat. 


{ysve-'f) yevEi 


(evyeve-'i) evyevel 


Ace. 


yevog 


(evyeve-a) evyevrj N. evyev'eg 


Voc. 


yevog 


evyev'eg N. evyev'eg 


Dual. 






iV. A V. 


(yeve-e) yevrj 


(evyev'e-e) evyevrj 


G.D. 


(ysve-oiv) yevoXv 


(evyeve-oiv) evyevolv 


Plural. 






J^.V. 


{yeve-a) y'evr) 


(evyeve-eg) evyevelg N". {evyev'ea) evyevf} 


Gen. 


(yeve-(jjv) yevaiv 


{evyeve-(i)v) euyevwv 


Bat. 


yevE-<Ti(v) 


evyev'e-<n(v) 


Ace. 


(yeve-a) y'evr] 


(evyeve-dg) evyevelg N. (evyevea) evyevfj 



Examples fo» Declension. 
TO eUog^form. Kd\\og,deauty. fiaXog, song. axOog, burden. 
Adjectives : 

(Ta^rjg, Neut. aa^eg, clear. aKpijSrjg, Neut. ccKpilSeg, exact. 

evffOrjg, Neut. evrjOeg, simple. 

§ 165. The sigma Stems retain their final consonant only 
when it stands at the end, i. e., in the Nom. Ace. and Yoc. 
Sing. Neuter, and in the Nom. and Yoc. Sing. Masc. and 
Fem. 

The Neuter substantives change the Stem-vowel £ into 
o in the Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Sing. : St. y tvsg, yivog. 



§ 165. Dialects. — The Epic dialect //•e(2'w^%, the New-Ionic always^ 
leaves the vowels of the sigma Stems uncontracted : ykveog^ y'evei. 
Hom. sometimes has the Gen. Sing, evg (from € o c, § 37, D. 1) : Odp- 
cevg {Qdpffog, courage). 

In the Dative Plur. Homer has three endings : e-etrffi (v), e (t-<ti(v)j 
and the usual e-<Ti(y): i3eXe-e(Tm{v), (3e\s(T-<Ti{v), ^e\e-ci(v), (jSeXog, dart). 



64: CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 166. 

JSTeuter adjectives leave f unchanged : EvyEvig. Masculines 
and Feminines form the Nom. Sing, by lengthening eg 
into rjg (§ 147, 2), as*c can not be affixed : tvyevrjg from 
svyeveg, like Troiiurjv from ttoijulev. 

Masculines and Feminines have the pure Stem in the 
Voc. Sing., and in compound words which are not oxytone 
in Nom. Sing, the accent is on the last syllable but two 
(compare §§ 148, 85) : Nom. ^loKparrig, Voc. Sw/cparfe ; 
Nom. ArijuioaOivrigfYoc. Ar^iuocrOeveg. 

Obs. — The Neuter aXr]9kQ (Masc. d\r]9rig, true) draws back the accent 
in interrogations : dXijOeg ; really ? 

§ 166. In all other forms g is rejected (§§ 61 and 49): 
yivE-'i for yivecr-L [^gener-i]. Wherever two vowels meet 
they are contracted : € e in the Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dual 
become r^ ; e a generally rj ; but when another vowel stands 
before e they sometimes become a, according to § 41 : St. 
ev^eeg, Nom. ev^erig, defective, Ace. Ivdea ; Stvyieg, Nom. 
vying f healthy. Ace. vyiayhvit also vyirw St. \pEEg, Nom. 
TO xpiog, debt, Neut. Plur. xpia, •The adjectives in ~^vi]g 
(St. ^vig) have ^vYi and <^va : Exxpvng, well-disposed, ev^vii 
and £v<pva. 

Obs. — Barytone adjectives have the accent in the Gen. Plur. on the 
last syllable but one, contrary to § 87 : avrapK^v (Nom. avTdpKrjg, 
self-sufficient). So also Tpirjprjg, trireme, used as a substantive, 
Gen. Plur. Tpirjpiov. 

§ 167. Proper names in -kXetjq, compounded with Kkiog, glory (St. 
KXeeg), have a double contraction in the Dat. Sing., and a single 
one in all the other cases : Nom. (nepiKXerig) UspiKXijg, Gen. (Uspi- 
KXeeog) UepiKXsovg, Dat. {UepiKXee'i, UepLKXki) UepiKXel, Acc. (UepLKXeea) 
nepifcXea, Voc. {UepiKXeeg) UspiKXeig. 

§ 166. Dialects. — A vowel before e is often contracted with it in 
Homer : (nreog or (nrelog, cave, Gen. <nrtiovg, Dat. (ttt^-i (from (nrk'i), Dat. 
Plur. (nrr}E(rai{v) and (T7re(T(n(v) ; evicXerjg, glorious, Acc. evKXelag (from 
evKXeeag), hnt dKXrjsTg (from dKXer]g, inglorious). Herodotus ivdekg (Ivderjgj 
defective), dvQpojirocpvkag (dvOpwTro^vrjg, human). 

§ 167. Dialects. — The Epic dialect forms 'HpaicXfjg, 'HpaKXfj-og, 
'BpaKXrj-i, 'BpaKXrj-a ; the New-Ionic, 'HpaKXkrjg, 'HpaKXe-og, 'HjoaKXI-V, 
'HpafcXe-a. 



169. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 

§ 168. 2. T Stems, i. e., Stems which elide r. 



65 



Examples. 


TO 


Kspag, Tiorn 




TO Kpsag, 


meat 


Stems. 


KE 


OUT 




• KpeuT 




Singular. 












KA. V. 


Kepag 






Kpeag 




Gen. 


KEpaT-og 


(Kspaog) 


Kspwg 


(Kpeaog) 


Kpeutg 


Bat. 


KBpar-i 


(Kspdi) 


Kep<^ 


(icpsdi) 


Kpk<f 


Dual. 












KA.V. 


Kspdr-e 


(Kspae) 


Kspd 






O.D. 


KEpdT-OlV 


(fCfjOffOtr) 


KSpiiiV 






Plural. 












N.A. V. 


Kspdr-a 


{Kspaa) 


Kspd 


(Kpeaa) 


Kped 


Gen. 


KSpdT-dJV 


{Kepdojv) 


KepuJv 


(/cpedwv) 


KpEa)U 


Bat. 


Kepd-(TL{v) 






Kpsd-(n(y) 





§ 169. r becomes g in Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Sing., accord- 
ing to § 67. In the other cases some words always reject 
it: e.g.,Kpiag,(Ti\agf splendor ; yripag,age; Kvi<^ag, gloom. 
Others, like K^pag, retain both forms together, with and 
without r. The vowels which meet are regularly contract- 
ed. The quantity of a is very fluctuating. The Dat. Sing, 
is written also at : aiXai. 

In prose, only a few Neuters (Nom. a c) have a mova- 
ble r. 



§ 169. Dialects. — Homer has ^kTra-i<T(n{v) or ^sTra<T-(n(v), Dat. Plur. 
of dsTrag, goblet. In Ionic a often becomes e : Homer ovSag, ground, 
Gen. ovSe-og, Kwag, Jieece, Nom. Plur. Kw€-a ; Kkpag, New-Ionic Gen. 

KEjOEOC. 

A movable r appears also in the Stems i^pwr, yeXwr, X(t><«>7' (Nom. 
t^/awf, sweat ; yeXojg, laughter; xp'^Qi sMn), Dat. l^jO^, Ace. idpw, together 
with Gen. iSpoJTog ; yeXw ; and regularly in Homer xpo-of , xpo-t (poet. 
Xpff), Xpo-a- Compare alddjg, ri(^g, § 163. 



66 ' CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 170. 

§ 170. 3. N Stems, i. e., Stems which elide v. 



Examples. " 


M. F. fieiKav, greater. 


N. fxaiZov 


Stems. 


' fJLEl^OV 




Singular. 


, 




N. V. 


fid^ojv 


N. fisi^ov 


Oen. 


IxeiZov-OQ 




Bat. 


fXElKoV-l 




Ace. 


fjid^ov-a [fiH^oa] jxeiKoi 


N. fiei^ov 


Dual. 






J^.A. V. 


HdZ,ov-f. 




O.D. 


fiaiZ,6v-oiv 




Plural. 






N. V. 


fxei^ov-eg [/let^oeg] fiei^ovg 


N. neiil^opa [jjiEi^oa] fxei^u) 


Oen. 


fiei^ov-iov 




Bat. 


fiEiZo-(n{v) 




Ace. 


fieil^ov-ag [fieil^oag] jxei^ovg 


N. fxEiZova [ixEeZoa] fieiKd) 



Examples for Declension. 
jSeXriiov, 'better. ato-x/wr, TYiore liateful. dXy/wi/, more 'painful. 

§ 171. The full and the contracted forms are equally in 
use. But the open ones (/xctSoa) never occur. Compara- 
tives of more than two syllables throw back the accent in 
the Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Sing. Neuter upon the last syllable 
but two : l^iXriov, a'/txYfoy. 

Besides the comparatives (Nom. w v,- o v), there are only 
the two proper names, 'AttoXXwv (Stem, and Nom.) and Ilo- 
(TEi^ow (Stem and Nom.), Ace. 'AttoXXw (also 'A7roXXwv-a), 
Tlocrei^M (also Iloo-ff^wv-a). On the Vocative, see § 148, 
Obs. We may compare several Stems which fluctuate be- 
tween o V and o (§ 163). 



§ 171. Dialects. — Somer forms the Ace. KVKeai or KviceiCj from kvkewv^ 
mixture. 



OP THK 



172. . CONSONANT DEC^KgJON. ^^ ^ .^ .6^ 

§ 172. Synopsis of terminations in the Second Principal 
Declension. 



Nom. 


Stem. 




Gen. 


in -a 


-ar 


TO (j(i)}ia^ l)ody. 


aionaros 


-ais 


-aid 
-air 


6 Tralf, boy. 
rj dais, meal. 


Traidos 
daiTos 


-dv M. 

-av K 


-av 
-avT 


Udv, Pan. 
Adj. TO irdv, the whole. 


Uavog 
iravTos 


-ap 


-ap 

-apT 

-a(p)T 


TO tap, spring. 
t) ddjxap, wife. 
TO ^piap, fountain. 


tapos 

dafxaprog 

(ppeaTog 


-as F. 

-as K 


-ad 
-air) 


i) XafiTrds, lamp. 
TO Kpkas, meat. 


XafiTrddog 
Kpeios 


-ag M. 


-avT 
-av 


6 yiyds, giant. 
Adj. [ieXds,Uack 


yiyavTOS 
[isXavos 


-avs F. 


-a{v) 


ri ypavs, old woTuan. 


ypdos 


-€t|0 


-etp 


r) xe/jO, hand. 


X^^poQ 


F. 


-evT 

-ev 

-nd 


Part. XvOeis, loosed. 
Adj. els, one. 

r) KXdg, Tcey. 


XvQsvTog 

tvos 

KXeidos 


-er K 


-evT 
-sv 


Part. XvBkv, loosed. 
Adj. dppEv, male. 


XvQkvTos 
dppevog 


-6c K 


<d 


Adj. (Ta<pes, clear. 


(Tacpovs 


-€We ^1- 


<v) 


6 (povevg, murderer. 


(poveojs 


-?7v M. 


-ev 

-T}V 


6 Xifxriv, harlfor. 
6 "EXXi]v, Greek 


Xifievos 
"EXXtjvos 


-rip 


-ep 

-vp 


6 alQrjp, aether. 
6 6r)p, game. 


al^tpog 
9np6s 



m 



CONSONANT DECLENSION. 



§172. 



Nom. 


stem. 




Gen. 


-rig 




r) (SapvTTjg, weight. 
6, r) Tpirjpijg^ trireme. 


(SapvTijTog 
Tpiripovg 


-I N. 


-t 

-tr 


Adj. ISpi^ acquainted with. 
TO fieXi, honey. 


idpiog 
fieXiTog 


-IV 


-tv 


6 deXtpiv, dolphin. 


deX(pXvog 


-tg 


-I 

-iS 

-IT 

-19 

-IV 


7/ TToXig, city. 
7] IXirig, hope. 
' V xdpigjavor. 
o, rj opvigj Mrd. 
â– f} ^aXafiig, Salamis. 


TToXsujg 
IXTTidog 
XdpiTog 
opvWog 
^aXafilvog 


-ov N. 


-ov 

-OVT 


Adj. evdaifiov,fortunute. 
Part. Xvov, loodng. 


evdaifiovog 
XvovTog 


-og N. 


-or 


TO ysvog, race. 
Part. TTEtpvKog, having 'become. 


yevovg 

TTE^VKOTOg 


-ovg 


-OVT 

-od 
-o{v) 


6 o^ovg, tooth. 

6 irovg^foot. 

6, r) /3owf , or, cow. 


oSovTog 

TToSog 

(3o6g 


-V N. 


-V 


TO dffTv^ city. 


daTSog 


-vv M. 

N. 


-vv 

-VVT 


6 fi6(Tvv, wooden tower. 
Part. dsiKvvv, shmcing. 


fioavvog 
hiKvvvTog 


-vg M. 
F. 


-VVT 
-V 

-vd 


Part. deiKvvg, shmcing. 
6 ixOvg,Jish. 
6 TTfixvg, ell 
r) x^^l^^G, chaTc. 


SeiKvvvTog 
Ixdvog 
TTrjx^iog 
xXajxvdog 


-oi F. 


-0 


r) tthOu), persuasion. 


Trei^ovg 


-(OV 

M. 


-ov 

-OJV 
-OVT 


rj dr]^o)v, nightingale. 
6 dycJv, contest. 
6 Xiwv, lion. 


dri^ovog 
dyCjvog 
XkovTog 


-WjO 


'Op 


6 pr]Tb)py orator. 


pnTopog 



173. 



CONSONANT DECLENSION. 



69 



V 

Nom. 


Stem. 




Gen. 


-(og M. 


-0 

-or 

-h)T 


6 rjpvjg^ hero, 
r) alSiog, shame. 
Part. Trecpvicwg, having lecome. 
6 tpcjg, love. 


ripuiog 
aidovg 
TrecpvKOTog 
ipojTog 


-^ 


-TT 

-0 


6 yvxjyj vulture. 

ri Karr)Xi-4/, upper story. 


yvTrog 

XdXvjSog 

KarriXXcpog 


-^ 


-K 

-r 

-X 

-KT 


6 (pvXa^, guard. 
7] (fXo^.flanfw. 
6 ovv^, nail. 
rj vv%^ night. 


<pvXaKog 

<pXoy6g 

OVVXOQ 

VVKTog 



§ 173. The Second Principal Declension agrees with the 
First in the following particulars : 

1. Masculines have g for the Nom. Sing, (or compensa- 
tion for it) ; feminines are less consistent in this. 

2. The Dat. Sing, affixes t (subscribed in the First Prin- 
cipal Declension). 

3. Yowel, and in part diphthongal, Stems take v in the 
Ace. Sing. 

Obs. — The original ending of the Ace. Sing, was also in the Second 
Principal Declension every where v. This consonant was, how- 
ever, connected with consonant-Stems by the connecting vowel 
a : 6dovT-a-v=zL2it. dent-e-m. Subsequently v was dropped, and a 
left, generally as the only siam : 6d6vT-a. 

4. The Gen. and Dat. Dual have i v (aiv, oiv). 

5. The Gen. Plur. w v. 

6. The Dat. Plur. o-t(v) originally every where. 

7. The Ace. Plur. g every where. 

Obs. — The original ending of all Ace, Plur, was ve, but v was 
dropped after vowels of the First Principal Declension, and was 
compensated for by the lengthened dg, ovg. After consonants 
there was the same process as in the Ace. Sing. : 6S6vT-a{v)-gj 
Lat. dent-e-s for dent-em-s. 

8. Neuters all have a in Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Plur. 



70 IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. § 174. 

The principal differences in the endings are : 

1. In the Gen. Sing., where the Second Principal De- 
clension always has o g (wc)- 

2. In the Nom. Plur., where Masc. and Fern, of the Sec- 
ond Principal Declension always have £ c. 

Irregidarities in Declension. 

§ 174. The mixing of two Stems which may have one 
Nom. is called Heterodizing {kr^poKXiaiafttifferent inflex- 
ion) : Nom. (jKOTog, darJcness, Gen. gkotqv (0-Declension), 
and GKOTovQ (Second Principal Declension) ; Xaywc, hare, 
according to the Attic declension, but Ace. Xayw. 

An important irregularity of this kind occurs with proper 
names in r? c • SwKjoarr^c (St. S wic/oarcc)^ ^^^ Ace. '^^(OKpa- 
Tr]v (as if from Stem Swic/oara of the A-Declension) with 
Sw/Cjoarrj. But those in -kX^c (§ 167) follow the Second 
Principal Declension exclusively. ^ 

§ 175. The formation of some cases from a Stem whicn 
can not be that of the JSTom. is called Meta/plasm, (jiera- 
irXaafioQ, cJiange of formation) : Nom. Sing, to ^Iv^pov, 
tree, Dat. Plur. ^ivdpE(Ti(v), as if from Stem SevSpeg; Nom. 
Sing. TO ^uKpvov, tear, Dat. Plur. ^aKpvai{v), from St. duKpv 
(poet. Nom. SaKpu) ; to nvpffre, Plur. to. irvpa, Dat. rote 
irvpoXg (0-Declension) ; NoiA. Sing, ovupo-g, dream, Gen. 
ovdpaTog, Nom. Plur. oveipaTa. 

§ 176. A peculiar irregularif^ appears in several Neuter 

§ 174. Dialects. — Several Masc. Stems in a, Nom. rig in Herodotus, 
have e a for r}v in the Ace. Sing. : SeaTrorri-g, master^ deaTroTEa. 6 6xo-g^ 
carriage, in Homer has Plur. rd ux^a, ox£(T(pi{v'), from the St. 6x^Q- 
Oidi-n-ovg has poet. forms from a St.OiSnroSa, Gen. Sing. OidnroSao, 
trag. OldiTTodd. Homeric ^ap-n-riddjv, stems ^ap-midov and ^apTrt]- 
dovT. Mivcog, Acc. Sing. Miv<i)a (§ 163) and Mivbjv. 

§ 175. Dialects. — Hom. metaplasms are : Dat. Plur, dvdpa7r6de(T<Ti{v), 
Nom. Sing. dvdpaTro^ov, slave; Nom. Acc. Plur. TrpoaioTrara, Nom. Sing. 
Trpoo-wTTov, countenance ; derxfiaTa, ionds, Sing. 6 Se(TiJ.6g ; tpirjpo-g, trusty, 
Nom. Plur. epirtpeg ; d\Kr], strength, Dat. Sing. dX/c-i ; vafilvrj, hattle, vafilvi ; 
ix^p, divine Uood, Acc. Sing. /x<^. 



§ 177. IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. 71 

Stems in apr, as (j)pEapr. They reject r in the Nom. Ace. 
and Yoc. Sing, and p in the other cases ; to <ppiap, well, 
Gen. (f)piaTog (also (f)priT6g) ; to rjirap, liver, Gen. rJTraroc *, 
TO aXeKpap and aXtK^cif Solve, Gen. aXd(l)aTog. 

To these correspond the Stems (T/ca(/o)r and v^a{p)T: 
Nom. (TKWjO, 6?^V^, Gen. o-icaroc ; vScdjo, Gen. vSaroc. 

§ 177. Special irregularities in alphabetical order: 

1. aviipy man (compare § 153), rejects e of the Stem 
avsp, and inserts S in its place (§ 51,6^5^.2): av-^-p-6g, 
avdpt, avSpa ; Voc. avsp ; Dual, av^pe, av^potv ; Plur. av^peg, 
avdptiJVf av^pa(Ti{v), (iv^pag. 

2. "Aprj g (the god Ares) : St. 'Ape c, Gen. "A/)€wc and 
"Apeog, Ace. "Aprjv, together with "Apr] ; Voc. regul. *'ApEg. 

3. a |0 V, without Nom. : Gen. tov and r^c apv-6g, of the 
lamb, apvi, apva , Dat. Plur. apva(n{v). 

4. r o yovv, Icnee {genu), Nom. Ace. Yoc. All the rest 
from St. y ovaT, Gen. yovaTog. 

5. 17 yvv 7/, woman. All the rest from St. y u v a t k-, 
Gen. yvvaiKog, Dat. yuvaficf', Ace. yuvaTica, Voc. yvvai ; Dual 
yuvaiica, yvvaiKoXv ; Plur. yi»vaT»c-£c> -wv, -5«(v), -a^. 

6. TO ^opv, wood, spear : St. ^&paT (comp. 4.). Gen. 
^opiiTog, poet, ^o p6 g, Dat. Sojoi and dopei. 

7. Z £ V c (^^'^^^ ^<?<^ Zeus), Gen. Atoc, Dat. At/", Ace. At a, 
Voc. Zed. 

8. 6 and 17 kviov, dog, with Yoc. kvov, from St. kvo v. 
All the rest from kvv: Gen. kiJvoc, Dat. kvvi, Acc. Kwva ; 
Plur. KvvEg, kvvu)v, Kv<Ti{v), Kvvag. 

9. 6 X a - c, stone, from Hom. Xao-c, Gen. Xa-oc^ Dat. Xa-V , 



§ 177. Dialects. — The following forms are peculiar to dialects : 

1. dvfjp, poet, 'avep-og, 'avkp-i, 'avep-a ; Dat. Plur. dvdpe(T<Ti(v). 

2. "AprjQ, Homer "Apijog, "Aprji, "Aprja. 

4. yovv, Ion, and poet. yovvuT-og, yovvar-a, yovvdaiiy) ; Ep. Gen. Sing, 
youvog, Plur. yovvd, yovvwv, yovv-(.a(n{y). 

6. ^OjOf , dovparog, Ep. ^ovjoof, Sovpij dovpe, dovpa, dovpojv, dovpe<T<n{v)^ 

7. Zevcpoet. St. Z/j V : Z?jv-dc, Z);v-/, Zj/v-a (also Zrjv, from Zjj). 



72 IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. § 177. 

Acc. Xaa-v, Xav ; Plur. Xa-sg, Xd-wv, Xd-£(T<7i{v) or Xd-e(Ti{v), 
Xa-ag. 

10. 6 /mdpTv-g, witness, with Dat. Plur. fidprvmiv), from 
St. fxapr V. The rest from the St. fxaprv p : p,dpTvpog, 
fidpTvpi, etc. 

11. 17 vav-g, ship, ve-ivg, vr\-'L, vav-v ; Plur. vr]-ig, ve-iov, 
vav-(Ti{v), vavg. Compare § 159. 

Ohs. — The Nom. Acc. Sing, and Dat. Acc. Plur. rest on the St. vav. 
Before vowels vav becomes (according to § 35, D. 2) vt]P, vt] ; ve-tog 
is for vT}-6g (§ 37, D. 2). 

12. 6 and 17 6pvt-g, bird, ^t. opviO and opvi: opvld-og, 
opvWi, opvWa, and opviv ; Plur. opvlOeg and opveig, 6pv£(i)v, 

13. TO ov g, ear. All the rest from St. w r : wrog, wrt ; 
Plur. wra, wtwv, w-(Tf(v). (On the accent, § 142, 3.) 

14. 17 n vv^ {the Pnyx), St. ttvk v, IIukv-oc^ TLvkv-i, 
UvKv-a. 

15. 6 7rpi(T(5v-g, the aged,hsis in the Gen. and Dat. Sing., 
and throughout the Plur., its forms from irp^a^vra (Nom. 
Sing. wpiaftvTrig) : irpia^ug, TTplcrf^sioVf 7rpe(Tf5E(Ti{v), signifies 
embassadors, to which the Sing, is irpEcr^evTrig. 

16. TCLv. Only Yoc. io tclv or w rav, friend ox friends, 
a defective Stem. 

17. 6 viog^ son, St. vio, vt, viEv, Gen. vUogf Dat. vlu, 
Acc. vUa (rare), Plur. vkXg, vliiov, vUmiy), vldg. But also 
regularly vlov, etc. 

18. 17 x^^Pf ^(^'^j St. ;)^ f t p, Dual xepolv, Dat. PL x^P<^K'^)' 



Dialects. — 11. vav-g, from St. vijv, Ion. vr}v-g, Hom. Acc. Sing, vfj-a^ 
Dat. Plur. vr]e(T<T^{v), vr]v<xi{y), Acc. vr}ag. 

from St. v(.Vj Ion. vs-oc, ve-t, V€-a, vk-ig, ve-wv, ve-ecrcrt, v£-af . 
from St. vav, Dor. j/a-oe, va-i (navi), vd-e<T(Ti{v). 
13. owe, Ion. ovag, ovar-og; Plur. ouar-a, Dor. log, tjT-6g. 

17. vio-c, Ep. Gen. vl-og, vl-i, vl-a, vl-eg, vl-dai{v), vl-ag. 

18. %€«>, poet, and New-Ion. x^p-og, x^p-'h Ep. Dat. Plur. xet/o-etn or 

X€l/0-e<T(Tl(^'). 

To these add the words which are anomalous only in dialects : 

19. Homer 'AtSri-g {Att"Aidr]g), St. 'Ai^, Gen. "AV^of , 'AV^-t, also 'AV- 
dit)vev-g, with regular inflexion, according to § 159. 



§ 178. CASE-LIKE TERMINATIONS. 73 

Case-like TertniTiations. 
§ 178. Besides the case-endings, there occur certain suf- 
fixes or appendages, which in meaning very nearly resem- 
ble case-endings. To these belong : 

1. -di, answering to the question where: aXXo-6i, else- 

where ; 

2. -6 e V, answering to the question whence : 6tKo-9ev, 

from home ; 

3. -§£, answering to the question whither : o'lKa-^e, home- 

wards. 



Dialects — 20. 6 ip(og, lave, Stems kpioT and epo, poet. Ace. ipo-v. 

21. Oefiig, justice, St. 9 e fit and 0e/ti<rr, Plur. OefiiaT-eg, OefiKxr-ag. 

22. TO Kapa, Tiead, Horn. St. k apt] r, k a pij ar, k p dar, k p dr, Kup. 
Horn. JVom. Sing. Kapr]. 

Gen. " Kdprjr-og, Kaprjar-og, Kpdar-og, Kpar-Sg. 

Dat. " KaprjT-i, Kapr]aT-i, KpduT-i, Kpdr-i (trag. Kapq). 

Acc. " Kapr], rbv Kpdr-a, to Kap. 

Nom. Plur. Kapd, KaprjUT-a, KpduT-a, secondary form K.dprjva. 

Gen. " KpaTCJV, Kaprjvojv. 

Dat. " Kpd(ji{v). 

Acc. " z=:Nom. (also Tovg Kpdr-ag). 

23. t; /itdoTi^, whip, Hom. Dat. ndcTl, Acc. ^daTi-v. * 

24. 6 ndg, month, Ion. = Att. fir]v. 

25. oaaB, eyes. Kom. Acc. Dual, Neut. in Homer. The trag. have 
Gen. Plur. oaaiov, Dat. oaaoig or oa(roiai{v). 

§ 178. Dialects. — The three local suffixes are very frequent in Hom. : 
oIkoOi, at home ; 'VkioQi irpo, in front of Ilios ; ovpavoOev, from heaven ; 
dyopr]Q(.v,from the assembly. 9ev also supplies the place of the Gen.- 
ending: Kara KprjOev, down from the head, entirely ; i^ d\6dtv, out of the 
sea. -d e is generally affixed to the Acc. : oIkovSe, homewards ; KXimrjvSe, 
into the tent; TroXivSe, into the city; (po^ov^E, into flight, (pvyade, into 
flight, and tpaZi, to the earth, are peculiar. 

A suffix peculiar to the Hom. language is ^ i (v) ; it is added to the 
Stem of nouns, and supplies the place of the Gen. or Dat. termination 
in both Sing, and Plur., as : 

1. A- decl. : I3ir]-<pi, with force; KXtmri-tpi, in the tentj dirb vevprj-^iv, 
from the dow-string. 

2. O- decl: Oeo-ipiv, from the gods; 'l\i6-(l>iv,from Ilios. 

3. Cons.-decl. : KOTv\T]dov-6-<piv, with the sucTcers (on the feelers of the 
polypus); dir bx^<T-(pi{v) , from the carriage; Tcapd vav-<pi{v), alongside 
the ships; dicb KpuTea-fiv, from the head. (§ 177, D. 22.) 

D 



74 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. § 179. 

These suffixes are joined to the Stem of the noun : 
^A.dr]vr]dEv,fro7rh Athens (with Ion. ?j) ; KVK\6mv,from the 
circle (kvkXo-q). Sometimes o comes in place of the A- 
sound : piZoOev (radicitus), from piZa {radix) ; it also serves 
as a connecting vowel with consonant-stenjs : iravr-o-OEv, 
from all sides. The o is sometimes accented, contrary to 
§ 107, a : kvkX-o-Osv, MapaOiov-o-dev, from Marathon. 
The enclitic suffix S t (§ 92, 5) is often also combined with 
the Ace. form : Mt'ya/oa-^f, to Megara ; 'EXfuaTy-a-^E, to 
Eleusis. otK-a-Se, home^ from Stem o t k o, is irregular. 

For ^ £ we find cr t, 2 £, with the same meaning : oWocte, 
elsewhither ; 'AOr}vaZe, to Athens; 0?//3a?£, to Thehes ; 
dvpaZe (foras). 

§ 179. Moreover, a few words have an old Locative in 
I for the Sing., and ai{y) (without a preceding i) for the 
Plur., answering the question where : oikol, at home ; Ilu- 
Oo7, at Pytho ; 'Io-0/ioT, on the Isthmus ; 'AOr]vri(Ti{v), in 
Athens; n\aTaia(n{v)fin Platma ; 6vpa(n{v), at the door 
(foris) ; wpa(Ti{v), at the right time. 



Chap. VII. — Other Inflexions of the Adjective. 

A. Inflexion according to Genders. 

Adjectives of the Vowel Declension. 

§ 180. The most numerous class of adjectives is that 
which in the Masc. and Neut. follows the 0-Declension, 
and in the Fem. the A-Declension ; which, consequently, 
has in the Nom. Sing, oc, y\ (or a), ov [Lat. us, a, uni\. 



§ 180. Dialecls. — The lonians have frequently here also r\ for Att. 
a: aiax^. 



§182. 



INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 



75 



Singular. 


Masc. 


Fem. 


Neut. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Nom. 


dyaOog 


dyaOfj 


dyaOov 


<piXiog 


tpiXia. 


^IXiov 


am. 


dyaOov 


dyadijQ 


dyaOov 


(piKiov 


<l)iXidg 


<piXiov 


Bat. 


dya9<p 


dyaOy 


dyaOi^ 


(piXi<li 


^iXi(f. 


(piXi({) 


Ace. 


dyaOov 


dyaOrjv 


dyaOov 


0/Xiov 


(piXidv 


(piXiov 


Voc^ 


ayaQk 


dyaOrj 


dyaOov 


(piXte 


<l)iXia 


(piXiov 


Dual. 














KA.V. 


dyaOu) 


dyaOd 


dyaOu) 


(piXioj 


<}>iXid 


^iXi(o 


G.D. 


dyaBdlv 


dyaGdlv 


dyaOolv 


(j)iXioiv 


tpiXiaiv 


0t\totv 


Plural. 














Nom. 


dyaOoi 


dyaQai 


dyaOd 


(^iXioi 


tpiXiai 


<piXia 


Oen. 


dyaOojv 


dyaOCjv 


dyaOhiv 


^iXioJV 


^iXiojv 


^iXicjv 


Bat. 


dyaOoig 


dyaOaXg 


dyaOolg 


(piXioig 


^iXiaig 


(piXioig 


Ace. 


dyaOovg 


dyaOdg 


dyaOd 


(piXiovg 


<piXidg 


(jiiXia 



In the Nom. Sing. Fem. a stands after a voivel or p, else- 
where r/ : ^iKaiog, ^iKaia, ^iKaiov, just / alaxpog, alaxp^t 
al(T\p6v, hateful / (TO(l)6g, ao^i], croc^ov, wise. 

Exception : ri stands after o, except when p precedes o : 
dirXoog^ uTrXor], aTrXoov, Simple. 
dOpoog, dOpod, dOpoov, assembled. 

§ 181. Though the declension of these adjectives con- 
forms to §§ 114, 126, the following points must be ob- 
served : 

1. a in the Nom. Sing, is always long. 

2. In the accent of the Nom. and Gen. Plur. the Fem. 
follows the Masc. : jSejSafoc, Jirm, Nom. Plur. Masc. /3f- 
l^aioi, Fem. /3t/3atat (§ 108 would require jScjSataf, from 
Nom. Sing. jScjSam) ; Gen. of all genders, jSejSatwv (not even 
in the Fem. jSejSatwv, as would be required by § 118). 

§ 182. Many adjectives of this class have only two end- 



§ 181. Dialects. — ^Ta, Fem. of ^oc, heavenly, has in Horn. & : dTa Oedujv, 
the heavenly one among the goddesses. 

§ 183. Dialects. — The poets form a peculiar Fem. from many com- 
pound adjectives : d^porrj (Masc. d/xfiporog, immortal), dvTiOeij (Masc. 
dvTiOeog, 



76 



INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 



§183. 



ings, the Masc. being used for the Fern. : Masc. and Fern. 
r\(Tvxp^> Neut. ?7(Tuxov, quiet. Comj)ound adjectives espe- 
cially are all of 07ily tioo endings : arf/cvoc, childless ; 
Kapirocjiopog, fruitful. 

§ 183. Adjectives ending in £ o c and o o c in tl^ Kom. 
Masc. are generally contracted (§ 130) : yjivaioq, golden^ 
and oTrXooc, simple, are thus contracted : 



Singular. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Nam. 


XpvaovQ 


Xpvar) 


Xpvaovv 


airXovg 


UTrXfj 


uTrXovv 


Gen. 


XpvcTov 


Xpv(Tng 


Xpv(Tov 


airkov 


airXrjg 


UTrXov 


Bat. 


XpV(T(p 


Xpvay 


XpV(T(^ 


ttTrX^ 


airXy 


a7rX(^ 


Ace. 


Xpvaovv 


Xpvariv 


Xpvaovv 


clttKovv 


cnrXfjv 


cLTrXovv 


Voc. 


XpvaovQ 


Xpvtrn 


Xpvaovv 


cnrKovg 


uTrXf} 


ciTrXovv 


Dual. 














jsr. A. V. 


XpvtTio 


Xpvaa 


Xpv(T(t) 


drrXu) 


aTrXd 


ctTrXo) 


G.D. 


Xpv(Toiv 


Xpvffdiv 


XpvaoTv 


airXoXv 


cLTtXaXv 


cnrXolv 


Plural. 














Nom. 


XPV<T01 


Xpvcrai 


Xpv(Ta 


cnrXdl 


cnrXdi 


ctTrXd 


Gen. 


Xpvffojv 


XpvffCJv 


XpvaHjv 


airXCJv 


cnrXCjv 


dirXCjv 


Bat. 


XpvcroiQ 


Xpvcraig 


Xpv(Tolg 


cnrXoig 


cnrXaig 


cnrXoig 


Ace. % 


XpVtTOVQ 


Xpvaag 


Xpvca 


cnrXovg 


cnrXdg 


cnrXd 



The Fern, ea is contracted to r), except when preceded 
by a vowel or p ; it is then contracted to a : apyvpia, 
apyvpa {a?'gentea). The Nom. Plur. oa, oai, produce a : 
ai : aTrXa, aTrXai. 

The contracted final syllable also receives the circumflex, 
contrary to § 87 : \pvGiog, xpvaovg. But compound adjec- 
tives retain the accent on the last syllable but one : ivvovg, 
well-disposed, Gen. {vvov, Dat. cuvtf^, Nom. Plur. ^vvoi. 

% 184. A few adjectives in w c in the Nom. follow the 



§ 183. Dialects. — The adjectives in €oc, oog^ often remain uncon- 
tracted : Horn. XP^^^V (where e disappears by Bynizesis), KoXXippoog, 
heautifully-Jiowing. 

§ 184. Dialects. — Horn. 'iXaog^ rrXtiog, TrXdrj, TrXaov ; New-Ion. eof = 
Att. ew f ; for Att. aiog {sahm), Horn, ooog, ?;, ov, comparative aacjrepog. 



§ 185. 



INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 



77 



Attic 0-Declension (§ 132) : VXswc, Neut. VXtwv, gracious ; 
a^ioXp^ii^Q, Neut. -wv, considerable ^ TrXiwg, wXia, ttXuov, 
full. (Twg (from aaog, salvus) has in the Nom. Sing. Fem. 
and Neut. Plur. a a ; but also the forms ctwoc, trwa, Plur. 



CTwof, (Hjjai. 



Adjectives of the Consonant Declension. 

§ 185. Other adjectives in the Masc. and Neut. follow 
the Consonant Declension, and form from the Stem a pe- 
culiar Fem. with the ending i a, which, however, undergoes 
various changes in combination with the Stem. Such ad- 
jective-stems of three denominations are : 

1. Stems in v (Masc. and» Neut., § 154). The Fem. is 
formed from J,he Stem as it appears in the Gen. {r\ St); € 
and L a are contracted, and the accent remains on the last 
syllable of the Stem : hence — 





Masc. 


Fem. 


Neut. 


Nom. 


ij-g 


eid 


V 


Singular. 








Nom. 


r/dv-g^ sweet. 


r)deXa 


rjdv 


Gen. 


r'iSeog 


rideiag 


ridhg 


Bat. 


?/^£l 


97^a'^ 


rideX 


Ace. 


T)dvv 


rj^Eiav 


vSv 


Dual. 








Mm. Ace. 


Tjdee 


ri^eid 


t)See 


Gen. Bat. 


r'/dkoiv 


r'l^eiaiv 


rjdeoiv 


Plural. 




' 




JSom. • 


r/ceig 


rjSdai 


-n^ka 


Gen. 


rjSkojv 


it^uwv 


ri^etov 


Bat. 


T)di<n{v) 


r'jSeiaig 


. ij^kaiiy) 


Ace. 


rjdeXg 


r]Mdg 


â–  r)dsa 



§ 185. Dialects. — Horn, sometimes has er] for Att. f la : (3a6eTj (J3a9da, 
deep) ; the Ion. £ a for tia: Horn. ijKka ''Ipigj swift Iris. Besides OfjXvg, 
feminine^ we find also ry^wc, irovXvg (iroXvg, much), as Fem. Sometimes 
€ a is used for v v in the Ace. Sing. Masc. : evpea irovrov, the wide sea. 



78 



INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 



186. 



Examples for Declension. 
yXvKvg, sweet. jSpaxvg, short. evpvg, hroad. 

(3padve, slow. raxvg, swift. 

Obs. — OfjXvg, female, diflfering also in accent, occurs as a Feminine. 

§ 186. 2. 8te7ns in v. The t in « a is transferred to the* 
preceding syllable (§ 65) : St. ju c X a v, Nom. Masc. /LieXag, 
Fern. fxiXmva (from lueXav-ia), Neut. juiXav, black. 



Singular. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Nbm. 


/usXae 


fikXaiva 


fisXav 


Gen. 


\ik\avog 


fieXaivijg 


fieXavog 


Bat. 


[xeXavi 


fxeXaivy 


likXavi 


Ace. 


fieXava 


fikXaivav 


fxkXav 


Voc. 


fisXav 


fikXatva 


fisXav 


Dual. 






â–  1 


K A. V. 


fieXave 


IxeXaiva 


fieXave 


G.D. 


fxeXdvoiv 


fieXaivaiv 


H^XdvoVif 


Plural. 








Nom. 


fisXaveg 


fxeXaivai 


fisXava 


Gen. 


fxeXdviov 


fiaXaivwv 


fieXdvojv 


Bat. 


fxeXafft 


fieXaivaig 


HeXafTi 


Ace. 


fikXavag 


fieXaivag 


jxeXava 



Examples for Declension. 
St. TaXav, ToXdgy rdXaiva, rdXav, unfortunate. 
St. TEpev, Tsprjv, Tspeiva, Hpsv, tender. 

§ 187. 3. Stems in vt. To these belong especially the 
numerous participial forms. In the Fem. the v t combines 
with the ending i a to form cr a, the previous vowel being 
lengthened by compensation (§ 50) : Xtyovr-La becoming 
Xtyoucra. 

The adjectives in e v r have ^Gtra in the Fem. : -^apkig, 
Xapk(j(Ta, ')(apUv, pleasing, St. xapievr. For the Dat. 
Plur.,see § 149. 



§ 187. Dialects. — Adjectives in evr (Nom. Masc. eic) are sometimes 
contracted : IIom.Tifiyg=:riixr]Eig,?ionorable; Xix)TevvTa=.X(x)T6evTa, abound- 
ing in lotuses; poet. irTepovcrcTazzzTrTepoeaaa, 



187. 



INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 



79 





Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Sing. 


hosing. 






hosing. 






Norn. 


Xvcrdg 


Xvcrdaa 


Xvadv 


Xviov 


Xvovaa 


Xvov 


Gen. 


XvaavTOQ 


Xvadcnjg 


XvaavTog 


XvovTog 


Xvov<TT]g 


XvovTog 


Bat. 


XvaavTi 


Xvadcry 


XvffavTi 


XvOVTl 


Xvovcfy 


XvOVTl 


Ace. 


XvaavTU 


Xvaauav 


Xv(Tav 


Xvovra 


Xvovaav 


Xvov 


Voc. 


Xvcrag 


Xvaacra 


Xvaav 


Xv<t)v 


Xvovaa 


Xvov 


Dual. 














iV. A. V. 


Xvaavre 


Xvadaa 


Xv(Taj/Te 


Xvovre 


XvovGa 


Xvovre 


G.D. 


XvadvTOiv 


Xvadaaiv 


XvadvToiv 


XVOVTOIV 


Xvoixraiv 


XVOVTOIV 


Plural. 














Ncmi. 


XvaavTSQ 


Xvaatrai 


Xvaavra 


XvovTsg 


Xvovaai 


Xvovra 


Gen. 


XvrrdvTOJV 


XvaaaCJv 


Xv(TdvTii)V 


XVOVTIOV 


XVOVCTOIV 


Xvovriov 


Bat. 


Xvadcn 


Xvadaaig 


Xvadcrt 


Xvovai 


Xvovaaig 


Xvovai 


Ace. 


XvaavTag 


Xvddaag 


XvcravTu 


Xvovrag 


Xvovaag 


Xvovra 


Sing. 


loosed. 






giving. 






Norn. 


XvQdg 


XvOelcra 


XvB'ev 


di^ovg 


didovaa 


dtSov 


Gen. 


XvQkvTog 


XvOEicrrjg 


XvQsvTog 


SiSovTog 


li^ovarjg 


Stdovrog 


Bat. 


XvO&vri 


XvQeicry 


XvOkvTL 


hdovTt 


SiSovay 


^idovri 


Ace. 


XvOavra 


XvQuaav 


XvBkv 


diSSvra 


didov<Tav 


^idov 


Voc. 


XvOeig 


XvOeXaa 


Xv9ep 


didovg 


didoiKTa 


dtdov 


Dual. 














N.A. V. 


XvOevTS 


XvBeitra 


XvBevre 


dlSoVTS 


dL^ovara 


SiSovre 


G.B. 


XvQkvToiv 


XvQdaaiv 


Xv9kvT0iv 


didovToiv 


Sidovaaiv 


didcvroiv 


Plural. 














Mm. 


XvOevTsg 


XvOelcrai 


Xv9evTa 


SidovTig 


diSovaai 


diSovra 


Gen. 


XvQkvTiov 


Xv9ei(Tu)V 


Xv9evT0)v 


did6vT(t)v 


didov(TU)P 


Sidovriov 


Bat. 


Xv9uat 


XvOdaaig 


XvBelai 


didoixTt 


didovaaig 


diSovtri 


Ace. 


XvOavrag 


Xv9el<Tag 


Xv9kvTa 


diSovTag 


SiSovarag 


^iSovra 


Sing. 


pleasing. 






showing. 






Mm. 


Xapieig 


Xapaaoa 


Xapiep 


deiKvvg 


^UKVvaa 


deiKvvv 


Gen. 


XapisvTog 


Xapik<T(Tr]g 


XapievTog 


hiKvvvTog 


deiKvvffrjg 


dsiKvvvrog 


Bat. 


XapievTi 


Xapikrray 


XopiBi'Ti 


SeiKVVVTl 


SeiKVixry 


SuKvvvri 


Ace. 


XapievTU 


Xapkaaav 


Xapiev 


deiKvvvra 


BuKvvaav 


dsiKvvv 


Voc. 


Xaplev 


XapU(T(Ta 


Xctpiev 


deiKvvg 


hiKvvaa 


SeiKvvv 


Dual. 














KA. V 


Xapkvre 


Xctpdaoa 


XapkvTE 


SeiKVVVTS 


hiKVvaa 


deiKvvvre 


G.B. 


XapikvTOiv x«ptso'(r«iv x"^P'^'^^tolv 


SeiKVVVTOlV 


dnicvixTaiv 


deiKVVvroiv 


Plural. 














Mm. 


XaplevTsg 


Xapieccrai 


XapiBVTa 


SeiKvvvTsg 


hiKvvaai 


deiKVvvra 


Gen. 


XapdvTwv 


Xapte(T<TMV 


Xapdvrujv 


dsiKVVVTCJV 


dfiKWcraiv 


ceiKVvvrwv 


Bat. 


Xapitai 


Xapikaaaig 


Xapi^frt- 


deiKvvai 


deiKvixraig 


deiKVV(n 


Ace. 


XapkvTug 


Xapdffffag 


XapiEVTU 


dtiKvvvrag 


d^iKVVcrag 


SeiKVvvra 



80 



INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 



188. 



Obs. — The form of the Fern, is explained from r before t becoming 
(T, according to § 60, i being dropped after <t, and v before a being 
thrown out and compensated for by a lengthening of the vowel : 
XvovTia^ Xvovcrta, Xvovaa, Xvovaa. 



iravTia. Tzavaia. Travaa, Tcaaa 



§ 188. 4. Stems in o r. The participles of the Perfect 
Active in o r (Nona. Sing. Masc. w g, Neut. og) have v i a 
in the Fem. : XeXukwc, XeXvKvTa, XeXvKog, one who has 
freed. See §§ 146, .147. 



Singular. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Mm. 


XeXvKoJg 


XeXvKvla 


XeXvKog 


Gen. 


XeXvKOTOQ 


XeXvnviag 


XeXvKoTog 


Bat. 


XeXvkoti 


XeXvKvig, 


XeXvKOTL 


Ace. 


XEXvKOTa 


XsXvKvlav 


XaXvKog 


Voc. 


XeXvkcjq 


XeXvKvla 


XeXvKog 


Dual. 








N.A.V. 


XEXvKore 


XEXvKvia 


XeXvkots 


Q.D. 


XeXvkotoiv 


XeXvKviaiv 


XeXvKoroiv 


Plural. 








Nom. 


XeXvKOTEQ 


XEXvicvTai 


XeXvKOTa 


Gen. 


XeXvKoTMjv 


XeXvKviojv 


XeXvKoTojv 


Bat. 


XeXvKofTi 


XeXvKviaig 


XeXvKoci 


Ace. 


XEXvKorag 


XeXvicviag 


XeXvKora 



Obs. — The strange difference of the Fem. from the Stem of the 
Masc. and Neut. is explained by the 7^ which was originally before 
the 0. From Por-ia came first focr-ia (§ 60), then by a peculiar 
contraction (Po becoming v) va-ia, finally (o- being dropped, § 61, 
h) v-'ia and via. 

§ 189. The most important adjectives of two endings with 
Stems according to the Second Principal Declension are : 
i. Stems in g (Inflexion given under §§ 164, 165), as : 

aatprjg ffatpsg, clear. Gen. aa^ovg. 

dXrjOrig dXt]Oeg, trice. " dXtjOovg. 

Other Examples for Beclension. 
irXriprjg^fuU. \pevSfjg, false. aff^aXrjg, safe. dvcr/ievrjg, hostile. 

2. Stems in v (Inflexion given under §§ 146, 147), as : 

TrSTTlOV TTETTOV, HpC. GCU. TTSTTOV-Og. 

eMaiiJ-oJV evdaifiov, happy. " evSai/xov-og. 



G<jj(pp(t)v (Tuxppov, reasonable. 



G(t)<ppov-og. 



§ 189. Dialects. — Herod, ipariv for dpariv. 



191. 



INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 



81 



Other Examples for Declension. 

ixvrjfiu)!/, mindful of. tTriXrjafKjjv, forgetful of. 

TToXvirpdymuv^ much occupied. 

3. Isolated forms, as : 

UpiQ iSpi, acquainted with. " Gen. Idpi-oQ. 

(Inflexion according to § 157, D.) 
dppr]v (^dpffrjv), dppev, TUale. Gen. dppev-og. 

Compounds of substantives, such as d-n-aTajp, Neut. dirarop, St. tt are jO 
(Nom. TruTrjp), fatherless ; dvcfxrjTdjp, firjTtjp, unmotherly ; ^iXoiroXig, -t, 
Gen, -iS-oc, loving the city; eveXirig (Gen. eueXTrt^-oc), hopefid. 

§ 190. 4. Besides these, there is a large number of ad- 
jectives which have only one ending, because either their 
meaning or form excludes a Neuter : apira^, rapacious, St. 
a piray ; ^vyag^ fugitive ^ St. v y a S ; ayvojQ, unacquaint- 
ed, St. ay V it)T ', airaiQ, childless , St. a tt a f o ; jiaKpo^up, 
long -handed ; 'Kkvy\q, jpoor, St. ^T^v^T\ yvjuvrig, light - 
armed., St. yv\ivy]T. Some adjectives of one ending fol- 
low the A-Declension, and are almost substantives, as : 
t^cAovrr/c, Gen. IQ^ovtov, "Doluntary ; they occur only in 
the Masc. 

§ 191. The following adjectives are irregular: /uiyag, 
great ; Trokvg^ much ; and Trp^og, gentle, the forms of eaph 
being derived from different Stems, viz., in fiiyag, from 

§ 190. Dialects. — Horn, has also many adjectives in the Fern, only: 
KoXXiyvvaiKu, Acc. Sing. e. g., ^Trdprrjv, abounding in beautiful women; 
ISioTidveipa, e. g. ^9ir], men nourishing. 

§ 191. Dialects. — In Horn, both Stems, ttoXv and ttoXXo, in Masc. 
and Neut., arc almost completely declined ; tliQ, Fern, is regularly 

TToXXr). 

N. TToXvg TTOvXvg or TroXXog 

G. TToXXov or TToXiog 

7roXX(^ 

TToXXov 

TToXXoi 



Sing. W. TToXvg 




TTOvXvg 0] 


G. 


TTOXXOU 


or 


TcoXiog 


D. 








A. 


TToXvV 




TTOvXvV 


Plur. N. TToXkg 




{iroXHg) 


.0^. 


TTOXXOJV 


or 


iroXkwv 


D. 


7roXiea<n(v) 


7roXk(jai{y) 


A. 


TToXeag 




* 



N. TToXv TTOvXv TZOXXOV 



N. TToXv TTOvXv 



TToXXoV 

TToXXd 



or TToXXoXg 



JV. iroXXd 



TToXkmiy) 
TToXXovg 
Herod, has scarcely any forms except from the Stem ttoXXo: ttoX- 

XoVy TToXXoi. 

D 2 



82 



COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 



192. 



the Stems /mey a and /x c y a X o ; in TroXvg, from iroXv and 
TT o X X o ; in irpaog, from ir p(}o and TTjoaii. 



Sing. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Nom. 


likyag 


fieydXij 


fikya 


TToXvg 


7ro\X?7 


TToXv 


Gen. 


fieyaXov 


fieydXrjg 


fieydXov 


TTOXXOV 


iroXKifg 


TToXXov 


Bat. 


H^yaXifi 


fisydXy 


fxeydXtit 


TToXX^i 


TToXXy 


TToXXfp 


Ace. 


fikyav 


fieydXijv 


fikya 


TTOXVV 


TToXXrjv 


iroXv 


Voc. 


fikya 


HeydXrj 


fikya 


TToXv 


TToXXrf 


TToXv 


Dual. 














W.A.V. 


fieydXu) 


fiEydXa 


fisydXu) 








a.D. 


fieydXoiv 


fieydXaiv 


fieydXoiv 








Plural. 














Nom. 


[XEyaXoi 


fiEydXai 


fisydXa 


TToXXoi 


TToXXai 


TToXXd 


Gen. 


fieyaXoJv 


fieydXujv 


fieydXiov 


TroXXwv 


TToXXwV 


TToXXwP 


Bat. 


fieyaXoig 


fiEydXaig 


fiiydXoig 


TToXXoXg 


TToXXaig 


TToXXolg 


Ace. 


fieyaXovQ 


p.e.ydXag 


fiEydXa 


TToXXovg 


TToXXdg 


TToXXd 


Sing. 








Plural. 






Nom. 


Trp^oQ 


TTpaeia 


Trpav 


Trp^ot, or 
TrpaEig 


TrpaCiai 


Tvpaka 


Gen. 


Trpq,ov 


TTpaeiag 


7rpg,ov 


TTpakwu 


vpaHwv 


7rpaku)v 


Bat. 


irp^ifi 


Trpaeig. 


^p4v 


Trp^oig, or 
7rpakm{v) 


TTpauaig 


Trp^oig, or 
7rpakcn{v) 


Ace. 


TTp^OV 


irpaelav 


irp^ov 


Trpq.ovg 


Trpaeiag 


irpaka 



B. Comparison. 
§ 192. The first and most frequent ending of tlie Com- 
parative is r £ /o o (Nom. Tfjooc, Ttpa, Tepov)\ of the Super- 
lative Taro (Nom. raroq, rarr], rarov), with the usual in- 
flexion of adjectives (§ 180). These endings are affixed to 
the pure Stem of the Masc., as : 



Positive. 


Stem. 


Comparative. 


Superlative. 


Kov(j)og, light. 


KOV<l)0 


Kovtporepog, a, ov 


KOvtporaTogy t] ov 


yXvKvg, sweet. 


yXvKV 


yXvKvrepog 


yXvKvraTog 


jueXaf, blacJc. 


fieXav 


fieXdvrepog 


fieXdvTarog 


XapUig^ graceful. 


Xapievr 


Xapikarepog 


Xapuararog 




(from xf^-P^^vT-T^pog-, according to 


§§46and|J). 


(Ta<l)r]g, clear. 


a a^eg 


aacpkaTEpog 


cra(pk(TTarog 


fiUKap., happy. 


fiaK ap 


fiaKaprepog 


fiaKaprarog 


TrevTjg, poor. 


7r€ vr]T 


TreveffTEpog 


TrevsaTttTog 



(for TrevrjT-Tepog, rarog^ according to § 46, r} being shortened). 



§ 197. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 83 

§ 193. The following points are to be observed : 
1 The Stems in o leave o unchanged only when the 
preceding syllable is long (§ 74, etc.), but lengthen it to 
w when that is short : Trovrjpo-Tepog, tvorse / wiKpo-TaTOv, 
77iosi hitter; ao(pu)'TepoQ, wiser ; a^iw-TaTi], most worthy. 
Every syllable with a vowel followed by two consonants 
or a double consonant is here considered long (§§ 76, 
77). 

§ 194. 2. The o is always rejected after ai in the adjective yepatde, 
senex^ sometimes in TraXato^ , antiquus^ and axoXdiog, at leisure : ye- 
paiTepoQj TraXaiTarog. 

§ 195. 3. The o or to is changed to at in fieaog, medius ; itrog, like; 
ivdiog, clear ; Trpuiiog, early y oipiogy late : fietraiTarog, TrpojiaiTepov. 
ijcTvxog, peaceful, has ricrvxaiTepog, and rjffvxdjrepog ; ^iXog, dear, be- 
sides 0t\wrf)ooc, -TUTog, also (j)iXrepog, -TUTog, and ^iXairepog, -rarog ; 
TrXrimaiTepogj TrXrjaLairaTog, belong to TrXrjaiov, near, and TrapaTrXt]- 
mairepog, more like, to the same ; Trpovpyiairepog to rrpovpyov, from 
irpb tpyov, advantageously. 

§ 196. 4. The endings ear ep o-g, eararo-g, are inorganically ap- 
plied : 

• a) to Stems in ov : aco^poveffrepog (St. <t(o^ pov, Nom. aw^pojv, reason- 
able), evdaifiovearepog (St. evdaifiov, Nom. evSai/xwv, fortunxxte). 
TrloTspog, -TUTog, from 7r'nov,fat, and TreTraiTspog, -rarog, from TrtTrwr, 
rijye, are exceptional. 

5) to the Stems ofdKpdrog, unmixed; Ipfxofievog, strong; d(Tfievog, will- 
ing : ciKparecrrepog, kpp<op.Evk(Tr^pog. More seldom to others. 

c) to some Stems in oo contracted: evvovarepog for evvoecrrepog, from 
evvovg, well-disposed. 

§ 1 97. 5. i<rrepog, lararog, occur with XdXog, talkative ; rrrtoxog, 
beggarly; 6\po<pdyog, epicure; fiovo(j)dyog, eating alone; and some 
adjectives of one ending, as KXeTrrrj-g, thievish : XaXiarepog, tttw- 
Xl<yrarog, KXeTrricrr^pog. 

Others of one gender in rj-g follow the rule of those in o : v^piaro- 
repog, from v^pi(Trr]g, haughty. 



§ 193. Dialects. — The quantity of the 0-sound in poets is rather 
doubtful : Hom. oi^vpwrarog, the most wretched. 

Horn, has Idvvrara, from iQvg, straight ; (padvrarog, from ^auvog, glit- 
tering ; dxap'Krnpog (for dxapir-repog, according to § 46), from «x«/otfj 
graceless. 



-84 COMPAKISON OF ADJECTIVES. § 198. 

The compounds of xapig, grace, favo7% fonn their Comparative and 
Superlative as if they ended in x«iOt7-o-c : tTnxapiribrepog, more 
obliging. 

§ 198. The second and rarer termination of the Com- 
parative is f o V (Nom., Masc, and Fem. i w v, Neut. i o.^v) ; 
of the Superlative, kjto (Nom. laToq, larr], kttov). The 
Stem- vowel is rejected before i. The accent is placed as 
far as possible from the end in the Comp. and Superl. In- 
flexion of the Comp., § 170. So is formed from : 

Comparative. Superlative. 

ri^'uDV, -ov i]di(TTog, -r/, -ov 

OdffaojVj -ov rdxKTTOQ, -rj, -ov 

(from raxiojv, according to §§ 54, 57). 
/teyaf, large. fiey a fiEi^ojv, -ov fieyitrrog 

(from jxeyiujv, according to § 58). 

Ods. — The length of a in Odaaov (compare /xdWov, § 202), and the 
diphthong of fxei^iov, is explained from the i passing into the pre- 
ceding syllable, as in dudviov (compare § 55); 

Farther with suppression of p : 

tx9p6, -e, hostile. txB'nov, -ov Superl. txBtcrog. 

ahxpo, -f, sJiameful. aiaxioiv, -ov " alaxK^rog. 

oiKTpo, -g, pitiable. " olKTicrrog. 

ixOp-og and oiKTp-og also have the forms in T^po-g and raro-g. 

§ 199. This comparison occurs also in connection with 



Positive. 


Stem. 


i)Ug, agreeoMe. 


r)5v 


raxvg, swift. 


raxv 



§ 198. Dialects. — The endings t w v, i o- r o c, are more frequent in the 
poets : Hom. ^iXiiov {<pi\og, dear) ; y\vKi<Dv (yXvKvg, sweet) ; ^Kiarog {ojKvg, 
swift)', (3d9i(TTog (JiaQvg, deep) ; jSpdacTojv = jSpaxiiov (jSpaxvg, short), Bup. 
poet. jSpdxKTTog, Hom. Superl. (idpharog (jSpaSvg, slow, § 59, D.) ; izdaaiov 
=:7raxi(iiv {Traxvg, thick)', ndaaiov z=:^ ixcLk'hov (jiaKpog, long). Sup. firjKKTTog 
(Dor. ficLKiaTog) ; KvdiiDv {tcvSpog, famous) ; jui^wv, ISTew-Ion. for fieiZiov. 

§ 199. Dialects. — 1. Hom. Comp. dpdiov, Positive Kparv-g, Superl. 
KdpTKTTog ; Comp. Xwinpog ; New-Ion. Kpscracov =: KpEiaawv ; poet. (3eX- 
repog, (SeXrarog, <pepTepog, ^spraTog, or <pepL(TTog, mme excellent, most excel- 
lent. 

2. Hom. KaK(x)Ttpog ; x^PVQ^ Xfpeiwv, x^P^f^orepog, x^^porepog ; New. -Ion. 
'd<T(X(t)vz=:r]cr(Twv. (Compare Kpk(jao)v, fik^iov, § 198, Obs.) 

4. Hom. vTr-oXil(x)v. 



§ 199. 



COMPAKISON OF ADJECTIVES. 



85 



other peculiarities in the following adjectives, where the 
changes of sound of §§ 55-58 are often applied : 
1. For the idea Osgood: 



Positive 

ayaQoQ 
[St. d /x e v] 
[St. dpec] 
[St. /3€Xro] 
[St. KpaTv] 



Comparative. 



Superlative. 



afMEivaJV, ajxuvov 

[cijoet'wv, Horn.] dpiarog, t], ov 

(SsXtiojv^ (ikXriov (ikXriaTog, ?/, ov 

Kpuaavjv {KpeiTTiov) KpaTitrrog, ij, ov 

N. KpeTaaov (kpeXttov) 
[St. \ w y] X(i)twv or Xi^wv Xi^arog, tj, ov 

i\r. Xijjiov or Xipov 

Obs. — dfiEivujv and dpiarog rather express excellence, capacity; Kpdcr- 
aojv, Kpariarog, strength, preponderance (Lat. superior) ; ijaatuv is op- 
posed to Kpd<JGh)V. 

2. For the idea of dad : 

Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

KUKOg KUKllOV JV. KiXKlOV KUKKTrog 

[St. xep] x^'P*^^ (deterior), JSF. x^pov xf/pioToe 

[St. r) K v] i](T<Tiov (inferior), JV. tjaaov JV. PI. ijiciara, least of aU. 

3. fxiKpog, small, besides fiiKpoTEpog 

/xeiiov, smaller, If. jxeXov 

4. oXiyog, little, 
[St. £\a%w], iXd<T(r(i)v N. tXaacov 

5. TToXvg, mucTi, TrXeiojv (ttXswv) 

N". TrXeov (also ttXeTv) 
G. KuXog, heautiful, as if from 

KoXXog, heauty koXXiojv -ZV! koXXlov 

7. p(}hog, easy, "* 
[St. pa], p4^v N. pq.ov 

8. dXyHvog, painful, as if from 
dXyog, pain, dXyiwv . N. dXyiov 



fiLKporarog 

oXiyicrrog 
tXdxKTrog 
TrXeicTTog 



KoXXiaTog 



pq.aTog 



dXyiarog 



Dialects. — 5. Homer contracts TrXkov to irXwv, TrXeoveg to irXevveg; 
Plur. also irXeeg, irXeag, TrXia. 

7. Ion. pr]idiog ; Hom. prfiTEpog, ptjiarog, prjtraTog. Hom. forms single 
degrees from substantives : Kvvrepog, more doggish (kvojv, dog) ; piyiov, 
worse ; plyog, cold, shudder. 

Defectives : Iveprepoi, also tragic vkpnpoi {inferi, for which Positive 
ivepoi) ; Hom, TTVfxaTog and XolaOog, Xoiadiog, last ; vcrrdTiog z=: vaTurog, 
devTUTog, in a like sense, Trpdjuarog ^=: irpwrog, the first. 



86 ADVERBS FROM ADJECTIVES. § 200. 

§ 300. Finally observe farther the Defectives : 

varepoQ, later, vffTaTog, ultimus. 
iffx^^Tog, extremus. 

(yeog, new), vearog, novissimus. 

(vTrep, over), v-jrarog, mmmus. 

{irpo, before), TrpoTspog, prior, TzpCJTog, primtis. 

(jrkpav, on the other side), Trepairspog. 

C. Adverbs of Adjectives, 

§ 201. Adverbs are derived from the Adjective Stem by- 
affixing to it the syllable w g. The o of the Stem is en- 
tirely dropped: <^tXoc, adv. ^tXwc The Stems of the Sec- 
ond Principal Declension ffave the same form as in the 
Genitive : raxvQf swift, rax^toQ ; ca^^ic, clear, (Ta(l)eiog, 
contr. (Ta(l)LJg ; cruxppojv, 7'easonaMe, atvfppovujg. Contrac- 
tion occurs only where the Genitive also has it. The ac- 
cent of the adverb is always the same as that of the Geni- 
tive Plural of the corresponding adjective : \pvxp6c, cold, 
\pv\pLjg ; ^tKaiog, jiist, dtKaitog ; irag (St. tt a v r), iravriog, 
every way. 

The Neuter Accusative, both of the Singular and the 
Plural, is moreover very often used as an adverb. 

§ 202. An older adverbial form is that in a, as : ray^, 
from rayyg, quich (meaning, in Att. prose, ^^M<^^) ; a^ia, 
at the same tiine ; naka, very. The Comp. of [laka is 
IxaXkov {jpotius)=^a\iov (§ b^)', Superl. juaXiaTa {jpotissi- 
7)ium). fu, loell, as an adverb to ayaQogy good, stands alone. 

§ 203. Adverbs in w ^ are also formed from Comparatives 
and Superlatives : l^^f^aioTepwg, more frmly / KaWiovwg, 
more beautifully. But, as a rule, the comparative has the 

§ 203. Dialects. — The adverbs in a are more numerous in Homer : 
&Ka {quickly, wKvg) ; \iya, aloud, Xiyvg ; Kapra, strongly, very, to Kparvg, 
compare § 59, D. ; (rdcpa (clearly, aa(pr]g). 

Homer has for w or iv the adjective ivg or rjvg, good. 

§§ 303, 204. Dialects. — Homeric UaffTepu), iKacTTdro) (from iKdg,far); 
daaov {pzayx'-^'^)-! aaaorkpio (dyxt, near), ayxi(fra', New-Ion. dyxorarw, 
dyxorara. In addition to this, there is the Horn. kiraaavT^poi, en 
with V instead of o. 



205. 



PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 



87 



Neut. Ace. Sing.^ the superlative the ISfeut. Ace. Plur., as 
an adverb : l5s(5ai6TEpov, koXXiov ; |3fj3a(orara, KaXXtcrra. 

§ 304. Adverbs in w, like dvo), above ; Kdrw, delow ; taio, inside ; t^w, 
outside^ have no q in Compar. and Superl. .: avtuTspu), Karwrl/ow, 
likewise dTrwrs/ow, farther (from diro) ; tyyvrepu) (or iyyvTepov), 
iyyvTCLTO) (or tyyvrara), from cyyvf, wear, and some others. 



Chap. VIIL — Inflexion of Pronouns. 
§ 205. The Personal Pronouns are : 



Singular. 










Nom. 


iyib, I [ego] 


av, thou [tu] 






Oen. 


t/xoy, iiov 


<TOV 


ov, of him. 




Bat. 


kfioiy fioi 


(TOt 


ol 




Ace. 


ifis, Ilk [me] 


as [te] 


â– i [se] 




Dual. 










KA. 


(vCji) vu), we. 


(acpm) acpM, ye. 


(acpios), they. 




G.D. 


{vmv) V(^v 


(ffipioiv) a<p(pv 


(atpiijtv) 




Plural. 










Nom. 


t'l^iiQ, we. 


vjieXg, you. 


a(peXg, they. 


N. a(p£a 


Gen. 


ilfiwv 


v^S)v 


acpuJv 




Bat. 


r'lUlv 


VfiXv 


a(pl-ai(y) 




Ace. 


r)fidg 


vfidg 


atpdg 


N. a^sa 



§ 205. Dialects. — The following are special additional forms of the 
Ion. Dialect. (Those in brackets are merely New-Ion.) 
Sin 



rvvT] [tu] 

\aso, aev (so, sv 

[aeXo, as-Oev (flo, s-Qev 

Toi, retv tot) compare § 34, 

te j D. 4. 
(vfikg) vfineg 
v}ikit)Vy vfieiojv (T^fwv, a(pei(t)v 

vnjxiiy) a(pi(v) 
v^kag^ vufxe cr(pdg, a<pkag, 

a(puag^ a<pe 
An isolated Ionic form for the Accusative Sing, of the third person is 
fx i p, trag. V i V, both enclitic ; in a like sense acps occurs in the poets. 
viv seldom stands for the Plural. 



Nom. tyojv 

^^^'X^ilHO, l/i£-6l€v(§178,D.) 

Bat. 
Ace. 

Plur, Nrnn. (v/xkg) dfifieg 

Gen. rifiEiov, ijfidoiv 
Bat. djifiiiy) 

Ace. rineag, dfifie 



88 PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. § 206. 

§ 206. The Stems of the Sing, are : e fie, for the first 
person ; a f , for the second ; e, for the third. The Nom- 
inative, however, is formed differently from them : lyd), gv, 
and that of the third person is entirely wanting. 

Obs. — The <r of the Stem ae has arisen from r (§ 60, a) \te\ which 
remains in many dialect-forms. The Stem t goes back to /^e, 
and this to a still older form, aP^ [Lat. se for me\. (§ 60,^ 5.) In 
the form <t0€, the f is hardened into ^. 

The Stems of the Dual are : v w {jio-s], a(lni), (jcfxt). The 
Dual of the third person does not occur in prose. 

The Stems of the Plural are : 17 ju f , u /x e, <t t (e is gen- 
erally contracted with the ending, hence the circumflex : 
see Dialects). 

§ 207. When there is no emphasis on the Personal Pro- 
nouns, it becomes enclitic in the forms mentioned in § 92, 
2 ; in that case the first person has the forms beginning 
with ju. But when emphatic, as well as generally after 
prepositions, it retains its accent, and the first person has 
the fuller forms : doKu /uloi, it seems to me y IfioX ov aoi 
TovTo ape<TKsi, this pleases m^e, not you. 

The Gen., Dat., and Ace. Plur. of the first and second persons, when 
not emphatic, sometimes have the accent on the first syllable : 
rjixwv, v/iiv, and in this case the final syllable of the Dat. and 
A!?c. is usually shortened : TJfiiv, rjixag (Hom.). When emphatic, 
with the final syllable shortened, they are written t)fiiv, vfiiv. 

§ 208. The Possessive Pronouns are formed from the 
Stems of the Personal Pronouns : 

St. € ju 6, e/tiof, my. St. ?7 /i €, r/fieTEpo^, our. 

" (7 €, aoQ^ thy. " I* /i 6, vfierepoQ, your. 

" e, og, his, her. " a<pe, cr^eTepog, their. 

Obs. — The ending npog is that of the comparative (§ 193). 



§ 208. Dialects. — Hom. additional forms of the Possessives : te6q 
\tuus'\, log {suns'], afxag (properly Dor.), v/iog, acpog. From the Dual 
Stems vw, (T(poj: vtJiTepog, nos-ter ; cr^mTEpog, belonging to you two; afiog 
(also ufiog) often means my, og sometimes means own, without any ref- 
erence to a particular person. 



§ 211. REFLEXIVE AND OTHER PROXOUNS. 89 

§ 209. avT(j-g, avTijf avro, self, is declined like a com- 
mon adjective, except that the Neuter in the Nom. Ace. 
Yoc. Sing, has no v (compare the article to). 

6 avTog {avTog), 17 avrr) (avTr])y to qvto (rauro or TavTOv), 
the same, Lat. idem. 

§ 210. The Stems of the Personal Pronouns, combined 
with avTog, produce the Reflexive Pronouns. 

Singular. Gen. M. N. F. Dat. M. N. F. Ace. M. F. N. 

1st person, IfiavTOv -fjQ Ifiavri^ -y tfiavTov -i]v^ myself, 

2d person, treavTOv -iig ceavT<^ -y aeavrov -rjv, thyself. 

or (TtwTov -rjg aavTi^ -y aavrov -r]v 

3d person, iavTov -rjg tavT(^ -y iavTov -rjv -6, Mmself Tier- 

or avTov -fJQ avT(^ -y avrov -t]v -6, self, it 



In the plural, both Stems are declined together : 
Plural. Gen. M.F.N. Dat.M.N. F. Ace. M. P. 

1st person, yfidv avT&v r'lfiiv avToiq -aXg t]fiag avrovg -dg, ourselves. 

2d person, vfiHiv avrwv vfxlv avrolg -a7g vfiag avrovg -dg, yourselves. 

3d person, acpdv avrdv (T(pi<nv avroig -alg (T<pdg avrovg -dg^ themselves. 

Neut. a(pi.a avrd 

Yet the 3d person plural has also the compound form : 

tavrCJv iavroXg -alg tavrovg -dg -d 

or avrwv avroXg -alg avrovg -dg -d 

§211. aXXo'Qy aXXr], aXXo, another (alius), is declined 
like avTog. 

The Stem aXXo combined with itself produces the Re- 
ciprocal Pronoun aXX-r]Xo (for aXX-aXXo), occurring 
only in the Dual and Plural. 



§ 209. Dialects. — New-5onic bivrog, lovrri, rojvro ; Homeric cjvrdg = 6 
avrog. 

§ 210. Dialects. — The Epic dialect declines both Stems together 
even in the sing. : Ifik avrov = ifiavrov, ol avrt^ ^ lavri^^ etc. 

New-Ionic sfieujvrov, aecovrov, tcjvrov, stand for the forms with av. 



90 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 



212. 



Dual. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


G.D. 


aKKy\Koiv 


aKK.y]Kaiv 


aXki]koiv 


Ace. 


aSXy]kixi 


aKkr]Ka 


d\\i]Xio 


Plural. 








Om. 


aXKr\K{tiv 


dXAjjXwv 


dWrjXtov 


Bat. 


aKki]koiQ 


aKKTf]Kaiq 


d\\T]\0lQ 


Ace. 


afO<r\KovQ 


aXAijXa^ 


dWijXa 



§ 212. The two most important Demonstrative Pro- 
nouns are : 

ode, ijde, toSsj that. ourog, avrr}, tovto, this. 

ode consists of the article 6 and the demonstrative enclitic 
81, and is therefore declined entirely like the article with 
de affixed, ovrog corresponds to the article with regard to 
the rough breathing and the r at the beginning ; it also has 
the diphthong au in the last syllable but one where the 
article has a or t; (A-sound), and o v where the article has 
o, w, or o u (0-sound). 



Norn. 



Singular. 






Plural. 







V 


t6 


01 


at 


Td 


ode 


ijde 


Tode 


o'ide 


a'lSe 


Tdde 


OVTOQ 


aVTTJ 


TOVTO 


OVTOl 


avTai 


TavTa 


TOV 


rrjg 


TOV 




TU}V 




TovSe 


TTjgde 


Toiide 




Tiovde 




TOVTOV 


TavTTjg 


TOVTOV 




TOVTOJV 




rv 


ry 


Tq, 


ToXg 


Taig 


Toig 


Tqide 


TySe 


Ti^Se 


ToXgSe 


Toigh 


ToTgde 


TOVTlf) 


TavTy 


TOVTlf} 


TOVTOig 


TavTUig 


TOVTOig 


TOV 


TT)V 


TO 


Tovg 


Tag 


Td 


Tovde 


Tt'ivde 


Tode 


Tovgde 


TagSe 


Tdde 


TOVTOV 


TaVTT]V 


TOVTO 


TOVTOVg 


TavTag 


TaVTU 



Oen. 



Bat. 



Ace. 



§ 212. Dialects. — In Homer, the article itself is a demonstrative pro- 
noun, with these special forms : Nom. o ; Gen. rolo ; Gen. Dat. Dual 
ToXiv ; Nom. Plur. roc, rai ; Gen. Plur. Fem. Tdiov ; Dat. Plur. Tolaiiy), 
Tyai(v), or T7jg. 

From ode we have Dat. Plur. rola^eo-t or ToTade(T(n{v)j and KeXvog, poet, 
for tKeh^og. 



§ 214. RELATIVE AND INTERROG. PRONOUNS. 



91 



TU) 


TO. 


Th) 




' Toiv 


Toiv 


Toiv 


ru}de 


ToiSe 


TOJde 


G.D. 


< ToTv^e 


rdlvde 


ToXvde 


TOVTix) 


Tavra 


TOVTiO 




i TOVTOIV 


Tavraiv 


TOVTOIV 



N.A.V. 



The adverb of oh is wh ; that of ovtoq, ovtojq or oi5rw, in this way. 
Like ovTOQ are declined : 

TO<TOVTOQ TOffaVTT) TOffOVTO OT TOffOVTOV, SO gVeOt {taUtUS) ; 

ToiovTOQ ToiavTTi TOtovTo OT ToiovTov, suck (talis) ; 

TtjXlKOVTOQ T1]klKaVTT} TTjXlKOVTO OT TTjXlKOVTOVj SO old / 

in which, however, the r of the forms beginning with r is 
dropped ; raura, but TO(T-avTa ; by affixing the enclitic dk, we have 
the forms ToaogSe, so large; roldc^e, of such quality; ttjXikoq-Ss, of 
such an age, with a regular adjective declension before the syl- 
lable de. 

kKEivo-g, EKeivT], Ikeivo, that, is declined like avTog. 

A long accented i is often affixed to the Demonstrative Pronouns 
to strengthen the meaning without affecting the declension, but 
the € of ^€ is lost : ovTogi, odt, tKeiviovt, avrijt, ToigSt Compare the 
Lat. ce in his-ce, has-ce. 

§ 213. The Belative Pronoun has the rough breathing 
in all cases, as : 



Singular. 


Plural. 


Dual. » 




Masc. Fem. 


Neut. 


Masc. 


-Fem. Neut. 


Masc. Fem. Neut 


N&m. 


og, wh). ri 


o 


di 


di li 


N.A. w li w 


Gen. 


ov rjg 


ov 




wv 


G. D. olv div olv 


Bat. 


V y 


V 


dig 


dig olg 




Ace. 


ov TjV 





ovg 


ug li 





Obs. — In the phrases kul og etpri, and he said, and r) 5' og, hit he said, 
og is used as a Demonstrative (compare the Dialects). 

§ 214. The Interrogative Pronoun has the same Stem 
as the Indefinite Pronoun, from which it is distinguished 

§ 213. Dialects. — Horn, o = og, oov = ov, eijg = rjg, and signifies he. 
Ion. olo = ov, and the forms of the Article which begin with r, are used 
instead of those of the Bdati^e: tov = ov, cujus; r^ =z ^, cui; To~ig-=^ 
olg, quibus. 

§ 214. Dialects. — Hom., partly also New-Ion. forms are : Gen. t^o, 
Tw ; Dat. r£<^, T(p ; Gen. Plur. tbujv ; Dat. Plur. Tkoi(n(y) ; Neut. Plur. 
daaa. The 



92 



INTERROG. AND INDEF. PRONOUNS. 



215. 



only by the accent. The Interrogative Pronoun has the 
accent always on the Stem syllable ; the Indefinite is en- 
clitic : hence rig, who f riq, enclitic, some one. 





Interrogative. 


Indefinite. 




Singular. 


Singular. 


Nbm. 


Tig tI 


TlQ tI 


Gm, 


Tivog 


Tivog 


Bat. 


TlVl 


Tivi 


Ace. 


Tiva Tl 


Tivd Tl 




Dual. 


Dual. 


Nom. Ace. 


TIVE 


Tivk 


Gen. Bat. 


TIVOIV 


Tivoiv 




Plural. 


Plural. 


Mm. 


TlV^Q Tiva 


Tivkg Tlvd {CLTTO) 


Gen. 


TlViOV 


TIVWV 


Bat. 


Ti<Ji(v) 


Tl(Ti(v) 


Ace. 


Tivag Tiva 


TLvag Tiva {aTTo) 



Qba. — 1. Tov, T(^, which as indefinites are enclitic, are often used for 
Tivog, Tivi, and for tivoq, tivi. 

Obs. — 2. The Eelative and Indefinite combine to form dcFTig, ijTig, 
o Tl, wTio. Both Stems are declined together : ovnvog, Tjgnvog, 
t^Tivi, olvTivoiv (§ 93, d). A space is left between o and ti in o ti, 
which, to distinguish it from the conjunction on, th/itt. 

The shorter forms of tIq are also used with dg ; but the Stem 6 is 
not declined : Gen. otov ; Dat. ot(i) ; more rarely Gen. Plur. otojv, 
Dat. oToi(n{v). uTTa is an additional form for uTiva, not to be 
confounded with dTTa for Tivd. 

§ 215. Another Indefinite Pronoun is ^tlva, of three gen- 
ders, quidam, sometimes undeclined, sometimes declined as 
follows : 

Sing. 6, 77, TO delva, ^eTvog, deivi, deiva. 

Plur. oi, ai, deiveg, deivojv, ^eivag. 



The following are special forms of the compound Relative in Hom. 

and also in New-Ion. : 

Sing. oTigy N. oTTi ; orev, ottso, ottev ; ors(p ; oriva, N. otti 
Plur. N. ciarra ; orsiov oTtoKTi ; oTivag, N. iiaaa 

(for arta, according to §57). 

. The Stem of the Relative thus often remains unchanged. 



217. 



CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 



93 



216. The following are called Correlative Pronouns : 



Interrogative. 


Indefinite. 


Demonstrative. 


Relative. 


TIQ, who ? 


rig, some one. 


o^e, ovTog, this. 


og, ogTig, who. 


TTOTepog, uter f 
which of two ? 


TTorepog, one of 
two(alteruter). 


erepog, the one of 
two {alter). 


uTTOTspog, which 
of two. 


-Koaoq, haw great ? 
how much? 
{quantus, quot). 


TTocTog, of some 
size or nwriber. 


To^^-ocogh, To- 
(Tovrog, so great, 
so much itantus, 
tot). 


ocrog, oTToaog, 
how great, how 
much (quan- 
tus, quot). 


TToTof, of what 
quality ? i^uxilis). 


TToiog, of some 
quality. 


Tolog, ToiogSe, roi- 
ovTog, of such a 
quality (talis). 


olog, oTTolog, of 
what quality 
(qualis). 


TrrjXiKog, how old ? 


TTTjXiKog, of some 
age. 


TTiXiKog, TTiXiKogde, 

TT]\lKOVTOg, of 

such age. 


TtjX'iKog, oTnjXiKog, 
of what age. 



05s.— On the ending r e p o c, see §§ 192, 208, Obs. 

In Attic prose of the Demonstratives generally only 
those in -Se and -ovro-q are used. 

§ 217. Correlative Adverbs are formed from the same 
Pronominal Stems. 



§ 216. Dialects. — oaaog (add. form oarsaTiog), roffcrog, are Epic for 
o(Tog, Toaog. For every Interrogative tt the New-Ion. dialect Has k : 
KocTog, Koiog, kote, kqv. 

§ 217. Dialects. — ttoQl is Epic = ttov ; ttoQI =: ttov ; dem. toOi, there, 
rel. Wi, where. In poetry, t6Qw is dem. to ttoOzv, New-Ion. ivOavra for 
IvravOa, IvOevtev for IvtevOev. 

wg in the Poets, like ovriog, means so, to be distinguished from ujg 
(without accent), hoic ; it is written also we, with the meaning yet: 
Kal log, and yet. With the meaning so, Twg also occurs, yxi is an ad- 
ditional form of y. The tt is doubled : oinrojg, oTTTrore (§ 62, D.). 



94 



CORRELATIVE ADVERBS. 



§218. 



Interrogative. Indefinite 



Demonstrative. 



Relative. 



TTov, where ? 
{uUf) 

TToOev, 



TToT, whither f 

(quo ?) 
TTore, when ? 

c at 
TcriviKa < what 
(timef 

TTwc, how ? 

( whither ? 



. ^^ r some- 

cvM) r^^'^' 

TToOev ^ from 

{all- > some- 

cunde) ) where. 

7V IsoM 

^^, i whither, 

quo) ^ 

TToH, sometime. 



Try 



â– <. in what 



way i 



T^y\ 



some whither, 
in som^ way. 




ov 

OTTOV 



) where 
\ {ubi). 



oQ^v \ whence 
oTToOev S (unde). 



) whither 
) (qiM). 



thitJier, 
in this 
way. 



ol 

OTTOl 

OTEj OTTOTE, wheU. 

tlv'iKa ) at what 
oTnjviKa S time. 

WQ, OTTiOQ, as. 

c whither:^ 
( way. 



Obs. — tv9a and ivQiv, in their original demonstrative sense, occur 
only in a few combinations in Attic prose {ivBa dr),just then; 
ivOa Kul ev9a, here and there) ; but they are regularly used in a 
relative sense : where., whence. 

To the Correlative Adverbs there belong also cwc, qtiamdiu (Rela- 
tive, as long) ; rlwe, tamdiu (Demonstrative, so long), as well as 
the poetic b^pa (for o^pa, § 53, c, Obs.) used in the same meaning 
as «wf , and ro^pa as Hajg. 

To^the simple UeXvog (that, § 212) correspond among the Adverbs 
of place tm, there; eKEWev,from there; iKeiae, thither. The De- 
monstrative iig occurs in Attic prose only in kuI wg, even thus, and 
ovd' Mg, not even thus. It is also written Jtg in these combinations. 

§ 218. The conjunctions Srj, Stjitote, and ovv (meaning ever, Latin 
cunqu£), and the enclitic Trep, may be joined to any relative pro- 
noun or adverb to give prominence: oang drj ttotb, whosoever ; 
oTTiog ovv (utcunqy^), eiffirep, just as. 

Sometimes ij is affixed to the interrog. tL in the sense of why f and 
to the corresponding indirect interrogative B n : rirj, otitj, why ? 

§ 219. There are also negative pronouns and adverbs to be noticed : 
ovTig, fir]Tig, no one; ovSeTepogj^ff^Shepog, neither, neuter ; ovda/nov, 
firidanov, nowhere ; ovda/idg, fiijdafiwg, in no way. 



220. 



THE NUMERALS. 



95 



Chap. IX. — The Numerals. 

§ 220. The Cardinal^ Ordinal^ and Adverbial Numer- 
als, with their value and signs, are : 



1 


d 


elg, fiia, «V, one. 


6 Trpwroc, thejirst. 


uTra^, once. 


3 


i3' 


dvo 


devTspog 


dig 


3 


7 


TpHQ.rpia^ 
i Te(T(Tapeg, rka- ) 


rpiTog 


rpig 


4 


h' 


< aapa, or rkrvd- \ 
( joef , TETTapa ) 


TETapTog 


TETpaKig * 


5 


e 


TTSVTe 


TTEfiTTTOg 


TTEvraKig 


6 


t' 


U 


EKTOg 


E%dKig 


7 


r 


(.Tcrd 


ffiSofiog 


ETTTaKig 


8 


V 


OKTU) 


oydoog 


OKTUKig 


9 


& 


tvvka 


Evarog {Evvarog) 


ivaKig (Ivvdicig) 


10 


i 


â– SsKa 


dsKarog 


^EKUKig 


11 


id 


'svdeica 


EvSEKarog 


EvdEKUKig 


12 


c(3' 


du)deKa 


diodEKUTog 


dbidEKUKig 


13 


ty' 


rpigKaidsKa 


TpigKaiSEKUTog 




14 


t^ 


\ TEcrrapiQKa'ihKa \ 
\ TsacapaKaideKa ) 


TEtraapaKai^EKaTog 




15 


IS 


TrevreKaideKa 


TTEVTEKaiUKarog 




16 


it' 


SKicaiSeKa 


EKKaidEKUTOg 




17 


tr 


tTrraicaideKa 


ETTTaKai^EKUTOg 




18 


IT}' 


OKTiOKaiSeKa 


oKTOJKaidEKarog 




19 


iff 


IvveaKaidEKa 


EVVEaKaidEKUTog 




20 


K 


EiKoaiiy) 


eiKOCTog 


EiKoaaKig 


30 


X' 


TpidKOvra 


TpidKOCFTog 


TpidKOVTUKig 


40 


/*; 


TE(xaapaKOVTa 


TEaaapaKoarog 


TEcrcrapdKOVTaKig 


50 


v 


TTEVTTJKOVTa 


TrevTTtKOffTog 


TTEVTTlKOVTdKig 


60 


r 


e^rjKOvra 


E^T]K0(TT6g 


UT]KOVTdKig 


70 


6^ 


ijSdofirjKovra 


tl3doiJ.T]KO(TT6g 


ilSdo/jirjKovrdKig 


80 


IT 


oydorjKOVTU 


dySoT]KO(TT6g 


oydorjKOVTaKig 


90 


q' 


IvEvriKovra 


EVEVtJKOdTog 


EVEVTIKOVTUKig 


100 


p 


Ikutov 


EKaroarog. 


EKaTOVTUKig 


200 


a 


didicomoi^ ai, a 


SiaKomocrrog 


^laKoaiaKig 


300 


T 


TpidKoaioi, ai, a 


TpiaKoaioaTog 




400 


V 


TETpdKOCTlOl, ai, a 


TETpaKOmOCTTOg 




500 


Â¥ 


TTEvrdicoaioi, ai, a 


TTEvraKoaiodTog 




600 


X 


i^aKomoi^ at, a 


E^aKOffLOtTTOg 




700 


f 


iTTTdKoaioi, at, a 


ETTTaKOCTLOaTOg 




800 


it) 


OKTUKoffioi^ ai, a 


oKTaKoaiooTog 




900 


^ 


j ivuKomoi, ai, a 


EvaK0(TL0(TT6g or 




I ivvdKoaioi^ at, a 


EVvaKoaioffTog 




1000 


p. 


Xi'Xtoi, aij a 


XlXlOOTOC 


XiXid/cig 


2000 


J3 


SiQxiXioi, ai, a 


Sigxi-Xioffrog 




3000 


n 


Tpigx'iXioi, aiy a 


vpigxiXiofTTog 




10000 


ji 


fjivpioi, ai^ a 


fivpioffrog 


fivpidicig 



96 



THE NUMERALS. 



221. 



Obs. — The letters of the alphabet are used in numbers also in un- 
interrupted succession. In the most frequent designation, given 
above, stigma (<r') is inserted after k for the number 6 : a to & 
are therefore units ; t is 10, k' 20 ; after it (= 80), Q' (koppa = 90) 
is inserted; and after w (==800) ^ (sampi:i=:900). The alphabet 
begins again at 1000, but here each letter has the accent under 
it; hence ,/3r/tr=: 3344, ,aa>^/3'=1863. 

§ 221. The Cardinal Numbers 1 tcr4 are declined: 



1. Norti. 


' elg fiia tv 


2. W. A. dvo 




Qm. 


tvoQ fitdg evoQ 


G. B. dvolv 




Bat. 


ivi inq, • tvi 






Ace. 


'iva fiiav 'iv 






3. Nrnii. 


Tpelg JV. Tpia 


4. TEaaapeg 


If. Tsaaapa 


Oen. 


Tpiaiv 


Tecraapbjv 




Bat. 


rpi(T[{v) 


rkaaapmiv) 




Ace. 


Tpe7g iV! Tpia 


Ttaaapag 


iV". Teacrapa 



ov^dg, ov^e/iiiaf ov^ev-, and firtddgy no one, are declined 
like HQ. ^vo is also used without inflexion, ^vfiv is an- 
other form for ^voXv. tt occurs for o-o- in all forms and 
derivations of TscrcrapeQ. a^^w {amho, hotJi), Gen. Dat. a/x- 
0otv, is sometimes represented by the Plur. afK^iOTLpoi, ai, a, 
of which the Singular ajuKfiOTepov, hoth, is also in use. 



§§ 330-223. Dialects. — 1, Homer has the fem. Id, irjg, ly : also Neut. 
Dat. T(^. 

2, dvo) for all cases : ^orw, doioi, doiai, Sold ; Dat. doiolg ; Ace. doiovg, 
dg, d. 

3, Tp'iTaTog-=.TpiTog. 

4, Hom. ^ol. TTitTvpEg, New-Ion. rkacrepsg, Horn. TSTparog (§ 59, D.). 
7, kl^^ofxaTog. 8, dydoarog. 9, tivarog. 

13, Hom. SvwdeKa, and dvo Kal dUa, dvodsKaTog. 

20, Hom. kiKoai, kiKOffTog. 30, Hom. TpirjKOvra. 80, by^wKovTa. 90, 
ivvTjKOVTa. 200, etc., also diijKomoi', Herod. TrevTijKotnoi, eivaK6<noi. 

9000, Horn. IvedxiXoi. 10,000, SeKdxTXoi. 

dixa, Hom. dixOd'^ likewise rpixOd, rerpaxOd, threefold, fourfold ; also 
rpnrXy, TETpanrXy. 



I 



§ 224. NUMERALS. 97 

§ 222. The numerals 5 to 199 are indeclinable. 

We also find rpslg, rpia Kai dsKa, rkaaapEQ, r'taoapa Kai dsKa, for 13 
and 14. The units and tens are united by Kai, in any order : 
EiKoai Kai TrkvTE and Trevre Kai eiKoai ; or without Kai when the 
tens are first : etKocrt Trsire, 25 ; so also kKarbv SeKa. For twenty- 
j^rst we have eIq Kai dKoarog, or TrpCJTog Kai eiKoffrog, and eiKOffTog 
TrpuJTog, etc. 

The Cardinal numerals from 200 are, like the Ordinal, 
regular adjectives of three terminations : ^taKomoi, ai, a. 
The Ordinal numerals have the endings of the superlative, 
except ^evTspog, which has that of the comparative (compare 

§ 192). 

§ 223. By combination with (tvv, the numeral Stems form Distribu- 
tives: (tvvSvo, two and two; avvTpug, three aTid three; Multipli- 
catives, by the syllable irkovg (from ttXooc, Lat. plex) : airXovg^ 
simple; SnrXovg, rpnrXoiig, TrevTaTrXovg, etc. Observe also hrraog, 
twofold; Tpiffaog, threefold; dnrXdmog, twice as much; TpnrXdmog, 
etc., TToXXaTrXdmog, many times as much. Adverbs : fiovaxy, sim- 
ply (jiovog, alone) ; dixy or dixa, dmibl/y. Substantives : fiovdg (St. 
fxovad), unity; Svdg, rpidg, rerpdg, Trefnrdg, i^dg, ij3dofidg, oydodg^ 
evvedg, deKdg, eixdg, tKaTovrdg, X'^*^?> /uupidg; hence rpelg fivpiddeg 
= 30,000. 

§ 224. The most important ge^iieral Adjectives of quan- 
tity are : cicaoToc, each / kKanpog, either,' irag, Tracra, irav 
(St. iravT), all / TTooToc, oirocTTog [quotjis] ; and the ad- 
verbs : iroWaKig, many times, often ; tKaaraKig, every 
time / oaaKig, as often as / ro<5avTaKiq, SO often / TrXet- 
GjaKiQi very often ; dXiyuKig, seldom, 

E 



98 THE VEKB. § 225. 

B. INFLEXION OF VEEBS. 

General BemarJcs. 
§ 225. The Greeks distinguish in the Verb — 

1. Three Nmiibers : Singular^ Dual, and Plural. 

2. Three Voices : 

Active : t\vaa, I loosed ; 

Middle : iXvcraiuYiv, I loosed for myself; 

Passive : IXvOr^v, I was loosed. 

Verbs which occur only in the Middle or Passive are called 
Deponents : ^ixofxai, I receive, 

Obs. — Only the Aorist and the Future have special lorms for the 
Passive ; and only the Aorist special forms for the Middle : in 
all other tenses the Middle forms have also a Passive meaning. 

3. Two classes of Tenses : 

A. Principal, viz. : 

1. Present : \vii),Iloose ; 

2. Perfect : \i\vKa, I have loosed ; 

3. Future : Xvctw, I shall loose. 

B. Historical, viz. : 

1. Imperfect : cXuov, I was loosing ; 

2. Pluperfect : eXeXvKEiv, I had loosed / 

3. Aorist : tXvcra, I loosed. 

4. Pour Moods, viz. : 

' 1. Indicative : Xvoj, I loose / 

Finite J 2. Subjunctive : Xikjj, I may loose / 

Verb. I 3. Optative : Xvot/ii, I would loose / 

. 4. Imperative : Xue, loose. 

5. Three Verbal Nouns, viz. : 

1. Infinitive : Xvhv, loose ; 

2. Participle : Xvojv, loosing; 

3. Verbal Adjective : XvHoq, to be loosed, soU 

vendus. 



§ 227. THE PERSONAL ENDINGS.— TENSE-STEMS. 



99 



226. The Personal Endings had originally the follow- 



ing* forms : 






* 


Active. 




Middle. 


Principal Teuses. Hist. Tenses. 


Principal Tenses. 


Hist. Tenses. 


Sing. 1. -/it 


-V 


-/xat 


-firiv 


3. -at 


-C 


-aai 


-ao 


3. -rt 


— 


-rat 


-TO 


Dual 1. -fiw 




-fiEOov 




2. -TOP 




-(jQov 




3. -TOV 


-TTIV 


-aQov 


-aOriv " 


Plur. 1. -fiw 




-fie9a 




2. -re 




-a9s 




3. -rn 


-V 


-vrai 


-VTO 



The Active personal endings of the principal tenses are 
most easily observed in the verb : 



€t-/it, I am. 
l<T-<Ti (contr. d) 
la-Ti(y) 



t(T-fiev 
ka-Tov 
ia-Tov 



ecr-fisv. 
la-Ts. 
H-ai(y) {pi: 



60). 



The endings of the three persons in the Sing, are really the per- 
sonal pronouns alSixed, I^thou^ Jie^ and to be compared with the 
Stems of the Personal Pronouns : {lo (St. ^ e), at ((re), n (the Stem 
of the article, r o). The 1 Dual in the Active is always iden- 
tical with the 1 Plur. The ending of the 1 Sing, of the Historical 
Tenses was originally fi (Lat. era-m)^ which at the end of the 
word was changed into v, according to § 67, Ods. The ending of 
the 3 Sing, was originally r, which, however, could not continue 
at the end according to § 67 (compare § 233, 3) ; and that of the 
3 Plur. VT (Lat. era-nt) ; but the r was dropped (§ 67). 

§ 227. The tenses, moods, and verbal nouns are classified 
according to the Stems {Tense-Stems) from which they are 
formed. The Tense- Stems are the following : 

1. The Present Stem, from which the Present and Im- 
perfect are formed. 



§ 236. Dialects. — Instead of vrai, vto, the Ion. (especially New-Ion.) 
often has arat, aro, in 3 Plur. Mid. The vowel a is here properly a 
connecting vowel, as in the Ace. Sing, of the Second Principal Declens. 
(§ 173, 3, Ods.) ; and v is dropped in both alike ; hence a-Tai, a-To, for 
a-vTai, a-vTo (compare §§ 287, 302, 3). 



100 'TENSE-STEMS. § 228. 

2. The Strong Aorist Stem, from which the Second or 
Strong Aorist Act. and Mid. are formed. 

3. The Future Stem, from which the Future Act", and 
Mid. are formed. 

4. The WeaJc Aorist Stem, from which the First or Weak 
Aorist Act. and Mid. are formed. 

5. The Perfect Stem, from which the Perfect, Pluper- 
fect, and Future-Perfect are formed. 

These five Stems belong to the Active and Middle. There 
are added to them, for the special forms of the Passive : 

6. The Strong Passive Stem, from which the Second or 
Strong Aorist Passive and Second Future Passive are 
formed. 

7. The Weah Passive Stem, from which the First or Weak 
Aorist Passive and First Future Passive are formed. 

The form from which all the Tense- Stems of a verb may- 
be derived is called the Verbal Stem. 

§ 228. The Suhjunctive is indicated between the Stem 
and the ending. Long vowels are peculiar to it : Xv-w-/x£v, 
solv-a-mus ; Xv-yi-te, solv-d-tis. 

The vowel t is characteristic of the Optative^ which gen- 
erally becom-es a diphthong with other vpwels : Xv-oi'/m^v, 
we would loose. The Subjunctive has the^endjngs q£ tho"* 
JlTiuCiW<f^ Aaa^i^.*? y the Optative (except 1 Sing. Act.) those 
of the historical tenses. 

The Pnperative has the following peculiar endings : 

Active. Middle. 

Sing. 2. -6i -ao 

3. -rw -a9<») 

Dual 2. -TOP -gBov 

3. -rwv -aOiov 

Plur. 2. -re -aOe 

3. -vTOJv or -Tojcrav -trOwv or -aOdxrav 

§ 229. The general law for the accentuation of the verb 
is that the accent is jplaced as far bach as jpossible from 

§ 228. Dialects. — The Horn, dialect often shortens the long vowel 
of the Subjunctive in the Dual and Plural. 



§ 230. CONJUGATIONS. 101 

the end, final a i not being considered long except in the 
optative : Xuw, Xvere, Xvojuai. 

Obs. — An exception is formed by the Participles, which in declen- 
sion (chap, vii.), if possible (§§ 79-87), always keep the accent 
on the same syllable as in the Nom. Sing. Masc. : Part. Pres. Act. 
fiainXevcjv, regnam, Kent. (iamXevov (not (SamXevov, according to 
§ 84), Part. Fift. Act. (iaaiXevaujv, regnaturus, Neut. (3amXev<Tov. 
(The special exceptions, see §§ 331-333.) 

§ 230. We distinguish Two Principal Conjugations : 

1. The First — the far more frequent— connects the per- 
sonal endings with the first two Tense- Stems by a connect- 
ing vowel : Xv-O'iuev. The verbs belonging to it are called 
verbs in w because the first Person Sing. Pres. Act. ends 
in u) : Xvtt), 

2. The Second — the less frequent, but older — affixes the 
personal endings to the first two Tense- Stems without a 
connecting 'dowel : la-iikv. They are called verbs in /x i 
because the 1 Sing. Pres. Act. preserves the original end- 
ing /x I : £i-/it. 

The forms of the other five Tense- Stems are common to 
both Conjugations. 

The Paradigms of the verbs are given first : the forma- 
tion of each Tense- Stem is then explained in order. 

List of the Pakadigms. 

Eifii,Iam Table I. 

Synopsis of Xvu), I loose (exhibiting the meanings of the 

Tenses) " II. 

Verbs in q. 

A. Vowel Stems. 

1. Uncontracted, Xww " III. 

2. Contracted, rt/taw, ttoieo), dovXoM " IV. 

B. Consonant Sterna. 

1. Guttural Stems, TrXsKio, ^evyw, Td<r(T(i) " V. 

2. Dental Stems, xpevSofiai, TreiOio, KOfii^oj " VI. 

3. Labial Stems, Trsfnroj, XtiTrw, KaXvTrTio " VII. 

4. Liquid Stems, ^ipw, dyyiXXw, (nreipu) " VIII. 

Verbs in mi. 

First Class, tIOtjixi, ^I'^w/^t, 'IcTTrjiJii " IX. 

Second Class, ^e/fcvvp " X. 



102 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 



Table I. 



PAEADIGMS OF YEEBS. 

Et/it, I am. Stem kg. 



Moods. 


M 


GQ 


Present. 


Imperfect. 


Future. 




g 


1 


. 






Indicative. 


s. 


1 


elfxi 


i)v or ?} 


tcTO/xai 






2 


el 


fioBa 


toy or tcrei 






3 


k(TTi(v) 


r)v 


tarai 




D. 


1 






lao/xeOov 






a 


iarov 


ijarov or rfrov 


taeaOov 






3 


lOTOV 


r)<TTi]V or iiTr]v 


taeaOov 




P. 


1 


(.(Tflkv 


rjfxev 


kaofieOa 






2 


iars 


ricrre or ryre 


i<TE(T9e 






3 


dffi 


r}(rav 


icrovTUi 


Subjunctive. 


S. 


1 

2 
3 


0) 

V 






~ 


D. 


2 
3 


ijTOV 

rjrov 








P. 


1 
2 
3 


wfiev 
r)TE 






Optative. 


S. 


1 


drjv 




iaoinr]v 






2 


tirjg 




iffoio 






3 


eit] 




taoiTO 




D. 


1 




. 


kaoifieOov 






2 


elrjTov or dTov 




IcroicrOov 






3 


eirjTijv or dTTjv 




IcfoktOtj 




P. 


1 


eiTjixav or dfxev 




ktroifieOa 






2 


sirjTE or fire 




tffoiaOe 






3 


dr]aav or dev 




icroivTO 


Imperative. 


S. 


2 
3 


taroi 








D. 


2 
3 


tffTOV 
i(TT(iJV 








P. 


2 
3 


tare. 

etTTuxrav or tffrcjv 






Infinitive. 




dvai 




i<7£a9ai 


Participle. 






ovaa 

ov (Stem ovt) 




ttrofievog 

i<TOfiEvr) 

eao/iievov 



Note. — The formation of the tenses of this verb is explained in 
§ 315, but they are inserted in this place because some of them are re- 
quired in conjugating the Middle and Passive Voices of ordinary verbs. 



Table II. 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 



103 



i 




•2 



^ 



91P 



o 3 o o 53 ^o 
/< /< r< ^ ^ /-i 



S^ 












SKhS 



^^J 






b § b "b 

1^ ^ ^ ^ 
S » S) S> 



b § g^§ 






â– ^ 






"to 






^ '3 <*) R" '!?â–  1*) 

vj) ^ Q:> ^ <I) Qi 

^ ^ /< ^ ^ /< 



I It si -I 



^ b b b 
r> ^ ^^ .^ 



b b 

^S s 



/</</<<< ^ 






^ ?^ 5S 
?? ^ ^ 

-5; p-O 



i i 



81P 



CJI CJI 



o> 



?. ?k 



=L a. :i. b b a. 

s s s s -s s 

^ /< /< 1^ ,< /< 






3- ?^ A 
3 3 o <o S 3 
S -S »S IS ^s ^s 






'«fH 



O^S^fr 



5-5* 
3 o S 
b b b 
-s -s -s 
>< ^ >< 






s 



iJ^ 



's 



rtii-i 



SSl-s 



JaJ 



b 3 « o « B 
s b b b b b 

^ ^S ^S »S JS ^s 

^ ^ >< ^ << >< 






^•n 



o 



11 

'^'"refill 

ii^.flit 



1 



3- § ^ 

B 3 o CO «3 '3 
« Si Wj y a s,; 

S "S ^S s s s 

^ ^ /< ^ ,< /< 



coOhhmPh 



^ J 
I -^ 

k s ^ 



J 



b^ 



'^ b'^ 

"* 'Si S 

^^^'^ 

o o . 
b b oi 
â– s s \o 



;^ ;> 



104 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table III. 



A. VOWEL STEMS. 
Active 



Tenses. 


2 ^ 

If 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 






S S 










. 




Present. 


Imperfect. 






Present. 


S. 1 


Xvo) 


iXvov 


Xviij 






2 


Xveig 


aXves m 


Xvyg 






3 


Xmi 


iXvelv) 


Xvy 






D. 2 


XVETOV 


iXviTOV 


XvT]TOV 






3 


XVETOV 


iXviTijv 


XvTJTOV 






P. 1 


Xvofuv 


iXvofiw 


XvbJjXEV 






2 


Xvere 


iXvere 


XVTJTE 






3 


Xvov(Ti{v) 


tXvov 


Xv(t)(n(v) 




Future. 


S. 1 
2 
3 

D. 2 
3 

P. 1 
2 
3 


Xv(T(0 

XvaeiQ 
Xvaei 

XlXTETOV 
XvffSTOV 

Xvarere 

Xv<TOV(Tl(v) 








1 Aorist 


S. 1 


tkvaa 




Xv<T(0 




(Weak). 


2 


iXvffag 




Xvayg 




t 


3 


iXvaE(y) 




Xvcry 






D. 2 


iXvaarov 




XvariTOV 






3 


iXvadrriv 




XvffrjTOV 






P. 1 


iXvffaixEV 




Xv(T(OflEV 






2 


eXvaare 




Xv<TT]TE 






3 


tkvaav 




Xv<TO}(Tl(v) 








Perfect. 


Pluperfect. 






1 Perfect 


S. 1 


XkXvKa 


iXEXvKElV 


XeXvku) 




(Weak). 


2 


XkXvKaQ 


IXeXvKElQ 


XEXvKyg 






3 


XsXvke(v) 


IXEXvKei 


XsXvicy 






D. 2 


XeXvKarov 


IXeXvKeirov 


XeXvkijtov 






3 


XsXvKaTOv 


iXiXvKeiTijv 


XeXvktjtov 






P. 1 


XeXvKafiev 


kXeXvKEifiev 


XeXvkwixev 






2 


XeXyKare 


IXeXvKEiTe 


XEXvKT]rE 






3 


XeXvKd(Ti(v) 


IXeXvKScrav 

or tXEXvKElffaV 


XEXvK(o(n(v) 




2 Aorist 




Wanting. 








(Strong). 












2 Perfect and 




Wanting. 








Pluperf.(Strong). 













Examples for 
6vio, I sacrifice; 9EpairEvoj,Iserve; (3ovXEvtx), I advise; xop^vu),Idance; 

tTravaOijv ; 



Table III. paradigms of verbs. — verbs in Q. 105 



1. UNCONTRACTED. 
Voice. 





Optative. 


Imperative. 


Infinitive. 


Participte. 




Xuot/ii 




XVELV 


XvdiV 




Xvoig 


Xve 




Xvovaa 




Xioi 


XviTU) 




Xvov 




XVOITOV 


XvfTOV 








Xvo'lTTlV 


XVSTOJV 




Gen. XvovTog 




XvOlflEV 






XvovffTjg 




XvoiTe 


Xvere 




XvovTog 




XVOIEV 


XvovTojv or XvETcotrav 




St. XVOVT 




Xvffoifii 




XXXTEIV 


XlXTOJV 




Xvffoig 










Xvffoi 


â–  




XvcTovffa 




XvaoiTov 






Xvaov 




Xv<ToiTr}v 






Gen. XvffovTog 




XvffOljXEV 






Xv<Tov(Tt]g 




Xv(TOLT£ 






XvaovTog 




XvaoiEv 






St. XvaovT 




Xvaaifxi 




Xvaai 


Xvoag 




Xvcraig or Xvaeiag 


Xv(TOV 




Xvaaaa 
Xmav 




Xvcrai or XvffEie(v) 


Xvadru) 




Gen. XvaavTog 




XvaaiTov 


Xvaarov 




Xvadarjg 




XvffaiTTjv 


Xv0a.Tix)v 




XvaavTog 




Xvcraifiep 






St. XvaavT 




XvaaitE 


XvauTE [ffav 








Xvaauv or Xvcreiav 


XvadvTiov or Xvadrcj- 








XeXvKOifxi 




XEXvKEVai 


XEXvK(x)g 




XeXvKOig 


XiXvKE 




XeXvkvIu 
XEXvKog 




XeXvKoi 


XeXvketo} 




Gen. XEXvKOTog 




XeXvkoltov 






XEXvKViag 




XeXvKoirrjv 


XeXvketov 




XEXvKorog 




XfXvKOllXEV 


XeXvketmv 




St. XeXvkot 




XeXvKOlTE 


XeXvkete 








XeXvicoisv 


XeXvkovtojv or 
XEXvKETOJcrav 



























Conjugation. 

SaKpv(o,I weep; Travio, I maJce to cease (Mid., I cease). [1 Aor. Pass. 

Verbal, Travarkog.] 

E 2 



106 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table III. — 











A. VOWEL STEMS 












Middle and 










Tenses comTnon to 


Tenses. 




Si 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 




Present. 


S. 


1 


Xvofiai 


Xv<t)ixai 








2 


Xvy or Xvei 


Xvy 








3 


Xverai 


XvjjTat 






D. 


1 


XvofieOov 


Xvo}fx.E9ov 








2 


XveaOov 


Xvij(t9ov 








3 


Xve(t9ov 


Xvt]<t9ov 






P. 


1 


XvofiEQa 


Xv(oixe9a 








2 


Xve<T9s 


Xvr}a9e 








3 


XVOVTUI 


XviOVTUl 




Imperfect. 


S. 


1 
2 
3 


iXvov 

tXvETO 








D. 


1 
2 
3 


iXv6ixe9ov 

iXve<T9ov 

kXvk(T9ijv 








P. 


1 

2 
3 


tXv6ne9a 
lXve(T9e 

iXvOVTO 






Future. 


S. 


1 


Xvffo/xai [ofiai 
etc., as in the Pres. Xv- 






Perfect. 


s. 


1 

2 

3 


XsXvixai 
XkXvffai 

XsXvrai 


XeXvfievog w 






D. 


1 
2 
3 


XeXvfiE9ov 

XsXv<t9ov 

XeXv(T9ov 








P. 


1 

2 
3 


XeXvfiE9a 

XsXv(r9e 

XkXvvTai 






Pluperfect. 


S. 


1 
2 
3 


IXeXvfiijv 

IXeXvffo 

eXsXvro 








D. 


1 
2 
3 


kXeXvixs9ov 

iXeXva9ov 

iXeXv(T9r]v 








P. 


1 

2 
3 


eXeXvixE9a 
lXsXv(j9e 

IXkXvVTO 






Future Per- 


S. 


1 


XeXvarofiai [o/xai 






fect. 






etc., as in the Pres. Xv- 







Continued, pakadigms of v]^Ba,=-= 



I. UNCONTRACTED. 

Passive Voices. (§ 225, OU. 2.) 
1)0111 Voices. 






Optative. 



Imperative. 



Infinitive. 



Participle. 



\vo'i\ir\v 
Xvoio 

XVOITO 

Xvoi/xeOov 

Xvoi(t9ov 

XvoiaOrjv 

Xvoi/iieOa 

XvoiaOe 

XVOIVTO 



XveaOai 



Xvov 

XvkffOu) 

XvsffOov 
XveaOojv 

XvetrOe 
XvkrrOiov or 
Xvkadioaav 



Xvo/xEvog 

XvofievT] 

XvofiEvov 



XvcroifiTjv [oifxrjv 

etc., as in tlie Pres. Xv- 



XvaeaOai 



XvaofievoQ 

XvaofievT) 

Xvcrofievov 



XeXvfievoQ drjv 



XeXixrOai 



XsXvcro 

XeXv<t9(o 

XeXvcrOov 

XsXvcrOe. 
XeXvaOiov or 
XeXvaOitxrav 



XiXvixevog 

XeXvixevr] 

XeXvfievov 



XsXv(Toifirjv [oifiTjv 

etc., as in the Pres. Xv- 



XeXixrecrOai 



XeXvcTofievog 

XeXv(rofikvT] 

XsXvaofievov 



108 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table III. — 



A. YOWEL STEMS. 
Middle and 

Tenses peculiar to 



Tenses. 




Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 




1 Aorist 
(Weak). 


S. 1 
3 

3 
D. 1 
3 
3 
P. 1 
3 
3 


kXvadfiriv 

iXvaaro 

tXvadJleQov 

tXvaaaBov 

eXv(Td(T9r]v 

kXvffdfieOa 

IXvaacQe 

kXvaavTO 


Xv(T(t)fiaL 
Xvay 

Xvffijrat 

Xv(Jb)}it9ov 

Xvar]a9ov 

Xv<Tt](T90V 

Xv(rojiie9a 

Xv<Tt](T9e 

XvffiovTai 




3 Aorist 
(Strong). 




Wanting. 






Tenses peculiar to 


1 Aorist 
(Weak). 


S. 1 
-3 

3 
D. 3 

3 
P. 1 

3 
3 


iXvQriv 
IXvOrjg 

IXiOri 

iXv9rjTov 

IXvOrjTijv 

eXvOrjfiev 

lXver]Te 

IXvOtjffav 


Xv9o} 
Xv9y£ 

Xv9y 
Xv9rirov 

Xv9flT0V 

Xv9a>ixev 

Xv9T}re 

Xv9(o(n(v) 




1 Future 
(Weak). 


S. 1 
3 
3 

D. 1 

3 

-3 

P. 1 
3 
3 


XvOrjaofxai 

XvOrjay or Xv9r]<TeL 

XvOricreTai 

XvOrjao/xeOov 

Xv9r}<Tea9ov 

Xv9r](Te(T9ov 

Xv97](r6iif.9a 

Xv9r}cre<r9e 

Xv9r](TovTai 






3 Aorist 
(Strong). 




Wanting. 






3 Future 
(Strong). 




Wanting. 






Verbal Adjectives : Xvrog, rj, 6v. 3. XvHog, a, ov. 





Continued, paradigms of verbs. — verbs in 12. 109 



I. UNCONTRACTED. 
Passive Voice. 

fhe Middle Voice. 





Optative. 


Imperative. 


Infinitive. 

• 


Participle. 




Xv(TaifiT}v 
Xvaako 

XvGaiTO 

Xv(TaiixE9ov 

Xvaaia9ov 

Xv(rai(T9r]v 

Xv<jainE9a 

Xv(jai(j9E 

XvaaivTO 


Xvaat 

Xv(Td(T9u) 

Xv(Taa9ov 
Xvad(j9u}v 

Xv(Ta(T9E 

Xvada9(>)v or 
Xv(Td<T9w(Tav 


Xvaaa9aL 


XvffdfiEvog 

XvaajiEVT] 

XvadfiEvov 












the, Passive Voice. 




Xv9Eiriv 
Xv9Eirig 

Xv9Eir] 

Xv9EiT}Tov or Xv9eXtov 
Xv9Eir]Tr]v or Xv9EiTr]V 
Xv9Eit]fiEv or Xv9eXijlev 
Xv9EiriTE or Xv9eIte 
Xv9Eir]<Tav or Xv9eXev 


Xv9r]Ti 

Xv9r]T(ii 

Xv9t]tov 
Xv9r}Tiov 
Xv9r]TE 

Xv9r]T(t)ffav or 
Xv9evtojv 


Xv9r]vai 


Xv9eig 

Xv9Ei<Ta 

Xv9ev 

Gen. Xv9EVTog 

\v9Ei(Trig 

Xv9EVTog 

St. Xv9Evr 




Xv9T](T0iflT]V 

Xv9r](Toio 

Xv9r]<T0lT0 

Xv9r]<ToifiE9ov 

Xv9r](Toia9ov 

Xv9r]<Joia9riv 

Xv9T](ToiixE9a 

Xv9r]<Toia9e 

Xv9r]<T0lVT0 




Xv9r)(TE<T9ai 


Xv9r]a6}iEvog 

Xv9tiaoiiEvr] 
Xv9ri<T6nEvov 



























110 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table IV. 



A. VOWEL STEMS. 

Present and 



Tlfidu), I honor 


TToieu), I make 


dovXoo), I subjugate. 




[compare Lat. am{a)o'\. 


[comp. Lat. rrumeo]. 






Stems: n^ia 


TTOie 


SovXo 




• Active. 






S. 1 


Tljxdlt) Tlfld 


TTOieu) TTOlG) 


dovXoo) dovXd 






2 


rijiduQ Tifi^g 


TTOikig TTOieXg 


dovXoeig dovXoXg 




i 


3 


Tiixdei Tifiq, 


TTOUei TTOiel 


dovXoei SovXoX 




1 


D.l 










T5 


2 


Tifiderov Tifiarov 


ttoiUtov ttoisXtov 


dovXoSTOv SovXovrov 




3 


TlfldlTOV TlfiaTOV 


TTOUeTOV TTOielTOV 


SovXoerov dovXovrov 




P 


P. 1 


Tifjidofiev TifiatfiEv 


Troisojxev Troiovfiev 


SovXoofiev SovXovfiev 




Pk 


2 


TlfldETE r I ft UTS 


TTodere Troielre 


dovXoere SovXovte 






3 


Tlfld-OV- TlfxCj- 


irOlkoV- TTOIOV- 


dovXoov- SovXov- 








<Tl(v) <'â– *(*') 


m(v) ctCi^) 


ai(v) <Ti(v) 






S. 1 


Tlfldu) TlflUJ 


TTOteW TTOlUt 


dovXoo) dovXoJ 






2 


Tifidyg Tifi^g 


TTOuyg TTOiyg 


dovXoyg dovXoXg 




â–  


3 


Tifidy Tijxq, 


TTody TTOiy 


dovXoy dovXoX 




1 


D.l 












2 


rifidrjTov rifiaTOV 


TroisijTov TTOiiirov 


SovX6r}Tov dovXutTov 




2* 


3 


Tindr]Tov ri/xarov 


TTOUrjTOV TTOlrJTOV 


dovXolJTOV dovXbJTOV 






P. 1 


Tifidu)fiev TijXbofxev 


TTOlSlOfieV TTOlCjjXEV 


dovXaiofXEv SovXwfiev 






2 


TifidrjTE Tifidre 


TToieijTe TToiiJTe 


dovXoJjTS dovXwTS 






3 


Tifidu)- rifiu)- 


TTOIBIO- TTOIW- 


dovXou)- dovXw- 








(Ti(v) o't(*') 


<n{v) fft(v) 


(n{v) (T I (y) 






S. 1 


Tifidoifii rifK^ifit 


TTodoifil TTOIOX/Xl 


dovXooifii dovXoXfii 








{-aoiTjv -(^Tjv)* 


(eoirjv -oiijv) 


{-ooirjv -0 i t) v) 






2 


Tifidoig TifKpg 


TTOisoig 'KoioXg 


dovXooig SovXoXg 








(-aoiijg -(^r]g) 


(-eoJTjg -oiTjg) 


{-toirjg -oirjg) 






3 


TlfldoL Tlfltp 


irodoL TToioX 


dovXqoi SovXoX 








{-aoirj -i^rj) 


{-eoirj -0 i rf) 


{-ooiij -0 i rf) 




q5 

•1 


D.l 










2 


TlfidoLTOV Tifxqtrov 


TTodoirov ttoioXtov 


dovXooiTov SovXoXrov 








{-aoir]Tov -(^t]tov) 


(-eoir)TOV -oir}Tov) 


{-ooir]TOV -oirjTOv) 




o 


3 


TifiaoiTTjv riixt^rijv 


â– JTOLeOlTTJV 7roioiTT]v 


dovXooiTr]v dovXoirijv 








(-aoiTjTTjv -(i)r]rr}v) 


{-eoir)TT}v -oirjrriv) 


{-ooirjTijv -oirjTTjv) 






P. 1 


Tifidoifiev rifxi^fiev 


TTodoifiev TTOioX/xev 


dovXaoiixev SovXoXfiev 








{-aoi7]nsv -(^T]nsv) 


(-eoirjfxev -oirjfiEv) 


(-OOITJUEV -oijJUEv) 






2 


TlfxdoiTE rifK^TE 


TTodoiTS TToioXre 


dovXooLTE dovXoXre 








{-aoiijTe -(^7]T() 


{-eoirjTE -oiijTe) 


(-ooirjTE -oiTjTe) 






3 


TlfldoiEV TlfK^ev 


TTodoLEV TTOIOXeV 

{-eoirjfTav -oirjaav) 


dovXooiev dovXolev 

















* Obs. — The more usual forms are those printed in spaced type. 



Table IV. pakadigms of verbs. — verbs in G. Ill 



II. CONTRACTED. 

Impeiifect Tenses. 



Middle and Passive. 



rifiaofiai Tifiwfiai 
Tifidy, €1 r I /i ^ 
TifidsTai Tifxarai 
TifiaofieOov TifKofie- 

Qov 
Ti}iataOov TifxdffOov 
TifidecrOov TifidffOov 
TijxaofieOa rifitofieOa 
Ti/ideaOe rindcrOe 
TifidovTai rifiojVTai 



Trouofiai 

TTodaTai 
TTOieofieOov 

TTodeaOov 
TroisecrQov 
TroieofxeOa 
TToderrOe 

TTOlSOVTai 



TTOIOV fiai 
TTOty, €l 

TTOIOV fie- 
Oov 

TTO IEXgOoV 

TToielaOov 
TTOIOV fieOa 
TToielcrOe 
TTOiovvrai 



dovXoofiat 
dovXoy, €i 
SovXoerai 
dovXoofie- 

9ov 
dovXoecrOov 
dovXoecrOov 
dovXo6n£9a 
dovXoEaOe 
dovXoovrai 



dovXov flat 
dovXol 
dovXovTui 
dovXovfiE- 

9ov 
dovXovaQov 
dovXovaOov 
dovXovfieOa 
dovXavaOe 
SovXovvTai 



Tifiaojfiai 
Tifidy 
TifidrjTat 
Tifiau)ne- 

Oov 
TifxdijffOov 

TlfldT](T90V 

TifiaojiiE9a 

Tifxdr](T9e 

Tifidwvrai 



Tifxiofxat TTOisiofiai 

Tinq, TTOiky 

Tifidrai TTodrjrai 

TllMOJfie- 7T0Cf.i!jfXE90V 

9ov 

Tiiid(y9ov â– 7rodT](T9ov 



Ti}ida9ov 
Tifiu)fie9a 
rifid(T9e 
TifiatvTai 



TTodr}a9ov 
7TOie(t)ixe9a 
7TodT)(j9e 

TTodiiiVTai 



TTOHOjiai 
TTOiy 

TTOifjrai 

TTOloJfie- 

9ov 

TT0lfj(T90V 
TT0liJG90V 

TToiit) ixe9a 
'7Toii}a9s 

TTOlUJVTai 



dovXoiofiai dovXiofiai 
dovXoy - dovXoX 
dovXoTjTai dovXatrai 
SovXoMfia- SovXwfjLB- 

9ov 9ov 

SovX6t]<T9ov 5ovXuj(t9ov 
dovX6r}a9ov dovXCJa9ov 
^ovXo(jj}if.9a dovXa)ne9a 
dovX6T]a9e dovXoj<r9e 
dovXoiovrat dovXtoVTai 



Tifiaoifirjv 

Tifidoio 

TifxdoiTO 

Tifiaoijxe.- 

9ov 
Tifxdoia9ov 

Tifiaoi(T9ov 

TifiaoifiE9a 

Tifidoi(T9e 

TlfldoiVTO 



Tlfl(i)IXT]V 

TllK^O 

TlfK^TO 

9ov 

TlfH^<T9oV 

Ti^t^a9ov 
Tifn^fiE9a 
Tifi(^(T9e 

Tljli^VTO 



TT0l(.0l}Xr}V 

TTO^OIO 

TTodoiTO 

7roieoiiJ.e9ov 

TTodoia9ov 

TTOieoi<T9r]v 

TroieoifiE9a 

TTodoi(T9e 



7T0l0lfir)V 
TTOLOXO 

ttoioIto 

TTOloiflE- 

9ov 
TToioXa9ov 

TT0l0i<T9rjV 
TT0l0iflE9a 

ttoioX(t9e 



TTOUOIVTO TTOIOLVTO 



dovXooifjirjv dovXoifirjv 

dovXooio dovXoXo 

SovXooiro dovXoXTO 

dovXaoi/xE- SovXoifXE- 

9ov 9ov 

dovXoot- dovXoX<T9ov 

(t9ov 

SovXooi- SovXoi<T9r]v 

(T9riv 

dovXooifiE- dovXoifieOa 

Oa 

^ovX6oia9E dovXoX(T9e 

dovXooivTo dovXoXvTO 



112 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table lY. — 

A. VOWEL STEMS. 

Present and Imperfect Tenses^ 



rTfidio, I TwTWr 
[compare Lat. am{a)o\. 


[comp. Lat. moneo]. 


dovXoo), I subjugate. 






Stems: n^ta 


TTOie 


SovXo 




Active. 






s. 


2 


rt/^ae rifid 


TToke TToiei 


SovXoe dovXov 








3 


TifiasTU) rifidro) 


TTOieeru} tt o t e i r w 


dovXosru) iovXovro) 




c5 


D.2 


TlfiCieTOP TLfXaTOV 


TToderov Troieirov 


dovXoerov dovXoiirov 








3 


rifXaeTlOV TtflOLTiOV 


TTOiEtriov TTOieiriov 


dovXokrwv S ovXovriov 




p 


3 


TijxdtTE T I flare. 


TTodere Troiilre 


dovXSere SovXovre 




1— 1 






Tijxaov- TlflWV- 


TTOieoV- TTOIOVV- 


dovXoov- S ovXovv- 






3 


T(i)V TbJV 


Tiov r(ov 


T(ov r<jjv 










TlfXaSTU)- TlflCLTlii- 


TTOueru)- TTOietrw- 


dovXokru)- dovXovru)- 


e 








aav aav 


aav cav 


aav aav 




d 

l-H 




Ti^deiv Tiiiav 


TTOueiv TTOielv 


dovXoeiv SovXovv 










Tifidcov rifidv 


TTOUdJV TTOIOJV 


dovXotov SovXwv 




]3 






rifidovaa Tinaxra 


TTOiEovaa woiovcra 


dovXoovaa S ovXovffa 








rifidov TifioJv 


TTOlkoV TTOIOVV 


SovXoov d ovXovv 






s. 


1 


eri/xaov iri/xwv 


IttoLeov sTToiovv 


idovXoov edovXovv 






D. 


2 
3 
1 


erifiaeg kTifidg 
kTifiae(v) krif^id 


iTToieeg (Troieig 
kTroies(v) tiro ill 

• 

iiroiUrov cTroteT- 


idovXoEg edovXovg 
tdovXoe{v) kd ovXov 








2 


tTlfldf.- BTiixd- 


IdovXos- kdovXov- 




a3 
ft 

a 






TOV TOV 


rov 


Tov rov 






3 


tTifiai- krifid- 


tiroid- IttoieL- 


edovXos- tdovXov- 




l-H 


P. 


1 


rrjv TTjv 

tTlfxdo- kTlfxCi- 


Tr}v rijv 
kTroikofiiv k'lroiov- 


rrjv rr]v 
tdovXoo- IdovXov- 








2 


tTifidET^ It I liars. 


flEV 

eTToikre 1 tt o t £ i r e 


fiev fiev 
MovXoere fdovXovre 








3 


krijiaov krifiwv 


eTToieov tTVoiovv 


edovXoov kdovXovv 





The other Tenses are conjugated like the same Tenses in Xvu). 

Examples for 
ToXfido), I dare. law, / let (§ 236). 



mydo), I am silent. 
(Sodio, I call out. 



d(TKS(i), I practise. 
KO(Tfieio, I adorn. 



Continued, pakadigms of verbs. — verbs in Q. 113 



II. CONTRACTED. 

Indicative Mood. 



Middle and Passive. 



TlHaOV TlfHx) 

TifJidk(T9(t) niidaObJ 
TifideaOov niidaQov 
TifiaeaOojv TifidaOiov 
TifideaOe rifidcrOe 
TLfiaicrOwv TifidaOiov 

TifiakaBi)}- TifidoOo)- 
aav aav 



TTOUOV TTOIOV 

TTOii^aOu) ttoib'ktOo) 
iroikaOov TrotElaOov 

TTOlUaOiOV "TTOlElffOoJV 

TToikaOe TroceXaOe 
TTOiseaOiov TroieicrOojv 

TTOueaOu)- TTOifiaOoi- 
aav aav 



^ovKoov ^ovXov 
dovXoetrOoj 6 ovXovctOm 
doifkoEtrOov dovXovtrOov 
dovXoecrOojv dovXov(T9iov 
dovXoerrOe. d ovXovaOs 
dovXokcrOojv S ovXovcrOuiv 

^ovXosado)- dovXovtrOoj- 
aav crav 



TifideaQai riixdcrOai 



TTOikecrOai TroieXcrOat 



dovXoeaQai dovXovtrOai 



Tifiaofie- rifidJfie- 

VOQ VOQ 

Tijiaofikvr] TifitofievT] 

TlfiaoflE- TlfKOflS- 

vov vov 



TTOieofie- TTOIOV ft e- 

VOQ VOQ 

TTOieOflSVt] TTOIOV fXeVT) 

TTOLeSfie- TTOIOV fie- 
vov vov 



dovXoofie- dovXovfie- 

vog vog 

dovXoofievTj d ovXov fievT] 
SovXoone- d ovXov fiE- 

vov vov 



tTlfia6flT]V ETlfHOfXlJV 

BTlfldoV £TlflW 

iTifidero enndro 

krifiaSfxe- lrifi(i)fiE- 

Oov Bov 

erifide- erifxa- 

(tOov <t9ov 

kTijiak- tTifid- 

(tOtjv adriv 

Irifiaofie- er ifib) fiB- 

Oa 9a 

iTifxdeffBe kTifid(T9e 

krifldoVTO STlflWVTO 



STTOUOflTJV tTTOlOV flTjV 
ETTodoV k TTOIOV 

eTTOisero eTTOielro 

tTTOLEOfXe- eTTOlOV fie- 

' 9ov Bov 

lTT0lkc90V tTTOiel- 

<t9ov 

tTT0iee(T9t]v eTTOiei- 

a9r}v 

tTTOLEOflE- ETTOlOVfie- 

9a 9a 

«7roi£€(r0€ ETTOiEXaBe 

SITodoVTO eTTOlOVVTO 



kdovXoofiTfv 


kdovXovixrjv 


edovXoov 


edovXov 


IdovXoETO 


IdovXovTO 


edovXoofxe- 


edovXovfie- 


Bov 


Bov 


IdovXoe- 


kdovXov- 


(tBov 


aBov 


edovXos- 


kdovXov- 


<TBr)v 


aBriv 


tdovXoofxe- 


kdovXovfie- 


Ba 


Ba 


tdovXoetjBe 


sdovXovffBe 


edovXoovTO 


idovXovvTO 



A Synopsis of these Tenses is given in the following Table 

Conjugation. 

dpLBfieiOj I count. Zrifiiou), I punish. 



drjXou), I make clear. 
ffTe(j)av6(t)^ I crown. 



Xpvaoo), 



114 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN 12. Table IV. 



A. VOWEL STEMS. 

( Tlncontracted 



Tensea* 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 


Optative. 




Active Voice. 




Future. 


Tl/Xr}(T(t) 
TTOiriffiO 

dov\(jj(r(o 


• 


Tiixrjaoijjii 
7roir)<TOifii 
dovXtoaoifxi 




1 Aorist 
(Weak). 


iTifiijaa 
kdovX(t)(xa 


7rOlT]<TU) 
dovX(0(T(t) 


Tifir](Taifii 
TTOiTjaaifii 
dovXaxTai/xi 




1 Perfect 
(Weak). 


TeTiixTjKa 

TTETToitlKa 

dedovXbJKa 


TerifirjKUi 
7re7roir]K<i} 
dedovXwKU) 


TeTifirjKoifii 
â– 7re7roiT]Koifit 
deSovXwKoifii 




1 Pluperfect 
(Weak). 


kreTi/xriKeiv 
eTreiroirjKeiv 
kSedovXujKeiv 








Middle and Passive Voices. 




Future. 


Tinr](TOfiaL 
TTOiTjaofiat 
dovXwaofiai 




rifirjaoifirjv 
TTOirjaoi/xTjv 

^0vXh)(T0'lfir]V 




Perfect. 


TETifirinai 
TTETroirjixai 
dsdovX(ofiai 


TETi}ir]fikvog hi 
TTETroiijfisvog (5 
SedovX(i)fxevog <L 


TETi}ir}}ikvog eir]v 
TTETroirifikvog eirjv 
SeSovXhjfiBvog elrjv 




Pluperfect. 


kreTifirjixijv 
hiTETroiriiiriv 
kdedovXw/xrjv 


• 






Future Perfect. 


TETifirjaoixai 
7r67rot?7 (To/iai 
dedovXbXTOnat 




TeTiixr}(7oifir]v 
7reTroiT](ToiixT]v 
dedovX(»)(ToifiT}v 




1 Aorist Pas- 
sive (Weak). 


kTTOLTjOrjV 

sdovX(x)9t]v 


Tiixr]9uj 
Troir]9Cj 
dovX(i)9oj 


riixr]9eiiiv 
'7roiTj9eir}v 
dovX(i}9eir]v 




3 Future Pas- 
sive Weak). 


Tiixi]9r](T0fiai 
Troir]9r)<TOixai 
^ovX(t)9r](TOjxai 




TlfiT]9t]<T0ifl7]V 

'7roir]9riaoijxr]v 
dovXio9r](ToiiJirjV 




Verbal Adjectives : 1. Tifirjrdg 2. TijxriTkog 

TrOllJTOQ TTOirjTSOg 

dovXiOTog dovXioTEog 





Continued, paradigms of verbs. — verbs in Q. 115 



1. UNCONTRACTED. 





Imperative. 


Infinitive. 


Participle. 






Active Voice. 








7roif)aeiv 
dovXioaeiv 


iroiTjcriov 

dovXu)(T(ov • 


' 


Tinrjaov 

7roiT]<TOV 

SovXwffov 


Tifif}(Tai 
TTOLtjaai 
dovXwcrai 


mirjaag 
TTOirjCag 
dovXwcrag 




TerifiTjKe 
TreTToirjKe. 
SedovXwKe 


reTi/jiTjKBvaL 
TreTTOiijKSvai 
dedovXojKevai 


TETifir}Kwg 
TreTTOirjKiog 
dedovX(i)Ka>g 












* 

Middle and Passive Voices. 






Tinr]qf.(j9ai 
7roir](Te(T9ai 

d07)X(O<TE(T9ai 


Tifirjaofievog 

TTOirjtTOIXEVOg 

dovXoxTofXEvog 




Teri/Jirjcro 

TTSTToiljaO 

deSovXuxTo 


TETi^ri(T9ai 
'rrtTroiri<T9at 
^f.SovXu)a9ai 


TETifitjfxevog 
Treiroiijfievog 
SeSovXojfievog 






• 








T€Tifir)(Tea9ai 
7r€7roti7(T£(T0ai 
dEdovXa)(Te<T9ai 


reTifirjaoixevog 
TrsTTOiijaoiievog 
SsSovXioao/ievog 




Tifir]9r]Ti 
iroiri9r}Ti 
SovXo}9tjti 


TifiT]9rivai 
7roiT]9fjvaL 
dovXoj9T)vai 


TifiT]9Eig 
7roiT]9eig 
dovX(i)9dg 






Tifir]9r](TE(T9at 
7roir]9r)as(T9ai 
dovXiij9r](Te(T9ai 


Tifir)9r](T6fievog 
'7roir]9r}a6fiEvo^ 
dovXi>}9r)(T6fiEvog 




• 



116 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table V. 



B. CONSONANT STEMS. 

TrXeKio, I plait (Class 1) ; (pevyco, I flee (Class 2) ; 



Tenses. 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 




Active. 




Present. 


Present. 
ttXckw 

(pevyut 
rd(T(Tit) 


illJ 


ttXIkw 
^evyoj 
rdaaio 




Future. 

• 


ttXs^u) 








1 Aorist (Weak). 

2 Aorist (Strong). 
1 Aorist (Weak). 


fTrXe^a 
i(pvyov 
tTata 




TrXfi^w 

<l>vyoj 

rd^oj 




1 Perfect (Weak). 

2 Perfect (Strong). . 
1 Perfect (Weak). 


Perfect. 

TTSTrXExa 
TTscpevya 
rkraxa 


Pluperfect. 
iTTiTrXkxf^iv 
tTTi^ivyuv 

tTETdx^l-V 


7r€7rX£\;a> 

TTE^EVyU) 

Tfraxw 




Middle and Passive. 




Present. 


Present. 
TrXkKOfiai 
rdaaofiai 


Imperfect. 
tTrXeKofitjv 

kTa<T<T6flT}V 


TrXfKw/iat 
rdaffiofiai 




Future. 


TrXk^ofiai 
rd^ofiat 








1 Aorist Middle (Weak). 


kTrXt^d[ir]v 
iTa^djjirjy 




TrXk^iofiai 
rd^iofiai 




Perfect. 


Perfegt. 
TTSTrXey/iai 
TSTayixai 


Pluperfect. 
tTrETrXsyfiijv 
eTETdynTjv 


TfeirXEy fxevog at 
TETaynsvog <Jj 




Future Perfect. 


TreTrXk^ofiai 
rerd^ofiai 








2 Aorist Pass. (Strong). 
1 Aorist Pass. (Weak). 


iTrXdicTjv 
kTdxOijv 




TrXaKd 
TUxOd 




2 Future Pass. (Strong). 
1 Future Pass. (Weak). 


TrXaKriaojiai 
raxOhf^Ofiai 








Verbal Adjectives : 1. tzX^ktoq, <l>evKT6£, toktoq. 





Examples for 
ayw, / drive (Aor. ijyayov, Perf, Act. ijxa) ; dpxio^Irule, both of Class 
(Pres. -ff(Tio, rarely -?w), see § 850. Nouns are formed from the Pure 
V dpx-n-i ^^ government. 



Table V. paradigms of verbs. — verbs in Q. f 17 



I. GUTTURAL STEMS. 

rdaaix)^ I arrange (Class 4). Verbal Stems: ttXek, (pvy, ray. 



Optative. 



Imperative. 



Infinitive. 



Participle. 



Active. 



TrXsKoifit 
(pevyoifii 
rdffaoifii 



TrXsfcg 
<j)evye 



TrXsKELV 

(pevyEiv 



rrXsKdJV 
(pevy(t)v 



TrXs^oifxi 
(pEv^oifirjv 

TOL^Olfil 



ttXb^hv 

^ev^eaOai 

rd^eiv 



ttXs^ojv 
Ta^ojv 



TrXe^aifii 

(pvyoifxi 

Ta^aifii 



TrXe^ov 
<l)vye 

TOL^OV 



TrXe^ai 
<pvyEiv 
rd^ai 



TrXe^ag 
Takag 



TrerrXexoifit 
Tre<pEvyoifii 
TeTaxoi/Jii 



TTETrXexe 



TreTrXexEvai 
Trecpevysvat 
TETax^vai 



TreTrXexwf 
TTSipevywg 
TETax*i)Q 



Middle and Passive. 



rrXeKoiixrjv 
Taoaoiji'qv 



TrXsKov 
rdaaov 



TrXeKetrOaL 
Td(T(T(.a9ai 



TrXEKofiivog 
TatTcrofxevog 



7rXe^oifjii]p 
Ta^oifiriv 



TrXe^eaOai 
rd^eaOai 



TrXe^ofievog 
ra^ofievog 



TrXe^aifiT]v 
ra^aifir)v 



TrXe^ai 
rd^ai 



TrXe^aaOat 
rd^atrOai 



TrXE^dfiivog 
Tu^dfievog 



â– jreTrXeyfievog tlr]v 
TETayfikvog eIijv 



TTSTrXe^o 
Tera^o 



TTETrXkxOcti 
TETdxOai 



TTETrXeynevog 
TETayixevog 



TTSTrXe^oifirjv 
TETaKoifirfv 



TTETrXe^earOat 

TETd^EffOai 



TTEirXE^OflEVOg^ 
TETa^OftEVOg 



TrXaKEiTjv 
TaxOEirjv 



TrXdicTjOi 
rdx^^Ti 



TrXaKTJvat 
raxOrjvai 



TrXuKEig 
raxOEig 



7rXaKr](TciffiT]v 
rax9r]<ToinT]v 



7rXaKr]<TE(T9ai 
TaxQr)<TE(TQai 



TrXaKTjaofiEvog 
TaxOrjffSfiEvog 



2. irXEKTSOg, (pEVKTEOg, TUKTEOg. 



Conjagation. 

1; opvaffu), I dig, Stem op^x, Class 4, a; for other guttural Stems 

Verbal Stems, as r6 TrXsy-fia, the wreath (§ 47); ri rdKi-g^ arrangement ; 



11§ PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table YI. 



B. CONSONANT STEMS. 

\pevdofiai, I lie (Class 1) ; TreiOw, I persuade (Class 2) ; 



Tenses. 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 




Active. 




Present. 


Present. 

7r€l0(U 


Imperfect. 

tKOfllHioV 


7rei9(o 




Future. 


KOfllio 






1 Aorist (Weak). 


tTTHaa 
tKOfiiaa 


KOfllffU) 




2 Perfect (Strong). 
1 Perfect (Weak). 


Perfect. 
Trs'7roi9a 

KEKOfXlKa 


Pluperfect. 
£7r67roi0eiv 

tKiKOfllKBlV 


7mroi9to 

KEKOfllKa) 




Middle and Passive. 




Present. 


Present. 

ipe.v^onai 
7rei9oixai 
KOfiiKofiai 


Imperfect: 
i-il/evd6/xT}v 
kTrH96fir]v 
eK0fiiZ6fir}v 


^l/ev^lof^al 
7rei9(i)fiai 
KOfiiZuifiai 




Future. 


â– ^pevaojxai 
rrdcTOfiai 
Koiiiovfiai 






1 Aorist Middle) 
(Weak). 


k-i\/Evadfir]v 
irru<rdixr]v 
eKoiXKjdinijv 


y\/EV(TiO}xat 

TTElCTCOfiai 

KOfiiffwuai 




Perfect. 


Perfect. 

t-^EV<Tfiai 

7rs7rei(Tfiat 

KSKOfllfffiai 


Pluperfect. 

ItpEVaflTjV 

iTre7rei(TfXT]v 

lKSK0lxi(TflTIV 


ixliEvafisvog <L 
TreTreicrfievog w 

KEKOflKTIXSVOQ h) 




1 Aorist Passive 
(Weak). 


l'ipev<T9ijv 
l7rei(T9r)v 
tK0fii(T9r]v 


â– ipEV(T9(0 
7rEl(T9u} 
K0fll(T9u) 




1 Future Passive 
(Weak). 


\pevcr9rjcrofiai 
'7rH(x9r](TOfiai 
K0fii(T9ri(T0fiai 


# 




Verbal Adjectives : 1. }Psv<tt6q, TTHcrrog, KOfxiarog. 





Examples for 

(TTTEv^w, libo^ Fut. o-TretVw, Perf. tairEiKa, Perf. Mid. toirEKxnai, Aor. Pass. 

For verbs of a Dental Stem, with the Present ending in -aau)^ see § 250, 

tlie lie; r) Tria-Ti-g, the faith; rj <nroyd-T]j the libation; 6 kXw^-wv, Gen. 



Table VI. paradigms of verbs. — verbs in Q. 119 



II. DENTAL STEMS. 

KOfii^u), I carry (Class 1,5). Verbal Stems : 4^evd, ttiO, KOfitd. 



Optative. 



Imperative. 



Infinitive. 



Participle. 



Active. 



KOfli^Olfil 



KOfll^S 



irdQuv 

KOfliZ,tlV 



7rsi6(t)v 

KOfii^tOV 



KOflloTfll 



TreKTHv 

KOfllElV 






TreKTaifii 
KOfxirraiixi 



KOfllffOV 



KOfiitrai 



KOfiiaaQ 



TTETTOiOoiHt 
KEKOfllKOlfll 



KEKOfllKe 



TTSTTOiOevai 

KEKOfllKSVai 



TrETroiOwg 

KSKO/llKWg 



Middle and Passive. 



rpevdoifiTjv 
7rei9oifir]v 

KOfll^oifi.1]V 



\pEvS0V 
TTUOOV 

KOniZ,ov 



\pevdea9at 
TreiOeaOat 



â– ypevdofievoQ 
TreiOofiEvog 
KOfii^ofiavog 



\l/ev(ToifiT]v 

TTSKToifirjV 
KOflloifilJV 



-ipeixTsaOai 
ireiaeaOai 
KOfiiHadai 



xpevaSfievog 
TreKTofievog 
KOfJLiovfiavog 



xpevaaifXTjv 

KO/XKTai/lTIV 



xpev(xai 

TTHCai 

Kofxiaai 



TtHaaaOai 
KOfiiaaaQai 



â– tpevad/xevog 
Treiadfievog 
KOfiKTafievog 



lipev(Tfievog elrjv 
7re7r€i<Tfitvog drjv 

KSKOfllffflEVOg HT]V 



ttpevffo 

Tr'sTTHGO 
KeKOflKTO 



t^evffOai 

TTETTEiaOai 

KEKOfxicQai 



xpevaOEirjv 
iruaQdriv 
KOfiiaOEirjv 



xlyeixrOrjTi 
TrdffOrjTi 
KOfiiaOrjTi 



xpEvaO^vai 
7rHa9fjvai 
K0fii(r9f}vai 



Irpevfffievog 
TTSTreicTfievog 
KSKQ flier fievog 



tpevaOeig 
â– KuaQdg 
KOfiiaOdg 



\pevaOT](ToifiT]v 
TreicOrjffoifiijv 

KOflKTOlJffoiflTjV 



^EvaOrjaEaOai 
TrnffOrjaeffOai 
KOfii(T9r)<Te(T9ai 



xpevcrOrjffofisvog 
TTHaOrjaofi^vog 
KO/iKTQrjfTo/xevog 



2. ypevcTTeog^ TretoTso?, KOfiiffTeog. 



Coiijugation. 

iffirehOrjv ; kXv^io^ I wash 
Obs. Nouns are formed from 
K\v6<av-og, tlw wave ; rj dpTray-rj 



dpTrd^it)^ J snatch; IXtti^oj, I hope. 
the Pure Verbal Stem, as : to \pevd-og, 
plunder. 



120 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 



Table VII. 



B. CONSONANT STEMS. 

Trefvrio, I send (Class 1) ; XtiTrw, / leave (Class 2) ; 



Tenses. 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 




Active. 




Present. 


Present. 

TTSflTTU) 

XeiTru) 
KaXvTrro) 


Imperfect. 

tTTt/iTTOV 

IXeiTTov 

iKaXvTTTOV 


XeiTTb) 

KaXvTrro) 




Future. 


Xeiipu) 
KaXvxpoj 






Aorist 1 (Weak): 
2 (Strong). 
1 (Weak). 


tXlTTOV 

iKoXvipa 


XlTTit) 

KaXvxpu) 




3 Perfect (Strong). 
2 Perfect (Strong). 


Perfect. 
irsTTOfKpa 
XsXonra 


Pluperfect. 
€7r€7ro/i0etv 
kXfXoiiruv 


TTETTOfUpoi 

XeXoiTTw 




Middle and Passive. 




Present. 


Present. 

TTSflTTOfiai 

Xuirofiai 
KaXvTTTOfiai 


Imperfect. 
iiTEfnroiXTjv 
IXeiTTofiijv 
eKaXvTrrofiTiv 


XeiTTCJuai 

KoXvTTTOJfiai 




Future. 


TTSfixpoixai 

XEi\pofiai 

KaXvxpo/xai 






A . . (1 (Weak). 

Aonst Jn/Oi.,.? { 


l7reiJ,\pdfiT]v 

iXnrojJiijv 

eKaXvtpdfirjv 


7re fi-ipMfiai 

XtTTwyuat 

KaXv^jyiofiai 




Perfect. 


Perfect. 

TTETrEflfiai 

XeXeiixjxai 
KeKoXvfifxai 


Pluperfect. 
iireTrkufiriv 
eXeXdfi/jir}v 
IkekoXv/xixijv 


TTETrefjlflEVOQ (L 

XeXeifinkvog w 
KeKaXyfijiiBVOQ w 




Future Perfect. 


XeXei-^ofiai 
KEKaXvypofiai 






1 Aorist Passive 
(Weak). 


kTrkn^9riv 

kXei<p9i]v 

kKaXv<p9r}v 


Xei<p9(o 
KoXv^du} 




1 Future Passive 
(Weak). 


7reix(p9rj<T0fiai 

Xei(l)9r)aofiai 

KaXv(l)9r)(rofiai 






Verbal Adjectives 


: 1. TrefiTrTog, Xem 


Tog, KaXvTTTog. 





Tpeiru), 



Examples for 
turn (Class 1) ; dXei(f)<o, I anoint (Class 2) ; Tpij3o), I rub 



(§ 249). Nouns are formed from the Pure Verbal Stems, as 6 Tro/xTr-o-g, 
ing, manner; t6 dXH<p-ap,the ointment; 6 rd^-o-g, the tomb. 



Table VII. 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 



121 



III. LABIAL STEMS. 

KaXviTTix}, I cmer (Class 3). Verbal Stems: 7refi7r,Xi7r, KaXv(3. 





Optative. 


Imperative. 


Infinitive. 


Participle. 




Active. 




irsfiiroifii 

XeiTTOlflL 

KaXv7rT0i/j.i 


KdXvTTTk. 


â– JTEflTTElV 

Xeitteiv 

KaXvTTTElV 


TTEinrojv 
XeLttiuv 

KaXvTTTiOV 




irkfiipoifii 

Xeixpoifii 

KaXv-^oijxi 




TTEIXXpElV 

XElXpElV 

KoXvtpElV 


TTEH-ipUiV 
XElXpCJV 

KaXvxj/iop 




Trefixpaifii 

XiTTOlfll 

KoXv-^aini 


Trsuxpov 

XiTre 

KaXvxpov 


XlTTElV 


TTEfi^l/ag 

XlTTWV 

KoXvipag 




TTETTOfUpOlfiL 

XeXoiiroifii 


mTrofKpE 

XeXoiTTE 


TTETTOflCpEVai 
XEXoiTTEVai 


TTETTO/iKpdjg 
XEXoLTTWg 




MWdle and Passive. 




TrefiTToiixrjv 

XenroinTjv 

KaXvTrTOifirjv 


TTEfXTTOV 

Xelttov 

KaXvTTTOV 


TrtinrE(j9ai 

XE'nrE<j9ai 

KaXv7rrE(T9ai 


TTEfiTTOfiEVOg 

XELTTOHEVOg 

KaXvTTTOflEVOg 




Xei-tpoifirjv 
KaXv\poiixr]v 




TrE}i-^E(T9at 

XEi\(/E(T9ai 

KaXv\l/E(T9ai 


7ren\p6fiEvog 

XEi-^pofiEvog 

KaXv^ofiEvog 




Tre fixpaifirjv 

Xnroinr]V 

KaXvxpaifiTjv 


TTEflXpat 
XlTTOV 

KoXvipai 


7re/x\pa(T9ai 

Xi7rEcr9ai 

KaXvypa<T9ai 


TrEntpdfiEPog 

XiTrofiEvog 

KoXvipdfiEvog 




TTETrefifiivog e'irfv 
XeXeififiEvog eirjv 
KEKaXvfiiikvog etrjv 


TreTrEfi-ipo 

XeXEi-ipo 

KEKaXvtpo 


7re7rEfi^9ai 

XEXEl<p9ai 

KEKaXv(p9ai 


TrETtEflflEVOg 
XEXElflflEVOg 
KEKaXvflflEVOg 




XsXei\poifit]v 
KEKaXv^oifnf]V 




XEXEi->pE<T9ai 
KEKaXv\pEa9aL 


XEXElXpO/XEVOg 
KEKaXvipOflEVOg 




7refi(p9driv 

Xei<p9eirjv 

KaXvp9elT]v 


Trkn(p9r]Ti 

XEi(l>9r]Ti 

KaXv(p9r]Ti 


irEfi<p9^vaL 

XEi<p9fjvat 

Ka\v<p9rivai 


7rEfi(p9Eig 

XEi(p9eig 

KaXv^9Eig 




'7rEfi^9ri<ToifiT)v 

XEi(p9r]<Toifir]v 

KaXv^9r)<Toifir]v 




7rEfi(p9rj(TE<r9ai 
XEi^9t]<yEa9ai 
KaXv(^9r](TEa9ai 


TrEH(l>9r}a6fiEvog 

XEi(l>9T}(r6fiEvog 

KaXv<p9T}(T6nEvog 




2. TTEfiTTTSog, XetiTTeog, KaXv-rrreog. 



Conjugation. 

(Class 2), as to its Perf., see § 279 ; 9d7rTio,Ilmry (Class 3), Stem tu^ 
the escort; Xoiir-o-g, remaining ; r} KoXv^-t}^ the hut; 6 Tpdir-o-g, the turn- 

F 



122 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 



Table VIII. 



B. CONSONANT STEMS. 

depoj, IsTcin (Class 1) ; ayyeXXw, I announce (Class 4, c) ; airdpu), I sow (Class 



Tenses. 



Indicative. 



Subjunctive. 



Active. 
Present. 



Present. 

Sepu) 
dyyeXKu) 
(TTreipu) 
fiiaivu) 



Imperfect. 
edepov 
rjyyeXXov 

tOTTHpOV 

kfiiaivov 



dsp(o 
dyysXXc 
(TTreipu) 
fiiaivoj 



Future. 



dspuj 
dyyeXio 
ffxepu} 
fiiavio 



1 Aorist (Weak). 



edeipa 
ijyysiXa 
ecnreipa 
sfiidva 



Seipoj 
dyyuXd) 

(TTTEipit) 

fxidvo) 



1 Perfect (Weak). 



Perfect. 
rjyyeXKa 
iarrapKa 
fiSfiiayKa 



Mid. and Passive. 
Present. 



Present. 
Sepofiai 
dyytXXofiai 
(jTreipo/^ai 
juiiaivofiai 



Pluperfect. 

T^yy^KEiv 
kairdpKHv 
kfiefiidyKeiv 



T^yyeXKOJ 
tairdpKio 
fisfxidyKu) 



Imperfect. 
Idepofirjv 
T^yyeXXofirjv 
ia7reip6fiT]v 
eixiaiv6fjiT]v 



dep(ofxai 
dyykXXiofiai 
(TTreipiofiat 
fxiaiviofiai 



Future. 



depovfiai 
dyyeXovfiai 
GTrepovfxat 
fiiavovfxai 



1 Aorist Middle 
(Weak).- 



edeipdjurjv 
riyyuXdfxriv 
itTTTupdfiriv 
k/xiavdfirjv 



deipiofiai 
dyyeiXojfxai 
(TTreipojfiai 
jxidvcjixai 



Perfect. 



Perfect. 
Sedap/xai 
ijyyeXnai 
taTcapfxai 
fxe/jiiarrfiai 



Pluperfect. 

iSeddpfirjv 
T^yyeXfiriv 
L(T7rdp/xr)v 

ifXEflldffflTfV 



dedapfisvog <5 
i^yyeXfisvog & 
Itnrapfisvog t3 
fiE/xia(Tfisvog w 



r4 Strong. 
Aorist Jl Weak. 
Passive j 2 Strong. 

VI Weak. 



iSdpriv 
riyy'sXQriv 
ktnrapriv 
IfiidvOTjv 



dapio 
dyyeXOu 
(TTrapSj 
fiiavOio 



r2 Strong. 
Future ) 1 Weak. 
Passive) 3 Strong. 

U Weak. 



daprjao/xat 
dyyeXOrjcTOfiai 
(nrapr](TOfiai 
p.iav9r]<T0fiai 



Verbal Adjectives : 1. dapTog, dyyeXroe, (nrapTog, fxiavrog. 



Table VIIL 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 



123 



IV. LIQUID STEMS (\, ft, v, p). 

4,<?); pa/vw, J5oiZ(Class4, <Z). Verbal Stems: dep,dyye\,(T7r6p,niav. 



Optative. 



Imperative. 



Infinitive. 



Participle. 



depoi/jii 
ayyeXXot/ii 

(TTTEtjOOt/il 

fxiaivoifii 



depe 

dyyEXXe 
ffTrelpe 
fxiaive 



depuv 
dyysXXeiv 
(TTreipHV 
HiaivHV 



depiov 
dyysXXuv 
(Tirdpojv 
fiiaivwv 



depoTiXL 
dyyeXoXfit 
(Tirapo'lfii 
fiiavoifii 



deipaifit 
dyyeiXaifiL 
ffTT^ipaifii 
Hidvaifii 



depeiv 
dyyeXfXv 
(TTrepelv 
jxiavdv 



deXpov 
ayyuXov 
(Tireipov 
fiiavov 



deXpai 
dyyeXXai 
(TTreXpat 
fiidvai 



depCjv 
dyyeXuiv 
(TTrepatv 
fiiaviov 



deipag 
dyyEiXag 
(TTrelpag 
fiidvag 



T^yyeXKOi/xi 

l(T7rdpK0llXi 

fisiiidyKoifiL 



-ijyyeXKe 
icFTrapKE 
fie/xiayKE 



i^yyeXKsvai 
iaTrapKsvai 
/leniayKSvai 



i^yyeXKMg 
tairapKMg 
HEfiiayKwg 



depoifiTjv 
dyyeXXoifirjv 
<T7reipoiixr]v 
fiiaivoifiTjv 



depov 
dyysXXov 
(TTreipov 
fiiaivov 



depsffOai 
dyysXXEaOai 
(TTreipetrOai 
fiiaiveaOai 



Sepofievog 
dyyeXXofievog 
(TTnipofievog 
fiiaivofiEvog 



SepoiiiTjv 
dyyeXoifiriv 
aTTEpoifitjv 
/xiavoifiriv 



depeXaOai 
dyyeXeXtrOai 
aTrepeXaOai 
fxiavuaQai 



depovfievog 
dyyeXovfiEvog 
(TTrepovfievog 
fiiavovfievog 



daipaifiijv 
dyyEiXaifXT]v 
<nrsipaifiT)v 
fiiavaifirjv 



deXpai 
dyynXai 
(TTreXpai 
fiiavai 



ddparrOai 
dyyeiXaffOai 
(TTreipacrOai 
fiidvaaOai 



deipdfievog 
dyyeiXdfxevog 
(TTreipdfievog 
fiiavd/xevog 



^edapfisvog Eirjv 
riyyaXfisvog eiT]v 
icTTrapfisvog eiTjv 
fXEniaajikvog drjv 



dEdapcro 
i]yysX(TO 
icrirapao 
fiEfiiaffo 



SeddpQai 
â– qyykXOai, 
l<nrdp9ai 
fieHidvOai 



h^apfxkvog 
i^yyeXfikvog 
iairapfikvog 
/xeiiiatTfikvog 



SapEirjv 
dyyeXQeiTjv 
(TTrapeirjv 
fiiavOsiTjv 



SaprfOi 
dyyeXOrjTi 
<T7rdpr]9i 
fiidvOrjTi 



dapfjvai 
dyyeXOfjvai 
(TTrapfivai 
HmvQrivai 



dapeig 
dyyeXOeig 
(TTrapeig 
fiiavOeig 



^apr](roifir]v 
dyyeX9T](Toifxr}V 
<r7rapr](ToifiT]v 
fiiavOrftToifiTiv 



daprfaeaOai 
dyyeX9f](TE(j9ai 
(TTrapri(Te(x9ai 
Hiav9'q(TEa9ai 



capriaofievog 
dyyEX9r}(T6fiEvog 
(nrapi](T6fievog 
fiiav9T](T6ixevog 



2. SapTsog, dyyeXHog, airaprkog^ mavrkog. 



124 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN fii. Table IX. ^ 



VERBS IN fii 





ri-en- 


til, I put. 


di-du)-fii, I give. 


'i-cTii-fJLi^ I place. 




Pure Stems Oe 


3o 


GTa 




Present Stems n-Oe 


di-do 


i-ara 




Present. Active. 






S. 1 


Tl-OlJ-fJll 


di-ScD-fxi 


'i-arrj-fiL 






2 


ri-9r]-s 


di-d(o-g 


'i-(TTr]-g 




g 


3 


TL-9r]-ai{y) 


di-dio-(Ti{v) 


'i-(TTtJ-(Tt(v) 






D. 1 






« 




1 


2 


Ti-Oe-Tov 


di-do-TOV 


'i-ard-Tov 




''B 


3 


Ti-Oe-Tov 


Si-do-Tov 


'i-OTCL-TOV 




H- 1 


P. 1 


Ti-Be-fiev 


di-do-fj.Ev 


'i-(TTd-flEV 






2 


Ti-Os-re 


di-do-TE 


'i-OTCL-TE 






3 


Ti-9s-d-(n(v) 


dt-86-d-(n(v) 


i-(jTd-(n(v) 






S. 1 


Ti-Oa, 


ai-^oi 


t-OTW 






2 


Ti-Oy-Q 


di-d(ii-Q 


i-(TTy-Q 




g 


3 


Ti-By 


di-d(^ 


i-ary 




•§ 


D. 1 












2 


ri-9i]-Tov 


dl-^OJ-TOV 


l-(TTr]-TOV 




^ 


3 


Tl-0i]-TOV 


di-dio-Tov 


i-aTrf-TOV 




CO 


P. 1 


Ti-9w-fiev 


dt-dd-fiiv 


l-OTW-/i£V 






2 


Ti-Bij-re 


Si-dat-TE 


l-CTYI-TE • 






3 


Ti-9Ci-(n{v) 


di-dio-(n(v) 


l-(TTO)-ai{}') 






S. 1 


Ti-9eir]-v 


di-doir}-v 


i-(TTair]-v 






2 


Ti-9f.ir]-Q 


di-doiij-g 


i-crTair]-g 






3 


ri-9eiT] 


di-doiTj 


i-tTTairj 






D. 1 












2 


. ri-9eiT]-Tov or 


di-doL7j-Tov or 


i-arairj-Tov or 




05 
> 




ti9htov 


didoXrov 


laTOlTOV 




3 


Ti-9ur}-Ti)v or 


8i-doiT}-TT]v or 


i-aTairj-Trjv or 




^ 
^ 




Ti9eiTT]v 


didoiTriv 


i(TTaiTT}V 




P. 1 


Ti-9eLT]-fiEv or 


^L-doiTj-fiev or 


i-crTaiTj-fiev or 








riOeiixev 


Sidolfiev 


icTTalfjiev 






2 


ri-9eiT]-Te or 


dL-8oiT]-Te or 


i-aTair]-TE or 








Tl9HTe 


MoTre 


laTdiTE 






3 


Ti-9eiT}-(Tav or 


Si-SoiTj-tTav or 


i-(TTaij]-(Tav or 








Ti9eiev 


didolev 


laTOlEV 






S. 2 


ri-9si 


di-dov 


'l-<TTtJ 




05 


3 


Tl-9s-TiO 


dL-d6-T(o 


i-<TTa.-T(o 






D. 2 


Ti-9e-T0V 


di-do-TOV 


'l-<TTd-TOV 




S 


3 


Ti-9s-ru)V 


dL-do-TMV 


i-(TTa.-TOJV 




1 

1— I 


P. 2 


Ti-9e-Te 


di-So-TS 


'i-ara-TE 




3 


Ti-9k-vT0}V or 


di-d6-vro)v or 


i-trrd-VTwv or 








ri-9k-r(o(Tav 


di-d6-T(i)(Tav 


i-<Trd-T(i)<Tav 




Infin. 


« " 


Ti-9k-vai 


di-do-vai 


i-ard-vai 




Part. 




n-^ei-c, Ti-9el-(Ta, 


Si-dov-Q^di-dov-aa, 


i-ard-g, i-ard-ffa, 








TiBkv G. Ti9svr-og 


didov G. di-dovT-og 


lardv G. i-(TrdvT-og 

















Table IX. paradigms of verbs. — verbs in jui. 125 
FIRST CLASS. 





This First Class consists of Verbs wliicli affix their terminations 






directly to the Stem. 




Present. Middle and Passive. 




ri-Oe-fiai 


di-do-ixai 


i-ara-fiai 




Ti-9e-(Tai 


di-So-aai 


'i-UTd-aai 




ri-9e-Tai 


di-do-Tai 


'i-ara-Tai 




Tl-Q't-jXiBoV 


di-d6-fie9ov â–  


i-GTa.-fiE9ov 




Ti-Oa-aOov 


di-do-aBov 


'i-<JTa-(T9ov 




ri-9e-a9ov 


di-do-G9ov 


'i-<TTa-<T9ov 




rt-9e-fiE9a , 


Si-d6-fis.9a ' 


i-<TTd-fie9a 




Ti-9e-(T9e 


di-do-a9e 


'l-<TTa-<T9e 




Ti-9e-vTai 


di-So-vrai 


'i-ara-VTai 




Ti-Bd-fiai 


di-dio-fiai 


i-GTCj-fiai 




TL-9y 


Si-d({i 


i-<TTy 




Ti-Bfj-Tai 


Si-doj-Tai 


l-ffTtj-Tai 




rL-9<jj-fiE9ov 


5t-du)-fie9ov 


t-(TTa)-flE90V 




Ti-9rj-a9ov 


di-dio-<T9ov 


i-(TTrj-&9ov 




Ti-9i]-(r9ov 


di-du)-a9ov 


i-<tttj-(t9ov 




Ti-9io-ixe9a 


di-dit)-fie9a 


i-<TTU)-fie9a 




Ti-9rj-a9e 


di-Sw-(r9e 


i-<TTrj-<T9e 




Ti-9u)-VTai 


h-^S)-VTai 


i-ario-vTai 




Ti-9ai-ixr]v 


di-doi^fi7]v 


l-aTai-ixrjv 




Ti-9u-o 


di-doi-o 


i-aToX-o 




ti-9h-to 


di-doX-TO 


i-(TTai-TO 




ri-9ei-fii9ov 


Si-^oi-fiE9ov 


i-(TTai-fxe9ov 




Ti-9ei-(T9ov 


di-dol-(T9ov 


i-(TTai-G9ov 




Ti-9d-(y9r]v 


^L-^oi-(T9r]v 


i-aTai-a9r]v 




Ti-9d-nE9a 


^i-Soi-fiE9a 


i-CTai-fiEBa 




ti-9h-<t9£ 


Si-SoX-(T9e 


i-(TTdi-a9e 




Ti-9ei-vTo 


di-dol-VTO 


i-(jTaX-VTO 




tI-9e-<7o 


di-So-(To 


'i-(TTa-ao 




ti-9s-<t9oj 


di-d6-(T9i)j 


i-(TTd-(T9(t) 




Ti-9e-<T9ov 


di-So-aBov 


'i-aTa-<j9ov 




Ti-9k-a9u)v 


Si-S6-<t9(i)v 


i-<TTd-(r9ojv 




Ti-9e-(T9e 


di-do-a9e 


'i-(TTa-(T9e 




ti-9s-(t9ojv or 


di-d6-(T9ojv or 


i-<TTd-(T9(t)v or 




Ti-9k-cr9io(rav 


Sl-S6-(T9u)(TaV 


i-(TTd-(r9io(Tav 




ri-9e-(T9aL 


di-do-(T9ai 


'i-ceTa-a9ai 




Ti-Bs-fievo-g^ ijj o-v 


dt-So-fievo-Qj r], o-v 


i-ffTd-fievo-g, ij, o-v 











126 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN fit. Table IX. — 



VERBS IN fit. 





Ti-Orj-iJii, I put. 


^i-dio-jjii, I give. 


'i-ar7]-fii^ I place. 




Pure Stems 9e 


do 


(Tra 




Present Stems Ti-9e 


di-do 


i-(TTT} 






S. 1 


k-Ti-9f]-V 


i-6i-dio-v 


'i-(TTr}-v 






2 


k-Ti-9r]-g 


e-di-du)-Q 


'i-arri-g 




^ 


3 


t-Ti-9rj 


i-di-do) 


l-CTTIJ 




1 


D. 1 










2 


k-ri-9e-T0v 


k-di-do-TOV 


'i-<TTa-T0V 




1 


3 


k-Ti-9£-rr)v 


t-h-U-Tj}v 


l-(7Ta-TT}V 




P. 1 


i-Ti-9e-iJ,ev 


l-di-do-fxev 


i-aTa-fiEv 






2 


k-Ti-9e-Te 


k-di-do-re 


i-ffTa-re 






3 


£-Ti-9s-(Tav 


l-di-do-crav 


i-<TTc^(rav 






Second or Stro 


ng Aorist. Active. 






S. 1 


[i-9v-v] 


[e-doj-v] 


t-(Trr]-v 






2 


[e-9r,-Q] 


[e.du>.g] 


i-arri-g 




s 


3 


[i-er)] 


[i-dio] 


e-<rni 




'^ 


D. 1 










c3 


2 


i-9e-T0v 


i-do-Tov 


t-crrrj-rov 




''B 


3 


l-9k-Tr]v 


e-d6-rT]v 


t-arr)-rriv 




M 


P. 1 


i-9e-fiEv 


i-do-fiEv 


t-cTrrj-fxev 






2 


i-9e-Te 


e-do-TE 


i-(TTT]-Te 






3 


e-9e-aav 


i-do-aav 


i-<Trr)-(Tav 




Sub). 




9io 


duj 


(TT(0 








9y-g 


^V-Q 


ary-g 










etc., as in the 




Opt. 


9eir]-v 


doiij-v 


aTair}-v 








etc., as. in the 






S. 2 


9e-Q 


do-g 


aTrj-9i. 






3 


9e-T(o 


do-ro) 


ffrrj-Tio » 




D. 2 


9e-tov 


do-TOV 


(rrij-TOV 




2 

1 

H- 1 


3 


9s-T(OV 


d6-Tit)v 


arq-Ttav 




P. 2 


9e-TS 


do-re 


<TTfj-T£ 




3 


9k-vT(t)v or 


d6-vr(i)v or 


(TTa-VTwv or 








9k-Tit)(Tav 


do-Tioaav 


(TTT}-T(0<TaP 




Infin. 




9el-vaL 


dov-vai 


arfj-vai 




Part. 




9Ei-g, 9ei-(Ta^ 9'e-v 


dov-g, dov-(Ta, 


(TTd-g, (TTd-aa, 








G. 9kvT-0Q 


do-v G. dovr-og 


(TTOLV G. ffTOLVT-Og 





The following Tenses are formed 



Active. 




Future. 


9fj(TU} 


diixyto 


(TTT]<Tb) 




First or Weak 
Aorist. 


Wjjku 


idioKa 


iarTjffa 




Perfect. 


Tk9uKa 


dsdioKa 


e(TTr]Ka 




Pluperfect. 


iTi.9HKHV 


kdeSbJKHv 


k<TTr]KHV or 
f.l<TTr]KUV 




Verbals. 











Continued, paradigms of verbs. — verbs in jut. 127 
FIRST CLASS. 





This First Class consists of Verbs which affix their terminations 
directly to the Stem. 




< 

i 

« 
t 
I 


-Tl-Bk-flTiV 

-Ti-BE-ao • 
-t'i-Be-to 

-Tl-Bk-fXEBoV 

-Ti-BE-aBov 
-Ti-B't-(jBriv 
-TL-Be-fieBa 
-tI-Be-<tBe â–  
-t'l-Be-vto 


k-Si-do-firjv 

E-dL-do-tTo 

E-di-do-TO 

E-di-do-jXEBov 

E-di-6o-(TBov 

i-di-do-aBTjv 

E-Si-do-fieBa 

E-Si-do-aBE 

l-di-do-VTO 


'l-(TTa-(TO 

'i-ara-TO 

l-crrd-fMEBov 

'i-ara-aBov 

i-aTa-aBriv 

l-ard-fiEBa 

'i-ara-aBE 

'l-(TTa-VT0 




Second or Strong Aorist. Middle and Passive. 




i-9e-fir]v 

i-9ov 

e-9e-T0 

e-9e-fiE9ov 

l-9E-a9ov 

E-9k-a9r]v 

k-9e-fiE9a 

i-9E-a9E 

i-9E-VT0 


E-do-firiv 
e-dov 

E-do-TO 

E-d6-fiE9ov 

E-do-(T9ov 

E-d6-<T9r)v 

E-do-fieBa 

i-do-rrBE 

t-do-VTO 


Wanting. 




9CJ-nai 
By 

Pres. Subjunctive. 


Sat-fiat 


Wanting. 




9Ei-fj,r}v 

Pres. Optative. 


doi-fiTjv 


Wanting. 




9ov 

Bk-(TB(o . 

Be-aBov 

Bk-(rBii)v 

Bk-aBE 

9k-a9(i)v or Bk-aBioffav 


dov 

do-crBo) 

do-aBov 

do-aBiov 

S6-(tBe 

d6-aB(t)v or do-rrBoxrav 


Wanting. 




Be-aBai 


do-crBai 


Wanting. . 




Bs-fiEvo-g, ri, o-v 


do-fiEvo-g, ri, o-v 


Wanting. 


rni the anahgy of Verbs 


in Q. 






Middle and Passive. 




Brjaofiai 

Passive. TEBrjffofiai 


dijjffofiai 
SoBri<TOjJ,at 


aTrjaofiai 
(TraBr}(T0/xai 




Middle. Wanting 

PASSiVE. ItsBtjv 


Wanting 
IdoBriv 


ECTT^aajiriv 
EOrdBriv 




HBEifiai 


dsSoixai 


scTTafiai 




irEBEifirjv 


edEdonijv 


eaTdfirjv 






Betoq 

dETSOQ 


Sorog 
SoTsog 


araroQ 
crraTEog 



128 



PAKADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN fxt. Table X. 



VERBS IN fit. SECOND CLASS. 

This Second Class consists of Verbs which fonn the Present-Stem by- 
adding vv to the Pure Stem. 



deiKvvfii, I show. Pure Stem ^ e i k. Present Stem Seik-v v. 


Present Active. Middle and Passive. 


Indicative, 


S. 1 
2 
3 

D. 1 
2 
3 

P1.1 
2 
3 


dHK-VV-fXL 

detK-vv-g 
deiK-vv-ffi(v) 

h'lK-VV-TOV 

Mk-vv-tov 
SeiK-vv-fiev 

SeiK-VV-TB 

deiK-vv-d(Ti{v) 


deiK-vv-fxai 

ddK-vv-uai 

deiK-vij-Tai 

deiK-vv-fi.e9ov 

deiK-w-aBov 

SeiK-w-aBov 

hiK-vv-iit9a 

deiK-vv-(T9e 

deiK-vv-vrai 


Subjunctive. 




deiKvvo), yQ, y, etc. 


deiKvvu)fiai, y, yrai, etc. 


Optative. 




dHKVVOLfll, Oig, 01, etc. 


deiKvvoifiijVj oio, oiro, etc. 


Imperative. 


S. 2 
3 

D. 2 
3 

PI. 2 
3 


Mk-vv 

deiK-vv-rcj 

deiK-rv-Tov 

deiK-vv-T(i)v 

deiK-vv-Te 

deiK-vv-vr(ov or 

deiK-vv-TOjaav 


deiK-vv-ffo 

deiK-vv-<T9(o 

SeiK-vv-a9ov 

SeiK-vv-aBiov 

£dK-vv-(T9e 

deiK-vv-(T9ii}v or 

deiK-vv-(T9u}(Tav 


Infinitive. 




deiK-vv-vat 


MK-vv-a9at 


Participle. 




dHK-vi>Q, deiK-vv<Ta, hiK-vvv 
Stem Sf.iK-vv-vT 


deiK-vv-fiepog, rj, ov 


Imperfect 
Indicative. 


S. 1 
2 
3 

D. 1 
2 
3 

P1.1 
2 
3 


i-dsiK-vv-v 
k-deiK-vv-g 

k-h'lK-VV-TOV 

i-SeiK-vv-rrjv 

k-^UK-VV-jltV 
k-h'lK-VV-TB. 

e-deiK-w-aav 


t-deiK-vv-fir]v 

e-deiK-vv-ao 

t-SeiK-vv-ro 

i-hiK-vv-ni9ov 

£-Mk-vv-(t9ov 

k-hiK-vv-a9riv 

k-deiK-vv-iie9a 

e-deiK-vv-<T9e 

k-hlK-W-VTO 


Future. 




deiK(o 


dd^ofiai 

Passive. ^Eix9r)<T0fiai 


First or 
Weak Aorist. 




tdeiKa 


Middle. iSu%dnr]v 
Passive. IMx9t]v 


Perfect. 




dedeixa 


dedeiyfiai 


Pluperfect. 




IdedeixEiv 


ededeiyiJ.r]v 



§232. 



I. THE PRESENT-STEM. 



129 



Chap. X. — First Principal Conjugation, 
or Verbs in w. 

I. The Present- Stem. 
A. Inflexion of the Present-Stem. 

§ 231. The Present-Stem is the form which remains 
after rejecting a> in the 1 Sing. Pres. Act. 

On the distinction of the Present- Stem from the Verbal- 
Stem, see § 245, etc. 

The following Table exhibits the way in which the Per- 
sonal Endings are affixed to the Present- Stem by means 
of the connectins: vowels. 



§ 232. 




Active. 


Middle and 
Passive. 


Present 


1 Sing. 


\v-u) 


[solv-o] 


Xv-o-iiai 


Indicative. 


2 " 


\v-El-Q 


[solv-i-s] 


Xv-y or Xvu 




3 " 


Xv-ei 


[solv-i-t] 


Xv-e-TUL 




IDual 






Xv-6-fiE9ov 




2 " 


Xv-e-Tov 




Xv-e-crOov 




3 " 


Xv-e-rov 




Xv-e-a9ov 


• 


1 Plur. 


Xv-o-fizv 


[solv-i-mus] 


Xv-6-ne9a 




2 " 


Xv-e-TS 


[solv-i-tis] 


Xv-a-(T6e 




3 " • 


Xv-ov-<n{v) [solv-u-nt] 


Xv-o-vrai 


Present 


1 Sing. 


Xv-O) 


[solv-a-m] 


Xv-(t)-fiat 


Subjunctive. 


2 " 


Xv-y-Q 


[solv-a-s] 


Xv-y 




3 " 


Xv-y 


[solv-a-t] 


Xv-r]-Tai 




IDual 






Xv-(Sj-fieOov 




2 " 


Xv-Tj-TOV 




Xv-rj-aOov 




3 " 


Xv-t]-TOV 




Xv-t]-(t9ov 




1 Plur. 


Xv-oj-fiev 


[solv-a-mus] 


Xv-w-fie9a 




2 " 


Xv-ri-re 


[solv-a-tis] 


Xv-i]-a9e 




3 " 


Xv-<a-ai(v) 


[solv-a-nt] 


Xv-(t)-vTai 













F 2 



130 



I. THE PRESENT-STEM. 



232. 









Middle and 






Active. 


Passive. 


Present 


1 Sing. 


Xv-oi-fxt 


Xv-oi-fiT]v 


Optative. 


3 " 


\v-oi-g 


Xv-oi-o 




3 " 


Xv-OL 


Xv-Ol-TO 




IDual 




Xv-oi-fie9ov 




2 " 


Xv-Ol-TOV 


Xv-oi-a9ov 




3 " 


Xv-oi-TT]v 


Xv-oi-a9rjv 




1 Plur. 


Xv-ot-fiev 


Xv-oi-fieOa 


^ 


2 " 


Xv-OL-re 


Xv-oi-a9e 




3 " 


Xv-OL-EV 


Xv-Ol-VTO 


Present 


2 Sing. 


Xv-e [solv-e] 


Xv-ov 


Imperative. 


3 " 


Xv-k-T(o [solv-i-to] 


Xv-£-a9u) 




2 Dual 


Xv-e-Tov 


Xv-t-a9ov 




3 « 


Xv-£-T(t}V 


Xv-k-a9(i)v 




2 Plur. 


Xv-e-TE [solv-i-te] 


Xv-e-a9e 




3 " 


Xv-6-vTU}v [solv-u-nto] or 


Xv-k-(T9u)v or 






Xv-B-TO)(TaV 


Xv-e-<T9io(Tav 


Present 




Xv-eiv 


Xv-e-a9ai 


Infinitive. 








Present 




Stem Xv-o-vT [solv-e-nt] 




Participle. 




Xv-iov 


Xv-o-jxEvo-g 






Xv-ovaa 


Xv-o-fievT] 






Xv-ov 


Xv-O-flEVO-V 






Gen. Xv-o-vT-oQ 








[solv-e-nt-is] 




Imperfect. 


1 Sing. 


t-Xv-o-v 


k-Xv-6-}ir}v 




2 " 


t-Xv-e-g 


k-Xv-ov 




3 " 


i-Xv-E(v) 


E-Xv-E-TO 




IDual 




E-Xv-6-fiE9ov 




2 " 


l-Xv-e-TOP 


k-Xv-E-<T9ov 




3 " 


k-Xv-k-TTiv 


e-Xv-e-(t9t]v 




1 Plur. 


k-Xv-o-fxev 


e-Xv-6-fiE9a 




2 " 


e-Xv-e-TE 


k-Xv-E-(r9E 




3 « 


e-Xv-o-v 


k-Xv-O-VTO 



233. PERSONAL ENDINGS. 131 

§ 233. Obs. — 1. The E-souncl (e, ?/, et) is used as a connecting vowel 
except before nasals, where the 0-sound (o, w, o v) is used. 

3. In 1 Sing. Ind. Act. w is the connecting vowel lengthened, the 
ending fii being dropped. In the 2 Sing, e i ^ is for e o- 1. In the 
3 Sing. € I for tn: Xv-ei-g for Xv-e-m, Xv-ei for Xv-e-n [compare 
solv-i-t]. The ov of the 3 Plur. has arisen out of o by compensa- 
tive lengthening (§ 42) : Xv-ov-ai, from Xv-o-v(n, for the original 
and Doric Xv-o-vn [compare soh-u-nt]. In the 3 Sing. Imperf. 
€ (v) stands for original s-t — compare solveba-t — as r at the end 
could not maintain its ground (§67). 

8. In the 2 Sing. Indie. Pres. Mid. y or e t arose from t{a)aL (§§ 61, 
38) : \uy, from Xvt{iy)ai ; the ending ei is the Old Attic one ex- 
clusively used in oiei, thou thinkest ; (SovXei, thou wishest ; y is the 
one later in general use. Compare the Fut. ^u (§ 259). 
A. The Subjunctive has always w, ?;, ^, for o (ow), e, e i ; the y of the 
2 Sing. Mid. is contracted from r]{(j)ai (compare § 228). 

5. In the 2 Sing. Imperat. Act. the termination after the connecting 
vowelis quite lost, o w in the 2 Sing. Imperat. and Imperf. Mid. 
has arisen from €((r)o, €o : Xvovz=Xve((T)o, tXvov^tXve(a)o (§§ 61, 
37) ; o 1 in the 2 Sing. Opt. Mid. arose from o t (<t) o. 



§ 238. Dialects. — 1. The Epic dialect sometimes has the original 
ending ^ i of the 1 Sing, in the subjunctive : iOkXio-fii^ velim; the 2 Sing. 
Subj. and Opt. often has the fuller ending aOa (for q) : t9kXr}-G9a=. 
WkXyg, KXaioi-a9a = KXaioig (KXaioj, I weep)) the 8 Sing. Subj. has the 
old ending a i (v), from r i : k9kXr}-<n{v) = WkXy. 

«-^ 2. The long vowels of the subjunctive are often shortened in Homer : 
lOvvETE for iOvvTjre {i9vv(o, I put straight) (compare § 228, D.). 

3. The Epic dialect often has /u e v a i or /« e v in the Inf. Act. con- 
nected with the Stem by an accented € : dfivv-e-fievai or dfivv-k-jx^v := 
dn^vHv, to defend. 

4. The 2 Sing. Mid. often remains uncontracted in the Ion. dialect : 
XiXaUai, thou wishest ; Subj. txwi (habearis), also shortened, fiicryeai 
(miscearis) ; Imperat. sTreo, follow ; Imperf Ideveo, thou wast in want of. 
f is also contracted to e u (§ 37, D.) : cVeu. 

5. The 1 Dual and 1 Plftr. Mid. in poetry often has a for : (iov- 
X6ixe<T9ov, -/i€(79a, we wish. 

Q. uTo (§ 226, D.) occurs in the Ion. dialect regularly for vto in 
3 Plur. Opt. : ^axoiaro {^naxoivro)^ they Tnay fight. In New-Ion. arat, 
aro^ are also sometimes found in other forms where e is the connect- 
ing vowel instead of o : Krid-k-arai = Krjd-o-vrai, they care : IfiovX-k-aro 
=â–  i(3ovXovTo. , 



132 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 234. 

B. TJiG Augment. 

§ 234. The Augment {Augmentum^ increase) is the 
sign of the jpast in the Indicative of all the historical 
tenses (§ 225, 3. B.). It has two forms ; that is, it appears 
either — 

d) As a SyllabiG Augment, in the syllable £ prefixed, or 

J) As a Temporal Augment, in the lengthening of the 
initial vowel. 

All verbs beginning with a consonant have the Sylla- 
hiG Augment : i-\v-o-v, t-ruTrr-o-jur/v, / was strucJc. p is 
doubled after £ : tpplirTov, from ptirTtj,! hwl. 

Obs. — The Syllabic Augment appears in the stronger form of r] 
instead of e in -il-fieSX-o-v, I was about to, from /ueXXw ; ij-(iov\-6-fitjv, 
I wished, from (iovkofiai ; i)-dvvd-fir]v, I could, from Svva/iai. 

§ 235. The Temjporal Augment is used in all verbs which 
begin with a vowel., whether aspirated or not. The Tem- 
poral Augment changes 

a to 77 : ayw, I lead. Imperfect r}y-o-v 

« " 1]'. i\avv(>),I drive. " t/Xaw-o-v 

o " w : dveiSi^u), I reproach. " wveidi^-o-v. 

t "I: 'iKSTevo), I beseech. " 'iKerev-o-v 



7. Homer, quite peculiarly, has in the 3 Dual Imperf. rov, <t9ov, 
for Tr]v, (T 9 T}v : Itevx^tov, the two made; and Attic writers have Ttjv 
for the 2 Dual of an historic sense: eixerrjv, ye two had; evpkrrjv, ye 
two found. 

§ 234. Dialects. — In Homer, and also in other poets, the Augment 
may be entirely omitted: r6u%e, h^ made; tx^v, Tie had. X, fi, v, a are 
also sometimes doubled after the Syllabic Augment : iXXiaazro (from 
Xi<T(TOfiai, I beseech) ; d only in the Stem d i : iddsKra (I feared, § 817, 5). 
On the contrary, p is sometimes left single : epdirTOfiev {pdirTio, I sew, 



§ 235. Dialects. — By the Temporal Augment a becomes d in Doric : 
dyov. The Temporal Augment is very often wanting in Herodotus, 
especially in the case of diphthongs. 



§ 238. THE AUGMENT. ' 133 

i; to v : 'v(3piK(o, linsult. Imperfect 'of3piZ-o-v 

ai " y : aiaOdvofiai, Ipercewe. " yaOav-o-firjv 

ay" j]v: av^dvu), lincrease. " rjv^av-o-v 

01 " (p : oiKTdpujj I pity, " t^Kveip-^v 

Before vowels, a becomes a, not t; : 'aiw,! hear, 'diov. 
The long vowels rj, w, 7, v, and usually the diphthongs 
et, ev, ov, remain without Augment. 

dKuKoj, I conjecture J eiKuK-o-v (also yKaZov); 

EvpiffKU), IJind, evpi(TK-o-v (seldom Aorist rjvpov) ; 

also a V and o i immediately before a vowel : avaivu), I dry^ 
avaivov ; omictgw, / 5#<?^r, oia/ctjov ; and other diphthongs 
in isolated instances. 

Obs. — The rough hreathing precedes the augmented 
form when the verb in its unaugmented^form had it. 

§ 236. £ becomes c i (instead of r/) in some verbs, viz., in 
laii). Heave ; WiZ^bi, I accustom ; k\i(TGit),I roll ; cXkw or 
kX^vii),! draw ^' 'iirofxai, I follow; lpyaZ,o^aiyIwor7Cj' epiru) 
or kpTrvZ,(si, I creep / lorrmw, / entertain hospitably / txw, I 
have. Compare below the Aorists : aV/zrjv (§ 313), cTXov {at- 
piw, I take, I 327, l), uaa, I placed (§ 269, D.,iind § 275). 

Obs. — These verbs originally began with a consonant, and therefore 
had the Syllabic Augment : PepyaK-o-fiai (§ 34, D.), k-PepyaK-o-fxriv ; 
<^«X-^ (§ 327, 6), i-aex-o-v. Then the consonant was dropped : 
t-epya^-o-fir]v, e-ex-o-v ; finally ee was regularly contracted to « 
(§ 36) : elpyaZ-o-fiTjv, slx-o-v. 

§ 237. toprdKo), I celebrate^ has the Augment in the second vowel: 
eojpTttZov for riopraKov (compare § 37, D. 2). Verbs which origin- 
ally began with a digamma (§ 34, D.), consequently with a con- 
sonant, have the Syllabic Augment in spite of their initial vowel : 
dvddvoj, I please, e-dv5avov; ovp'no, I make water; ojOsoj, I push; 
wvsofiai, I buy (§ 275). Both Augments, Syllabic and Temporal, 
are combined in opdoj, I see, k^paov (tojpojv) ; dv-oiy-u), I open, 

dv-k(j)y-o-v. 

§ 238. Verbs compounded with a preposition have the 



§ 237. Dialects. — Homer forms t<i}vox6u from olvoxokM, I pour out 
wine ; irjvSavov (Herod, idvdavov) and r]vdavov from dvddvu), I please. 
Compare § 34, D., 1 and 4. 



134 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 239. 

Augment immediately after the preposition : ug-(j)ip-(jj, I 
carry in, eig-t-(pEp-o-v ; irpoq-ay-u), I lead to, irpoQ-riy-o-v ; 
Ijc, out of, becomes l^ before the Augment ; I ^-ij^-o-v, I 
led out. ^he true forms of lv,in, and (tvv, with, altered 
by assimilation (§ 51) in the Present, appear again before 
e : avX-Xiy-o), I collect, avv-i-Xey-o-v ; E/i-jSaXX-w, I invade^ 
ev-e-f^aW'O-v. 

The final vowel of a preposition is elided : a7r-£-^fjO-o-v, 
J carried away, from a7ro-<f)ip-(jj ; only irepl and irpo never 
lose their final vowel ; but irpo is often contracted with e : 
Trpov-j5aivov, from 7rpo-i-(5aiv-o-v, I inarched on. 

§ 239. Exceptions. — Some verbs, which are not merely compomid- 
ed with prepositions, but derived from already compound nouns 
(Decomposita), have the Augment at the 'beginning: ivavTioo/iai 
(from tvavTiog, against), rivavTiovuriv (from oonrjv), I icas against; 
poet, rfvapov, from Ivaipo), I slay ; Trapprjaid^ofiai (from Trapprjaia, 
freedom of speech), iirappri<nal6}iriv, I spoke freely ; but the majority 
nevertheless have it in the middle : iKKXijaid^io, I assemble, from 
tKicXrjffia, assembly, l^eKXrjmaZov ; vTroTrTevio, I suspect, from vTrowTog, 
suspicious, VTTOJTrrwov ; Karrjyopsu), I accuse, Karrjyopovv (from eov). 
Trapavofieu), I act contrary to law (from Trapd-vofiog, contrary to law), 
has irregularly Traprjvofxow (eov). 

§ 240. Many prepositions have in some compounds so far lost their 
distinctive meanings that the verbs are treated as simple : KuOevdoj, 
I sleep, tKaOev^ov, yet KaOijvSov also ; KaOi^io, I sit, tKaOi^ov. Com- 
]3are the verbs 'Irjfii {d<pirip.i, § 313), 'ivwfii (dfi<pievvvixi, § 319, 5), 
t)fiai {Kd9r]fiai, § 315, 2). Some verbs also have a double Aug- 
ment : dvkxofiai, I endure, -qvuxonrjv ; dvopQoio, I raise up, rjvwpQovv 
(oov) ; evoxXioj, I encutriber, rjvMxXovv (sov) ; irapoiveb), I a,ct as a 
drunkard, iirapi^vow. So also ^lairdtx), I live (from diaira, mode of 
life), ediyrcjv (aov) ; didicovsb),! serve, IdirjKovovv {eov). 

§ 241. dvg, had, ill, in composition is preceded by the Augment 
when the second word begins with a consonant or long vowel : 
^vQTvx^i^i I cim unfm'tunate, ISvqtvxow (eov) ; dvgdJTrscj, I make a 
sour face, i^vgw-n-ovv (eov) ; but short vowels receive the Temporal 
Augment after bvg : SygapeffHio, I displease, dygi^pearow (eov). 

Compounds with e v generally have no Augment : evrvxow (eov), 
I was fortunate ; but short vowels occasionally receive the Tem- 
poral Augment after ev : evrjpyeTow (eov), together with evepyerow, 
from evepyerkio, I do good. 



243. CONTRACTED VERBS. 135 

§ 242. All other compounds have the Augment at the beginning : 
TjOviiovv, from dOvixeio, I am without courage. 



C. ContraGted Verbs 

§ 243. Verbs whose Present- Stem ends in a, e, or o, reg- 
ularly contract these vowels in all forms of the Present- 
Stem with the connecting vowel, and hence are called Oo7i- 
tracted Verbs. The laws of contraction given in §§ 36-38 



§ 243. Dialects. — The Ion. dialect very often does not contract ; but 
the three kinds of contracted verbs are treated differently. 
A. Homer inflects the a-Stems in three ways ; 

1. The syllables regularly contracted by the Attic writers remain 
open and unchanged: doidid-ei,he sings; vaisTd-ovai, they dwell; and 
the Fem. Part, vaierawora for vaierdovaa, with a remarkable change of 

OV to (t). 

2. Contraction takes place : dpsT^ = dpeTd-n, he thrives, from dpeTdw ; 
Trpog-ijvSa = 7rpog-T]vSa-ej from Trpog-avddoj, I address. Sometimes a e 
becomes rj (not d) : irpog-avSrfTriv (3 Dual Imperf ), oprjai — also with 
regular accent — (from 6pd-eai) = Att. 6p^ (2 Sing. Pres. Ind. Mid.). 

3. Extension instead of contraction takes place when a vowel of the 
same kind is inserted before the long one which results from con- 
traction : 6pdu),I see, contracted 6pu>, extended 6p6oj. 

a) This inserted vowel is usually sJwrt. Hence opdio is thus in- 
flected : 



Mid. 



Act. Pr. Ind. 


6pd-(0 


itt. 


bpoj I 


lorn 


. bp6<o 






opd-eig 




op4q 


u 


bpd^g 






bpd-si 




bpq. 


u 


bpd^ 






opd-ovai 




bpaxn 


u 


bpoiaai 




Subj. 


6pd-(o 




bptj 


u 


bp6(i> 






opd-yg 




op^Q 


a 


bpdifg, etc. 




Opt. 


opd-oifii 




bpvixi 


u 


bpotftfii 




Inf. 


opd-Eiv 




bpdv 


u 


bpdav 




Part. 


bpd-iov 




bpSiV 


u 


bpoiov 






bpd-ovaa 




bpSxra 


(( 


bpoiacra 




Gen. 


opd-ovTog 




bpwvTog 


(( 


bpoojvTog 


2. Sing. 


Ind. 


bpd-y 




bpq. 


(( 


bpdg, 


3. Plur. 




bpd-ovrai 




bpwvrai 


u 


bp6u)VTai 


Opt. 3. 


Plur. 


bpd-oiVTO 




bpt^VTO 


11 


bp6(^VT0 


Inf. 




bpd-eaOai 




bpdoBai 


a 


bpdaffOai 


3. Plur. 


Impf. 


eojpd-ovTO 




k(t)pS)VTO 


u 


bpodJVTO 



136 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 243. 

are observed. Paradigms of the three verbs tl/liciw, iroiew, 
^ov\6(x), are given on p. 110-113. 

Ods. — As the e i in the Infinitive f i j/ is not original, aeiv, oeiv do 
not become ^v, oiv, but dv, ow (§ 37, Ois.). 



Dialects. 

I) sometimes long, e. g., 

r'lfid-ovcra Att. rjjSuKTa Hom. -q ^u)0) a a 
from ri^du), I am youtliful ; so also from Spdijj,Ido; 

dpd-ovai Att. dpwai Hom. d p w cj (t i 
and from fivdonai, I remember ; 

fivd-eaOai Att. iivdaQai Hom. fivdaaOai. 

After long 'vowels, the one following is sometimes shortened : 

fiva-ofievoQ Att. fiviofxevoQ Hom. jxv o) 6 fiev o g 
r)(Bd-ovTeg " rjfiwvTeQ " r) fSMOVTsg 

The metre chiefly determines which of the vowels "should be long 
or short. Such forms, for instance, as dpsTdg, C ")? vjSoojvTeg (""""), 
are inadmissible. ^^ 

In Herod., the Stems in a often pass over into the conjugation oi 
the Stems in e : 6pk(o (but 6p^g, 6p^), dpeofiEv, bpkovai, opeovreg. Instead 
of £0 we also find €w : opsiovTeg. Homer also has ijvTeov = Att. ijvriov 
(from dvrd-(i), I meet) ; Xjoew/xevof = Att. xp'^h^vog, making use of. 

B. Stems in e fluctuate between the open and contracted forms, 
eo is often monosyllabic by synizesis (§ 39): Wpi^vEov, I complained ; 
often also in Ionic contracted to e y : Hom. vevfiai =z Att, vkofiai, I 
return home, eov rarely becomes e v : veiKevai = vuKovai, they quarrel. 
e € becomes rj irregularly in Hom. : ofiapTrjrrjv (ofiaprsoj, I rmet with), 
d-7rELXr]TT}v (aTTEiXeio, I threaten), dopTrrjrrjv (dopTreo),! Slip), Inf. ^oprjuevai =: 
Att. (popeiv, to carry. An utterly anomalous Infinitive is (popjjvai. 

The second e in the 3 Sing. Mid. is sometimes dropped : fivOsaL for 
fivOkai (Att. fiv9y, fivOei, tTwu sayest) ; ttwXso = Att. iTrwX'ov, thou hadst 
intercourse ; sometimes e e are contracted to e t : fivOelai. The first 
way is usual in Herod. Homer also prolongs e to e t without con- 
traction: veiKdtit =z Att. veiKw; ereXy'ero = Att. ereXelro (TeXw, I complete). 

C. Stems in o are mostly contracted: yowovfiai, I supplicate. Some 
have an extension like those in a : dp6io(n(v) =z Att. dpov(n(v), they 
plow; dT]i6(i)ev =: Att. dr]'ioTev,t7iey would destroy; vTrvojovrag =z Att. vir- 
vovvrag, the sleepers. 

In Herod, o sometimes changes to e, and with o is contracted to 
£v : tdiKai(ivv=: Att. ediKaiovv, deemed right. 



§ 245. PRESENT AND VERBAL-STEMS. 137 

§ 244. Obs. — 1. Monosyllabic Stems in t admit only the contraction 
€1. All syllables which, contracted, would produce another 
sound, remain uncontracted. 

Stem TT \ € (Pres. ttXsw, / sail, Inf. irXuv) ' 
TrXkig 'jrXeiQ, but ttXsu) 

TrXeei rrXei, " rrXkovci 

tTrXEEQ iirXeig, " tirXeov 

deio, I Und, forms an exception, having to dovv (Seov), ^oviiat, etc., 
to distinguish them from forms of deu), I am in want of; M, it is 
necessary; to deop, duty. 

2. Some Stems in a have a preference for rj, which they admit in 
the place of d : ^a-w, / live, ^yg, Z,y, KvTe, Zi]v ; Truvd-oj, I am hun- 
gry, TTHvriv', Sixpa-u), I thirst, di-^fjv; so also Kvd-u), I scratch ; afid-cj, 
I stroke ; ^j^d-oj, I scrape ; and xpa-o/xai, I Tuake use of . 

3. piyo-h), I freeze, has w and ^ for ov and oi: Inf. piyujv, Opt. pt- 

4. Xovio, I wash, lav-o, has a peculiar contraction ; that is, the con- 
necting vowel after o v disappears : i-Xov for e-Xov-e ; Xov-fiai for 
Xov-o-fiai, etc. In like manner, ol-o-fiai is often contracted to 
ol-jxai, I think, and the Imperf. (^-S-fiijv to (^-firjv. 

D. Distinction of the Present-Stem J^rom the Verbal- 
Stem. 

% 245. We call that jjart of a verb the Verbal Stem 
from the combination of which with the terminations of 
persons, tenses, moods, infinitives, and participles, consist- 
ently with the laws of euphony, all the forms of the verb 
may be explained : X v, Pres. Xuw, Perf. XeXu/ca, Fut. Xuo-w ; 
T t fxa, Pres. Tijicujjf Perf. rerijuriKa, Fut. tijuliictu). 

Obs. — From the Verbal-Stem also nouns are formed by means of 
the nominal suffixes : Xv-<n-Q, loosing ; Xv-rfip, looser; Xv-rpo-v, re- 
demption fee; Ti-firj-m-g, valication ; Tifi7]-Tr)-g, censor. 

When the Verbal- Stem can not be traced farther back, 
it is called a Poot : X v, and a verb formed from it, a Root- 
Verh: Xvw. But when the Verbal-Stem is itself a Nom- 



§ 244. Dialects. — 3. For xRW^i- Herod, has xp«7-at. 

4, Horn. 3 Sing. Imperf X6e (for Xofe, § 35, Ol)s.)=Xov6, tXove. 



138 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 246* 

inal-Stem formed by means of a. nominal suffix, it is said 
to be derived : rifia is at once the Nominal- Stem o^ tijuti, 
honor, formed by the nominal suffix ju a from the root r i, 
and the verb* formed from it is a derivative one : Tifiait). 

Obs. — Boots are almost all of one syllable ; derived Stems are of 
two or more syllables. 

§ 246. The Yerhal-Stem is not always like the Present- 
Stem, but the Present- Stem is frequently an extension 
of the Verbal-Stem : Pres. Xuir-is), I leave, Present-Stem 
X £ t TT, Verbal- Stem X i tt (Aorist iXiirov), 

Such additions are called enlargements of the Present ; 
the Verbal- Stem divested of them is the jpii^re Verbal- 
Stem. 

Obs. — Where the Verbal-Stem differs from the Present-Stem, nouns 
are usually formed from the former, not from the latter : Verbal- 
Stem V y, Present-Stem ^ e v y, substantive ^uy-?? {fug-a)^ adj. 
(pvy-diS) -Q, fugitive. 

§ 247. The relation of the Present-Stem to the Verbal- 
Stem produces four classes of verbs with some subdi- 
visions. 

1. First Class (unenlarged). 

The Present-Stem is like the Yerhal-Stem. 

This comprises, first of all, the pure verbs, i. e., verbs 
whose stem ends in a vowel (with the exception of a small 
number in c w, § 248, and many others besides : rijia-Wy 
^ov\6-(i), irai^ev-u), I educate ; \v-w,I loose ; Ti-b),I honor ; 
apx'h}, I rule ; ay-w, I lead ; Xey-tj, I say. 

§ 248. 2. Second Class (lengthened class). 

The Stem vowel is lengthened in the Present-Stem. 

This comprises several verbs whose Stem ends in a 
inute, and which in the Present have a diphthong or a long 
vowel, as : 



§ 248. Dialects. — To these belongs the Hom. (rivto^IJiurry^ from the 

Stem cry. 



§ 249. PRESENT AND VERBAL-STEMS. 139 



({>Evy-ixi 


, I flee, Pure Stem ^vy {^vy 


-i), flight, Lat fuga). 


XsiTT-a) 


, I leave, " 


a 


XtTT 


• 


TreiO-ot 


, I persuaxle, " 


u 


TT I e {mB- 


av6-g, persuasive). 


Tf]K-U), 


I melt, 


u 


TOLK 




rpt^-dj 


,Irvb, " 


a 


rpi^ 




it, besides these, there are 


also 


six verbs in e w, viz. : 




TrXeu), I sail, 




Pure Stem 


ttXv 




Trvko),Il)low, 






TTVV 




veio, I sail, 




" " . 


VV 




peu), I flow, 






pv 




Osio, I run, 






9v 




xki»,Ipour, 






x^ 



Obs. — The v of these Stems was lengthened to e v, but resolved to 
£p before vowels (compare § 35, D. 2) ; finally the f was dropped : 
TrXv-TrXevM-TrXePio-TrXeu). The diphthong appears in the substan- 
tives unresolved : 7rvev-fia, Ireath ; pev-fia, stream. Compare 
§ 260, 2. 

§ 249. 3. Third Class (T-class). 
The Present-Stem affixes r to the Verbal-Stem. 
*This comprises only verbs whose Pure Stems end in 
Labials, as : 

TviTT-oj, I strike. Pure Stem tvtt (rvTrog, stroke). 

(SXaTTT-u), I injure, " " /3 \ a /3 (pXafif), injury). 

(SaTTT-b), I dip, " " I3a<p (J3d<prj, a dip). 

and, besides — 

TiKT-u),Il)ringforth, " " t^k {rkROQ, child). 

The final consonant of the Pure Stem is called here*, as 
in the verbs of the following class, the character. On the 
changes of sound, see § 45. 

other Examples. 

KOTTTO), I cut, Stem KOTT 

KXhlTTii), I steal, " K \ € TT 

KpitTTTii), I hide, * " Kpv<pOYKpv(3 

Odirro), I bury, " r a (§ 54, c). 



§ 249. Dialects. — The Stem (3Xa(3 in Hom. has a Pres. (BXafierai, like 
class 1. 



140 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 250. 

§ 250. 4. Fourth Class (I-class). 

The Fresent-Btem adds i to the Verbal-Stem [Latin 
fug-i-o, Pure Stem fiog]. The l is here subject to the 
various changes and transpositions discussed in §§ 55- 
58^ viz. : 

a) The Gutturals k, y, x foi"â„¢? with t, the group (to- 
(New-Att.rr) (§57); 

^v\daa(o,I gtiard^instesLd'of <pv\aKio), Pure Stem <i)v\aK ((pvXaKrt, a 

guard). 
rdcTffoj, Z arrange, " raytoj, " " Tay (Tayog, ar- 

ranger), 
rapdaai,}, I confuse, " rapaxio, " " rap ax {japaxh, 

confusion). 

Other Examples. 
eXi(T(T(o (k) , I roll. 7rpd(Tffu) (y) , / do. dpvaao) (%) , / dig. 

KT]pv<T(Tio (k) , I proclaim. o-^drrw (y) , / slay. 

Obs. — The character of the Presents dpnoTTw, I fit ; Trdamo, I scatter; 
Trkdaau), I shape ; (3pd<Tao), I seethe ; ipkaaio,! row ; TTTiaffoj^Istamp; 
(SXiTTU), I abstract honey, is a dental ; Trecraa), I boil, has Stem ttstt' 
irregularly. 

§ 251. I) 8, and more rarely 7, with i, form Z (§ 58): 
tZojuiai, I sit, instead of t^io/uai, Pure Stem £ ^ (fS-oc, seat, 
Latin sedes) ; Kpa Jw, I cry, instead of Kpayiw, Pure Stem 

Other Examples. 
^pd(^io (S) , I say. oZio (d) , / smell. ax^Zm (S) , I split. 

Obs. — Present-Stems in K which express a sound have the Verbal- 
Stem in y: arevd^ii), I sigh ; olfiw^o), I wail; olfiojy-r], a wailing; 
moreover, (rrdZio,! trickle; arilio, I priclc, Lat. in-stig-o; ixaari^io, 



§ 250. Dialects. — The Stems of the Presents i/xdcrao), I whip; XiV- 
aofiai^ I beseech ; Kopvcrcru),! arm; Herod, d^dcrao),! touch, end in Den- 
tals (X I r, KopvO); Horn. Iviaau), I blaTne, has irregularly the Stem 

IviTT. 

§ 251. Dialects. — In all dialects, Presents in -Zio much more fre- 
quently have a Guttural for their character, in Hom. especially in 
dXaTrd^u), I conquer; datZco, I divide; ixepfir]pi(^<o, I ponder; TroXefil^u), I 
war; ory^eXt^w, / strike, etc. 



§ 253. PRESENT AND VERBAL STEMS. 141 

/ wTiip, and some others. K\d^a>, / mZZ, Stem k \ a y y, K\ayy-rj, a 
call; 7r\dZ(o, I mislead ; craXTriKd), Illoio a trumpet, haye a Pure 
Stem in yy ; vi^u), I wash, has irregularly the Stem v i (5. 

§ 252. c) X with l forms XX (§ 56): 

/3aXAfa>, I throw, for (SaXioj, Pure Stem (3a\ (j3e\-og, a shot). 
aXXofiai, I leap, " aXiofiai, " " aX [sal-i-o]. 
riXXii),Iplttch, " TiXiu), " " TiX 

Other Examples. 
9dXX(o, I lloom. <T<pa.XXoj, I cause to stagger. oreXXw, / send. 
-TraXXd), I wield. dyyeXXu), I announce. xj^aXXcj, I play on the lyre. 

§ 253. d) V and p throw the l into the preceding syllable 
of the Stem (§ 66) : 

Teivu, I stretch, for tsviu), Pure Stem rev (t6v-o-c, a stretching, Latin 

tendo). 
^Oeipoj, I corrupt, " <p9epi(o, " " (pOep {(pOop-d, corruption). 
<paiv<i), I show, " (pavid), " " <p a v (d-^av-rjg, ir 



Other Examples. 
fxaivofiai, I rage. (nreipo), I sow. lyeipoi), I awaTcen. 

aipu), I raise. dyeipoj, I collect. v^aivw, I weave. 

Obs. — If the Stem syllable has i or v for its vowel, this is length- 
ened by the retreating i : Kpivoj, T sever, judge, from KpXv-nt) ; adpio, 
I drag, from, avp-nd. 

A single Stem in \ also follows this formation, viz.: o^eX, Pres.^ 
ocpdXb), I owe, for 6<peXi<i), to distinguish it from o^lWw, / increase, 
with the same Stem. 

The t unites immediately with the final vowels of the Stems Kav 
and KXav, which then sacrifice their v (P) : Ka-i(o, I burn ; KXa-ito, 
I weep. Additional forms in Attic are Kdoj, »cXda> (§ 35, Obs.). 

N.B. — The other less usual classes of verbs are given below. 



§ 253. Dialects. — Homer joins i immediately with Vowel Stems : 
da-i(D, I bum. Stem ^ a : na-io/jiai, I seeJc, Stem fi a ; va-icj, I dwell. Stem 
V a ; and he uses d^tXXw in the sense of tlR Att. d(j)eiX(o ; but, on the 
other hand, he has tiXw, / press, from the Stem I X for which one 
might expect tXXw (Class 4, c). 



142 II. THE STRONG OR SECOND AORIST-STEM. § 254. 



11. The Strong or Second Aorist-Stem. 
§ 254. The Strong or Second Aorist Active and Middle 
is formed from the Strong Aorist-Stem, which is like the 
Pure Yerbal-Stem, except the few cases named in § 257. 



Pres. 

Stem 



XeiTT-a), I leave. 

X I TT 



rvTTT-o), I strike. 



/3d\X-t 
I3a\ 



I throw. 



Active. 



Aorist 
Ind. 



f-XiTT-o-v, / left. 
e-XiTT-e-g 



i-rvTT-o-v, I struck. 

t-TVTT-E-Q 



i-l3a\-o-v, I threw. 
i-(3aX-e-£ 



etc., like the Imperfects tXeiTrov, trvTrrov, ijSaXKov 



Subj. 



fXi7r-a> 
{XiTT-y-g 



TVTr-(j) 

TVTT-y-g 



/3aX-w 
(iaX-y-g 



etc., like the Pres. Subjunctive XetTrw, rwTrrw, (5d\\i 



Opt. 



|{ 



XlTT-Ol-fll 

XiTT-oi-g 



TVTT-Ol-fll 
TVTT-Ol-g 



(idX-oi-^i 
(idX-oi-g 



etc., like the Pres. Optative Xhttolhi, tvtttoihi, (idXXoifii 



Imper. 



[XtTT-e 
I Xnr-e-T(o 



TVTT-e 

TVir-k-T(o 



/3aX-€ 
(iaX-k-Tia 



etc., like the Pres. Imper. XeiTre, rvTrre, (idXXe. 



Infin. 



XlTT-UV 



(iaX-Hv 



Part. 



XlTT-bJV, XiTT-ovcra, 

XtTT-ov, Gen. XiTT- 
ovTog 



rvTT-iov, rvTr-ovcra, 

TVTT-OV, Gen. TVTT- 

ovrog 



(5aX-d)v, (3aX-ov(Ta, 
(3aX-6v, Gen. jSaX- 
ovTog 



Middle. 



Indie. 



|{ 



i-Xnr-6-iir]v i-Tvir^o-jxinv t(5aX-6-fir]v 

k-XlTT-OV k-TVTT-OV £-/3aX-oi; 

etc., like the Imperf. kXmronriv^ hvTrToixrjv, i(3aXX6fir]v 



Subj. 



IiXiTr-w-fxai Tvir-io-jiai jidX-oi-fiai 

(Xiir-y TVTT-y j3dX-y 

etc., like the Pres. Subj. X«Vw/iat, Tvirriofiai^ j3aXXw/iat 



Opt. 



ijXnr-oi-fH]v Tvir-oi-firiv (iaX-oi-ni]v 

(XlTT-Ol-O I TVTT-Ol-O (idX-Ol-0 

etc., like the Pres. Opt. XMroifii^v, rvTrroifirjv, iSaXXoifirjv 



Imper. 



JXlTT-oi) TVTT-OV (5aX-ov 

I [Xnr-k-ffOu) TVTr-k-aQii) ^aX-'t-cQio 

etc., like the Bres. Imper. Xeittov, tvtttov, (5dXXov 



Infin. I XiTT-s-aBat 



Tvir-k-trOat 



I (iaX-'s-ffOai 



Part. j Xi7r-6-/u£vo-c, ?;, o-v \ TV7r-6-/ievo-g, rj, o-v | f3aX-6-iiisvo-g, rj, o-v 



§ 257. II. THE STRONG OR SECOND AORIST-STEM. 143 

§ 255. 1. The Inflexion of the Strong Aorist-Stem dif- 
fers from that of the Present- Stem (Imperfect and Present 
tenses) ofily in the accent of the following forms : the In- 
fin. Act. is perispome Q^vkuv), the Infin. Mid. paroxytone 
{\i7ri(jdai)y the Part. Act. accents the 0-sound {Xnrtjv, \i- 
TTovaa), the 2 Sing. Imper. Mid. is perispome {Xiirov). 

2. The Aorist Middle has not, like the Present Middle, 
the meaning also of the Passive : thus ipaXofirjv means only 
I threw for myself but not I was thrown. 

On the Augment of the Indicative, §§ 234-242. 

§ 256. The Strong Aorist can be formed only from such 
verbs as have a Present- Stem different from the Pure 
Verbal- Stem, therefore not from the verbs of the First 
(unenlarged) Class (§ 247). Also it is not usually formed 
from many verbs of other classes, and scarcely occurs at all 
from any hvX Root-Yerhs (§ 245). 

Obs. — On the Aorists of the verbs ^w-w and ^y-w (class 1), see §§ 316, 
16, 17. 

§ 257. In a few verbs the Strong Aorist Stem is distinguished from 
the Pure Verbal Stem ; viz., instead of e of the latter, the Strong 
Aor. sometimes has a, by which rpgTr-w, / tum^ though belonging 
to the first class, has a Strong Aor. : t-rpaTr-o-v (Impf t-TpETr-o-v), 
e-Tpair-6-fir]v. An isolated formation is Pres. Tptljy-io, I gnaw, Aor. 
t-Tpay-o-v. ay-Wj I drive, likewise belonging to the first class, by 
doubling the Verbal-Stem forms the Aorist-Stem ay-ay, whence 
Ind. : iiy-ay-o-v, Subj. dy-dy-w, Inf. ay-ay-uv. 



§ 255. Dialects. — 1. All the peculiarities enumerated § 233, D., ex- 
tend likewise to the Strong Aorist : 2 Sing. Subj. (SaXriaOa, 3 Sing. 
(3aXT]<n, etc. The Inf Aor. Act. ends in Horn, also in Uiv instead of 
elv (fiaXUiv). 

2. The Middle Aorist forms of the Stems c r a (§ 316, 4), /3 \ t; (§ 316, 
19), ovra (§ 316, 20), exceptionally have a Passive meaning. 



144 



III. THE FUTURE-STEM. 



§258. 



III. The Future- Stem. 

§ 258. From the Future-Stem are formed the'Fut. Act; 
ive and Middle. 



First Future 
{The a Future). 


Second Future 
(Contracted Future). 


Pres. 


Xuu), Stem \ V 
Fut. Stem Xva 


Pres. (paivo), I show, Stem (pav 
Fut. Stem <pdve 


Active. 


Indie. 


Xixr-w, I shall loose, 

Xv(T-eig, etc. 

like the Pres. Xv(o 


(pavfo), a, I shall show. 
<pdvk-(.ig, iig, etc. 
like the Present tto/w 


Opt. 

Infin, 

Part. 


Xvff-oi-fit 

XV(T-EIV 

Masc. Xvff-wv 
Fem. Xva-ovaa 
Neut. Xv(T-ov 
Gen. Xv(T-ovroc 


(pave-oirjv, oii]v 
<pavk-uv, elv 
(pave-iov, wv 
<pavk-ov(ja, ovaa 
<pavs-ov, ovv 
^avE-ovTog, ovvTog 


Middle. 


Indie. 


Xv(T-o-ixai, I shall loose for 

myself. 
like the Present Xvo^ai 


(pave-o-fiai, ovfiai, I shall ap- 
pear. 
like the Present iroiovfiai 


Opt. 

Infin. 

Part. 


Xv<r-oi-fir]v 
Xv(T-E-(r9ai 
Xv<T-6-fievog, ij, op 


^ave-oi-firjv, oifiriv 
<pavk-e.-(jBai, uaBat 
(pave-o-fievog, ovfievog, t), ov 



§ 257. Dialects. — Horn., in the case of several Stems with p, forms 
the Strong Aorist by metathesis (§ 59), and by changing e into a : 
depK-o-jxai, I see, t-SpaK-ov ; TrspO-oj, I destroy, e-rrpaO-o-v ; in others by 
the syncope of € (§ 61, c) : l-rrT-o-firjv {-Trkr-op-ai, I fly)-, e-yp-e-ro (Stem 
iyep, Pres. class 4, d, iyeipo), I awake) ; Part, dyp-6-fjievoi, assembled; 
Inf. dyep-eaOai (Pres. class 4, d, dyeipnj). 

Reduplication occurs in Homer in a great many Aorists : l-xk-^pdd- 
o-v (Stem (ppad, Pres. class 4, h, ^pdZej, I indicate) ; m-TrXQ-o-v (Stem 
TTiO, Pres. class 3, tthOo), I persuade) ; ire-TrdX-wv (Pres. class 4, c, TrdXXw, 
I Tyrandish) ; Aor. Mid. 3 Sing. : TE-rdpTr-e-To {rkpir-o-^ai, I rejoice) ; 



§ 260. III. THE FUTURE-STEM. 145 

§ 259. 1. The Inflexion of the Future- Stem is the same 
as that of the Present- Stem, i. e.^ that of the a Future is 
the ordinary Inflexion, that of the contracted future is the 
Inflexion of the contracted Present of £ Stems (§§ 231, 
232, and 243). 

§ 260. The <t Future forms the Future- Stem by adding 
<r to the Yerbal-Stem: Xu, \va. All Stems ending in a 
vowel or a mute have the a Future. The cr, according to 
§ 48, with gutturals makes 5, with labials ;/», and admits 
of no dentals before it (§ 49) : ay-w, / drive^ Fut. a^-w ; 
ypa(j)'(i), J write, Fut. ypa^p-i*) ; a^-w, I sing, Fut. (ttr-w ; 
(TTTtvS-w, liho, Fut. aTTEid-oj for o-TrtvS-orw (§ 50). About 
Opi^w, Stem T pecj), Ovxpd), Stem rvcf), and others, see § 54. 

2. Verbs of the second or extended class (§ 248) retain 
the extended Stem also in the Future : Xt t/T-w, Xd\p-u) ; the 
six verbs in eu) mentioned in § 248 show their strengthened 
form in the Fut., though it is not seen in the Present : TrXtw, 
TrXevaoiuai ; in like manner, icXatw brings out its Pure Stem 
icXau in icXauo-a), and jcato) in Kavcrtsj (§ 253). About x^w, 
see § 265. 

3. Of verbs of the third or T class, and of those of the 
fourth or I class (§ 249, etc.), the Pure Stem must be 
found in order to form the Future : tvittu) (class 4), Pure 
Stem TV IT, Fut. Tv\p<jj ; ^uXao-o-w, Pure Stem (pvXaK, Fut. 



Stem <p I d (class 2), <pddofiai, Inf. Aor. 7re-(pid-s-(T9ai, also Fut. ttc-^i^-?}- 
aofiai. Isolated Aorists are : £-/c8-/c(€)\-€-ro, he called, from KeXofiai ; tte- 
(pv-o-v, I Mlled (Stem ^ e v) ; rk-rfi-o-v (I hit, Stem r e /w) ; rt-ray-wv 
{seizing, Stem ray, Lat. tango). riv-iTr-aTr-o-v (T scolded, Pres. iv'nrTU)), 
along with kv-kv'nr-o-v, and ripvK-aK-o-v (I kept &ac^, Pres. tjOVKw), have 
the reduplication in the middle of the word. The reduplication in 
this case every where belongs to the Tense-Stem, and, as in the Per- 
fect-Stem (§ 273), is preserved in all the moods, in the Infin., and the 
Participle. The Indie, may add the Augment or omit it before the 
reduplication. (§ 234, D.) 

§ 259. Dialects. — About the contraction, see § 243, D. 



146 III. THE FUTURE-STEM. § 261. 

(j)vXaK,w ; (f)paZ(j>), Pure Stem (p pa^, Fut. (l>pa(rii). Accord- 
ingly^ verbs ending in the Present in -(raoj or -ttm gener- 
ally make the Fut. in -gw, and those having the Present 
in ^w generally have their Future in -o-w. 

According to this rule, let the Future be formed of 
iXiacFw, I roll / Krjpv(7<T(i), I jproclaim / irpaaad), I do / 
o-\t'2aj, I split ; ^LKaZd), I judge ; ottXiZu), I arm ; and 
let the Presents be found to the Futures dpv^w, (T(j)a^(i), 
^laaopaiy Xoyttjopai. 

Verbs with a dental character ending in the Present 
in -aau) or -ttu), naturally (§ 250, Obs.) make the Future 
in -(Tit) : ttXckho (Pres. TrXao-o-w, T shape), apfxoaw (Pres. 
apfxoTTU), I fif) ; and, on the other hand, those with the 
character y, which have the Present in -^w (§ 251, Ohs^, 
make their Future in -^w : trrcva^w (Pres. (siival^u), I sigh) ; 
GTi^w (Pres. (rrt^w, I jprick). 

§ 261. Vowel^Stems have their vowels long before o- ; 
a becomes a if preceded by f, t, or p (§ 41), in all other 
cases it becomes x). Every other short vowel is changed 
into the corresponding long one : ta-w, / leave^ ed(T-<jj ; 
la-ojiaiy I heal, lacT-Ofim ; ^pa-w, I do, ^pdcr-ix) ; but rifxa-ii), 
Tifiria-ix) ; /3oa-w, I cry out, Pot](T-oiuaL ; lyyva-(i), I hand 
over, ^yyvrjcT-ii) ; iroii-u), 7rofr}o-w, ^ovXow, dovXtja-u). 

The Stem x p « {xP^^>^ 9'^'^^ ^^ oracle ; xpao/uaiy Itcse) 
exceptionally has t/ in the Future : \pi](Hi), '\pi](jop.ai ; 
whereas aKpodofxai, T listen, has aKpoaaojuai, 

Respecting the Future with a short vowel, see § 301. 

§ 262. The contracted Future forms the Future- Stem 



§ 261. Dialects. — The Ion. dialect has ri even after e,i,p: Trupijoofiai, 
I shall endeavor. The Ep. dialect sometimes doubles the a when the 
vowel is short : alSsaao/xai (aideoiJiai, I feel shame). The Hom. Futures 
aXaTrd^w, TroXe/ii'^w, <TTV(pe\i^a), and others, with their Presents in -^w, 
are explained in § 251, D. 

§ 262. Dialects. — Stem Oep has in Hom. the Fut. Oepffofiai, Pres. 
Osponai, I grow warm; Stem Kep (Pres. class 4, d, Keipao, I shave), Fut 
KEpffo) ; Stem <pvp, Pres. (pvp(t),Imii:^ Fut. tpvpao). 



§ 264. III. THE FUTURE-STEM. 147 

by adding t to the Verbal- Stem : (pav, (pave. This form 
of the Future occurs in Stems ending in X, iui,v,p; and 
the Stem voioel is short : vejuw, I distribute^ Fut. ve\iu) ; 
a^Vvw, I defend, a/uvvw. Verbs of the seventh class here 
show their Pure Stem (§§ 252, 253) : /3aAXw, / throw, 
paXu) ; (paivwj <f)avu) ; ktsivm, I hill, ktbvw ; (jiOeipio, (f)6epio ; 
ayytWu), ayyeXw. 

According to this rule, let the Future be formed of 
<T0aAXw, I cause to fall; (rriXXw, I semi; p.aivo^ai, I rave ; 
atpWf I lift ; and the Present (class 4) of (nrepw, irotKiXu), 
trrifiavu), r}dvvLJ, 

Exceptions. — The Stems /ceX (keXXw, class 4, c^ I Mock against) and 
Kv p (Kvpeu), I meet) have the o- form of the Future : KaXaoj, Kvpffoj. 

Obs. — The contracted Future is properly a peculiar fonn of the a 
Future, for (pavs-oj has arisen from ^av-e-a-o) (§ 61, &), in which e 
is the connecting vowel. 

§ 263. Several Stems in c (Pres. tw), aS (Pres. a^w), and 
iS (Pres. f^w), throw out the o in the Future. Those in s 
and ad then contract the vowels £ and a with the connect- 
ing vowel : TeXi-tj, I complete, rfXeV-w, rtXtw, rf Xw ; 1 Plur. 
TfXto/xev, r £ X o u /i £ V (as in the Present) ; [5ij3a!^io, I hring, 
(5ij3a(T-ii)y (5i(5au)y j3(j3w ; 1 Plur. j5if5aopev, /3</3w^£y. To 
these also belongs IXckjo, eXw, 2 Sing. IX^g, 3 Sing. £X«, from 
the irregular Present iXavvw,! d/'ive ; compare § 321, 2. 

Stems in id after dropping the <t insert e, Avhich is con- 
tracted with the connecting vowel : KOjUt'Sw, / carry, Fut. 
Act. KOfxia-Wf Kopi'i-ii), Ko fxitjfl Plur. Kojuiiofiev, KOjuiovjuiev ; 
Fut. Mid. KO fjiiov jjLai. 

This form of the Future is called the Attic. 

§ 264. Some verbs take an £ after the o- of the Future, 
which is contracted with the connecting vowel : 7rv£w, I 
hreathe. Stem irw, irvtvaovfiaL ; TrXew, I sail. Stem irXv, 



§ 263. Dialects. — The Futures in aw in the Horn, dialect are treated 
exactly like the Presents (§ 243, D. A.), hence tX6w, tXa^^, IXdq. 



148 III. THE FUTURE-STEM. § 265. 

TrXEVdovjuai along with TrX^vaojiaL ; (pavyii), I fl^^e^ Stem ^ u y, 
(jiEv^ovfiaL and (pEvKofxai. This kind of Future, which oc- 
curs only in the Middle voice with an Active meaning, is 
called the Doric. 

§ 265. Few verbs form their Future without any tense 
sign : ^au), I^our, Fut. Act. x^^f Mid. x^ojiai, and so also 
among the irregular verbs tdofiai, I shall eat (§ 327, 4), 
and TTLoum, I shall drink (§ 321, 4). 

§ 266. The Future Middle generally has a Middle sense, 
but in many verbs it has a Passive, and in not a few an 
Active meaning; the last is the case especially in verbs 
denoting a bodily activity : r/^w, / sing ; aKova), I hear ; 
cnravrdijjy I meet ; aTroXavu), I enjoy ; (dadiZtv, I walk 
(f^adiovjuai) ; jSoaw, I call out / ytXaw, / laugh / oi/iwjw, 
J bewail / aiyaio and o-twTraw, I am silent / cTrouSa^w, I 
am zealous. Irregular verbs (§ 320, etc.) very frequently 
have a Middle Future with Active meaning. 



§ 265. Dialects. — The Horn. (3eiofiai or (ikofiai, I shall live, akin to 
/3i6w, / live, is likewise formed without a tense sign. 



§267. 



IV. THE WEAK OR FI 



ly. The Weak or FiRS^&e^fsf^S^H^^ v5^ 

§ 267. From the Stem of the Weak or First Aorist are 
formed the Weak (or First) Aorist Active and Middle. 



Pres. 


\v-ixi 




^aiv-oj 




Stem 


Xv 




.Pure Stem (pdv 




1. (T 


Form. 


2. Supplementary Form. 




Stem of Weak Aorist Xva d 


<pijvd 






Active. 


Middle. 


Active. 


Middle. 


Indie. 


i-Xv(Ta,Iho'sed. 


e-Xvad-fiTjv^ I 
loosed for myself. 


showed. 


t-<pr]vd-jxr]v 




t-Xvaa-Q 


l-Xvau) 


t-(pi]va-g 


k-(^r]V(i} 




i-Xv(Te{v) 


l-Xv<Ta-TO 
e-Xv(Td-fie-9ov 


t-(l)r]ve{v) 


i-(pr]va-TO 
k-pr]vd-fie-9ov 




l-Xvaa-Tov 


i-Xma-<j9ov 


e-<l>r]va-TOV 


i.-(pr]va-a9ov 




h-Xv(jd-Tr]v 


i-Xv(Td-a9i]v 


l-<pT]vd-Tr]v 


e-(l)r]vd-(x9t]v 




i-Xvaa-fxev 


t-Xv(Td-fie9a 


l-(l>rjva-ixEv 


i-(pT]vd-ixe-9a 




i-Xvaa-re 


e-Xv(Ta-(T9e 


i-<prjva-TE 


e<pr]va-(T9e 




i-Xvaa-v 


k-Xvaa-vTO 


e-<pT)va-v 


i-^{]va-VTO 


Subjunct. 


Xmu) 


Xvcr<x)-fiai 


(prjvoj 


<pT)VU)-fiaL 




XvayQ 


Xvcry 


<pf]vyQ 


(pnvy 


etc., lit 


:e the Pres. Act. < 


md Mid. 




Optative. 


Xv<Tai-fJLi 


Xv(yai-fxr]v 


(pr]vai-fit 


^r]val-fir]V 




Xvaai-Q or 


Xvaai-o 


^r}vai-Q or 


<pr]vaL-o 




XvauaQ 




<pr]VHaQ 






Xvaai or 


Xvaai-TO 


(prjvai or 


(pr]vai-TO 




Xvauiiy) 


Xv(Tai-fie9ov 


(l)r}veiE{v) 


(j)r]vai-fis9ov 




Xixjai-Tov 


Xv(jai-a9ov 


(prjvai-Tov 


(pr}Vai-a9ov . 




Xv(rai-rr}v 


Xv<rai-(j9r]v 


(pr]vai-Tr]v 


(pT)vai-(T9r}P 




XixTai-fxev 


Xv(Tai-fie9a 


^rjvai-fiev 


(p7]vai-fii.9a 




\v(Jai-TE 


Xv(rai-<T9e 


<pr]vai-TS. 


<pr]vai-(79e 




Xmai-ev or 


Xvaai-VTO 


(prjvai-ev or 


(prjvai-vro 




Xvaei-av 




(prjvet-av 




Imperat. 


Xv(TO-V 


Xvaai 


(pfjvo-v 


(l)i]vai 




Xvad-TU) 


Xv(Td-(79oJ 


(j)r]vd-T(o 


<pT]vd-(T9<x) 




Xvcra-Tov 


Xv(Ta-a9ov 


(prjva-TOv 


(pr]va-(r9ov 




Xvtrd-Tiov 


Xvad-<T9o}v 


<p7]vd-TU)V 


(pr]vd-a9iov 




Xvaa-TS. 


Xv(Ta-(T9e 


<prjva-Te 


<pr]va-(T9e 




Xv(jd-VT(i)v or 


Xv(Td-a9u)v or 


^rivd-VTiov or 


(privd-a9u)V or 




Xvod-ruxjav 


Xv(Td-(T9ij}(Tav 


(pTfvd-Tiocrav 


<j)rivd-(T9ioaav 


Infinitive. 


Xvaai 


Xv(Ta-c9at 


(pfjvai. 


(pr)va-<T9ai 


Particip. 


Xvad-Q, daa, av 


Xvad-fiivo-Q, T}, 


^T]vd-g, d(Ta, av 


(ptjvd-fievo-g. 




Gen. XvcravT-oQ 


o-v 


(pr]VavT-OQ 


r],o-v 



150 IV. THE WEAK OR FIRST AORIST-STEM. § 268. 

§•268. The characteristic vowel in the inflexion of the 
"Weak Aorist is a, which in the 3 Sing. Ind. Act. becomes 
f , but every where else remains unchanged before the per- 
sonal and modal signs. In the Subj. a is lengthened to 
(1) and r?, whereby the endings become the same as those 
of the Present. In the Optat. Act., the forms with h in 
the 2 and 3 Sing, and 3 Plur. are more common than those 
with ai : Xvaeiag, Xvaeitiy), Xvaeiav. In the 2 Sing. Im- 
perat. Act. v is added, by which the a is rendered so ob- 
scure as to become o: Xvao-v, and in 2 Imp. Mid. i is 
added, which, with the a, makes ai. In the 2 Sing. Ind. 
Mid. o- ig thrown out, as in the Pres. and Fut., so that 
t-Xv(Ta{(j)o becomes tXuo-w, according to § 37. 

Ols. 1. — Three forms of the Weak Aorist are the same, the 3 Sing. 
Opt. Act, the Infin. Active, and the 2 Imperat. Mid. ; but in ac- 
cent they differ ; for, as the ai of the Optat. is regarded as long 
(§ 229), the first of these three fonns is always paroxytone : 
\uaai, ypdxpai {ypa<pto^ I write), Traidevcrai (jrai^Evu), I educate) ; the 
Infin. always has tlie accent on the penultima : Xvtrai, Traid^ixraty 
ypdxpai ; the 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid., where possible, has the accent 
on the antepenultima : jraidevaai, Xmai, ypdxpai. 

Obs. 2. — The 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Weak Aor, Act. is the same in 
form as the Neut. Partic. Fut. Xvaov, but in Verbal-Stems of more 
than one syllable it differs from it by the accent : 7raiSev(7op, but 
the Neut. Part. Fut. is Traidsmov (§ 229). 

§ 269. The ct form of the Aorist differs from the Stem 



§ 268. Dialects. — In the Ion. dialect, the 2 Sing. Indie. Mid. fre- 
quently leaves the vowels uncontracted : tXixrao. 

Some Aorists in Hom. tatoe the vowels o and e instead of a : Uov, 
I came, l^eg ; if3r]<Tero (Jiaivo),! walk) ; Utrero (he set or went down, ^uw) ; 
so also the Imperatives opo-eo, «me ; d^eTe,'bring; ol(Te,J)ring; \e^eo,lw 
down ; TreXdaaerov = TreXdaarov, from rnXd^io, I approach. 

§ 269. Dialects. — dcpvaaio,! draw water, has in Hom. the Fut. dipv^M, 
but the Aor. d(i>va(Ta. Irregular Horn, forms without a *are : tx^va for 
tx^vtja, from Pres. x^w, / pour; tKrja, 1 Plur. Subj. Krjofisv or Kdofi^v, 
Imperat. Krjov or ksIov, Infin. Krjai or Kslai, from Pres. Kaio), I hum ; Stem 
Kav (Att. tKav(Ta)', tcaeva, Tres. atvu), I drive away; the Infinitives 
dXevaaOai or dXeaaOai, to avoid ; darkarrQai, from dareofiai, I distribute. 



§ 270. IV. THE WEAK OR FIKST AORIST-STEM. 151 

of the Future only by the addition of the a : Xu<t, Xvaa ; 
ypa-ip, ypaipa ; 0i»Xa|, (l)v\aZa. Respecting the change of 
vowels and consonants before <r, compare §§ 260, 261. 
The irregular x^^ (§ ^^5) has the Aorist ex^a for exevcra. 
Compare the irregularity in uira,! spoke / rjveyKa, I bore, 
§ 327, 12 and 13. 

§ 270. The Stem's in X, /i, v, p, forming their Future 
without (7, reject this consonant also in the Weak Aorist, 
which gives rise to the supplementary form, for thfe vowel 
of the Stem is lengthened by compensation for the loss of 
the (T. 

a after t and p becomes d : Pres. Trepaivu) (class 4, d), I penetrate, Stem 

TTEjOa v,Fut. TTEjoarcD, Aor. l-Trkpdva (§ 41) ; 
otherwise ?; : Pres. (paivu) (class 4, d), Stem <pav, Fut. 

(pdvuij Aor. i-(f)r}va. 

£ becomes « : Pres. ayykWio (class 4, c), I announce, Stem 

a y y 6 \, Fut. dyyeXw, Aor. ?yyyet\a. 

" " Pres. vk}io) (class 1), / distribute, Fut. j/ejuw, 

Aor. t-vHfia. 
I " I : Pres. fcpiVw (class 4, <Z), I judge, Stem Kpt v, 

Fut. KpXvCJ, Aor. t-KpLva. 
V " -u : Pres. d^oi/w (class 4, ^), / defend, Stem 

dfivv, Fut. dfivvd, Aor. ijfivva. 

Obs. — The Stems d p (a^jow, / ^//i^) and d X (uWofiai, I lea])) have in 
the Indie. ?/ because of the Augment : i)pa, r/Xd/jiriv, but in the 
other forms a : dpag, dXdfievog. a instead of »/ occurs in some 



elcra, I placed, is a defective poet. Aorist ; the Hom. Infin. is tWat, 
Part. Eiaag and eWac (dveo-ag), 3 Sing. Mid. UcrcraTo. On the doubling 
of the (T, see § 261, D. : Xoecrcra (XoP-e-ffaa) =: tXovaa (Xoixo, I wash), with 
e inserted. (Compare § 35, Ohs.) 

§ 270. Dialects. — 1. Homer makes the Aorist of several Stems in 
X, ft, V, p with (T : tXaa, from tiXw, / ^;ress ; the defective diroepaa^ I 
tore away. 

2. In the ^ol. dialect, a is assimilated to preceding X, ft, v, p; an 
example of it in Hom. is axpeXXa for uxptX-aa = Att. axpeiXa, Pres. 6<piXX(o, 
I ina'ease. 

3. The Augment of the Hom. Aor. yeipa, Pres. elpoj, I join, is quite 
irregular. Compare § 275, D. 2. 



152 IV. THE WEAK OR FIRST AORIST-STEM. § 271. 

few verbs: Kepdaivio^ I gain ; opyaivo}, I cause anger; (rrjixaivo), I 
indicate — karjfidva along with iarjfirjva. On the other hand, ?; 
instead of d, in spite of the p, occurs in reTpaivuj, I hore, tre- 
Tpriva. 

§ 271. The Weak Aorist is the usual form in all verbs 
whi(!h, accorcling to § 256, can not form the Strong Aorist, 
that is, in all derivative verbs and in verbs of the first 
class; but radical verbs of other classes, especially those 
with Stems in X, ju, v, |0, also have the Weak Aorist. 

The Weak Aorist Middle, like the Strong one, has only 
a Middle sense, and is never Passive (§ 477, etc.). 



Y. The Perfect-Stem. 

§ 272. From the Perfect-Stem are formed the Perfect 
and Pluperfect Active and Middle, and the third Future 
{FutuTum exactum), which occurs only in the Middle. 

§ 273. The essential characteristic of the Perfect-Stem 
is the reduplication (compare Trc-Trrjy-a with Jjat. j>e-pig~i), 
which generally takes the first place ; but in verbs com- 
pounded with prepositions is put, like the Augment, after 
the preposition (§ 238) : Xl-Xu-ica, but k-Xe-Xu-jca. 

The reduplication belongs to the Perfect- Stem, and is 
therefore, unlike the Augment, preserved in all the moods, 
infinitives, and participles (compare 258, D.). 

In verbs beginning with a consonant, it consists in the 
initial consonant with e being placed before the Stem : 
Stem Xu, Perfect-Stem XcXu, 1 Sing. Perf. Ind. Act. 
Xl-Xu-jca. 



§ 273. Dialects. — The reduplication can not, like the Augment, be 
omitted in the Epic dialect; dky-jxaL forms an exception (3 Plur. 
SeX-^-T^'-)^ though we also find ^s-^ey-fiai, I expect or receive, Part. 
^e-8sy-ixhog, from Pres. Sex-o-fiat, (compare § 316, 34). Some verbs' 
beginning with a vowel do not lengthen it in the Perfect in the New- 
Ionic dialect. 



273. 



V. THE PERFECT-STEM. 



153 



â–  I. Active. 


Present Xv-ut 

Stem Xv 

Perfect Stem XeXw 

Perfect : 1. Weak form 


(paiv-io 

Pure Stem ^ a v 

TTC ?/ V 

2. Strong fonn 


Indie. 


Xe-Xv-K-a, I have loosed. 

Xe-Xv-K-a-g 

Xe-Xv-K-e-(v) 

Xe-Xv-K-a-Tov 

Xe-Xv-K-a-TOV 

Xe-Xv-K-a-jxev 

Xe-Xv-K-a-TS 

Xs-Xv-K-d-(n{v) 


7r£-0)]v-a, I Mve appeared. 

â– K'E-<pr}v-a-g 

TrE-<l>riv-E{v) 

TrE-<pf]V-a-Tov 

TTE-tprjV-a-TOV 

TrE-tprjv-a-fiEV 

7rE-(pf]V-a-TE 

7rE-(pr)V-d-(n(v) 


Subj. 


Xe-Xv-k-uj 
XE-Xv-K-y-g 

etc., like the Subj. Pre 


TTE-^rjV-OJ 

7rE-(pr]V-y-g 
sent, § 232. 


Optat. 


Xs-Xv-K-oi-fii or XeXvkoiijv 7rE-(pT]V-oi-fii or irEiprjVoiriv 

etc., like the Optat. Present, § 232. 


Imperat. 


Xe-Xv-k-e TTE-tpriV-E 

etc., like the Imperat. Present, § 232. 


Infin. 


XE-Xv-K-EVai 


TTE-^rjv-Evai 


Partic. 


M. XE-Xv-K-(ljg 
F. Xe-Xv-k-vIu 
K XE-Xv-K-6g 
Crcn. XE-Xv-K-oT-og 

(Inflexion, §147, 2.) 


7rE-(pt}v-wg 
TTE-ipriv-vla 
TTE-^rjv-og 
7rE-<pr]v-6T-og 


Pluperfect. 


Indie. 


e-Xe-Xv-k-ei-v, I had loosed. 

E-XE-Xv-K-El-g 

e-Xe-Xv-k-ei 
e-Xe-Xv-k-ei-tov 

E-XE-Xv-K-El-rT]V 

e-Xe-Xv-k-ei-^ev 
e-Xe-Xv-k-ei-te 
E-XE-Xv-K-E-crav or IXEXiiKEiaav 


E-7rE-<pr}v-Ei-v, I had appeared. 

E-TrE-<prjv-Ei-g 

E-TTE-^rjV-Et 

E-TrE-<pr]V-Ei-rQV 

E-TTE-tprjV-Ei-TTJV 
E-7rE-<j)T]V-El-flEV 
E-TrE-<pr]V-El-TE 

l-wE-(pr]V-E-(Tav or iTTEtprjvEKrav 



G 2 



154 



V. THE PERFECT-STEM. 



274. 



II. Middle and Passive. 


Perfect. 


Indie. 

• 


Xe-Xv-fiaij I have loosed 
for myself, or have 
l)een loosed. 

Xk-Xv-aai 

Xk-Xv-rai 


Xe-Xv-ne9ov 

Xe-Xv-(T9ov 
Xs-Xv-(t9ov 


Xe-Xv-iJ.e9a 

Xs-Xv-(T9e 
Xk-Xv-vTai 


Subj. 


Xe-Xv-fjievog, a», yg, y, etc., § 315. 


Optat. 


Xe-Xv-fisvog, Hrjv, Eirjg, elij, etc., § 315. 


Imperf. 


Xk-Xv-<TO 

Xe-Xv-aOo) 


Xs-Xv-a9ov 
Xe-Xv-a9ii}V 


Xk-Xv-<T9e 
Xe-Xv-(79(t)v or 
Xe-Xv-(T9ioaav 


Infin. 


Xe-Xv-aQai 


Partic. 


Xe-Xv-fitvo-g, i], o-v 


Pluperfect. 


Indie. 


e-Xe-Xv-fxijv, I had 
hosed for myself 
or had leen loosed. 

t-Xk-Xv-ao 

t-Xk-Xv-TO 


l-Xe-Xv-fii9ov 

i-Xe-Xv-aOov 
t-Xe-Xv-<T9r]v 


t-Xe-Xv-ixe9a 

t-Xe-Xv-(T9e 
e-Xs-Xv-vTo 


Future Perfect. 


Indie 


. X£-Xo-(T-o-/iai, / shall have been loosed. 
Xe-Xv-a-y, etc., like the usual Fut. Mid. (§ 258). 


Opt. Xe-. 


Kv-a-oi-fii]v 


Inf. Xs-Xv-<T-e-<r6ai 


Part. Xe-Xv-(r-6-inevo-Q 



§ 274. The following points, however, are to be ob- 
served : 

1. An aspirate, according to § 53, a, is represented by the 



§ 274. Dialects. — The full reduplication, in spite of the initial p, 
occurs in the Horn. pE-pyTno-jjievo-g^ soiled ; on the other hand, the Per- 
fects ffji-[xop-a (Pres. ^Eipofxai, class 4, d, I obtain) and ia-cv-nai (Pres. 
(T6wfa), class 2, 1 hasten), instead of jxinopa, chvfiai, are treated like Stems 
with p. 



§ 275. V. THE PERFECT-STEM. 155 

corresponding tenuis : Stem x^ P^t X^P^f ^ retreat, ke- 
Xwprj-Ka ; Stem v, Ovw, I sacrifice, Tt-6v-Ka ; Stem <^ a v, 

2. When a verb begins with two consonants, only the 
first appears in the reduplication, and even this only when 
it is a 7?itcte followed by X, fi, v, or p : Stem 7 ^ a ^, y/oa^w, 
I write, yi-ypa^-a ; Stem tt X a 7, irXnaaii), I strike, iri- 
TrXr/y-a ; Stem irvv, irviu), I hreathe, Tri-Trvev-Ka. 

3. In every other case a Stem beginning with two con- 
sonants takes only t for its reduplication: Stem ktev, 
KTSivu), I hill, t-KTOv-a ; Stem ^ i] r e, Z^tco, I seeJc, E-Zr}rr}-Ka, 

4. Stems beginning with p likewise have only e, after 
which the p is doubled : Stem p i (p, piirTii), I throw, ip-pi(p-a 
(compare §§ 62, 234). 

Exceptions. — Verl3s beginning with yv, yX, and sometimes those 
beginning with /3X, have a simple e for their reduplication. Stem 
y V w, t-yv(D-Ka, I have come to Jcnow ; Stem (5}fa<TTe (jSXatrrw, / 
germinate)^ i-^Xdarri-Ka. The Stems ktu (KTw/xai, I acquire) and 
/ttva, on the other hand, have d-KTrj-fxai and fie-fxvT]-fjiai,Irem£m- 
ler, me-min-i. Compare Tre-TTToj-Ka, I Jiave fallen, and Trk-Trra-fiai, 
lam spread out, §§ 319, 3, 327, 15. 

Instead of the reduplication ei appears in d-\T}(p-a, I liaxe taken (§ 
333, 35) ; u-\r\x-a, I have obtained (§ 333, 37) ; £i-Xoxa (from X^yw, / 
gather) ; Si-ei-Xey-jxai (from ^taXeyojuai, / converse) ; u-pr]-Ka, I have 
said (§ 337, 13) ; and in the aspirated e'i-nap-rai, it is fated, Stem 
fiep. 

§ 275. Initial vowels are lengthened as in the case of the 



§ 275. Dialects. — 1. The Attic reduplication is more frequent in Ho- 
mer, as: dp-rjpo-Tai, from dpoio, I plough; dX-dXrj-fiaL, from aXd-o-jxai,! 
wander ; dp-rjp-a, I am joined, Stem d p ; u5-iod-a, I smell, o^w, compare 
od-or ; o7r-w7r-a, I have seen, from the Stem 6 tt ; and with a v inserted : 
kjxv-rjixv-Ka, from the Pres. i^fiv-oj, I droop the head. Herod, has dp-aiprj- 
Ku, from aiptu), I take. 

3. Instead of d-ioQa, Hom. also has l-ioQa, which is the only form 
used by Herod. From the Stem kXir (originally PeXtt) i-oXir-a, I 
hope; from Stem ipy (Pepy), i-opy-a, I have done. From the Stem 
« p (Lat. sero), Pres. elpoj, 3 Sing. Pluperf. Mid. kpro, Part. Perf. Mid. 



156 V. THE PERFECT-STEM. § 276. 

Temporal Augment (§ 235) : Stem dpOo, opOio, I raise 
ttp, iopO(i)-Ka. The verbs mentioned in § 236 have el here 
also ; aiXiyfxai, Pres. iXiaauyyl roll. 

1. Some Steins beginning with a, e, or o exceptionally take what is 
called the Attic reduplication instead of the mere lengthening of 
the vowel. This reduplication consists in the initial vowel with 
its following consonant being repeated, and the vowel of the sec- 
ond syllable being lengthened : Stem d \ i ^ (dXei'^w, class 2, / 
anoint)^ dX-rjXicp-a ; Stem clko, dKovu), I hear, aK-rjKo-a (for dicrjKoPa, 
§ 35, Ohs.), but Mid. fiKovcrfiai; Stem opvx (opvcraio, class 4, 1 dig) 
6p-ojpvx-a; Stem dyep (dyeipu), claSS 4, d, I collect), dy-rjyEp-KU ', 
Stem iXa (Pres. tXavpo), I drive, § 321, 2), IX-rjXd-Ka, Mid. IX-rjXa- 
fiai ; Stem iXeyx, Pres. tXeyxo), I refute (class 1), Perf Mid. tX-rjXey- 
fiai (compare § 286, Obs.) ; lyp-riyop-a, I am awaJce, from the Stem 
eyep, Pres. lydpoj,! awaJcen (class 4, d), is ii-regular. 

2. The Stems d X w (dXto-Koytiai, § 324, 17, / am made prisoner), d y 
(dyvvfii, § 319, 13, Ihreah), eIk (not used in the Pres., § 317, 7), 
and w V € (ojvkofiai, I luy) are likewise irregular ; but originally 
they had an initial consonant (§ 34, D.) : c-dXw-Ka, e-dy-a, i-oiK-a, 

k-MVi)-iiai ; tl!e Stem dvo ly (dvoiyu), I open) has dv-sipy-a. To 

these may be added el-ojQ-a, I am accustomed, from the Stem i 9, 
originally PeO (compare §§ 236, 237). 

1. The Perfect Active. 

§ 276. The terminations of the principal tenses are ap- 
pended to the Perfect- Stem in the Indicative by means of 
the connecting vowel a. The first person has no personal 
ending at all ; in the third, a is changed into e. The Sub- 
junctive, Optative, and the Imperative (which rarely oc- 
curs) have the vowels of the Present ; the Infinitive ends 
in -ivai (always paroxytone), and the Participle in -a»c, 
-ma, -6q, Gen. -oroc (Stem or,% 188). 



Upfisvog (compare § 270, D., 3). Th» following two are defective 
Perfects in Horn. : dv-r]vo9-e{v) , it gushes forth ; kv-r}vo9-e{v), it is upon. 
Both also occur as Pluperfects. 

§ 276. Dialects. — In the Hom. dialect, the Part. Perf. Act. sometimes 
has 0) instead of o : T£9vr]wTog =: Att. T£9vT]K6Tog (from 9vrj(7KU}, I die) ; 
KEKXiiyioTeQ for KSKXTjyoTeg, calling, from Pres. fcXd^w. # 



§ 278. THE PERFECT ACTIVE. 157 

Obs. — The Subjunctive and Optative are not unfrequently formed 
periplirastically by the Participle with the corresponding forms 
of ei'/u/, / am. 

§ 277. The Perfect Active is formed in two different 
ways : 

1. The Strong Perfect (Second Perfect) 

is formed, like the Strong Aorist, directly from the Stem : 
Stem IT pay, Pres. (Class 4, a) irpaacrw, I do, Perf. ttI- 
TTpay-a. The Strong Perfect, like the Strong Aorist, oc- 
curs almost exclusively in the case of radical verbs (§ 245), 
and is generally the older and rarer form. 

§ 278. The following changes of vowels are to be ob- 
served in its formation : 

a after p becomes d : Stdm Kpay, Pres. Kpd'Cuj, I 

scream^ Perf. Ks-Kpdy-a. 
a Otherwise becomes n : Stem irXdy^ Pres. TrXrjacro), 

I strike^ Perf. Trs-TrXrjy-a. 
Stem (pdv, Pres. (paivu), I 

sTioic, Perf. Tri-<pT]v-a. Compare 

£ becomes o : Stem (jTpe.^, Pres. arpk^u), § 40 to § 43. 

/ tiirn^ Perf. t-<TTpo(p-a. 
I " 01 : Stem XXtt, Pres. Xeittw, / 

leave, Perf. Xk-Xonr-a. 
V , " eu : Stem ^wy, Pres. (pevyoj, I 

Jiee, Perf. 7rs-^evy-a. 

The change of a into to is quite isolated : Stem pay, 
Perf. ep-pioya, I am torn, Pres. pijyvv-pi (§ 319, 24), and 



§ 277-280. Dialects.— The Hom. dialect is partial to the Strong Per- 
fect ; the aspiration does not occur iij it : Stem kott (kStttu)), kekottojc- 
The Part. Trt-^y^-dr-fL', from Stem (pvy ((pevyio), is quite an isolated 
Hom. form. Hom. forms the Weak Perfect only froni Vowel-Stems, 
and even here he has sometimes strong secondary forms : Stem v, 
3 Plur. Perf. Act. rrE^vdcn = Att. TretpvKdcri, from ^vcj, I deget ; Stem kots 
(koHu), I am angry), Part. Perf. k^kot^wq, § 317, D. In the Fcm. Part. 
Perf. shortenings of vowels often occur : Stem d p, Masc. Part. Perf. 
ctp-Tjp-ibg, joined, Fem. dp-dp-vlw, Stem 9aX (OdXXio, I dloom), Masc. 
Part. Perf. te-OtjX-ojc, Fem. TE-GdX-vTa. The Perf. rk-rprjx-a, lam restless, 
Pres. ^apdaaix), I disturb. Stem r [ a ] p a x, is irregular. 



158 V. THE PERFECT-STEM. § 279. 

SO also that of e into w : Stem f 6, Perf. u-wd-a, I am ac- 
customed (§ 275). With the Attic reduplication, and in 
some other cases also, there is no lengthening of the vowel: 
Stem opv^y 6p''(jjpv)(-a, Pres. Ojouo-aw, T dig j yi-y pacji-af 
from ypa(p(x), I write. 

§ 279. Some Stems ending in the consonants k, 7, tt, /3, 
change these into the corresponding aspirates, generally 
without any lengthening of the vowels : 

Stem KTjpvic, Pres. Krjpvaaio, I jyi'oclaimj Perf. ice-Kfjpvx-a. 

" d y, " ayw, I lead^ " j}\;a (dyj70\;-a). 

" K TT, " KOTrrw, / hew, " Ks-KO(p-a. 

" /3\ai3, " fiXdTTToj.Ihurt, " (i'c-(i\d(p-a. 

In spite of the aspiration, the vowels are changed in 
Kt-Kko^-a, Stem k X £ tt, Pres. icXiTrrfj, -T steal / izi-Troptp-a, 
Stem IT E fXTT, Pres. irijiTrw, I send / Tt-rpocp-Qi, Stem r peir, 
TptTTii), I turn^ which is in form the same as the Perf. of 
the Stem r/of^ (Pres. rpif^n,), I nourish)', u-\ox-a (com- 
pare § 274), Stem X c 7, Pres. Xtyw, I gather. 

■ Obs. 1 . — Few verbs have both fonns with and without the aspirate : 
the Stem Trpay (Pres. Trpdcrau), I do) has both Trk-Trpdy-a (intran- 
sitive, //««i'6/«?r<^?) and Tra-TTpdx-a {transitive, I have done) ; Stem 
c'lvoiy, Pres. dvoiyu), I opeii, Perf. dv-U^y-a (intrans., 7 stand ojjen) 
and dv-£<^x-a (transit., I have ojyened). 
2. The aspirated form of the Perfect, contrary to § 277, occurs also 
in a number of derivative verbs : Stem dWay, dWdaaio, I 
change^ from dXKog, Perf. ?y/\Xax-a. 

§ 280. 2. The Weak Perfect (First Perfect) 
is formed from the Stem by the insertion of k : Stem X i», 
Xi-Xv-K-a. The Weak Perfect is the more recent form, 
and with all Yowel- Stems it is the only one in use, while 
it is the more common with Stems ending in r, S, 0, and 
those in X, jm, v, p. 

Obs. — The only complete Strong Perfect of a Vowel-Stem in Attic 
prose is dKrjKoa (§ 275, 1) ; but compare § 317. 

§ 281. In regard to the vowel, the Weak Perfect follows 
the (T Future (§§ 260, 261): Stem dp a, dpdcrw, di-^pj^-Ka ; 



§ 283. THE PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. 159 

Stem T I fia, riiur](7(i)f TETifirfKa ; Stem TT X u, irX^vaw, ni- 
TrXfuica ; Stem tt t (Trtt^w, / jyersuade), tte/o-w, iriirsiKa. 
\iijj, I j[)Our^ Perf. KiyvKa^ is an exception (§ 265). For 
other exceptions, see J 301. 

Stems in r, ^, % throw out these consonants before a, 
without any other change : Stem ic o ju t ^, KOfiiZw, I carry, 
KeKO/uuKa. 

§ 282. The monosyllabic Stems in \, v, p, having e in the Stem 
syllable, change this e in the Weak Perf. into a : Stem (tts\, 
GTsWoj^ I send, Perf, t-oTaX-Ka ; Sterii tpO^p, (pOeipo, I destroy, Perf. 
t-(p9ap-Ka. Several in v throw out the v: Stem Kptp, Kpivio, 1 
judge, Perf. ke-kpI-ku ; Stem kXXv, kXIvu), I incline, Perf. ick-KXX-Ka ; 
Stem ttXvv, ttXvvio, I icash, Perf. Trk-TrXv-Ka; Stem rev, re/vw, / 
stretch, Perf Ts-rd-Ka. Wherever v is not thrown out before k, it 
becomes, according to § 51, a nasal y : Stem ^av, (paivm, I show, 
Perf, Tra-(pay-Ka. 

Other Stems of this kind, and some in /i, admit of metathesis (§ 59) : 
Stem (iaX, fiaXXw, I throw, Perf ^t-jSXr}-K-a ; Stem ku^i, Kafivoj, I 
grow tired, Perf. Ke-Kfirj-K-a (§ 321, 9). 

2. The Pluperfect Active. 

§ 283. The Pluperfect takes the Augment before the 
Perfect- Stem ; its terminations are those of tlie historical 
tenses. Between the Stem and the termination the diph- 
thong H steps in, which in the 3 Plur. is reduced to e. 

Obs. — The 3 Plur. in uaav is rare and more modern. 

The Temporal Augment of verbs beginning with a vowel 
is not recognizable, because their Perfect-Stem has already 



§ 282. Dialects. — The Hom. fik-n^Xio-Ka for fie-fiXu)-Ka, from the Stem 
^ X (Aor. tfioXou, I went), is explained by metathesis. Compare §§51, 
D., 324, 12. 

§ 283. Dialects. — The Ionic dialect has the antiquated endings of 
the Pluperf : 1 Sing, ea, 2 Sing, eag, 3 Sing. €f(i/), contracted et, eiv, 
or t] • the 2 Plur, New-Ion. ea-re. Hom. he-Orj-rr-ea, I was astonished ; 
3 Sing. dedH7rv{]K-eiv, from dmrvea}, I dine. 

t-[i6ixT]K-ov (Perf. ixefirjKa, I hleat) and i}vioyov, along with rjvojym (Perf. 
dv(oya, I compel), are formed quite irregularly, according to the man- 
ner of Imperfects. 



160 V. THE PERFECT-STEM. § 284. 

a long vowel:. Verbal-Stem ay, ayu), I drive, Perfect- 
Stem 77 X, ]]x-H-v. The Syllabic Augment is often omit- 
ted. The 1 and 3 Sing, in the older Attic dialect have t? 
instead of u and uv, as c-XeXvk-tj. 

The formation of the Pluperfect is exactly the same as 
that of the Perfect, and, like it, it is either strong or weak, 
and has the vowel long or short, or unchanged. 

§ 284. 3. The Perfect Middle and Passive 
c^n be formed only in one way, that is, by appending the 
personal endings of the principal tenses of the Middle, with- 
out any connecting vowel, to the Perfect-Stem, i. e.^ to the 
reduplicated Yerbal-Stem : Stem X v, Perf. Mid. Xi-Xv-jiai, 
The Infinitive and the Participle always have the accent 
on the penultima : XeXvaOai, XeXvfiivog ; Stem waidev, 
Treirai^tiKrdai, from irai^evu), T educate. 

§ 285. The vowels are treated in the same way as in the 
Weak Perfect : Stem t i^a, TSTifirjKa, TSTifirnmm ; Stem ttX 0, 
iriiruKa, irfTreKTiuiai ; Stem (pO e p, ttpOapKa, ttjiOapiuLai ; Stem 
^ a X, j3t/3XrjK:a, jStjSXr/^at. The verbs rpi^n), I nourish, 
Tpiwii), I turn, and crTpiclxx), I turn, also take a instead of c : 
Ti-Opa/ui-fjiai, Tb-TpajJi-nai, hGrpaji-fxai. 

§ 286. The final Consonants of Consonantal- Stems change 
according to the general laws of sound (§§ 45-49) : 



§ 284. Dialects. — In the Horn, dialect, the a of the 2 Sing. Perf. and 
Pkiperf. Mid. is sometimes thrown out between two vowels : fxsfiyT]ai 
=: HBfivT]<7ai (meministi)^ contracted fj-sfivy; so also in the New-Ionic 
the Imperat. fisfiveo for fisfivrjao. 

§ 285. Dialects. — The Hom. ■n-e-Trpw-rai, Stem tt p (Strong Aorist 
tTTopov, I gave), is explained by metathesis. The following have a 
short vowel : rkrvyixaL, from Tevx(t), I prepai^e, 3 Plur. Tsrevxarai ; tte- 
^vyfitvog, from ^ewyw, IJiee; ttjavfiai, from csvoy^ITiasten ; v instead of 
ty : TT^.-Trvv-fxai, from Trvew, § 248. 

§ 286. Dialects. — The of the Stem Kopv9 (icopvaaa), I arm) remains 
unchanged in Homer : Ks-KopvO-ixevoQ. aicrxvvio, I put to shame^ has 

yaxv^inai. 



§ 287. . THE PERFECT MIDDLE. 161 

1. Before all terminations beginning with ju 

every guttural becomes y : Stem ttXek, ttXsku}, I twist, Trs-TrX^y- fiai ; 
" dental " o- : ^tem ttiO, irei9a), I persuade, TrE-Treia-fisOa; 

" labial " fi : Stem y pa<p, ypd^io, I write, ye-ypafi-[isvog. 

Obs. — When a guttm-al or labial is iDreceded by a nasal, the latter 
is thrown out before ^ : Stem KUfiir, Ka/iTrroj, / hend, KtKaiifiai ; 
Stem sXeyXj thlyxoi, I refute, eXkXeyfxai (§ 275, 1). Some Stems 
in V, by way of exception, do not change the v before fi into (x, 
but into fi : w^y^/uat, from o^vpm, I sharpen; those which throw 
out the V in the Perf Active do the same here (§ 282) : KkKpijiai 
(compare irk-ipacr-nai, from the Stem ^dv): airevdoj, I offer a liba- 
tion, Fut. (nreiGuj, has taTruajiai. 

. Before o- 
every guttural becomes k, and this with <r becomes K : Tre-TrXe^at ; 
" labial " tt, " " " ^: yi-ypaif^ai', 

" dental is thrown out : Te-ireKrai. 

3. Before r 

every guttural becomes k : Trs-TrXcKrai ; Stem \ e y, Xs-XeK-rai ; 

" labial " tt : ye-ypaTrrai ; 

" dental (exc. v) " o- : Trs-Treta-Tai (Stem (pav, Trk-<pav-Tai). 

4. The or of gQ after consonants (§ 61) is dropped, and 
then 

every guttural becomes x • 7re-TrXex-9ov for TTE-TrXeK-aOov ; 
" labial " <p : ys-ypa^-Oe for ye-y pacp-aOe ; 

" dental (exc. j/) " o- : Tre-Treitr-Oai for Tre-TreiO-aOai. 

V, X, and /o remain unchanged before the which has 
arisen from gQ : Stem a v, irEcpavOat ; Stem a 7 7 e X, 
?777£X0a(. 

§ 287. The ending vrai of the 3 Plur. is irreconcilable 
with Consonantal- Stems. Sometimes the Ionic arai takes 



§ 287. Dialects. — In the Ion. dialect, the forms arai and uto for the 
3 Plur. are common : Hom. has ^E-^Xr]-aTai (j3dXXcj, I throw), TrEiroTrjaTo 
{irordofiai, I fiutter), dedaiuTai {daiio, I divide), tpxarai, i'tpxaro (dpyu), I 
shut in, § 319, 15); in New-Ionic, TrapecTKEvddaro {irapaaKEvdZio, I pre- 
pare), KSKoafiUtTai (Kotr/xeu), I adorn). Three Homeric forms insert S : 
ippd-d-arai (paivio, I besprinkle), dKr]XE-5-aTo (dxvvfiai, I am grieved), 
tXrjXd-S-ciTo (Stem IXa, kXavvio, I drive) ; IprjpsSaTai, from epeidcj, I sup- 
port, is irregular. 



162 



V. THE PERFECT-STEM. 



288. 



its j)lace (§ 226, D.), before which y, k, j3, and tt are aspi- 
rated : y^-ypcK^-arai, r^-ray^-araL (Stem ray, Taaaii), I cor- 
range)^ T£-Tpi(f)-aTaL (Stem Tpiji, rpif^u), I rich). But the 
common practice is to use the periphrasis by means of the 
Participle with Li-cri(v) : y^ypajifiivoi tWiv. Compare Lat. 
scrijpti sunt and § 276, Obs. 

The following paradigms supply examples of the above- 
mentioned changes. 



Perfect Middle and Passive. 


Guttural Stems. 


Dental Stems. 


Labial Stems. 


TTi-TrX^y-Hai 

TTE-irXe^ai 

TTE-irXeK-Tai 

Tre-TrXey-fieOa 

TTE-TrXex-Oe 

Tre-TrXey-fisvoi doi 


TrE-Treia-fxai 
TTE-ireiaai 
7re-Trei(T-Tai 
7r€-7rct(T-/x£0a 

7r£-7r€l(7-06 

7re-7rei(T-fxsvoi elai 


yk-ypan-fiai 

yk-ypa-^ai 

yk-ypaTT-rai 

ye-ypdix-fjieOa 

y'E-ypatp-dE 

yE-ypafi-fiEvoi dai 



288. After Vowel-Stems, a is frequently inserted before the ter- 
minations beginning with ^ and r, but more especially when the 
Stems have the vowel short : Stem r e X e, teXm, I complete, Perf. 
TE-TEXe-cr-fiai ; Stem c tt a, <nrdio, I draw, 3 Sing. 'i-aira-a-Tai ; but 
it also occurs in not a few Stems with long vowels and diph- 
thongs: dKovit},niear,i]Kov(Tiiai\ keXevio, I order ; kvX'uxt, I roll ; Xevcj, 
I stone to death ; ^voj, I j^oUsh ; Tra'nx), I strike ; ttXeio (TrfTrXeyorai), 
/ sail; Trpioj, I saw ; adio, I shake ; %ptw, / anoint; \l/avio, I touch. 
Others fluctuate : kXc/w or kX^'w, I close; Kpovu), I push. 

289. The Subjunctive and Optative are generally formed by peri- 
phrasis with the Participle and the corresponding forms of dfiL 
(Compare Lat. solutus sim, essem.) These moods are but rarely 
evolved out of Vowel-Stems themselves : KTdofiai, I acquire, k'e- 
KTrj-fxai, Subj. Ke-KToj-fiai, KE-Kry, KE-KTij-Tai, Opt. Ke-KTt^-fitjv (from 
KE-KTaoi-firiv), Ke-KTtp-To; besides these, we also have KSKTyfirjv, yo, 

yro. 



§ 289. Dialects. — The Horn. Subj. from Stem f^iva (fiEfivrjuai, memini), 
1 Plur, /xefiVMfieQa (New-Ion. /xe/ivew^e^a), Opt. ixsjxvyjfirjv ; 3 Sing. XeXiiro, 
3 Plur. XeXvvTo, instead of XeXv-i-ro^ XeXv-i-vro, § 28. 



§ 291. THE FUTURE PERFECT. 163 

§ 290. 4. The Flujperfect Middle and Passive 
differs in every verb from the corresponding Perfect only 
by the addition of the Augment and the personal endings, 
which are those of the historical tenses. Respecting the 
3 Plur. in vto and aro, and their places being supplied by 
periphrasis, see § 287, which is here applicable also. 

§ 291. 5. The Fttture Perfect or Futurum Exactmn 
adds cr to the Perfect-Stem with the Inflexion of the Fu- 
ture-Middle ; the o- produces the same changes in the pre- 
ceding consonants as in the ordinary Future Middle : Tra- 
irpa^ETaL (Stem irpay, irpacrcrii), J do), it will have heen 
done ; yey paipETui (Stem y pacj), ypacjxx), I write), it will 
have been ivritten. 

There are two isolated Future Perfects with Active 
endings : idrriZu) (§ 311), I shall stand, and rtOvn^cj (§ 324, 
4), I shall he dead, from the Perf. forr/zca, rWvrjKa. 

Otherwise its place in the Active is supplied by the Part. 
of the Perf with the Fut. of tt/xf, I am {taojuai) : XsXvKtog 
taofxai, I shall have loosed (solver o\ 



164 



VI. THE STRONG PASSIVE STEM. 



292. 



VI. The Strong Passive Stem; 

§ 292. From the Strong Passive Stem are formed the 
Strong or Second Aorist, and the Strong or Second Future 
Passive. 



Present : tpaivu)^ Pure Stem ^ a r, Strong Passive Stem <pavt. 


1. Strong or Second Aorist Passive. 




h<f>di^r}-v, I ap- 




tpavut 




^aveirj-v 




peared. 










d 


k-<pdvT}-Q 


<u 


<pavy-g 




^aveiTj-c 


â– S 


h-<pavr) 


•S 


<l>avy 


.^ 


<paveirf 


s 


ir<pavri-TO%' 


^ 


<pavrj-TOV 


tl 


<pavdr]-Tov or (pavelrov 


^ 


i-<pavrf-Tr]v 


;f? 


^avfj-TOV 


& 


<paveif}-TTjv or <paveiTr]v 


1— 1 


t-<f>dvrj-ixtv 


13 


<pavCj-/xEv 




<l>avdr}-^w or ^aveifxev 




e-^dvT]-Te 




(pavij-TE 




(j)avdT]-Te or ^aveire 




k-<pdvr]-aav 




(l>av&-ai{v) 




(pavHTi-aav or <paveiev 




(pdvr]-Qt 


Inf. 


^avrj-vai 


Part. 


(pavdg, ^aveiaa, <j)avsv 


g? 


<pavr]-Tu) 








Gen. <pavk-VT-OQ 


•43 


^dvrj-Tov 












^avr}-T(i)v 












<l>dvri-T£ 










>5 


<pavri-Tio(Tav OV 










2. >5 


trmg or Second Future Passive. 


Ind. 


(pavri-aofiai 


>| 


Opt. 


(pavrj-croifiijv 


-*etc., tlie same as the Future Middle. 


Inf. 


(pavTj-ffEaOai 




Part. 


^avr]-o6fiivoQ^ 


ri,ov) 



§ 293. The personal endings of the Aorist Passive are 
of an Active nature, those of the Future Passive of the 
nature of the Middle. They are appended, as in the Sec- 



§ 293. Dialects.^The Hom. dialect lias the shorter ending ev in the 
3 Plur. Ind. Aor. Pass. : e-cpdve-v or ^dve-v ; rpd(pE-v = lTpd<pt}(Tav, from 
r/o£0a>. The Ion. dialect leaves the e in the SuIdj. uncontracted : /jXye-o} 
(jiicryu), I mix). Homer often lengthens the e in the Subj., sometimes 
to et : ddfid-b) = dafiio, Stem da ft, Pres. dd/jivTiixi, I tame; and some- 



§ 295. VI. THE STRONG PASSIVE STEM. 165 

ond Principal Conjugation (§ 302), to the Stem without a 
connecting vowel, and the e of the Stem is lengthened in 
the Indicative and Imperative to ??. In the Sjibjunctive, 
the £ is contracted with the vowels of the Subjunctive: 
(^avi'U), 0avw ; in the Optative, the e, combined with the 
modal sign ir], becomes ht] : 0av£-trj-v. The Infinitive al- 
ways has the circumflex on the penultima, and the Par- 
ticiple in the Nom. Sing. Masc. the acute on the last. 

§ 294. The Strong Passive Stem, just like the Strong 
Aorist Active and Middle (§ 256), is formed very rarely 
from derivative Stems ; but it occurs in verbs of all class- 
es, even the first (§ 247), f being added to the pure Yerbal- 
Stem : Pres. paiTT-ii) (class 3, / sew), Pure Stem pa^. 
Strong Passive Stem pa(p£, Aor. Pass. lppa(l>r\-v ; (j(j)aTTco 
(class 4, / slaughter), Pure Stem (T<l>ay, Strong Passive 
Stem (T((>ay s, Aor. Pass. i(T(j)ayr}-v, Put. Pass. (T^ayr}-(Toiuiai ; 
Pres. ypaiji-w (class 1), Strong Pass. Stem y patpe, Aor. 
Pass. lypa^i]'V. The Strong Passive Aor. occurs only in 
such verbs as have no Strong Active Aorist. The only 
exception is Tplirtj, I turn, Aor. Act. i-Tpair-o-v, Pass. 

l-TpCLTTTl-V. 

Obs. — By way of exception, ^XXayj/v is formed from the derivative 
Stem a X X a y, Pres. aXXdaao), I change. 

§ 295. As in the Strong Aorist Active (§ 257), the c is 
sometimes changed into a : kXItt-t-w, T steal, e-K\a7rrj-v ; 
ariXkh), I send, l-(TTa\r]-v ; Tpit^i-tx), I nourish, l-rpdcprj-v ; 
irXiK-u), I twist, l-Tr\iKr]-v and l-TrXaKr^-v ; ttXtjo-ctw, I strike, 



times to ri : (pdvrj-y = <pdvy. In the Dual and Plur., the modal vowel 
is shortened where this lengthening of the. e occurs: dajxd-tTE (for 
daiJ.er]TE, Att, dafiriTe). In the Infinitive we find the Horn, fievai or fxev : 

fiiyr]fiEvaij dafiijfiEv. 

§ 295. Dialects. — Homer here also employs metathesis (§ 59), as in 
the Strong Aor. Act. and Mid. (§ 357, D.) : Pres. rlpTr-w, / delight, Aor. 
Pass. e-TdpTTTi-v, Subj. Tpd7rk-(»y 1 Plur. Tpd-n-eiofiev (gaitdeamm), Inf. 
Tpdirrj-nevat. 



166 



VII. THE AVEAK PASSIVE STEM. 



296. 



has t'7r\riyr}-v, 7r\r]yr]-(TOfiai,hut in composition t^-e-irXayri'V, 
eK-7rXay{}-<Toiuai ; the Pure Stem of verbs of the second 
class here reappears: (nV-w (Stem a air, I corrupt), 
£-o-a7rrj-v ; rrjK-u) (Stem tclk,! melt), e-TaKrj-v ; plu) (Stem 
p V, I flow), l-f}pvr)-v, pvrj-GOfjiai. 

VII. The Weak Passive Stem. 

§ 296. From the Weak Passive Stem are formed the 
Weak or I^irst Aorist and ths Weak or First Future 
Passive. 



Pres. Xuw, Stem Xj;,Weak Passive Stem \vBe. 



1. Wealc or First Aorist Passive. 



Ind. i-Xv9i]-Vj I 
was loosed. 
i-\vdt]-Q 



Subj. XvOL 



\vBy-Q 



Opt. \v9eir}-v 
XvOeirj-Q 



etc., like the Strong or Second Aorist Passive. 



Imp. Xv9n-Ti 
Xv9f]-r(o 



Inf. Xv9i)-vai 



Part. Xv9e'i-q, Xv9iiaa, Xv9kv 
Gen. Xv9kvT-o£ 



etc., like the Strong or Second Aorist Passive. 



2. TTm/j or First Future Passive. 



Ind. Xv9f]-(T0fiai 



Opt. Xv9ri-(ToiiXT]v 



Inf. Xv9r}-aEa9ai 

Part. Xv9r}-(r6iiEvo-Q^ »;, o-v 



§ 297. The inflexion of the Weak Passive Stem is en- 
tirely like that of the Strong. Eespecting the r of XvOrj-n, 
instead of XvOr}-Oi, see § 53, c. 



§ 296. Dialects. — The Weak Put. Pass, is wanting in the Homeric 
dialect. * 

§ 297. Dialects. — Respecting the inflexion, see § 293, D. 

§ 298. Dialects. — The Hom. dialect after some Vowel-Stems inserts 
V before 9: d]XTrvv-v-9r] (Stem tt w, Trvku), I breathe), idpv-v-9ri Qdpixo, 
Isetjirm), and changes the e of the Stem ^aev (<paeiv(jj, (paivM^I Tnalce 
appear) into a, ^adv9r]v. 



§ 299. VII. THE WEAK PASSIVE STEM„ 167 

§ 298. The Weak Passive Stem is formed from the 
Yerbal-Stem by appending the syllable 0f. Before this 
syllable the vowels of Vowel-Stems are lengthened as in 
the Future, the Weak Aorist Active, and the Perfect : 
Ti/na, IrifjirtOriv ; irtipa, eTreipaOiiVy I tried. As to the ex- 
ceptions, see § 301. As in the Perfect Middle, a is inserted 
before 0, especially after short vowels, but often also after 
long ones : l-reXi-dSrjv, from rsXtw, / complete ; e-KsXtv-cr- 
Orfv, from Kf Xeuw, / order / and this is the case in the verbs 
mentioned in § 288, and especially in ytXaw, / laugh, lye- 
XcktOtjv ; ^pd(i)y I do, iBpdaOrjv ; wavcj, I cause to cease, 
tTravcrOriv, but also liravQnv, The Aor. Passive of (tw^w, 
I save, on the other hand, is formed from the shorter Stem 
Gil) without the o- : e(Toj6rjv. 

As in the Weak Perfect Active and the Perfect Middle, 
the £ before X, v, p is sometimes changed into a : Stem rev 
(rdvd), I stretch), l-TciOri'V (compare § 282). 

The changes of the consonants before are explained 
by the laws of sound (§ 45) : Stem tt pay, irpdcrao), I do, 
e-7rpdx'0r}-v ; Stem \pev^, \pevdo), I deceive, t-^eva-Orj-v ; 
Stem TTCjUTT, Tre/unro), 1 send, l-Treiu(f)-9r}-v. Kespecting 
Wpi(f)9riv (Pres. Tpi(j)(i)), £0a<^0rjv (Prcs. OdirTii)), see § 54, 
Ohs., and respecting triOriv, lTv9r)v (Stems Be, Ov), see 
§53, J. 

§ 299. The Weak Aorist Passive and the Weak Future 
Passive are, on the whole, more common than the Strong, 
and in the case of derivative verbs, as of nearly all Yowel- 
Stems, they are the only customary forms of the Aorist 
and Future Passive. 

There are some primitive verbs of which both Passive 
Stems are in use : Stem j3Xa/3, Pres. j3Xa7rra>, I hurt, Aor. 
Pass. £/3Xa/3»]v and £/3Xa00rjv. 



168 verbal adjectives. § 300. 

Verbal Adjectives. 

§ 300. The Verbal Adjectives are a kind of Passive Par- 
ticiples. 

Pres. Xvu), Stem X v, i. Xv-rog, 17, 6v, loosed, capable of 

being loosed. 
2. Xv-rto-c, a, ov, to be loosened, 
solvendu-s, a, um. 

The First Verbal Adjective is formed by means of the 
syllable to (Nom. ro-c, rr], to-v) from the Verbal- Stem, and 
has the meaning either of a Participle Perfect Passive, 
Xv-T6-g=solu-tu-s, or of possibility, capable of being loos- 
ened. 

The Second Verbal Adjective is formed by means of 
the syllable rio (Nom. rto-g, Tta, rio-v), which is never con- 
tracted, from the Verbal- Stem, and has the meaning of 
necessity, like the Latin gerundive : Xv-rto-g, one who is 
to be loosened / XvAov tart, loosening' must take place, 
solvendwn est. 

The vowels preceding the r are in general treated ex- 
actly in the same manner as in the Weak Passive Aorist ; 
(T is inserted in the same cases as in the Aor. Pass. : tsXs- 
a-rog, KsXEv-fT-riov, The consonants before r are treated in 
accordance with the laws of sound : irpaK-ro-g (Stem tt pay, 
Pres. wpaaaio) ; jpaTT-T6-g{ypa(l)(jj) ; Ko^ut cT-r£0-v( Stem KOfxtd, 
KojxiZtjjyl carry). 

Verbs which leave their Stem Vowel short in the forma- 
tion of their Tenses. 

% 301. The Vowel remains short throughout in : 



§ 300. Dialects. — Zoa-rb-Q is derived by metathesis (§ 59) from the 
Stem ^ € p (^£|oa>, I flay). 

§ 301. Dialects. — The H(fm. dialect lpd(i),Ilove, Aor. Mid. '^pdffdfirjv ; 
djOKEw, / ward off, ^pKE<ra ; Kopkio, I satisfy, sKopeffa ; kotsoj, I grndge^ 
KOTeaaaro ; epvoj, I draw, dpvaa. On the usual doubling of the a after 
short vowels Opd(T<raro, Ipvaaaro), sec § 261, D. 



§ 301. 


VERBS WITH A SHORT VOWEL. 169 


â– yeXdujj 


Ilatcgh, 


Fut. yeXaffOfiai, 


Aor. Act. tysXdffa, 
Aor. Pass. lyeXd(T9r]v, 
Fut. Pass. y^XatjQriaofiai. 


9Xd(o, 


Isqiteeze, 


Fut. eXdao), 


Aor. Act. WXaaa, 
Verb. Adj. eXatrrof. 


kXciu), 


I break, 


Fut. KXdau), 


Aor. Pass. tKXdaQrjv, 
Perf. Mid. KEKXafffiai. 


(TTraw, 


I draw, 


Fut. OTrciffio, 


Aor. Act. to-rrdaa, 






Aor. Pass. 


kff'n'daOrjv, Perf. Act. itnrdKa, 






Perf. Mid. 


iairaafiai, Verb. Adj. trTraorroc. 


XaXdo), 


I slacken. 


Fut. xa^affoj. 


Aor. Pass. £x«^«<y^^»'- 


aideofiai 


, I dread, 


Fut. aide(TOfiai, 


Aor. Pass. yUaOriv (338), 
Perf. yde(Tfiai. 


uKeofiai, 


I heal, 


Fut. aKSffOfiai, 


Aor. TfKEadfirjv. 


dXew, 


I grind. 


Fut. dXeffio (w), 


Perf. Act. tiX^Xem, 
Perf. Mid. dXr]Xe<Tfiai. 


dpKSUJ, 


I satisfy, 


Fut. dpKsaoj, 


Aor. Act. fipKiaa. 


ifieu), 


I vomit. 




Aor. Act. ijfieaa. 


Ke<o, 


I seethe, 


Fut. ^£(rw, 


Aor. Act. t^€(Ta, 
Verb. Adj. ?e(rroc. 


U<o, 


I scrape. 


Fut. ^S(T(0, 


Verb. Adj. ^earof. 


rfXew, 


Ijinish, 


Fut. TeXkao) (w), 


Aor. Act. InXeffa, 
Aor. Pass. IreXsaBriv, 
Verb. Adj. rtXEffrof, 
Perf. Act. TsHXeKa, 
Perf. Mid TETeXetrfiai, 


dpoo), 


Iplow, 


Fut. dpoffcj. 


Aor. Act. ijpoffa, 

Aor. Pass. rip69rjv. 


dpvio, 


I draw. 


Fut. dp6(Toj, 


Aor. Act. ijpvaa. 



addit. form dpvroj. 
eXicvu), I draw, # Aor. Act. 6iX<n;<Ta. 

Fut. Pass. iXKV<T9r)ffOfiai, * Perf. Act. eiXicvKa, 

Perf. Mid. elXKvafiai. 
TTTVii), I ^pit, Aor. Act. iTTTvaa. 

Verb. Adj. Trrvtrrof. 

2. 7%6 'y^j^eZ ^5 Zc>7i^ in the Weak Aor. Act., and short 
in the Perf., the Aor. Pass., and the Verbal Adjective in 

Sk(jJ, I Und, Fut. drjffio, Aor. Act. edri<Ta, 

Perf. Act. dedeKu, 
Aor. Pass. idWrjv, 
Verb. Adj. ^erdf, 
Perf. Mid. deSeiiai, 
3 Fut. SedrjtTOfxai. 

H 



170 VERBS WITH A SHORT VOWEL. §302. 

0vb)^ I sacrifice, Fut. 0i><rw, Aor. Act. tQvtra, 

Perf. Act. TsOvKa, Aor. Pass. iTvQrfv, 
Perf, Mid. TsQvfiai. 

\vw, I loose, Fut. X6<rio, Aor. Act. tXvffa, 

Perf. Act. XeXvKa, Aor. Pass. IXvOrjv, 
Verb. Adj. Xvrog, Perf. Mid. XeXvfiai. 

3. The Vowel is short in the Future and Weak Aorist 
Active and Middle, but long in the Perfect, Aorist Pas- 
sive, and Verbal Adjective ofKa\i(o,Icall, icaXI(Tw, KiKXriKa, 
Ik:X/;0jjv, K\r}r6g ; alviu), J^raise, has alvicra), yvEKa, yvWrjv, 
alviTogy but Perf. Mid. rjvrtfxai. 

4. iroOlu), I long for ; Trovtw, I toil ; and ^uw, / s^7^^, 
fluctuate between the short and long vowels : TroOirTOfim 
and 7ro6rj(jijj ; wovicrw, lTrovr\aafir]v ; Siiaw, Aor. Pass. IdvBriv, 



Chap. XI. — Second Principal Conjugation, 
or Verbs in jut. 

Preliminary Observations. 

§ 302. The Second Principal Conjugation differs from 
the First only in the inflexion of the Present and Strong 
AoristStems, and in the case of a few verbs also in the 
Perfect and Pluperfect Active. 

The special terminations of this conjugation are : 

1. The 1 Sing. Pres. Ind. Act. retains the ancient fit : ^j;-/i«, / say 
(§ 226). 

2. The 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Act. retains the ancient <n{v) (for ri) : 
<prjm{v) (§ 226). 

3. The 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. Act. inserts the vowel a before the termi- 



§ 302. Dialects. — The Horn, dialect often has the ending aOa in the 
2 -Sing. Ind. Act. : TiOrj-aOa, thou puttest ; i-<pri-a6a ; and fiEvai or fiev 
instead of vai in the Inf. : ^d-fievai, (pd-fiev ; and a short v instead of 
the (Tav of the 3 Plur. of the Preterite : i-^a-v. 

The Horn, dialect sometimes lengthens the Stem-vowel in the Subj. 
and shortens the Modal-vowel as in the Aor. Pass. (§ 398) : 'tofiev — 
'jw/iEv (eamus). 



§ 304. SECOND PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION. 1^1 

nation ai (for vn) (§ 226, compare Dialects), and this a is lengthened 
by compensation (J-aai{v)^ they go, from the Stem /), and unites with 
the a of the Stem : ^dm(v). 

4. In the Optative, it] (le, i), the Modal-sign attaches itself directly 
to the Stem: (pa-irj-v; compare § 293. 

5. The 2 Sing. Imperat. has the ending 9i : (pd-Oi. ) ^oj^pare S 292. 
G. The Infinit. has the ending vat : <pd-vai. ) 

7. The 3 Plur. of the Preterite has aav : l-^d-aav (3 Plur. Imperf.). 

All terminations of these two tenses are appended to 
the Stem without a connecting vowel : (^ta-fiiv (compare 
Ti/xa-o-fiev), (pa-TU) (compare Tifia-i-ru)) ; in the Participle, 
also, vT attaches itself directly to the Stem : a-v r, of 
which the Nom. is formed by the addition of o- : <f)ag ; 
Stem So, ^ovg (compare § 147, l). In the Subjunctive 
alone the final vowels of the Stems are contracted with 
the long connecting vowels, as in the ordinary contracted 
verbs (§ 243) : ^a-w, ^w ; ri-Bt-u), tl-9u) ; ^o-io-fiai, ^Cjfxai, 

§ 303. In the vowel-Stems of this conjugation a change 
of quantity takes place in such a manner that vowels in 
themselves short are lengthened in the Singular Indicative 
Active, a and e becoming r?, o w, and v v : (l>v-iuih ^ ^^Vy 
Plur. i^ta-jxiv, £-0t?-v, Dflal t-(pa-TOv ; [f-^ij-v, / jplaced'], 
Plur. t-Oe-jULEv ; ^HKvv-fii, I show, Plur. ^ukvv-h^v. 

Obs. — Those forms which always have the vowel long are specially 
noticed below. 

§ 304. All verbs in fxi are divided into 2 classes : 

1. Those which in the Present join their terminations 
directly to the Stem : ^rj-jui ; 

2. Those which form the Present- Stem by adding vv to 
the Pure Stem : ^uK-vv-fii, I show, Pure Stem 3 1 1 ic, Pres- 
ent-Stem daiKvv. 



172 



IRST CLASS OF VERBS IN fit. 



305. 



I. FiRgT Class of Verbs in jui. 

§§ 305 and 306. The Paradigms of this Class of Verbs 
are inserted on p. 124, fol. sqq. 

§ 307. Some few forms of the Verbs in jui are formed 



§§ 305, 306. Dialects. — The following are Ionic secondary forms, 
those inclosed in brackets being the New-Ionic. 

Active. 
2 Sing. Pres. Ind. Ti-eri-aea di-doX-aOa, also Si-dol-g 



3 " " " Ti-eu Si-Soi 

3 Plur. " " Ti-eel(n(y) Si-domi(v) 
also {7rpo)9tovm(y) 

2 Sing. Pres. Imperat. di-Sio-Oi 
Inf. Pres. TL-drj-fiBvai Si-dS-fiep 

di-dov-vai 
Imperf. 1 Sing. [i-Ti-Oe-a] [l-di-6ov-v] 

3 « [l-Ti-Oe-e] 

Middle. 

3 Plur. Pres. Ind. [ri-0€-arai 5i-d6-arai 
3 " Imperf. " 

Pres. Part. n-dri-nwoQ 



Active. 



2 Aor. Ind. 3 Plur. 



u a 



" Subj. 1 Sing, ee'no [06a>] 

2 " enyq OX OrjyQ dt^c 

3 " Oeiy Sa)(n(v) or 

6u)y(Ti{v) 
" " 2 D. 

" " 1 Plur. ekiofiEv or dojojxEv 

Qdofiw 



" " 3 
" Inf. 



[i-<rr^] 
{Ka9)-i-aTa 



[t-ora] 



i-(TTe-aTai] 
[i-aTs-aro] 



tarav 
ecrraffav 

(TTTjyg 

(TTrjirov (§ 302, D.) 
(TTswfiev or 
(TTeiofisv 

[<TTE(0(Tl] 



Oefxevai, Qkjxw dofievai, Sofiev arrifjievai 

Middle. 
" Ind. Wio, Wev (§ 37, D., 1) ' ^ 

[Herod. irpogOrjKavTo'] 
" Subj. [Oeajfiai] Oeiofiai 

" Imper. 9eo, eev. 



§ 308. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IJT jUt, 173 

after the First Principal Conjugation, as, e. ^., the 2 Sing. 
Imperf. hiOng, the 3 Sing. hiOeif as if from the Stem riOs. 
Ifl the Imperf., the forms i^/Souy, e^i^ovg, l^i^ov are the 
only ones in use from the Stem dido; they are formed 
in the same manner as those of contracted verbs (§ 243). 
Other similar forms will be noticed in treating of the sep- 
arate verbs. 

In the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. contraction is sometimes em- 
ployed : TiOelmf didovm, 

â–  In the 2 Sing. Imperat. Pres. Act. the real ending 6i is 
dropped, and the Stem-vowel is lengthened to compensate 
for it : dldov for dldoOi. 

In the same person of the Aorist after a short vowel i 
only is dropped, and the remaining 6, according to § 67, is 
changed to g : do-6i, dog, but (rrri-Oi, which only in com 
pounds sometimes appears as <rra, e. g., Karacrra. 

In the 2 Sing. Mid. of the Present and Imperfect the 
(T between the two vowels is preserved ; riOe-aai, TiOe-ao, 
lTiOs-<To ; only the 2 Sing, of the Subj. is treated entirely 
like the contracted verbs of the First Principal Conjuga- 
tion. In the 2 Sing. Mid. of the Strong Aorist, on the 
other hand, the o- is thrown out, which gives rise to a con- 
traction : t-Oe-ao, t-Oe-o, t-9ov ; Imper. Oe-ao, Oi-o, Sov, 

Obs. — The forms of the 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid. compounded with 
monosyllabic prepositions, after contraction, throw the accent as 
a circumflex upon the last syllable : Trpo-9ov ; but Homer has 
avv-9eo and Trepi-9ov. 

§ 308. The three verbs conjugated above (p. 124) distin- 
guish the Present-Stein from the Pure Stem by redujpli- 
cation, that is, the initial consonant with i is prefixed be- 
fore the ^ Stem : do,dido; eE,riOe{^53h); i-<TTa for 
ai-GTay according to § 60, h (compare Latin si-sto). In 
like manner, the Stem y^paui the Pres. becomes Kt-x/oa 
{Ki-xpv-fJ^iyJ^ ^<^^)i Tr\a and ttjoo, with the insertion of 
a nasal, become tt i- /li-ttX a, iri- iJ.-7r pa {jrifXTr\r]fii, I fill ^ 
7rifi7rpr)iuii, I hum) ; but avfi-irL-TT\r]-ixi, tfji-Tri-TrXri-fjii ; the 



174 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN fit. § 309. 

Stem £ becomes 'l-rj-jui, I send ; and, with the reduplication 
within the Stem itself, ova becomes o-vi-vr)-ixiy I henefit. 

§ 309. The Deponents Svvafiai, I can ; tTricTTaixai, I understand ; Kpe- 
fiafxai, I hang; together with the Aorists cTrpid/ij/v, I bought; ijvti- 
fiT]v, 1 benefited^ withdraw the accent, even in the Subjunctive 
and Optative, as far as possible from the end : dvviofiai, tm&raivTo 
(compare i(Tru>fiai, laTdlvTo). 

Other peculiarities of verbs of this class are : 

§ 310. The three Stems Ot {rW^iit), go (g/gw^t)^ and I 
(V»]/it) form an irregular Weak Aorist in ica : Wr]Ka, f SwKa, 
riKa, but in the Middle we find only i]Kafir]v. In the Sing, 
of the Indicative the Active forms are customary instead 
of those of the Strong Aorist, but in the Dual and Plural 
of the Indicative they are rare. The other moods and the 
Participles have the strong forms exclusively. 

The really customary forms of the Aorist, therefore, are 
these: 

Ind. Subj. Qut Mid. Wkunv 

iOriKa Opt. eeirjv Subj. Owfiai 

iQtiKag Imp. Bkq etc. 

tOriKf.{v). Inf. BCivai 

Wetov Part, edq 

iOsTTJV 

tOsfiev (seldom WljKanw) 
Were ( " WfjKaTe) 
tOecrav ( " WriKav). 

§ 311. 2. The roicgh breathing instead of the o- of the 
Stem o- r a is also used in the Perf. (§ 60, h) : i-drrj-Ka for 
(T£-(TTrj-Ka. On the shorter forms, forajufv, etc., see § 317, 4. 
icTTij^tx), I shall sta7id, is a Third Future Active. The Per- 
fects of Q £ and I are rWetKa, tiKa ; the same vowel also re- 
mains in the Perf. Mid. Tidu^iai, Eifiai. The Stems g o and 
ara leave their vowel short in the Perf. Mid. and Aor. 



§ 310. Dialects. — ^From the Stem d o Hom. has sometimes Fut. di- 
Sia-(T(o instead of ddjau). 



§ 312. FIRST CLASS OP VERBS IN fxi. 175 

Pass., and £ in the Aor. Pass. : ^i-^o-fiai, e^69r}v, IcTraOriv, 
IriOrjv, TeOriaojuLai. On the meaning of the different forms 
ofW»?/if, see §329,1. 

§ 312. To the First Class of the Verbs in fit there also 
belong : 

A) Verbs whose Stem ends in a (compare *i(TTr)iii) : 

1. ri-jui (compare Lat. d-io), I say, only in the Imperf. rjv, 
3 Sing, r) (compare § 213, Ohs.). 

2. 6'vi-vr}-fjiL (Stem ova,^ SOS), I benefit, Mid. ovivafxat 
(§ S09), I have advantage, Strong Aor. Mid. tjvrtfxrjv, wvrjao, 
wvr}TO ; Opt. 6vaifjLr}v, Imperat. ovyicto, Inf. ovaaOaiy Fut. 
ovYjCTii), bviidOfiai ; Aor. Pass. tJvriOrjv, 

3. TrL-fX'-Tr\r]-fxi (Stem TrXa, § 308). Additional form, 
irX^di), I Jill [Lat.^Z^-o], Fut. 7r\i](Tw, Perf. Mid. iriirXri- 
(Tfiai, Aor. Pass. ettXtj^^t^v. 

4. TTi-fi-irpri-fiL (Stem irpa). Additional form, irpriOtjj 
(quite like 3). 

5. (pri-juL (Stem <{) a), I say, 2 Sing. Imperf. ecjyrjaOa (enclitic 
in Pres. Ind. except 2 Sing., compare § 92, 3). Imperat. 
(paOi or (jidOi ; compare (paaKU), 324, 8. 

6. xp^ (Stem X P «' XP^)' ^^^^ ^lust, Subj. xPVf ^P*' 
Xpeivy Inf. xpvvai, Part. XP^^^ (only Neut. from xp^ov 
according to § 3^7, D.). Imperf. IxP^^ ^^ XP^^> l^ut. xpn- 
o-f t ; air 6 xpVf it suffices, also 3 Plur. airoxp^i^ f^t{v), etc., 
as above awoxpcid)* 

7. Ki-xp^'l^^ (Stem xp^9% 308), I lend. Inf. Kixpo,vai, 
Fut. xpv<r^f ^or. £ X p »? o" a. Farther the deponents : 

8. aya-fxai (Stem 'a y a), I admire, Fut. ayaaojiai, Aor. 
Pass. i]7a(T0r]v, Verb. Adj. ayaaroc- 

9. ^vva-fxai (Stem ^vva), I can, 2 Sing. Ind. ^vvy is rare 
(§ 309), Imperf Idwdfxriv, 2 Sing. iSuvw, Fut. ^vvmofxai. 



§ 313. Dialects. — 3. Horn, has the Aor. TrX^ro, it was filled^ 3 Plur. 
irXrivTO^ Opt. irXyfiTjv or TrXeifirjv, Imper. [f/x]7rXj;(70. 
6. Herod. aTrtxpa. 
8. Horn, dydofiai, dyaiofiai. 



176 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN juii, § 312. 

Aor. IdvvriOrjv, seldom IdvvaaOriv. The Augment is fre- 
quently 7} (§ 23456^^5.), Perf.'SfSvvTj/zatjVerb. Adj. ^vvarog, 
capable, possible. 

10. £7rfOTa-/zm (Stem tir kt to), I understand, 2 Sing. 
tTTiaTaaai, Imperf. riTTKTTa/xrjVy i]iri<TT(jjf Fut. liriGTr]GOfxaiy 
Aor. riTTKTTrjOriv, Verb. Adj. ImaTtiTog. 

11. tpa-fiai (Stem Ipa), poetic, / love (commonly ipau)), 
Aor. Pass. iipaaQriv, 

12. Kpijua-fxai (Stem k pep, a), I hang (§ 309). Fut. icpc- 
pr}(Topai, Aor. iKpspatrOriv, Additional forms, § 319, 2. 

05s. — The following may serve as examples of the formation of 
words : to 6i-fia, the position ; 6 do-rrjp, the giver; 1) ffrd-m-g, the 
7^e ; ri 6vr]-(n-Q, the henejit^ from the Pure Verbal-Stem, differing 
from the Present-Stem; ») tprj-firj^fd-ma, talk; 1) dvvaixi-g, power; 
i} eTri(TTr}-firi, hnowledge, from the Verbal-Stem, which is the same 
as that of the Present. 



Dialects. — 13. Horn. d/xEvac, satiate, Stem d, Subj. iiofiev. 
14, Stem (S a, Part. l3i(3dg, stepping. 

14. h. Stem ^ e a, 3 Sing. Imperf diaro, seemed, Aor. dod-aaaro. 

15. Stem t \ a, i\d(TKOfiai, iXdojiai, I am gracious, Hom. Imperat. 'i\r]9i. 

16. Stem Ktpa (compare Kepdvvvfii,Imix), Hom. 3 Plur. Subj. Mid. 
KEpiovrai. fifTo these belong also, in regard to the inflexion of the 
Present-Stem, those Hom. verl^s which either are used only in the 
Present-Stem, or form the Present-Stem from the Verbal Stem by 
affixing the syllable -va : 

a) d dfi-vrj-fxi (also Safi-vd-ui), I tame. Mid. dd/x-va-fxai, Fut. ^afioio, 
^afidq.Q, Weak Aor. Inf ^andaai, daixd(Ta(T9ai, Perf ^edfiTJixai, Aor. Pass. 
idnrjOrjv, dafidaOrjv, and Strong Aor. Pass, iddfiriv (Subj. Safieico). 

h) Kipvijui (also Kepdvvvni, § 319, 1), J mix, Part. Kipvdg, 3 Sing. 
Imperf kKipvd. Compare § 319, 1. 

c) Kpr)}ivdp.ai, poetic additional form of Kpefia-fiai (12). Compare 
also § 319, 2. 

d) ndpvdp,ai,I contend, 2 Sing. Imperf. kiidpvdo. 

e) Trkpvriiii,! sell, Part, irepvdg, Trepvafxevog. 

f) TTiXvafiai,! approach. Stem tteX, Aor. 3 Sing. i-Tr\r]-To. 

g) TriTvr]fii, I spread. Part. TriTvdg, Imperf TrirvavTo. Compare 
319, 3. 

h) (TKidvT]fii,I scatter, (TKidvarai. Compare § 319, 4. 



§ 313. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN /m, 17? 

§ 313. B) Verbs whose Stem ends in e (compare Ti6r}iuii) : 
1. t-?j-iut (Stem I, Present- Stem l-e, i. e., l-k, according to 
§ 308), / send. 

Act. Pres. 3 Plur. Ind. ia<n{v), Opt. hir}v (secondary forms 

'ioi/ni, 3 Plur. mitv). 

Imperf. tVv (secondary forms [touv], 'lug, Ui), Plur. 

afxev, 3 Plur. u-dav, (k^ih and r](^Lu {a<^ii}fxi, 

I send away). Compare § 240. 

Aor. r\-K-a, rJKag, riKi{v), eiTOv, urr\v, UfX^v, alrf, al- 

(yav. 
Subj. w. Opt. ur]v, Imperat. tg. Inf. uvaiy Part, hq 
(Stem I V r). On this Aor., compare § 310. 
Fut. rjo-w, Perf. H-K-a, 
Mid. Pres. 'i-e-fxai, I hasten, strive, Subj. tw/zat, ly, etc. 

Opt. hifxriv (additional form loijuiriv), Imperat. 'leao 

or tou, Imperf. T-ifiriv. 
Aor. Eijurfv, eiao, elto, Subj. wfjiat, Opt. cY/zijv (addi- 
tional form ofjurjv). 

055. — The e I of the Ind. e'l-firip is caused by the Augment (§ 236), 
that of the Opt. by the Mood-sign (§ 303, 4). 

Fut. li-aofiai, Perf a-/iat, Plup. u-nr]v. 



§ 313. Dialects. — 1. Horn. 2 and 3 Sing. Pres. '/etc, Vei ; 3 Plur. iHm{v)', 
1 Sing. Imperf. Vcij/, 'ihq^ 'Ui ; 3 Plur. 'lev, 3 Sing. Subj. 'Irjmiv) ; Inf. 
t£/iex/ai ; Aor. Act. 'ir]Ka ; 3 Plur. 'iaav ; Subj. fVw ; Aor. Mid. 3 Plur. tvTo. 

2. Fut. i'jaoj and (aj/)£<Tw [Herod. nEfxErifievog, as a Part. Perf. of fjte- 
Tir]iJii=:fiE9ir]fii, § 52, D., as if from ften'w, with irregular reduplica- 
tion]. 

Moreover : 

3. Stem d{P)e, Pres. dr)ixi, I hlmc, 2 Dual drjrov, 3 Sing. Imperf dr] and 
a£i, Inf. a^vai and dtj/xevai, Part. Aor. Nom. Plur. dtvTsg, Mid. drjixevog. 

4. Stem ^t^, (ev) dieaav, they frightened ; dievrai, they flee ; Opt. ^t- 
otro. 

5. Stem ^i^€, diKrffJiai, additional fomi, ^i^oj,! seeJc; 2 Sing. ^I'^j/at, 
Inf. diZT](r9ai, Fut. di^rjcrofiai. 

6. Pres. Ktx»7/ii (compare § 322, 18), I obtain; Subj. /ctxet'w, Opt. ki- 
X€t^v, Inf. Ktxfjvat, Part. Kix^ig, Mid. KLxnuevog. 

Imperf. 2 Sing, t/ct'xei? , 3 Dual Kixhrriv. 

H 2 



178 riKST CLASS OF VERBS IN fxi. § 314. 

Aor. Pass. uOr^v, Subj. kOio. Yut. tOijaofjiai. 
Verb. Adj. tTog, ltIoq. 
2. St-Sr/-jut (Stem S £), / buid, a rare additional form of 
^i-w (§ 244, 1). 

§ 314. C) Verbs whose Stem ends in i : 

1. el-fii (Stem i, Lat. i-re)^Igo. 
Pres. Ind. €i-/ti i-/iEv Subj. i-w t-yf, etc. 

eZ I-Tov i-re Opt. i-oirjv l-oig, etc. 

€t-fft(j/) i-rov t-a(Tt(^') Imperat. i-9i i-rw, etc. 

3 Plur. i-6vT(M)v or t-rwcrav 
Inf. l-t-pai Part, j-toi/, i-ovcra, i-6v (Gen. i-ovr-og, compare Lat. 

e-unt-is) 
Imperf. yeiv or ya yEifiev or ynev 

yEig " yeiffOa, yeiTov, yrov, yeire " ^re 
yet " ysiv, ydrijv, yrrjv, ytaav 

Verbal Adj. Wogy Iriog (additional form trrjrfcov, it is 

necessary to go. 

Obs. — The Present, especially in the Indicative, has a Future mean- 
ing ; the Imperfect has the endings of a Pluperfect ; y is pro- 
duced by the Augment preceding e t. 

2. Ku-fxai (Stem Kei),I lie, has the Inflexion of a Per- 
fect. 2 Sing. KH'crai, 3 Plur. Kttyrat, Subj. 3 Sing. Klrirai, 
Opt. KtoiTO, Imperat. Keiao, Inf. KuaOai, Part. K^juevog ; the 
compound irapaKUfiai, Inf. irapaKuadai. (Compare r\nai, 
§ 315, 2). 

§ 314. Dialects. — 1. Stem «', 2 Sing. Pres. Ind. ElaQa, Subj. Ir^aBa^ Irjmvy 
1 Plur. 'iofiev, 'tofiEv, and 'tojfiev, Opt. lot, i'ei>^ or elrj, Inf. luEvai, Ifiw. 

Imperf riia and 77/ov, 3 Sing. ijk{v) or t6(i;), 1 Plur. yo/xej/, 3 Plur. 
»yVov, ii'iaav, with (rj;^, '/i£^', ttrav. 

Fut. tlaofiai, Aor. Eiffdfiijv and hiaafiriv. 

2. Stem icet, 3 Plur. Keiarai, KtaTui, keovtm, Imperf. Kdaro, ksuto 
[jckrai = mrai]. Part. Fut. kswv, cuMturus, Inf KEikfiEv. 

6 V is an Hom. Stem in 0, Pres. ovofiai, I vituperate, ovoffai, 3 Sing. 
Opt. ovoiTo (§ 309), Fut. ovoffaofiai, Aor. tjvocrd^rjv, and, from the Stem 
6 V, wvdfirjv. 

p V or £ p V is an Hom. Stem in v, 3 Plur. elpvarai, tliey rescue, protect, 
Inf. pvaOai, ipvaOai, elpi)fi€vog, Imperf. 2 Sing, tpvtro, 3 Plur. pvaro, kpvaro, 
elpvvTo ; moreover. Inf. Act. elpvuevai, to draw ; Aor. Mid. pmuTo, he 
rescued; kpvaoaTo, Tie drew. 



§ 315. FIRST CLASS OP VERBS IN juu. 179 

Obs. — When compounded witn prepositions, KEifiat is almost iden- 
tical in meaning with the Perf. Pass, of the corresponding com- 
pounds of riOijfii : vTroriOrjiJit, I lay as a foundation ; viroKeiTai, it is 
laid as a foundation. 

§ 315. D) Verbs whose Stem 'ends in a consonant (a) : 

1. elfii (Stem I e, Lat. es-se),Iam. 
Pres. Ind. d-fii (for Icrfii) ia-fisv 

el (for iff-ai) la-Tov id-rk (es-tis) 

t<T-Ti(y) (Lat. es-t) ia-Tov d-ai{v) 
Subj. to a»/i€j/ Opt. drjv eirjfiEv OF Bifiev 

yg i]Tov i/TE £ij/c elriTov or drov elrjTe or drs 

y ijTOV w(n{v) sir) drjrrjv or drrjv drjaav or dev 

Imperat. i(t9l tarov tare Inf. dvai 

iaTU) i<TT(>)v i(TT(t)(Tav Part, wp ovffa ov (Stem ovt) 

(Lat. esto) eorwj/, ovtujv 
Imperf. riv or /} r;/iev 

i]rr9a 7j<ttov or r]TOv ijre or ^ore 
ijv i'i(TTr]v or i]TT]v fjeap ^ . 

Imperf. Mid. i]\ni\v (rare) 

Fut. iaofiai, 3 Sing, tcrrai • 

Verb. Adj. karkov. 

Obs. — 1. The loss of the rr of the Stem is compensated for by the 
vowel being lengthened in the 1 Sing. (§ 42) : tj'/ii for t <r;ti, in the 
2 Sing. 61 for tai, which has arisen from the laai preserved in 
Homer (compare §§ 49, 61, &). In the 3 Sing, the original end- 
ing n is retained: tort (i/), the 3 Plur. has €/(ri(v), from la-vn. 
The Subj. <u stands for Iw (Hom.), from iai» ; the Opt. dj]v for 

§ 315. Dialects. — I(mic additUmal forms : 2 Sing, la-ai or dg, 1 Plur. 
dfikv, 3 Plur. ta(Ti{v) ; iam is also enclitic, but not taai{v). 

Subj. 1 Sing, tw, etw, 2 Sing, tj/e, 3 Sing. tr](Ti{v), ri<n{v^, iy, 3 Plur. 
iio(n{v). 

Opt. also tote, coi, 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid. tarro, 3 Act. tarw, 3 Plur. 

t<TT(i)V. 

Inf. tfifievai (for t<T-fievai), infiev, i/xevaij tfiev. 

Part, iwv, eovcTa, toy (Stem £ V r). 

Imperf. 1 Sing, rju, ia, tov ; 2 Sing. tj;(T0a [tag'], 3 Sing, »}«;, tj^y, ffriv 

[2 ;^r. tare], 3'Plur. taav] 3 Plur. Mid. etaro (//vro). 
Fut. tfffTOfiai, 3 Sing, torerai, taaeraij loadrai (§ 264), 

2. From ^/tat, 3 Plur. tarat, darai, Imperf. taro, eVaro. 

3. Inf. tSfievai, to m^,Pres, ttrOu), iaOik), t^w [Lat, es-tis=ieditis]. Com- 

pare § 327, 4. 

4. 2 Plur, Imperf <i>epTe = (pepEve, bring [Lat./er^e], 



180 



FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN /xt. 



§316. 



t(T-irjv, as the Inf. Elvai for id-vai ; uiv for kojv (Horn.), from ea-wv. 
In the Imperf the Dual has most fully preserved the (t. 

Obs. 2. — Eifxi is enclitic in the Pres. Ind. except the 3 Sing, el (com- 
pare § 92, 3) ; iaTi is paroxytone when it denotes existence, or 
means the same, as t^etrrt, " it is possible,''^ as well as at the begin- 
ning of a sentence and after the particles ov, fit], ei, wc, Kai : tcm 
Oeog, there is a God; ovk taTi, it is not possible. When merely ex- 
ternal causes prevent it from being enclitic (§ 93, c), l<TTi(v) is 
oxytone : (piXog 1<ttIv Ijxov, he is mp friend. 

Ols. 3. — In the compounds of dfil the accent remains on the Stem- 
syllable ; e. g.^ in the Imperf. Trajoijv, in the Subj. and Opt. dTrw, 
dTrelev, in the Inf and Part. dTrelvai, irapojv^ in the 3 Sing. Fut. 
TrapkaTai. 



2. riiiai (Stem 


7] g),Isit, has, like Kei/mai, the Inflexion of 


a Perfect. 




Pres. rifxai 


tijueOov riiiiQa ' Imperat. t^go. 


rjaai 


rjaOov rjads riaOu), etc. 


rjarai 


rjaOov rjvraL Inf. ^(rOai, 


' 


Part. rtfievog. 



Impf. rijULriv rjcro, etc. 

In Attic prose we find almost exclusively the compound 
KaOri/uLai, of which 3 Sing. KaOriTai, Subj. KaOw/iai, Opt. jca- 
Ooifir]v, 3 Plur. Kadoivro, Imperat. KuOricro or kuOov (from 
KaOeao), Inf. KaOriaOaL, Part. KaOijfJievogf Imperf. lKaQr]fxr]v 
(§ 240) or KaSrifirjv, 3 Sing. iKaOr)To or KaOriGTO, 3 Plur. 
EKa6r)VTO or KaOrjvro. 

§ 316. The following Strong Aorists, formed without a 
connecting vowel from verbs whose Present- Stem mostly 
follows the First Principal Conjugation, likewise belong to 
the First Class of Verbs in ju t ; 

Stems in a, 

1. £-j3rj-v (Stem /3 a), Pres. f^aivii), I go, Impl^t. j3^0f ; 
in compounds also /3a {Kara^a), Inf. jS^vat, Part. jSac- 



§ 316. Dialects. — 1. 3 Plur. t/3av, Subj. jSet'w, ^riy or /3£t'y, ^uofiiv [Her. 
/Stwjuev], Inf. (Srjfxevai. 



§ 316. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IJ^^ fil. 181 

2. yr)pa-vai (Stem yn pa), Inf. to the Pres. yrjpa-CFKU), I 
grow old, § 324, i. 

3. h^pa-v (Stitoi ^pa), Pres. gi-g|oa-<TKw, § 324, 2, 1 run, 
Inf. ^pa-vaif Part. ^pag. 

4. t'-Kra-v (Stem k r a), Pres. jcre/vw, / ^^7Z, Part, icra-c. 
Pari Mid. ktcl-ji^voq {killed), 

5. £-7rrr]-v (Stem Trra, Trrf), Pres. irtTOimai, I Jly, Part. 
TTTag, Mid. irrajuLevog, Inf. irriadaL. 

6. e-rXr^-y (Stem t\ a), I endured, Subj. rXw,Opt. rXanjv, 
Imperat. TX»i0f, Inf. rXf/vat, Fut. TXritjoiuai, Perf. TtrXr^ica 
(§ 317, D., 10). 

7. £-<^0r?-v (Stem a), Pres. (pOavw, I anticipate, Inf. 
^Orfvai. 

8. l-Trpid-juriv (Stem tt jO t a),I hought, Imperat. 7r/otfi>. 

Sterns in c. 

9. €-ffj3r?-v (Stem (rj3f), Pres. a^ivvviii, I quench, § 319, 
7, Inf. (rj3»}vat. 

10. E-cTJcXn-v (Stem (tkXc), Pres. ctkeXXw, / dry, Inf. 
(7»cXfiva«. 

11. Imperat. crx^-g, from o"X£-0t (Stem gx^), Pres. t'x^, 
§ 327, 6, 1 Sing. Ind. t-ax-o-v. 

Stems in (i), 

12. i-a\(i)-v (Stem a\(i)),I was caught, Pres. akiaKo^at 
(§ 324, 17), Opt. aXoirjv, Inf. aXC}vai, Part. aXovg. 

13. £-j3t(u-v (Stem j3 f w), Pres. j3tow, / ^^^^, Opt. jSfoJr^y, 
Inf. (5iu)vai, Part, jdiovg. 



Dialects. — 2. Part, yj^pac 

3. [Her. tdprjv.] 

4. 3 Sing. tKTci, 3 Plur. tKrav, Subj. nrkiafiw, Inf. /cra/wevat, Mid. tfcraro 
^e icas M^, § 225, D., 2), Pass. Aor., 3 Plur. tKrdOep. 

5. Mid. tTTTCLTO, Subj. TTTrJTai, DoP. 1 Siug. Act. £7rrar. 

6. 3 Plur. trXdv. 

7. Subj. 3 Sing. tpOrfy or ^0»7(rt(v), {Trapa)^9air](n{v)^ 1 Plur. (p9s(o/iEv, 
12. j^Xwv, Subj. dXww, Opt. 3 Sing. dXoi)/, Inf. dXiofxevai. 



182 FIKST CLASS OF VERBS IN jUf. § 316. 

14. e-yv(i)-v (Stem y v lo), Pres. yi-yvM-aKw, I come to 
hnow (§ 324, 14), Opt. yvoiriv, Imperat. yvCjOt, Inf. yvwvai, 
Part. yvovQ. ^ 

Stems in i, 

15. Imperat. ttI-Ql (Stem tt t), Pres. Trivw^Idrink, 1 Sing. 
Aor. Ind. 'imov (§ 321, 4). 

Stems in v, 

16. i-^v'v (Stem 8v), Pres. ^vw,! dive, Imperat. ^vOi, 
Inf. Svvae, Part. Sac. As to its meaning, see § 329, 4. 

17. e-<f)v-v (Stem (pv), I became, Ties, (pvw, I produce, 
Inf. ijivvat. 

Dialects. — 14. Subj. yj/wa>, Inf. yvwfxevai, 

15. Imperat. vie. 

16. 3 Plur. idv-v, Subj. ^ow, ^u^e, 3 Sing. Opt. Un (from ^w-tq), Inf. 

17. 3 Plur. ^vp. 

Besides these, the following are peculiar to the Ep. Dialect : 

18. Part, dirovpag, Pres. d-Kavpcua^I take away. 

19. Stem /3 \ j;, Pres. /3a\Xa>, I throw ^ 3 Dual ^vfi(3\riTT}v (met together)^ 
Fut. ^vfi(3Xri(T0fiai, Mid. t/SXj^ro (w)as ?dt, § 255, D. 2), Subj. (iXij-e-Tai, 2 
Sing. Opt. (3XeTo, Inf (iXrjaOai, Part. l3Xf]fievog (hit). 

20. Stem o i' r a, Pres. ovrdio, I wound, 3 Sing, ovra, Inf. ovrdfievai, 
Part. Mid. ovrd/xevog (wounded), Yerh. Adj. ouraro?. 

21. Stem TT r a, Pres. Trrfjcraio, I stoop, 2 Dual i-irTrj-Tijv, Part. Perf. 

22. Stem tt X a, Pres. TreXa^w, / approach, Aor. Mid. TrXrjTo. 

23. Stem /3|[> w, Pres. (3i-^pib-(TKb}, I eat (§ 324, 13), Aor. e/3pwv. 

24. Stem ttX w, Pres. ttXwu), I sail, 2 Sing. Aor. eirXbjg, Part. 7rXb)-g. 

25. Stem icrt, Pres. fcW^w, I found, Part. Aor. Mid. tv-Kri-fievog (well- 
founded). 

26. Stem ^ 1, Pres. <peiv(o,Iwa8te away, Subj. Aor. Mid. (peierai, Opt. 
tpOifxrjv, (pQlTO, Inf. (pOicrOai, Part. (^Bi^Evog. 

27. Stem kXv, Pres. kXvio, I hear, Imperat. Aor. /cXwOt or kekXvOi, kXvtb 
or KEfcXure. 

28. Stem X u, Pres. Xww, 7 Z^J^se, Aor. Mid. XvfiTjv, Xvto or Xwro. 

29. Stem ttw, Pres. ttvew, / hreathe, Aor. Mid. afiirvvTo (he recm&fed 
Irreath). 

30. Stem <ru, Pres. cevu),! scare, Aor. Mid. o-yro, Part, avfiwog. 

31. Stem xi^, Pres. x«w, /^(mr (§ 248), Aor. Mid. txvro, x^ro, Part. 
XVfiEvog. 



§ 317. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN jui, 183 

§ 317. Several Perfects also have some forms without a 
connecting vowel : 

A) Vowel Stems. 

A number of Vowel- Stems form the Sing. Perf. Ind. 
Act. regularly, but in the Dual and Plural of the Perfect 
and Pluperf. Ind., in the other moods, and in the Infinitive 
and Participle, may connect the endings immediately with 
the Perfect- Stem. 

1. Stem /3 a, Pres. jSatW, I go (§ 321, l). 

Perf. Ind . f3i(5r}K-a /Bf/ia-jucv 

j3£j3»j»c-ac /3 £ j3 a -TO V )3£j3a-T£ 
f3ij3r]K-£ f5ij5a-TOV /3£j3a-o-£(v) 

3 Plur. Subj. /3£j3w(Ti(v), Part. /Bt/Bwc, jStjSwaa, Gen. 
/BtjSwroc. 

2. Stem y a (for y a v), Pres. ytyvofiat, I become, Perf 
76-70 v-a, Plur. also yi-ya-fitv (§ 327, 14), Part, yaytjg, 
Gen. ytywTOQ. 

Dialects. — 32. Stem dX (a\Xo/iai,/8pnwg'), Aor. Mid. dX(ro,a\ro, Subj. 
uXerai, Part. dX/xevog. 

33. Stem yev, only in yevro, he took. 

34. Stem ^cx (Pres. Bkxoiiat, I accept), Aor. idsyfirjv, 3 Sing. ^£<cro,Im- 
perat. Ss^o, Inf. ^ix^"* (compare § 273, D.). 

35. Stem Xey (Xkyio, I collect), Aor. Mid. Xekto, he counted. 

36. Stem Xex (no Pres.), Aor. Mid. Xekto (he laid ^mseZ/"), Imperat. 
Xs^o, Inf. Xsx9ai, Part. {KaTa)XeyixEvog, Aor. Act. tXe^a, Mid. cXe^aro, Fut. 
Xe^o/iat. 

37. Stem fi i y, Pres. /utVyw, J mia;, Aor. Mid. ifUKTo, fUKTo. 

38. Stem dp, opwui,! excite, Aor. Mid. wpro, Imperat. opao or opaco 
(ppfTev), Inf. opOai, Part, opfisvog. 

39. Stem Tray {Trfiyvvfii,IJix), Aor. Mid. tTrriKTo,it was fixed. 

40. Stem TraX (7rdXX(o,Iwield), Aor. Mid. TrdXro. 

41. Stem TTcpO {irep9oj,I destroy), Inf. Aor. Mid. irkpQai {to ie de- 
stroyed). 

To these are to be added the Participles which have become Ad- 
jectives, dfffievog, glad (Stem dd, dvddv<t>, I please); iKfievog, favorable 
(Stem t K, iKveofiai, I come). 

§ 317. Dialects. — 1. Hom. 3 Plur. pe(3aa(Ti(v), Part. (5e(3awg, Dual (3e- 
/3a aire. 

2. Hom. 3 Plur. yey ad<Ti{v), Part, yeyawf, ycyavTa, Gen. yey aCjTog, 3 
Dual Plup. (kK)yeyari]v. 



184 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN fit, § 317. 

3. Stem Ova, Pres. Ovr}-(TKio, I die, Perf. rc-^vrj-jca, Plur. 
ri-Ova-fiev, etc. , Inf. reOv avai. Part. rtOvewg, reOveCjaa, 
TtdviOQ, Pluperf. 3 Plur. eTiOvaaav (§ 324, 4). 

. 4. Stem (TTu, Pres. '['(ttyi-iul, Perf. t-arrj-Ka,! stand, Plur. 
t-cTTa-iuev, Subj. Iotw/xev, idTLJcriiy), Opt. loratr/v, Imperat. 
taraOi, tcTTaTio, iCTTCiTOVf torrarf. Inf. I or a vat. Part. k<jTWQ, 
iaruxra, tcfrogyQen. e(TTLJTog, 3 Plur. Pluperf. f orao-a v 
(§ 306, etc.). 

5. Stem gf, Perf. gt'-gi-a or g^gof-ica, //^«7', Plur. ^i^L- 
fxiv, Zi-'^iaaiiy), Subj. StStw, Opt. SeStftrjv, Imperat. ^i^iOt, 
Inf. SfgfE'va^ Part. SfgitT^c, Pluperf. Egegt'ftv, 3 Dual k^^^lmv, 
3 Plur. i^k^taav, also Aor. c^ftaa, Fut. ddaojuLai. 

Obs. — The regular and irregular forms are mostly both in use. 

B) Consonant Stems, 

In these the peculiar changes of the vowels (§ 303) and 
consonants (§§ 45-49) must be observed. 

6. Stem IB (Aor. ddov,Isaw, § 327, 8). 

Perf. Ind. old -a, I hnow, lar-fxev, Subj. siSio ddujfxev 

di-oQa la-Tov iff -re eiSyc ddiJTOV sidijre 

oIS-e{v) iff-TOV iff-affi(v) Sidy eidfJTOV eida)ffi(v) 

Oj)t. eldeirjv, Imp. iff-6i ia-rov iff -re Inf. eidtvai 

iff-ru) Iff- rwv iff-rojffav Part, ddtjg, elSvia, 

eidog, Gen. eiSor-og 

Plup. ydeiv or ySij (IMew) ySeifiev or yffnev 

ydeiffOa " ySrjffOa ydeirov or yffrov ySeire " yffre 

ydei{v) " ydr) ydeirrjv " yffrrjv ydeffav " yffav 

Fut. £t(TOjuai, Verb. Adj. hrhv. 



Dialects. — 3. Imperat. rkOvaOi, Inf. re9vdfiev(ai), Gen. Part. reOvsCirog, 
reOvTjoJrog, reOvsiwrog, re9vi]6rog, reOveiSrog, Fem. reOvrjvla. 

4. 2 Plur. Ind. also 'iffriire, Part, iffracjg, Gen. iffraSrog [Her. cfrrewf, 
i(rrew(ra]. ^ 

5. ^et^ta, deidi/xev, Imperat. SeidiOi, 1 Sing. Perf. also SeidoiKa, Aor. t^- 
^£t(Ta (compare § 77, D.). 

6. 1 Plur. "id-fiev [Herod, and sometimes also in Att. writers oldajxev, 
3 Plur. oldaffi], Subj. eidkoj or Idstj, Plur. eldofiev, eidere^ Inf. iSnev{ai), 
Fem. Part. j'^uTa, Plup. [y^ea] jyet^Tje, V^e€(v) or rieidr] [2 Plur. y'^lare], 3 
Plur. to-a j^, Fut. ei^^crw. 



§ 318. SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN fit. 185 

Obs. — Besides olaOa^ we rarely have oUag, more fr^uently ydeig, 
ySrjQ, together "with yhiaQa, and ydefxev, ydsTs, instead of .ijdeifiev, 
ySeiTS. 

7. Stem t K, only in the Perf. toiKa,! resemble^ appear, 
1 Plur. poet. coty/xEv, 3 Plur. quite irregularly A^a(FL{v) 
(compare '[(raai), Inf. HKtvai (poet, with loiKivai), Part. elKtjg 
(with loiK(x)g), tiKvXa, eiKog, Plur. It^jjcEtv. 

8. Stem Kpay, Pres. Kpa^o), I cry^ Perf. KUpaya, Im- 
perat. Ke-Kpax'Oi. 

11. Second Class of Verbs in /it. 
§ 318. 1. The Second Class of the Verbs in jui belongs 
to this conjugation only in regard to the inflexion of the 



Dialects. — 7. Imperf. eZicc, Perf. [Her. olKa, oIkwq], Dual uktov, 3 Dual 
Plup. etKTT]v, 3 Sing. Plup. Mid. tjIkto or ukto. 
Besides : 

9. Stem /i a, 2 Dual Perf. nefidrov, strive, fisficifiev, fikfiare, fiindd<n, Im- 
perat. fn^aTio, Part, fnfiaibg, via, 6g, Gen. wrog, 3 Plur. Plup. fikfidfrav. 

10. Stem rXa, Perf. TsrkrjKa,! am patient, 1 Plur. TETXa/xev, Opt. te- 
rXaiTjv, Imperat. TerXaOi, Inf. rETXafiev{ai), Part. TerXrjwg, rjvla, Gen. re- 
rXfjoTog. 

11. Stem avfa>7, Perf. dvioya,! command, 1 Plur. dvojyfiev, Imperat. 
dvoJxOi, 3 Sing. dvoJxOio, 3 Plur. dv(ox9e, Plup. ?)va>yea. 

12. Stem eyep, Perf. iyp-riyop-a, I am awaJce, 2 Plur. Imperat. fcypi^- 
yop9e, 3 Plur. Ind. kypr}y6pQd<n(y). 

13. Stem £\i;0, Perf eiXrjXovOa, I have come, 1 Plur. elXrjXovOfiev. 

14. Stem 7r6v0, Perf 7r£7rov0a (Pres.'Tradxwj/swjf^r, § 327, 9), 2 Plur. 
TrkTzoaQe (for 7r67roi^0-r£), Fem. Part. TrSTrdOvXa. 

15. Stem 7rt0, Perf irkiroLQa (Pres. TrdQco, I persuade), 1 Plur. Plup. 
eTTSTTiOnev, Imperat. ttettektOi. 

Farther the Participles : 

16. Stem 13 pu} (fii(ipu)aK(o,I eat, § '324, 13), Part. Perf ^t^pwg, Gen. 
(iifiphJTog. 

17. Stem TTTE, TTTio (TTtVrw, I fall, § 327, 15), Perf TrtirrwKa, Part. 
Gen. irtwTEGJTog, Nom. TreTrrwf . 

§ 318. Dialects. — Ion. 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. Act. -v<ti{v), together with 
-vdai{v). Hom. 2 Sing. Imperat. -v and -iiBi (daivv, ofivvOi), Inf 
Hom. -vfievai, vfiEv (ZevyvvfiEv). Hom. forms from Saivvfiai,Ifeast, 
the Opt. daivvTo, for daiw-i-ro. Similar cases see below, § 319, 32. In 



186 SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN fii. § 319. 

Present-zStSn. The Present- Stem of this Second Class is 
formed by adding the syllable v v to the Pure Stem. 

2. The quantity of the v is determined by the rules in 
§ 303, hence 8ftKvvjut, but l^dKvv/iev. 

3. Yowel- Stems double v in the Present- Stem : Stem 
K epa, Kipa-vvvfii, I 'inix, 

4. Here also numerous additional forms are in use ac- 
cording to the First Principal Conjugation (^uKvvtS), espe- 
cially in the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. : ^uKvvovai{v) ; and these 
forms are exclusively used in the Pres. Subj. and Opt. 

5. Most of the Verbs of this class have the Weak Aor- 
ist; only a^ivvv\xi, I quench (Stem o- j3 c), forms the 2 Aor- 
ist cajSrjv, Inf. (j^r\vm. Compare §§ 316, 9; 319, 7. 

The Paradigms of this Class of Verbs are inserted on 
p. 128. 

§ 319. The following verbs belong to the Second Class 
of Verbs in /* ( : 

Stems in a, 

1. Kepdvvvfit (Stem Kipa, Kpd)ylmix. 

Aor. tKkpdaa Perf. Act. dKpdKa . p ( UpaOriv 

" Mid. KBKpdfiai ' ' I lKepd<T9t]v 

2. Kpendvvvfii (Stem Kpefia)/l Mng, trans. Mid. Kpenafiai, I hang^ 

intrans. (§ 313, 12) 
Fut. Kp^iiCj (§ 263) UpefiaffOriv 

Aor. tKpefidaa 

3. TCETavvvfii (Stem TTETay,! spread. 

Trerw (§ 263) t7r£ra(r0j;v 

iTrerdaa 7re7r(€)ra/iat [pate-o] 

4. (TKEdavvvfii (Stem crfce^a),/ scatter; additional form (TKiSvTjfit 

(§ 312, D. 16, 7i) 
CKeda (§ 263) IffKidaffOriv 

l<TKkdd(Ta IffKBdaff/iai. 



the New-Ion. Dialect the t of the Stem deiKis lost in SeKo), tSeKa, de- 
deyfiai, IdexOrfv ; Hom. Pf. (deideyfiai, I salute) 3 Plur. deidexarai. 

§ 319. Dialects.— 1. Compare § 312, D. 16, and § 312, D. 16, 5. Other 
forms : Kepdio, Kepaiw, Aor. iKprjtra. 
2. Fut. Kpefiou), KpsfidffQ (§ 243, D.). 



§319. 



SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN fil. 



187 



Stem§ in e. 
Obs. — Several of these Stems originally ended in q. 
5. 'ivvvfii (Stem originally Peg, compare Lat. ves-tis)^ I clothe (only 

dfKpi-evvvm is in use). 
dfi(pi-u> (§ 263) 

Fut. Mid. dfupi-eaofiai i^fi(piE(Tfiai 

Aor. i)fi(pi-£<Ta (§ 240) 
Inf. Aor. Mid. linkaaaQai 

Q.Kopevvvfit {Stem. Kope), I satisfy. 

tKopeaa tKopeaOijv 

KfKopecrfiai 

7. (TJSevvvjxi (Stem a ^e), I quench. 

f''''^ Uransitive '<^^^<^/^«* l<r(3e<rer,v 

tajSecea ) 

t<TJir]v ia^riKa \ 

(§ 316, 9) \ intransitive (§ 329, 5) 

Fut. a(ir]<JO{xai ) 

8. aTopkvvvfii (Stem ffTope) (compare 11 and 25)^1 ^ead 

(compare Lat. ster-n-o) 
(TTOpCJ (§ 263). iaropecTixat 

laropeaa. 

Stems in (X), 
(Stem K(t)),Igh'd, 

lZ,w(ydfir\v 

(Stem pio),I strengthen. 

tppojfiai (lam stroTig) tppaxrOijv 
(Stem orrpw). Compare No. 8. 

iarpojfxai larptoQijv 



9. ^(OVVVfll 

tlwaa (Mid.) 

10. pwvvviii 

pU)(T(t) 

11. (Trptovpvixt 

(TTpbtfflO 
t<TTpiO(Ta 

12. XQ'^^^^H-'- 

fXpiotra 

13. ayvvfti 

dXio 

taKa (§ 237) 



ixpii)(TBiiv. 



(Stem xp<^)i^ co^' 
KSxp(o<Tnai 

Consonant-Stems. 
(Stem d y, originally Pay, § 34, D.), I hreah 
tdya (I am l)roken) Idyriv 

(§ 375, 2) 



Dialects. — 5. Imperf. ^Ivvov for 1<t-vvov [Inf. Pres. dwaOai], Fut. dfx- 
0i£(T(u, eWw, Aor. eWa, Mid. isffaaTO, Perf. Mid. el/iat, tWat, Part, dfikvog, 
2 Sing. Plup. tWo, 3 Sing, 'iaro, haro, 3 Plur. eVaro. 

6. Aor. Mid. Kopkaaaro, Part. Perf. Act. KeKoprjutg, satiated, Mid. keko- 
prjfiai. 

13. ^^a with ia^a [Her. Perf. tj;7a]. 



18^ 



SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN jut. § 319. 



14. ^£iKvy/At, see § 318. 

15. e'lpyvvfii (Stem eipy),I shut in (addit. form e'lpyuj) 

^ip^^ tipxOTjv 

elp^a Part, ep^ag, dpyfiai 

16. l^vyvvixi (Stem Kvy),IUnd. 

Kev^u) ilvyriv 

tZev^a iZevyfiai [t^evxOtjv] 

17. KTivvvfii (Stem K r 6 v) , / killj with (cretVw (§253) 

18. fiiyvvfii (Stem /iiy),/w^ with /liayw (§ 327,*7) 

/xi^w /^£/itX« ( IfiixOrjv 

t^iiKa fisfiiyfiai \ ijxiyrjv 

19. olyvvjxi (Stem o I y) , / 6>j9eyi (with o 7 y w) 

ot^w l<^X« and t<^ya (§ 279) it^x'^nv 

ey^a (§ 237) ti^yiiai 

20. oXXvfii (Stem 6X and 6X6),for 6Xwfii,Ii 

6\w (§ 262) oXtiXem (§ 275, 1) 

wXeca 
Fut. Mid. oXovfiai oXioXa 



.. , , in trans., //)ms^. 

0)X0flT]V ) -^ 

21. ofxvvfii (Stem 6fi, 6}x6)^I swear. 

ofiovfxai (Act.) ofiwuoKa (§ 275, 1) wfioaQrjv 

wfxoaa g-gjjjg pgj.f jyjij I ofubfioTai Verb. Adj. (dv)w/toroe 

( 6lXb)fiO(TTai 

22. ofiopywui (Stem bfiopy)^! wipe out. 

w/xopKa (Mid.) wfiopx&vv 

23. w^yvvfii (Stem tt a y), /^;i; [compare Lat. pango] 

.iirrj^a TrsTrijya {I am fixed) \ t7rrix9r]v 

i tTrdytjv 

24. (6//yvv/ii (Stem pay), J ^mr. 

f |0j6;;?a (Mid.) eppojya (I am tom) kppdyrjv 

(§ 278) payrjaofiai 

25. (TTopvvfxi (Stem trrop), with <TTopkvvvfii (8) and ffTp^vvv/xi (1 1) 

26. ^pdyvvfii (Stem <ppay), also (pdpyvvfiij and, according to 

Class 4, a, ^pdatro), I shut in, lock in. 

Dialects. — 15. Imperf. lepyvv, with Upycj [epyo], 3 Pliir. Perf. Mid. 
epxarai, Plup. tpx^''^ (§ 287), Part. Perf. kpyfikvog, Aor. Pass. IpxQtig, 
with Imperf. tpyaOov. 

18. Aor. Mid., § 316, 37. 

19. wV^a, ^^a [avot^a], Imperf, wiyvvvTO. 

20. 6Xs<T(T(jj [oXew], Part. Aor. oyXd/xevof (^Z^s^rwc^i^e), with 6Xk-a>. 

21. wfiotTcra or bfioaaa. 
To these also belong : 

27. aivvfiai, aTToaivvfiaij I talce away, used only in the Pres. 



320. IRREGULAR VERBS. 189 

Obs. — Nouns are formed from the Pure Verbal-Stems, as : ij SeX^t-c, 
the announcement; 6 Kpd-rrjp, tTie mixing howl; rb El-fxa^ the clothing 
— for Pea-fxa ; r) ^w-vt/, tlie girdle; rj pw-/f»/, the strength ; to arpu>-fia, 
the carpet; to Z,vy-6-v,the yoke; 6 6Xe-9po-Q,the ruin; 6 avv-iofio- 
Tr}-Q,the conspirator; 6 Trdy-o-g, the frosty h^ar-frostr 



Chap. Xlt. — Irregular Verbs of the First 
Principal Conjugation. 

§ 320. The irregularities of the Greek Verb chiefly con- 
sist in the Present- Stem differing from the Verbal- Stem in 
a way different from that which has been pointed out above, 
§ 245, etc. To the four classes there enumerated the fol- 
lowing four classes are to be added. 

Obs. — In these as well as in the following lists, the principal forms 
only are given, fi-om which the rest are easily formed. (Mid.), 
added to a tense, denotes that, in addition to the Active, the 



Dialects. — 28. dwni (and dvv(x)), I complete, only Imperf Mid. i)vvto. 

29. apvvfiai, I acquire, Aor. i^pSfiriv, Inf. dpeaOai, 1 Aor. 2 Sing, iipao, 
3 Sing. TjpaTo. 

30. dxvv^ai, I grieve, Aor. dKdxovTo (§ 257, D.), Perf. dKdxrjfJiai (§ 275, 
1), 3 Plur. dKTjx^daTai (§ 287, D.), 3 Plur. Plup. dKuxduTo, Part. dKaxn- 
fievog and dKrjxsfieuog. Moreover, the Active a/caxiZw (/ grieve), Aor. 
■^Kaxov and dKdxr](Ta (compare § 326). 

31. ydvvfiai, J rejoice, Fut. yavvaa^Tai. 

32. daivvm, I entertain. Opt. Pres. Mid. 3 Sing. daivvTo (§ 318, D.), 3 
Plur. daivvuT, Fut. dai(T(o (Mid.), Aor. iSaiaa (Mid.). 

33. Kaivvfjiai (Stem Kad), I Surpass, Perf. KSKatrfiai (I am distin- 



34. Kivvfiai, I move, additional form of ictvlw, Preterite i-Ki-o-v,Iwent, 
Subj. Ki-cj, Opt. Ki-oi-fii, Part, ki-wv. 

35. Tivvfii, Tivvfxai, additional form of nVw, § 321, D. 5. 

36. opeyvvfii, additional form of dpsycj, I stretch out, 3 Plur. Perf. Mid. 
opwpex"^"* (§ 287). 

37. opvvfxi (Stem 6 p), I excite, Fut. opaio, Aor. wpopov (§ 257, D.), 
Perf. opojpa (§ 275, 1), I have arisen [Lat. or-ior], Aor. Mid. 3 Sing. JjpTo, 
arose (§ 316, 38), Perf. Mid. 3 Sing. Ind. 6pa»p-e-Tai, Subj. bpwpriTai, with 
Imperf Mid. opkovTo. 

38. Tdvvfiai, with Tavvw, reivu), I extend, stretch. 



190 FIFTH, OR NASAL CLASS. § 321. 

corresponding Middle form is also in use ; e. g.^ in addition to 
iTiaa (No. 5) iri(Tdfii]v also is used. 

Fifth^ or Nasal Class. 

% 321. The Verbal-Stem is strengthened by the addition 
of V, or of a syllable containing v, to form the Present- 
Stem. 

a) V alone, often united with lengthening of the vowel, 
is added to the following Stems : 

1. Stem /3 a, Pres. /SatVo), I go. 

Aor.Act. Fut. Perf. Pass. 

i-fin-v (§ 316, 1) ^iiGoiiai (5e^r}Ka (§ 317, 1) 

t/3j7-(Ta (3i](To) (§ 329, 2) Verb. Adj. (idrdg 

2. Stem £ \ a, Pres. iXavvw,! drive. 

fiXd-aa. iXuj (§ 263) ajjXa/ca (§ 275, 1) v^dOriv 

i\r)\anai Verb. Adj. eXareog 

3. Stem <p6a, Pres. ^9avu),I anticipate. 

< t-<pBr]-v (§ 316, 7) <p9r]<Tonai ttpBoLKa 

( t-tpOd-aa 

4. Stem TV t, Pres. tt i v w, / drink (additional Stem tr o). Compare 
§ 827, 10. 

t-ni-o-v (§ 316, 15) Trioiiai (§ 265) 

5. Stem r t, Pres. rivo)^ I pay penalty. 

l-Ti-aa (Mid.) Ti<7ia TSTiKa IriaOTjv 

rkncT/xai 

6. Stem ^ 1, Pres. ^Oivu), I perish, waste away. 

i-^9i-(Ta (pQi<TO}iai t^Oi/iai e^OiOrjv 

7. Stem dv, Pres. dvvu) (with dvo), Class 1), I immerge. 

i-dv-v (§ 316, 16) H(T(i) dtdvKa idvOrjv 

t^vaa, I dipped. m 

8. Stem ^afc, Pres. SdKvo),IUte. 

t-ddK-o-v drj^ofiuL ^eSrjxa l^i}xdr]V 



§ 321. Dialects.— 1. Aor. ]^id. t/B^aero, § 268, D. 

2. Pres. tXaw, Fut. eXow, tXd^c, § 243, D., Aor. tXaaffa, Mid. r/Xdcrdfiriv. 
3 Plup. Mid. aj^Xd^aro (§ 287, D.) [^Xatreriv]. 

3. Ep. (pOdvu), Part. Aor. Mid. ^Od/xevog. 

5. Ep. Wvw, with n'-w and rtW/it, § 319, D. 35. 

6. Ep. (p9tv(o, (pei(o, Aor. e<p9ifiriv, i(p9lTo, § 316, D. 26 ; with Pres. <})9i- 
vv9(>). 

7. Aor. Mid. idvaeTo, § 268, D. [Pres. tvdweoj, I put on. Compare 
§ 323]. 



§ 322. 



FIFTH, OR NASAL OliASj 



191 



9. Stem Kdfi, Pres. Kctfivu),! weary. 
i-Kan-o-v Kafiovfiai KSKfiijKa 

10. Stem Tefi, Pres. rkfivu),! cut. 

t-Tefi-o-v (trdfiov) TSfid ThfirjKa (§ 283) hfirjOrjv 

§ 322. h) The syllable av is added to the following 
Stems : 

11. Stem aiaO, Pres. ai<T9-av-o-nai, I perceive. 

yad-6-fir}v aiffO-rj-ffOfiai yrrO-ij-ixat 



12. Stem dfiapr, Pres. duapT-dv-M,! err, 



rifiaprfi-Oriv 



rjfiapT-o-v afiapT-rj-ffOfiai rjnapT-rj-Ka 

13. Stem a u ^, Pres. avK-dv-u) and au?w, / increase [aug-eo] 

av^rf^ofiai (Passive) 

14. Stemj3Xa<rr, Fres. (5 Xaffrdvcjjllmd. 



t-fSkatXT-o-v 

15. Stem 5 ape, 
i-Sap9-o-v 

16. Stem kxO, 
(d7r)rix9-6-fir]V 

17. Stem I?, 

18. Stem KiX) 
i-Kix-o-v 

19. Stem olS, 

20. Stem 6\i<t9, 
utXiaQo-v 

21. Stem 6ff({>p, 
w<T(l>p-6-firjv 

22. Stem 6^\, 



(iXaffT-rj-au) tjSXdarrijKa (§ 274 exc.) 

Pres. dapOdvtj,! sleep. 

dapO-'fi-aofiaL deddpOrjKa 

Pres. (dTr)e xOdvofiai,Iam hated. 

(d7r)€x0-^-<TO/iai (a7r)i7X^^/iai 

Pres. I ^ a V w and t^w, I seat myself. 

Pres. Klxctvio,Imeet (compare § 313, D. 6) 

Kix-rj-oofxai 
Pres. olSdvia and oiSeto,! swell. 

oidrj-aui (pdrjKa 

Pres. 6 \ t (T a 1/ w, I slip. 

6\ia9-rj-a(t) 
Pres. 6<T<ppaivofiai,I smell. 

6(T<pp-r)-(T0fiai 
Pres. o^X-ttTK-av-w (compare § 324) and 
6(peiX(t), I owe. 

6<p\-r)-(T(iJ u)<p\riKa 



Dialects. — 9. Part. Perf. KEKfirjcJg, Gen. KeKfirjwTog. 

10. With Tfirjyb), Aor. Pass. 3 Plur. irftayev, with Pres. Hfin. 

Peculiar to the Hom. dialect are : Aor. 0a-£(v), illuxit, Fut. m-tpfi- 
(TOfiai, from Stem <}> a, Pres. ^aivoj ((i>adv(ti), I shine, shmo, Aor. Pass. 
^adv9r}v. 

§ 322. Dialects. — 12. Aor. ?)//j3porov for r)fipdrov (§ 257, D. Com- 
pare § 51, D.). 

13. diP)sK(o. 

15. Aor. iSpd9ov (§ 257, D.). 

18. Ep. KXxdvb). 

21. [Herod, datppdnrjv, 1 Aor.] 



192 . FIFTH, OR NASAL CLASS. § 322. 

23. Sternal, Vve%. av^ dvio^I please. 

24. Stem r y, Pres. 9iyyavb)^I touch. 
e-9Xy-o-v Oi^ofiai 

25. Stem \ a /3, Pres. Xafifidvoj, I take. 

t-\d^-o-v Xfjipofiai tiXij^a (§ 274) i\r]<l>9r]V 

dXrjuiiai (seldom XeXijuiiai) 

26. Stem Xd9, Pres. Xav9dva),I am hidden, with X^0w (Class 3), 

Mid., I forget. 
t-Xd9-o-v Xrjau) XkXT)9a 

Mid. eXa96fiT]v Xrjffofiai XsXrifffiai 

27. Stem \ a x, Pres. Xayxavoj,! attain. 
t-Xdx-o-v XriKofJiat £tX»7X" (§ 274) 

tlXijyuai 

28. Stem fid 9, Pres. fiav9dv<o, J^eam. 
t-Hd9-o-v fia9-ri-(rofiai ni}id9riKa 

29. Stem tt i; 0, Pres. Trvv9dvofiai,I learn, with mv9ofiaL, Class 2. 
l-Trv9-6-HT]v ireixTOfiai ireTrvfffiai 

30. Stem r i; x, Pres. rvyxdvu),! meet, with reux*^) I prepare, CI. 2. 
i-Tvx-o-v TEv^ofiai TS-Tvx-^-Ka 

seldom Hrevxa 

31. Stem ^vy, Pres. (pvyydvco, IJiee, with ^evyw (Class 2). 

O&s. 1. — The verbs in 23-31, whose Stem forms a short syllable, 
insert another nasal in addition to the affix a v. In ^aivio (1) 
and dffippaivofiai (21) i has crept in (§ 253), as well as in Kepdaivu), 
I gain, which forms only the Perf. KeKspdrjKa, from the Stem Ksp da ; 
all the other forms are regular, according to Class 4. A large 
part of the verbs (No. 11-16, 18-22, 28, and 30) form either some 

. or all the tenses, except those of the Present-Stem, from a Stem 
in € (compare below, § 326). 

Ohs. 2. — The following may serve as examples of the formation of 
nouns : to (^fj-fia, the step ; jy (p9i-(n-g, the consumption ; 6 KUfi-aTo-g, 

Dialects.— 23. Imperf , § 237, D., Aor. [eaSov'] evadov (§ 237), [ddriaio] 
'dada. 

25. [Her. Fut. XdfixpofiaL, Perf. XeXdi3r)Ka, Aor. Pass. iXdfi(p9T}v. 

XeXa/i/wai, Verb. Adj. Xa/iTrrof.] 
Hom. Inf. Aor. Mid. X€Xa(3s(T9ai (§ 257, D.). 

26. Pres., with lKXT]9dvo), cause to forget, Aor. eXijca and XsXd9ov 
(§ 257, D.), XeXa96nT]v (I forgot), Perf. Mid. XeXacr/iai. 

27. Aor. XkXaxov,! sTiared with [Fut. Xd^o/tat], Perf. XeXoyx"- 

29. Aor. Opt. 7re7rv9oiTo (§ 257, D.). 

30. Also Tevx<*), Aor. tstvkeiv, Mid. tevvkovto, Perf. Tsrvyfiai, 3 Plur. 
TtTEvxarai, Aor. kTvx9T]v, with the Pres. TiTv<7K0fiai (§ 324, D. 37), / aim 
at, Aor. iTvxr}<Ta, I met (§ 326). 



§ 324. SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. 193 

the exiiaustion; to Xij^-jxa, the assumption; ri Xr]9-r}, ths forgetting; 
V Tvx-n^ i^ chance^ accident ; and from Stems which are length- 
ened by £ : »7 ai(T9-r]-(n-g, the sensation; to afidpT-r]-fia^ the error; 
6 naO-jj-Trj-g, the scholar. 

§ 323. c) The syllable ve is added to the following 
Stems : 

32. Stem /3 u, Pres. jSww, I stop up. 

t-^v-aa (3v(T(o Mid. ^k^vfffiai 

33. Stem i k, Pres. iKvovfiai,! come, with iKavo), according to 

§323 

iK-o-fitjv 'l^ofiai ly/xai 

34. Stem k v, Pres. Kvvko),! kiss. 
i-KV-aa 

35. Stem ttet, Pres. tt i r v e w, I fall (compare TrtVrw, § 327, 15) 
t-TTBo-o-v (for l-7r€r-o-r), together with t-TriTv-o-v 

36. Stem u tt e x, Pres. vtc laxvov jiai, I pivmise (compare ix(o, 

§ 327, 6) 
VTTSffxonrjv VTroffxv^ofiai vireffxilfJiai 

so likewise dfnriax^ovfiai, I wear (also anTrkxofiai), Aor. tjixttktxoVj Inf. 

dflTTKTXf^V. 

§ 324. Sixth Class, or Inchoative Verbs. 
The Yerbal-Stem is enlarged by affixing o-k to form the 
Present- Stem. This o- k is added to Yowel- Stems (exc. 21) 
at once, but to Consonant- Stems after the insertion of the 
connecting vowel i. Several of the verbs belonging to this 
class (Nos. 2, 6, 7, 13, 14, 16, 20) farther strengthen the 
Present-Stem by means of a reduplication with the vowel 
£ : yi'yvw-(TK-(x) [Lat. {g)-no-sc-o'], 

§ 323. Dialects.— 32. [Herod. fHvoj.] 

33. 'iKio, Aor. l^ov (§ 268, D.), Part. iK/jievog,favoraI)le (§ 316, D.). 

34. Kvaaa. 

Moreover (to a — c), the Verbs : 

37. Stem dXiT, Pres. dXiTaivto, I sin, Aor. ^Xtrov, Mid. dXiVovro, Part. 
Perf. d\iTT]fievog, sinful. 

38. Stem a X 0, Pres. d\<i)dvo), I acquire, Aor. ^\(pov. 

39. dyivku), only in Yres., I lead, with aycj. 

40. Ipvyydvu), I roar, Aor. ijpvyov, Pres. also ipevyofjiai. 

41. Stem xdd, Pres. x«i'^«»'w, / embrace, Aor. tx«^o^, Fut. x«t<^o/^«i; 
Perf. KBxavda. 

I 



194 SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. § 324. 

As many of these verbs denote a beginning or coming 
into being, all of them are usually called Inchoatives. 

Stems in a, 

1. Stem yrjpa, Pres. yrjpd-aK-io, I grow old (seldom yrjpd-io). Com- 

pare sene-sc-o 
i-yr]pd-aa yrjpd-aofxai ye-yr/pa-Ka 

Inf. yrjpd-vai (§ 316, 2) 

2. stem dp a, Pres. di-d pd-<TK-(D^ I run (used only in com- 

pounds) 
t-dpd-v Spd-aofiai ds-dpd-Ka (§ 316, 3) 

3. Stem jf j3 a, Pres. ti^d-oK-io^ I hecome marriageable (compare 

pvbe-scrd) 
i](3T}-<Ta 

4. Stem 9va (from d v), Pres. 9vT]-(TK-io,Idie (usually aTroOvridKw) 
t-9dv-ov 6dv-ov/iai Ts-Qvtj-Ka (§ 317, 3) 

Fut. 3, Ttepr]^u}, § 291 evTj-To-Q 
(mortal) 

5. Stem IXa, Pres. i\d-(TK-ofiai, I conciliate. 

Mid. iXd-ad-fiijp tXa-(T-o-/iai iXd-aOij-v 

6. Stem fiva^ â–  Pres. jx i- ft vri-<TK-u), I remember. 
i-fivrj-(Ta nvr)-a(3) i-iivrj-aOr}-v 

fik-fiVT]-nai fivr]-<T9r](T0fiaL 

[Tuemini] 

7. Stem TT pa, "PreB. 'TTi-Trpd-ffK-u),! sell. 

(for the Aor. and Fut. dTridofirjv irk-irpd-Ka B-7rpd-9Tjv 

dTToddxTOfxaC) Trk-7rpd-/iai 7rpa-9r}(TO/xat 

TTB-TTpd-ffOHai 

8. Stem (p a, Pres. ^ a - tr <c - w, / say. ' Compare (prj-fii, § 312, 5. 

9. Stem X a and % « ^j Fres. % a - a k - w, / open the mouth. 
i-Xdv-ov xdv-ov^iai Kk-xriv-a. 



Stem in c. 

10. Stem dpE^ Pres. apk-oK-w^ I please. 

fipi-aa dpe-ffu) rjpk-a9r}v. 

Stems in (i). 

11. Stem/3iw, Pres. (dva)(3iu>-(rK-ofxai,I revive. 
(dv)e-(3i<o-v (§ 316, 13) 

{dv)e(3i(t)<rdfirjv, I revived. Compare § 329. 



§ 324. SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. 195 

13. Stem (3 \ 10 (from /io\, § 51, D.), Pres. jiXdi-a k-m^I go. 
e-fio\-ov fioX-ovfiai • 

13. Stem fipo), Pres. l3i-(3pu)-(TK-o), I consume. 

l3e-l3poj-Ka (Part. /3£/3pwf, § 317, 

D. 16) 
/3£-,3jO(i»-/iai 

14. Stem y v w, Pres. y i-yvio-ffK-o)^ I recognize [Lat. (g)no-sc-o] 

i-yv(i)-v (§ 316, 14) yvu)-aofiai i-yvcj-ica i-yvu)-aBriv 

• t-yv(o-(r-fiai 

15. Stem 9p(o (from o p), Pres. Oput-aK-o), I leap. 
t-Bop-ov 

16. Stem rpw, Pres. n-Tpw-cK-oj, I wound. 

t-rpio-aa rpw-aio rk-Tpio-fiai l-Tp(t)-9r}v 

17. Stem aX and dXw, Pres. aX-i-oK-o fiai^I am taken. 
j «-a\w-v aXdj-aofiai t-dXoj-Ka or ijXcj-Ka 

i ijXojv (§ 316, 12) (compare § 237) 

18. Stem d/i/3\ and d/i/3Xw, Pres. dfi^X-i-GK-tjj, I miscarry. 

i'lfijSXcj-aa rifi(3XiiJ-Ka 

19. Stem d vaX and avaXio, Pres. dvdX-i-<TK-oj, I expend. 

dvdXb}-aa or dvrjXitxra dvdXcj-ffCJ j di^aXw-ica j dvdXw-Qrjv 

also j}j/dXw-ora ( dvfjXw-Ku ( dvrjXb)-9r}v. 

Stem in t. 

20. Stem tt t, Pres. in-7ri-aK-<u, I give to drink. Compare tti-v-w, 

§ 321, 4. 
i-7n-<Ta Tri-ffu) 

Stems ill V, 

21. stem Kv, Pres. Kv-i-<TK-a), I fructify. 

22. Stem jtt 1 y, Pres. fieGv-(TK-(o, I make drunk, Mid., I decome drunk, 
l-fikev-aa t-fieOv-aeriv. . 

Consonant-Stems. 

23. Stem dfiirXdK, Pres. d fiTrXdK-i-a k-m, I fail. 

yfiTrXdK-ov dfnrXdK-i)-(Ji») 

24. Stem (£7r)a v p, Pres. (t7r)a vp-i-aK-ofiat, I enjoy. 

tTTtJVp-OflTJV 

Inf. tiravp-'taOai 

§ 324. Dialects. — 12. Perf. fie-fi-ji-Xcj-Ka (compare § 51, D., and . 
§282,D.). 

13. Aor. t-(3pu)-v (§ 316, D. 23), with tlie Pres. /36/3/3w06>. 

15. 3 Pirn-. Fut. Gopeovrai [with edp-vv-fiai, according to § 319]. 

16. With rpw-w. 

24. Aor. tTTtjvpov, Inf. tTravpeiv. 



196 SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. § 324. 

25. Stem evp, Pres. ev p-i-cr k-u), IJind. 

evp-ov (Mid?) evp-r]-(T(i) fvp-ij-K-a evp-e-9r}v 

(.vp-r]-Hai Evp-e-OTj-ffOfiai 

26. Stem (rrep^ Pres. crrsp-i-ff k-m, I deprive (with artpib, Mid. ^ 

(TTEpofiai, I am deprived) 
k-arkp-rj-aa (XTep-rj-cru) i-arkp-ri-Ka e-(TTep-r}-9r]v 

i-<TTsp-i]-fiai 

27. Stem dXvK, Pres. dXv-crK-a), I shun. 
tjXv^a dXv^o) 

28. Stem diddx, Pres. d idd'aK-o),Iteach. 

i-di^a^a didd^u) Se-Sidax-a i-di-ddxOriv 

^E-didayfxai 

29. Stem X&k, Pres. Xd-(TK-(o,I utter, speak. 
i-XttK-ov XaK-r]-(TOfiaL j Xs-XrjK-a 
i-XdK-ri-aa \ Xk-XdK-a. 

Obs. 1. — The last three Stems suppress a Guttural before ok. Sev- 
eral of the Stems quoted form a part of the tenses by affixing « 
to the Stem (compare § 322, Ohs., and § 326), especially Nos. 23, 
25, 26, 29. 

Obs. 2. — The following may serve as examples of the formation of 
nouns : 6 Odv-a-ro-g, death ; to fivij-fieXo-v, the memorial ; 6 ahro- 
fioX-o-g, the deserter; y yvaj-fir}, the opinion ; y) a\w-<Ti-f, the capture; 
6 didd(TK-aXo-g (from the Present-Stem), the teacher; ») SiSax-rj 
(from the Verbal-Stem), the instruction; and from Stems which 
are enlarged by e : t6 evp-rj-fia, the discovery; t) aTep-rj-cri-g, the 
deprivation. 

Dialects. — 26. Aor. (mphtrai, Part. Pass. Aor. ffTepsig. 

28. [diSacTKTjfrai] a secondary Stem is d a, Aor. dkdaov, I taught (§ 326, 
D. 40).. 

29. Ion. form Xt/kew (§ 325), Fern. Part. Perf XeXdKvXa. 
And the S^Decial Verbs : 

30. Stem dXcTa, Pres. dXdfjffKO), I become great, Aor. ijXdavov, I made 
great. 

31. Stem /c\€, Pres. kikXtjctku), with koXsio, I call. 

32. Stem ^av, Pres. [(pav-trK-oj] Tri-^av-aK-u), I call. 

33. Stem dTra^ (from d^), Pres. d-n-aip-i-ffK-cj, I deceive, Aor. y'7ra<pov, 

SClbj. d7rd(p(t). 

34. Stem d p, Pres. dp-ap-i-aK-oj, I Jit, Aor. ypapov, I fitted, Perf. dpijpa, 
I suit, Fern. Part, dpdpvla, Part. Mid. dpfievog, suitable, Weak Aor. ypaa, 
I fitted, Aor. Pass. dp9riv. 

35. Stem Ik, Pres. k-t-cK-u),! mdke equal (compare § 317, B. 7). 

36. Imperf. "lOK^iy), he spolce. 

37. Stem tvx (compare § 322, 30), Pres. riTvaKOfxai, I aim at. 



§ 325. SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS. 197 

§ 325. Seventh, or E-class. 
A short Stem alternates with one enlarged by c. 
A) The enlarged Stem in e is the Present- Stem; the 
shorter serves to form the other tenses. 

1. Stem ya/i, Pres. yaixe-o), I marry (Act. uxorem dtico, Mid. nubo) 
i-yr]^-a yafi-iSJ (Mid.) ye-yafX-ij-Ka 

ye-ycLfX-ri-fiai 

2. Stem yT]9, Pres. yt]Qk- it), I rejoice. 

yk-yrjO-a, I am rejoiced. 

3. Stem d OK, Pres. d oks-o),! seem. 

i-do^a So^u) Mid. dsSoy-fiai 

4. Stem Kv p, Pres. kv pe-o) and Kvpoj, I meet. 
i-KVp-aa Kvpcro) 

5. Stem fiapTvp, Pres. ixapTvpe-io^Iam icitness. 

Mid. fiapriponai, I call to witness. 

6. Stem %vp, Pres. ^vpe(o,I shave. Mid. ^vpo/xai- 
l-^vp-aiii]v t^vp-r]-fiai 

7. Stem TTUT, Pres. Trare-o fiai^Ieat. 
t-Traca/iT^v irkiraajxai 

8. Stem pt^, Pres. pnrr-e-io and plttt-uj (according to § 249),/ 

tJirow. 

tppirpa pi\p<jj ippi^a j tppitprjv 

ippififxai I tppi<p9r]v 

9. Stem w 9, Pres. w9s-io, I push. 

t-ojaa (§ 237) wo-w {u)9i](T(ti Mid.) i-utr-fiai t-w(T9i]v 



§ 325. Dialects. — 1 Fut. yafi4(o, 3 Sing. Fut. Mid. ya/xeafjeTai, slw will 
marry. 

3. [^0Ki7(rw, t^oKT/o-a.] 

8. 3 Sing. Plup. Mid. IpepnrTo. 

Besides : 

a) Stem yeyiov, Pres. yeyajve-oj^Icall, Perf. yiywi^a, Fut. yf.yo}vr](7(s). 

1)) Stem ^ a r, Pres. Sars-ofiai, I distribute, Fut. ddcofiai, Aor. ^do-traro, 
Perf. ^k^aarai. 

c) Stem d ovTT, Pres. dovTrk-o},I malce a sound, Aor. l{y)^ovTrr)-aa, Perf. 

67) Stem €tX, tX, Pres. d-\k-io,I j^ress, Impcrf. tfiXfov (§ 237), Aor. 3 
Pirn-. t\aav, Perf. Mid. teX/zat, Aor. Pass. edX?;!/ (§ 295), 3 Plur. aXiv, Inf. 

e) Stem KeXaS, Pres. Kika^e-tx), I resound. Part. KsXdd-Mv. 

f) Stem fc € V r, Pres. Kevre-oj, I stiJig, Aor. Inf. Ksv-crai. 



198 SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS. § 326. 

Obs. — In some verbs the Stem with e extends even farther than the 
Present-Stem. Examples of the formation of nouns : b ydfi-o-Q, 
the wedding; r) So^a, the ajipearance ; to fiaprvp-io-v, the testimony; 
â– t) bj-ai-g or wQrj-aiQ^ pushing. 

% 326. B) The shorter Stem is the Present-Stem ; the 
enlarged one in £ serves to form the other tenses. 

10. Stem aid{t), Pres. ald-ofiai and aldk-ofiai, I am ashamed. 

11. Stem d \ € ^ (e), Pres. d \ I ^ - w, / ward off. 
ijX^^-dixriv aXe^-rj-(Toixai 

12. Stem d X (0? Pres. axQ-ofiai^I am xiexed. 

dxOe-aojxai rixQ'^-<y9r}v 

dx0e-(T9r](TOfiaL 

13. Stem (3o<TK (f), Pres. (3 6(tk-o), T pasture. 

l3o<ricf)-aio ; from the Stem /3 o the Verb. Adj . ^o-t6q 

14. Stem (iovX (c), Pres. (iov\-ofiai,I will. 

(Augment, § 234) (SovXIj-aoixai (is-(3ovXri-fiai t-(5ovXrj-Qr]v 

15. Stem ^6(e), Pres. di-u),I need {M, it is necessary), Mid. Saofiai, 

I require. 
t-der}-(Ta Serf-au) de-Serj-Ka k-d£^-9t]v (§ 328, 2) 

16. Stem I p (e), Pres. not usual (§ 327, 13) 
i)p-6^t}v, I asked. lpr)-(TOfiai, Inf. ip'taBai 

17. Stem ip|6(e), Pres. tpp-io, I go away, 
fjpprj-ffa tppt]-(Jio TippT]-Ka . 



Dialects. — g) Stem ktvtt, Pres. Krvn-k-io, I ring, Aor. tK-nJTr-ov. 
h) Pres. TTif^w and 7rte^£-w,/j?r^ss, Aor. lirUaa. 
i) Stem p I y, Pres, piyi-w, I shudder, Perf tppiya. 
Tc) Stem orvy, Pres. <xTvys-io,Ihate, shun, Aor. tarvyov and (TTvyrjffaiy 
tarv^a, I made dreadful. 

I) Stem ^ t X, Pres. ^iXtw, / Zm?*?, Aor. l-(fCX-d-\i.i\v. 

Ill) Pres. x9<^^^V^''^^i I help, Aor. txpaia/xov. 

Three Verbs in aw with a movable a are here to be noticed : 

n) Stem y o, Pres. yod-(o, I wail, Imperf. l-yo-ov. 

o) Stem jxd K, Pres. p,r]Kd-o.-}iai, I low, Perf, fik-nrjK-a, Aor. t-fidK-ov. 

p) Stem fiijK, Pres. fivKd-o-fiai, I roar, Perf. ^kfivK-a, Aor. tfivK-ov. 

§ 326. Dialects. — 10. y^kaaro, Imperat. ai^ecraai, Fut. aiU-oonai, Aor. 
Pass. 3 Plur. olhadEv. 
11. dXaXKoa/ (§ 257). 

14. Pres. f36XeTai, Imperf tfSoXovTo, Perf ^k^ovXa. 

15. Aor. thvr](Ta, once ^/"/cra, I was in want of, also Pres. ^eyo/xai. 

16. Pres. elpofiai, Fut. elprjaofiai. 



§ 326. SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS. 199 

18. Stem evd{e), Pres. ev ceo, I sleep (generally KaOevSu)) 
Augment, § 240 (KaO)Evdri-(Toj 

19. Stem c ^ («), Pres. s ;// - a>, / cooh 

i]}pr]-(Ta ixptj-tjo/xai tj^prj-fiai r)\l/r)-6T]V 

Verb. Adj. t(i>06g 

20. Stem 9e\(e) or l9eX{e), Pres. 9s\-io or ies\-o), I will 
rjOtXij-ffa {t)9E\ri-(ru) ,rt9k\r}-Ka 

21. Stem iS(e), Pure Stem tiJ, Pres. 'li^ofiai, I seat myself; also 

iKdvoj, Class 5. Compare eKofiai. 
iKa9i(Tdfir]v (§ 240) Ka9iZ,i]<Tonai and Ka9edovfiai (§ 2G3) 

22. Stem kXuv and icXaie, Pres. KXaio) (kXoho), I weep. Com- 

pare § 253. 
tKXav-aa KXair)<T(i) with.' KXavcrofiai 

23. Stem /tax (e), Pre^ fidxo fiai, IJigTit. 

l-/iaxi-(Tdixt]v fxaxovfiai (§ 263) fie-fidxv-H-(^'- 

24. Stem fiEX{e), Pres. fisXei fioi,it is a care to me ; Mid. /^eXo- 

juai, I care for^ take care of. 
i-fieXT}-(Te fieXt)-<Tet /xe-fikXrj-Ke t-fx.EXr]-9r]v 

{lTn)fiEXr](TOfiai 

25. Stem /i e X \ (e), Pres. fi eXX-oj, lam on tlie point, hesitate. 
i)-^EXXr]-<ra fieXXrj-ab) 

(§ 234, Ohs.) 

26. Stem fiev{e), Pres. fikv-u, I remain [mane-o, man-si], Verbal 

Adj. fiev-e-Tog 
i-fieiva {itv-Ca fie-fievij-Ka 

27. Stem fivK (f), Pres. ixv^o), I such 

28. Stem veju(€), Pres. vsfi-cj, I assign. 

t-veifia vEfx-uj ve-vefuj-Ka (Mid.) e-vefir]-9T]v 

29. Stem 6K(e), Pure Stem dd, Pres. uK-(o,I smell. 

ujKr}-(Ta d^-(To} od-(o8-a (§ 275,1).) [Lat. od-ov] 

30. Stem oi(€), Pres. oi-ofiai,ItMnJc (compare § 244) 

oir]-(TOfiat (^rj-9Tiv 

31. Stem oi'xCO? Pres. olx-ojxai,I am off. 

olxri-CTOfiai oix-wfc-a 



Dialects. — 19. [Imperf. t^ee.] 

23. fiax^-ofiai, Part, ^ax^iofievog or ^axEovfievog, Fut. juaxv^^ofiai and 
juax£<T'o/iat. 

24. Perf. fXEfirjXs, Plup. fisfiriXei, Perf. Mid. nk-fi-^-XE-Tai (Plup. -ro), 
§51,D. 

26. Perf. fikjiova, I am disposed, strive. 

30. Pres. bt-ofxai, 6i-w, Aor. Mid. otaaro, Aor. Pass. m.a9r]v. 

31. Perf. oixnKa {olx^fxai), with the Pres. ot'x-vi-w, according to § 323. 



200 SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS. § 326. 

(oix-iOK-a, with irreg. Reduplication [§ 275] for o/x-wx-a. Com- 
pare § 35, a) 

32. Stein 60ei\(€), Pure Stem o^eX, Pres. 6(pei\u), I owe (§ 253, 

Obs.) 
uk})eX-ov [utinarri] 6<pEiX7j-(X(o ujcpdXrj-Ka 

oxpeiXrj-aa 

33. Stem rrepd^e), Pres. jrepdu) 
i-Trapd-ov 7rapdt]-<T0fiai irk-iropd-a 

34. Stem tt (e) r (e), Pres. Trkr-ofiai, I Jiy. 
l-7r{e)T-6-/J.T)v 7r{s)ri]-(T0fiai 

(§61,c) 

35. Stem pv{e), Pres. pko), I Jiow (§ 248). 

ippev-<Ta (rare, § 260, 2) pvrj-ao/iai Ippvrj-Ku Ippvrjv 

(with peixTOfiai) 

36. Stem <Tri/3(e), Pres. (TTei(i-io,Itread. 

i-arilSij-fxai 

37. Stem tv-ttts, Pure Stem r w tt (§249), Pres. rvirrw, 1 strike. 
i-TVTT-ov TVTTTri-au} Mid. Te-rvfi-fiai l-rvTr-rjv 

38. Stem x « * |0 «, Pure Stem x a p, Pres. xccipfo, I rejoice (§ 253) 

XciLpr]-aix) KS-xdpT}-Ka k-xdp-T)v 

Ke-xdpr]-fiai 

Obs. — The e sometimes appears in all the tenses except the Present, 
sometimes only in some of them ; sometimes it is added to the 
pure, sometimes to the strengthened Stem: fiev-e, aTi{3-e, t^e, 
6Ke, TVTrre. The formation of nouns -shows the same varieties : 
aldrj-fKjjv, shame-faced ; r) (iovXi]-(n-g, voluntas; lOeX^-fKjjVyVoluntarj/; 



Dialects. — 38. Part. Perf. Ksxaprnog, Fut. Kexapriao), Aor. Ixriparo, and 
3 Plur. KsxdpovTo, § 257, D. 
Besides : 

39. Stem dX9{e), Pres. dXO-ofiai, I become well, Fut. dXOri-ffofiai. 

40. Stem d a, Aor. dedaov (§ 257, D.), / taught, Aor. Mid. Inf. dedda- 
<r9ai {to get to hiow), Aor. Pass, tddriv {I learned), besides Fut. dariffofiai, 
Perf deddrjKa, Part. Perf deSaiog. 

41. Stem Kr]d{e), Pres. Kt)S-u), I grieve, Fut icjy^jy-aw, Perf KeKr]d-a (/ 
am concerned), Fut. KEKadrjaonai. 

42. Stem fied{a), Pres. ned-io, I rule, Mid., I reflect, Fut. fiEdrj-tro/xai. 

43. Stem tt 1 0, Pres. TreiQtu, I persuade, Fut. also Tn9r)<Tu), Part. Aor. 

44. Stem ro|o(€), Aor. t-rop-ov and l-Toprj-cra, I bored through, Fut 
r£ro|077-(ra>. 

45. Stem ^ i ^, Pres. (pEidoixai, I spare, Aor. Mid. Tre(pidka9aL (§ 257, D.), 
Fut. Trecpidrj-aofiai. 



§ 327. EIGHTH, OR MIXED CLASS. 201 

6 fiaxv-Trf-c, t^ warrior ; y fiEWrj-fri-g, the delay; fiov-ifio-g, remain- 
ing; 6 vofi-o-g, the law; y od-ixTj, the smell; 7) x^P'^j the jay . 

§ 327. EigJitJi^ or Mixed Class. 

Several essentially different Stems unite to form one 
verb ; 

1. Present aipk-ix),! tdk£, ; Mid., I choose ; Stems a\p?. and k X. 

€CK-ov (§ 336) aipr)-a(i) yprj-Ka ype-9r]V 

Inf. (Xuv 

d\6fir]v aiprj-(TOfiai yprj-fiai 

2. Pres. t px-o /xai, I go, come ; Stems kpx and t\(v)9 
fiX[v]9-ov IXev-aofxai tX-rjXvO-a (§ 275) 
Imperat. lX9s (§ 333, 12) 

Inf. tX9eiv. The place of the Fiit. is generally supplied by eJiu. 

3. Pres. tp d-oj and peZ-io,I do; Stems tpd, epy, pey 
i-pe^a tp^ii) • ipkx9r]v 

Obs. — The original Verbal-Stem is /^ e |0 y, hence to Fkpy-o-v (§ 34, 
D.), Att. tpy-o-v, worJc ; from (P)tpy,hj the addition of the en- 
largement of the Present i (Class 4), arose {P)tpy-t-(o, and from 
this tpS-(o. But by metathesis P epy became P pey, and, with 
loss of the P, pey, whence the regular Present, according to Class 
4, is piZ-o), i. <?., pey-t-u) (§ 251). 

4. Pres. t(r9i-(x),I eat ; Stem l(r9L, tS{e) [ed-o], and ^ a y 
t-(l>ay-ov Fut. td-ofiai kd-rjdoKU (§ 275) TjSa-<T9T]v 

(§ 265) t^-rjhafxai 

5. Pres. s TT - o n a I, I follow (Imperf e'nrofirjv, § 236); Stems Itt and 

(r(£)7r 
i-(nr-6p.r]v 'iiponai * Sul>j. (r7rio-fj.at Inf. aTrk(T9ai 

Obs. — The original Stem is o-e tt, from which k tt has arisen by weak- 
ening 0- to the rough breathing (§ 60, V). In the Aor. Ind. the 
rough breathing is not organic, e being properly only the Aug- 
ment. Besides this there is a syncope (§ 61, c). 



§ 327. Dialects. — 1. [^apaipyKa, dpaiprjfiai, § 275.] 

2. Aor. fiXv9ov, Perf eiXriXov9a (§317, D. 13), Part. tXr]Xov9wc. 

3. [Pres. spS-oj] Perf iopya (§ 275, D. 2), Plup. iuipyeiv, Aor. tp^a and 
tpe^a. 

4. Pres. t(T9ix) and tcio, Inf. 't^-p.evai, Perf tS-rjS-a, Mid. IS/jSoTai. 

5. Pres. Act. tVw, I am occupied, Aor. t-air-ov, Inf. (nrelv, Part, (nrwv^ 
Fut. fi/'w, Subj. Aor. Mid. tWw/^ai, kaTroifiyv, kaTrk(T9ai, kaTTofievoQ. 

I 2 



202 EIGHTH, OR MIXED CLASS. § 327. 

C. Pres. tx-i^^I'have^ liold (Imperf. fixov, § 236) ; Stems tx a^^l (Tx(e) 

t-ax-ov, I seked. 1. i'^w (Mid.) 

Subj. <TxtD, Opt. axoir]v 
Inf. ax^lv^ Part, ax^v 2. axtj-aa) i-axrj-Ka e-(Txs-9r}v 

Imperat. ax^-c (§ 316, 11) i-crxv-fiai Iktoq (tx^toq 

Mid. t-(TX-6fiT]v, CTXwyuai, etc. 
Ind. Gx-tadai 

Obs. — The original Stem is o- e x> from which « x lias arisen by weak- 
ening a to the rough breathing (§ 60, 1). From (rex by syncope 
came t-ax-o-v, by metathesis ax^, from which axs-e, t-axv-Ka. 
From i X came the Future Ua and the Verbal Adj. t/c-rd-e, while 
in the Present-Stem the rough breathing was changed into the 
soft breathing, because of the aspirate in the following syllabic 
(§ 53, 5, Ohs.) : tx-oj for ix"^* Compare also v-n-icrxveofiai and dfi- 
iriaxveofiai, § 323, 36. All the Stem forms also appear in the 
formation of nouns : to axT}- ^a^ the form ; i) t^i-g ^ the leaving ; ix- 
vp6-Q,Jirm^ tenable. 

7. Pres. fiiay-w, I mix, misc-eo ; Stems fiKry and ft i y, additional 
form fiiyvvfii (§ 319, 18). 

8. Pres. opd-a),I see; Stems 6pa, iS, ott 

Eid-ov (Mid.) vxpofiai t-wpd-KU w<pQr]v 

UTT-iOTT-a (§ 275) 

Imperat. l^a Mid. Idou (333, 12) 

Inf. io-eiv tiopd-fiai opdroQ 

lOfi-lXaL OTTTOg 

Obs. — On the irregular Augment of the Stem bpa (Imperf. iwpwv), 
§ 237. The Stem l d was originally Pid {^ 34, D.). Compare 
^'wZ-e-o ; the Aor. Ind. therefore, e-PiS-ov, with Syllabic Augment, 
contracted to eU-o-v, but Subj. Id-io, Opt. U-oi-fii. The Perf of 
this Stem is oUa^Ucrww (§ 317, 6). All three Stems appear also 
in the formation of nouns : rb opd-fia, the spectacle ; to eW-og, the 
form, appearance; j) o-^i-r, tlie sight; to 6fi-fia, the eye, hole. 

0. Pres. 7rd(Tx-<^,I »ujfer; Stem ttoo-x, 7ra0(£), ttbvO 
t-irdO-ov Trd-aop.ai irk-TrovB-a TraOrj-Tog 

(for TTSvO-troftai, § 50) 

Dialects.— 6. Perf. 5x-<u/c-a (§ 326, 31), Perf. Mid. ^yfim, 3 Plur. Plup. 

WXCITO. 

8. Aor. Idov, Weak Aor. Mid. kiaaTo and daaTO, Part, kicrdfievog to 
the Pres. etdo/xai, I appear, resemble (compare § 34, D. 4). As a shorter 
additional form of the Stem 6 pa, we find in Homer the Stem 6p {Pop), 
thence 3 Plur. Pres. kirl bp-o-vTai, they overhoTc. 

9. 2 Plur. TtkirouQ^ (§ 317, D. 14), Part. miraQvla. 



§ 327. EIGHTH, OR MIXED CLAS§. 203 

Obs. — From the shorter* Stems we have the nouns : to TrdQ-og^ the 
suffering; to irevO-og, the mourning. 

10. Triv-(o, I drinlc ; Steins Trtv, 7rt, tto [Latin ^o-tus]. Compare 

§ 331, 4. 

t-TTL-OV Fut. TTl-Oflai (§ 265) TTS-TTIO-Ka l-7r6-9t]V 

Imperat. ttI-Oi (§ 316, 15) 7r£-7ro-/xai tto-toq 

Obs. — From the Stem tto we have the nouns: 6 7r6-TT]-c,po-tor; r) 
TTo-m-g, po-tio ; to iro-Trjpio-v, po-culu-m. 

11. Pres. rp£x-w,/rw/i; Stems rpex and dpEfx 

i-dpdfx-ov dpaixovfi-ai Se-dpdfiij-Ka OpsKTSov 

OpB^ofjiai (§ 54, c) 

Obs. — Nouns from both Stems : 6 Tpox-6-g, the wheel; 6 dpofi-Ev-g, 
the runner. 

12. Pres. <psp-o),I carry [fero] ; Stems ^ep, lve{y) k, o l 
-qveyK-ov oi-(T(i) tv-Tjvox-a (§ 275) oi-<T-0ri<JO}iai 

ol-a-TOQ 
fjveyK-a (§ 269) ijvkx-Oriv 

i^veyK-d-firjv olaofiai tv-rjvey-fiai fci^ex-^r/co/uai 

Obs. — From the Stem <pep we have the nouns: ro ^ep-e-Tpo-v,t7ie. 
bier; 6 (pop-o-g^ the contribution, tax; 6 ^6p-To-g, the Mrden. 

13. Aorist el-TTov,! spoke ; Stems e i tt, i p, and p e 

dTT-OV 

el-rr-a (§ 269) tp-ui u-pr}-Ka (§ 274, Obs.) IppfjOtjv 

Imperat. eiTr-e Inf. eiTr-elv £i-pr]-fiai pr]-9r](Tonai 

(§333,12) ^ 

ei-pf]-<T-ofiai prj-To-g 

Obs. — The Stem e / tt has arisen by contraction from e-ett, and i-eir 
from Pe-pETT, the reduplicated Aorist-Stem of the Verbal-Stem Pi.ir 
{tTTog, word, § 34, D. 1). This is the reason why the dijihthong 
d belongs not to the Indicative alone (§ 257, D.). The Stem tp 
(Fut. tpw), to which the Mid. IpsaOai, to ask (§ 326, 16) belongs, 
has likewise lost P, it being originally Pep (compare Lat. «jer-bu-m). 
From Pep, by metathesis (§59), arose Ppe, after the loss of the P, pe, 

Dialects. — 11. Wpe^a [Spafieo/xai], Sedpofia. 

12. 3 Plur. Imperat. Pres. <pep-Te [Lat. fo^te], Aor. yveiKa, 3 Sing. 
Opt. Ive'iKai {tve'iKoi) [Perf. ivr]veiyfiai\, Imperat. Aor, pZo-e, Inf. olaefievai 
(§268,D.). 

13. Pres. e'lpu) (Class 4, d), Aor. i<nr-ov (Stem aev, compare 5), 7 
spoke, Imperat. tair-ere, Pres. tv-e-jr-oj, Imperat. tvveire (§ 62, D.), Aor. 
ivKTirov, Subj. iviaiTii), Opt. 2 Sing. ivi(JTrQig, Imperat. tvitnce and tvicnreg, 
Fut. Ivixpu) and IvKnrijffco. 



204 irregula:kities of meaning. § 328. 

hence ei-prj-KU for Pe-fprj-Ka, Ippri-Orj-iT for E-Ppf]-9r]-v, prj-ro-g for 
Pprj-ro-g. As Present forms, 0/;/ij, Xlyw, and, especially in com- 
pounds, dyopevoj may be used, e. g., dTrayopevcj, I forbid ; Aor. 
dTreiTTov, Fut. ctTrepu), Perf. cnrdpr]Ka. Nouns from tlae Stems k tt 
and pe : I'l o^, the voice; to pfj-fia, the word; 6 prj-Tcop, the orator. 

In addition to these, there are three verbs which redu- 
plicate the Stem in the Present : 

14. Present yi-yv-ofxai (also yiv-ofiat), I become. 

Stem y I - y (e) V and y e v («) (Lat. gi-g(e)n-o, Perf. gen-m) 
l-yev-o-firiv yevrj-ffonai ye-yov-a 

ye-ysvT}-fiai 

Obs. — From the Stem yev we have to yev-og, the rcLce^genm; oi 
yov-iiQ, the parents^ from y e v c, r) yive-ffi-g, the origin. 

15. Pres. TTi-TTT-bi (from 7ri-7reT-w),IfaU; Stem ttIttt, ttbt, tttcj 
l-TTEtr-ov, from t-Trer-ov (§ 60, a), Trta-ovfiai (§ 264), Tre-Trrw-Ka (com- 
pare § 323, 35). 

Obs. — From the Stem tttw : ») TTTuj-ai-e, to irTw-fia, the fall. 

' 16. Pres. Ti-Tpd-<i),Ibore; Stems tit pa and Tpa 
i-Tpri-aa Tprj-ffco 

(§ 270, Obs.). 

Irregularities of Meaning. 

§ 328. The most important^regularities of meaning cof 
sist in the fluctuation between the Active, Middle, ana 
Passive, as well as, on the other hand, between the transi- 
tive and intransitive meaning. 

A) Active, Middle, and Passive Meaning. 

1. Very many Active verbs have a Middle Future with 
Active meaning (§ 266). This is the case with most verbs 
of Classes 5 to 8. * 

Z- The Deponent verbs are to be regarded as Middle, 



Dialects.— 14. Perf 1 Plur. y's-yd-fiEv, § 317, D. 2. Compare § 329, 8. 
15. Perf. Part, tte-ttte-ujq, § 317, P. J 7, 
Besides : 

17. t-aua>, Stem av, dP^ I sleep {I as Reduplication, compare § 308), 
Aor. ataa. 



§ S29. 



IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. 



205 



and also make most of their tenses in the Middle form. 
Those are called Passive Deponents whose Aorist has a 
Passive form : e. g., (dovXoiuai, I wish, ij3ov\r)9r)v, I wished. 
The most important Passive Deponents are the following, 
of which those marked * have a Passive Future, which is 
used alons: with the Middle : 



EvXaphiiai, I am on my guard. 
*i]SoiJiaL, I rejoice. 



J- Ovuiouai 

TTjOO 


^ItaTce to heart. 
I am inclined. 


Htti ) 


( / am anxious. 


jxera J 

CLTTO ^ 

K vosouai 
tv 

Trpo , 


' / repent. 
' I despair. 

I reflect. 

I ponder. 
. I anticipate. 



dyafiai, I admire (§ 312, 8). 
^aidkofiai, I dread (§ 301, 1). 

aXdofiai, I ramble. 

afiiXKdofiai, I rival. 
*dpvso/iai, I deny. 
*dx9ofiai, lam indignant (§ 326, 
12). 

(SovXofiai, I wish (§ 326, 14). 

Seofiai, I need (§ 326,15). 

depKOfiai, I look. 
*dca\eyo[xai, I converse. 

Uvafiai^ I can (§ 312, 9). olonai, I am of opinion (§ 326, 30). 

ivavTioofiai, I am Opposed. asfiofjiai, I reverence. 

iTTiffTafiai, I know (§ 312, 10). (jtiXoriixkofiai, I am ambitious. 

O&s.— Several of these verbs have the Middle Aorist as well as the 
Passive. 

3. The Passive Aorists of several Active verbs have a 
Middle meaning : thtppaivw, I rejoice, ev(j)pav9riv, I re- 
joiced ; arpicjxjj, I caiise to turn, larpai^nv, I turned — 
myself; (^taivw,! show, t(l>avriv, I appeared, etc. 

4. The Passive forms of several Deponents have also a 
Passive meaning: laojiai, I heal, laOr^v, I was healed; 
Ziyjipai,! receive,V^iy(%r\v,I VMS received; in some even 
the Middle forms have both Active and Passive meaning : 
fiLfiioiiai, I imitate, ninifir]ixaL, I have imitated or have heen 
imitated. 

§ 329. B) Transitive and Intransitive Meaning. 

When the meaning of a verb fluctuates between Trans- 

§ 329. Dialects. — The Strong Aor. tTpa(pov {Tp'tcpu)^ I nourish) in Horn, 
has an intransitive meaning, I grew up. In Herod. , dvkyvojv {dvayi- 
yvuxTKU)) means I read, dvkyvwaa, I persuaded ; Hom. ypLTrov, I fell, Aor. 
to kpe'nru) (Class 2), / throw down; tvaaaa, I caused to dwell, Aor. to 
vaio), I dwell. 



206 IRREGULAEITIES OF MEANING. § 3^9. 

sitive and 'Intransitive, the Strong Aorist has the intran- 
sitive, and the Weak Aorist and Future Active the tran- 
sitive meaning ; when there are two Perfects, the Strong 
likewise has the intransitive and the Weah the transitive 
meaning ; if there is only one Perfect, it is intransitive. 
The most important cases of this kind are : 

1. Stem (xra, Pres. to-rr^^t, /^Z^J^c^, Weak Aor. iaTr\<m, 
I jplaced, Put. ot»Vw, / shall jplace^ Pres. Mid. 'iarainai, I 
jplace myself^ Strong Aor. laTr\v, I placed myself— stood^ 
Perf. f o-rr^fca, / have jplaced myself, or stand (§ 503), Plup. 
t(TTr}Keiv, I stood, Put. karij^tj (§ 291), I shall stand, 

Obs. — This same important distinction appears in the numerous 
compounds : d^iaTrjui, I cause t9 revolt, to separate, dTradTrjv, I re- 
xolted — separated, d<}>k(rTr]Ka, I Tiave revolted; i<pi(TTr}}ii, I put over, 
iTrk(TTr}v, I put myself over, ttp'tGTrjKa, I am put over; KaOitrrrjixi, I put 
down, Karkarriv, I put myself foncard, KaOkarrjKa, I stand tliere or 
forward. The Aor. Mid. has a specially Middle meaning, e. g., 
KariarriaaTo, he determined for himself (compare § 479). 

2. Stem |3a, Pres. (^aivw,! go,is commonly intransitive 
with the Put. f^iiao/uai ; but in the poets, I cause to go, 
also in the Weak Aor. ijdwa, Put. j3)7«rw ; but intransitive 
in the Strong Aor. t(5r]v,Iwent, (5i[5r}Ka, I have advanced, 
stand firm (j3i(5a-io-g,firm), 

3. Stem (j) V, Pres. (pvo), I heget,We2ik Aor. t(j)V(Ta, (pv&h) ; 
but the Strong Aor. '^(j)vv,Iwas hegotten,Tri(l>vKa,I am hy 
nature, to which the Pres. is (jtvoiiat. 

4. Stem S V, Pres. Suw, I sinlc, hide, often transitive ; 
icaraSuw, I cause to sink, also t^vaa, Zvau) ; but c^Dv, I 
sunk myself , I dived ; Ividvv, I put on; l^iZvv, I pict 
off- 

5. Stem (Tj3€(c), Pres. (T(5tvvviuii, I que7ich. Weak Aor. 
£-<Tj3£-cra, / quenched. Strong Aor. t<j^r\v, I was quenched, 
ta^r\Ka, I am quenched. The Pres. to it is (r^ivvvjjLai. 

6. Stem cr k: £ X, Pres. a/caXXw, / dry, but Aor. tV/cXr^v, / 
grew dry, with the Pres. o-icfXXojuaf. 



§ 331. ACCENTUATION OF VERBAL FORMS. 207 

7. Stem IT I, Aor. Iettiov, I drank^ iifiaa (irnricrKU}), I 
caused to drinlc. 

8. Stem Y £ V, Pres. ydvojuai (compare § 327, 14), / am 
horn, Aor. iyuvafxnvy I hegat. 

9. Stem 6 X, Pres. oWvui, I ruin, strong Perf. oXwXa, 
/ am ruined, jperii, Weak Perf. dXwXsica, / Itave ruined^ 
jperdidi. 

§ 330. In a number of verbs the Strong Perfect alone 
has only an intransitive meaning, as : 

1. ayvvni,IhreaJc., Perf. iaya,I am hrohen (§ 275, 2). 

2. lyupwy I awaJce, *^ lyprjyopa, lam awake (§ 275, l). 

3. ndOw, I persuade, " iriiroida, I trust {irudoixaiy I fol- 

low, ohey). 

4. irnyvvfiL, I fasten, " TreVjjya, / stick fast. 

5. prjyvviui, I tear, " Vppiiiya, I am torn (§ 278). 

6. <7/i7rw, I cause to rot, " aianira, I am rotten, 

7. rri/cw, I melt, " rtrrjica, I am melted. 

8. <ltaivix),I show (rarely shine), Perf. iricjiriva, I have ap- 

l^eared {^(^aivop.ai,I apjpear\ 

On the (li'stinction between avtwya and av£(i>x", and be- 
tween -Ki-wpaya and TrLirpaya, see § 279. 

§ 331. General View of the Accentuation 
OF Verbal Forms. 

The general rule given in § 229, that in the verb the 
accent is removed as far hack as possible from the end, is 
subject to the following exceptions : 

For all contracted syllables the accentuation is seen 
from § 87. Hence Sokw, eXw^ev (§ 263), TrEaovjuLai (ttitttii}, 
§ 327, 15), TiOw^ai (§ 302), XvOw, Xv% (§ 296). Compare, 
however, § 307, Ohs. 



§ 330. Dialects. — 9. Horn. daiu),lsetjire to, Perf. Udr]a, I have caught 
fire. 

10. Horn. tXTTw, / ghe hope, Perf. iokira, I hope. 

11. Horn. (pOeipio, I destroy, Perf. {ci)t<i)dopa, I am destroyed. 



^08 ACCENTUATION OF VERBAL FORMS. § 332. 

§ 332. Compound Verbal forms follow the general rule 
laid down in § 85, with the following limitations : 

1. The accent never goes back beyond the syllable on 
which the first word had it before the composition: aTro- 
Soc, give hack (otto), not aTroSoc ; liriGXiq, hold in (liri), 
not iTn(j\z^. 

2. In double compounds the accent never goes back be- 
yond the first : cvviK^oQ, give out loith ; irapivOeg, j)ut in 
besides. 

3. The accent never passes heyond the Augment or He- 
duplication : a-rrriXOE, he went aioay ; atfiKrai^ he has ar- 
rived. This is the case even when the Augment or Re- 
duplication is not expressed : vtteTkov, I gave way ; a'vevpsy 
he found again / (rvvoi^a, I hnow along with^ from oI§a, 
Ihnow^^Qxva^ an exception. 

§ 333. The other exceptions are : 

1. All Infinitives in v a t have the accent on the penult- 
ima : TiOivai, Quvai, \i\.vKivaiy XvOrjvai. 
. 2. the Infinitive of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs in 
w is perispome : Xafinv. 

3. the same form in the Middle is paroxytone : Aaj3f- 
aOat. 

4. the Infinitive of the Weak Aorist Active has the 
accent on the penultima : irai^ivaai, lirmvicjaL (§ 268, Ohs. 

!)• _ _ 

5. SO likewise the Infinitive of the Perfect Middle : ttc- 
TTttf^fucr^af, KEKOfiicrOai. 

6. the Participle of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs 
in (1) is oxytone : XajSwy. 

7. the Participle of the Present and of the Strong Aor- 
ist Active of verbs in ju t is oxytone : riOeig, cnro^ovg. 

8. so likewise the Participle of the Perfect Active : Xe- 
\vK(i)g {xna, 6g, Gen. orog) ; and, 

9. that of both Aorists Passive : XvOcig, ypa^dg. 



§ 337. FOKMS OF VERBS IN THE IONIC DIALECT. 209 

10. the Participle of the Perfect Middle is paroxytone : 
XeXyjuiivog. 

11. the contracted 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Strong Aor- 
ist Middle is perispome : XajSou. Only the compounds of 
monosyllabic forms with dissyllabic prepositions form an 
exception : irEptOov {ir^piTidrifjLL). Compare § 307, Ohs. 

12. The 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Strong Aorist Active 
in the following verbs is oxytone : utte, sjpeak ; IXOi, 
come; svpiyjl'iid; l^i, see ; \a(5i, take. But aTTfiTre, etc., 
according to § 85. 

On the accentuation of the three equal forms of the 
Weak Aorist, see § 268, Obs. 1. 



Peculiar Forms of Verbs in the Ionic Dialect. 

§ 334. Dialects. — The Iterative form, denoting the repetition of an 
act, is frequent in Homer and Herodotus, though foreign to Attic 
prose. Its characteristic sign is the letters a k affixed to the histor- 
ical person-endings, in the Active as well as in the Middle, by means 
of the connecting vowels o and e ; hence 1 Sing. Act. (tkov, Mid. 
aKO]jii]v. The Augment is generally wanting, in Herod, always. 
The inflexion is quite the same as that of the Imperfect. 

§ 335. Dialects. — The Iterative c k may be affixed to the Present as 
well as to both the Strong and Weak Aorist-Stems ; hence we distin- 
guish Iterative Imjjerfects^ as : tx-e-(7Ko-j/, / used to liave^ and Iterative 
Aorists^as: U-e-ck-o-v^ I used to see ; IXaaa-aK-^-v ^ he used to drive ; the 
former denote the repetition of continuance, the latter the repetition 
of the occurrence of an action (§ 498). 

§ 336. Dialects. — In verbs of the First Principal Conjugation, e is 
the constant connecting vowel for the Iterative Imperfects and the 
Iteratives of the Strong Aorist : fxev-e-crKop (/jievio, I remain)^ (io<jK-k- 
(TKovTo {i36(TKw, I pasture), (pvy-E-crKe {(pevyw^ Ifl^e) ; a occurs rarely in its 
stead : p'nrT-a-aKov (ptTrrw, / hurl), Kpinrr-a-oKov {icpvTrTU), I hide). Con- 
tracted verbs in the Iteratives either leave the two vowels uncon- 
tracted : koXUgkov (KoXeoj, I call), or reject one of them : wOeaKov (w0£w, 
I push), EiaaKov (edu), I leccve) ; the Stems in a sometimes change ae 
to aa : vaiSTaaffKOV {vaieTccoj, I inlidbit). Compare vaurdq,, § 243, D. 

§ 337. Dialects. — In verbs of the Second Principal Conjugation <tk 
is affixed immediately to the Stem : t-^a-crfcov (Stem ^ a, ^»?/ut, I say), 



210 FORMS OF VERBS IN THE IONIC DIALECT. § 338. 

ard-ffKov {iarrjv, I placed myself), t<jKov instead of ia-cKov (Stein i q, 
eifii, I am)j ke-<tk^to (Stem kei, Ksi/xai,! lie), ti-Oe-ctkov (TiOrj/JLi, I put), 
prjyvv-aKov (prjyvvfii, I tear). For the Stem 6 X, as in other formations 
{wXe<Ta, oXeao)), e is the connecting vowel : oX-e-o-Kcro. 

CK is farther appended directly to the Weak Aoiist-Stem : Iprjrvaa- 
<TK6 (tpTjTvoj, I pacify), fivrjcrd-GKETo (jivdoixui, I remember). 

§ 338. Dialects. — Many Stems of the Present and Strong Aorist in 
poetry (seldom in Attic prose) have 9 added without any particular 
modification of meaning. The Preterite is the most frequent of the 
Stems thus strengthened. The 9 is connected with the Stems some- 
times by a, sometimes by e. The most important forms of this kind 
are : 



^lofKu), additional form di(OKd9w, I pursue. 


el Kit), 






^ eiKd9u), I yield. 


dfivvta, 






rifivva9ov, I warded off. 


e'tpyo), 






ipyd9ov {iepya9ov), I separated, sTiut off. 


KllO, 






tKia9ov, I went. 


deipofiai. 






r/epWovTai, they Twver. 


dyEipo), 






i)yepE9ovTo, they were assembled. 


<l)9ivoj. 






<p9nw9oj. 


*xw, 


(( 


u 


(TxiOeeiv, Aor. Inf., to hold. 



§ 340. SIMPLE DERIVATION. 211 

III. DERIVATION. 



Chap. XIII. 

§ 339. A word is either sivvple^ i. e., sprung from a single 
Stem : \6y-og, speech (Stem X e y), ypcK^t-w, I write (Stem 
y pacf), or co7npound, i. e.^ formed from two or more Stems : 
\oyo-ypa^O'Q, sjpeech-writer. 

A) Simple Derivation. 
Simple words are either jprimitive {Verbalia)^ i. e.^ are 
formed directly from a Verbal-Stem (§ 245) : apx~^h begiii- 
ning^ from the Verbal- Stem a p\ (apx(i>f 1 hegin), or de- 
rived {Denominativa), i. e.^ formed from^ a N'ominal-Stem 
(§ 100) : apxa-lo-q, incipient, ancient, from the Nominal- 
Stem dpxa, Nom. apxi], beginning. 

% 340. Nouns are usually formed — whether from a Ver- 
bal or from a Nominal- Stem — by means of a termination. 
This termination, added to the Stem, is called a derivative- 
ending or suffix. Thus X070-C is formed by means of the 
suffix o from the Verbal-Stem Xty, apxa-lo-g by means 
of the suffix Lo from the Nominal- Stem apxa. The suf- 
fixes serve more clearly to define the idea of the noun, or 
to mark the different relations in which the general idea 
of the Stem is to be conceived : Verbal-Stem ttoie {ttoilj, 
I p7'oduce, compose), TToi-n-Tit-g, compos-^/*/ 7roirj-(n-g,com- 
â– posi-tion ; 7rot?j-jua(r), composition, poem; Verbal-Stem 
y pa^ {ypd<ptj, I vjrite), 7|oa<^-£v-c, ^^r\ier ; ypacji-i-g, writ- 
ing instrument; ypapr^ay vfviting ; ypaji-fxi], a line; 
Nom.- Stem St/ca {^Ikt], right), tiKa-io-g, right, just ; ^i- 
Kaio-avvrj, righteousness ; Nom.-Stem (iaaiXev (j^aaiXev-g, 
Mng), |3a(TtX€-ta, gueen ; j^amXt-lcif kingdom ; (^aaiXiKo-g, 
kingly. 

Obs. 1. — Only few primitive nouns are formed without a suffix : 
^wXa^, guard, Nominal and Verbal-Stem (pvXaK (^vXdaaoj, Class 4, 
a,Igicard); 6\l/, voice, Stem 67r,Verb.-Stem Itt (elTrelv). 



212 SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. § 341. 

Obs. 2'. — The Consonant-Stems undergo the necessary changes be- 
.fore suffixes beginning with a consonant (§ 44, etc.) : .ypa^, 
ypdix-fia, Xey, Xe^ie, WOJ'd ; diKad (diKaZio), ^iKaa-Trjg, judge. Vow- 
el-Stems readily lengthen the vowel and sometimes insert a be- 
fore several suffixes, as in the Perf. Mid. (§ 288), and in the Weak 
Passive-Stem (§ 298) : Troirj-fxa (compare Tre-Troirj-ixai), aei-a-fio-g, 
shaking (compare Gk-trn-cr-fiai). 

Obs. 3. — In many primitive words the Stem undergoes a change 
in its vowel, which generally is like that of the Strong Perfect 
(§ 278): Stem X a 0, X/j0-j;,/or^e^MZ;iess, compare \k-\r)9-a; Stem 
TrefXTT, TTOfiTT-r}, escort^ compare Tre-TrofKp-a ; Stem Xitt, Xoitto-c, re- 
maining, compare Xs-\onr-a. The most frequent vowel-change is 
that of € to o : Stem tte^tt {Trefiiru), I escort), tto^tt-j?, escort ; Stem 
^Xcy {(fKkyio, I hirn), ip\6^, Jiame ; Stem rpEir {rpsTrio, I turn), 
TpoTT-og, turning, manner. 

Obs. 4. — A general rule for the accent of nouns is that the Neuters 
are almost all barytone (§ 19) : to ykv-og, tJie race; Sui-po-v, gift; 
XeiTpavo-v, remains ; Trvev-ixa, breath. 

§ 341. I. The most important Suffixes for forming 
Substantives. 

A) Substantives (Jenoting an agent are called nomina 
agentis. The person acting or occupied in and belonging 
to something is indicated by the following suffixes : 

1. Ev, Nom. Ev-Q (always oxytone), Masc. (§ 137). 

Examples of Primitive words are : 

7(oa^-ey-c, «^5n^ER, Verb. -Stem ypa<p, Pres. ypdipco (Class 1). 
yov-ev-g, begett-Bn, " yev, " yiy vo/iai (Class 8). 

Kovp-Ev-g,barb-ER, " Ksp, " <c6/|0w (Class 4, d). 

An examj^le of the not very numerous Denominatives 
is : 

7rop9n-ev-g,ferry-MAN, Nom.-Stem TropOfio, Nom. TropQii6g,X)Cissage. 

Obs. — Several Masculines in e w - ? have Feminines in e t a (proparox- 
ytones) : jSamXevg, Mng; (3aai\eia, queen. 

2. TTjp, 'Nom. TTjp ^ T e I p a, 'Nom. Teipa ^ 
Top, " Tiop CMasc. rpia, " rpia i-p^^ 
ra, " Tr]-g ) Tpid, " rpi-g | 

Tid, " Ti-g J 



§ 343. SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. 213 

Examples of Primitive nouns are : 

Stem and Nomin. (T(x)-Tr}p,deUver-En,'Mai3c. ) Verb.-Stem (toj ((tw?w) 
" ad,-Tecpa, " Fem. \ (§298). 

^^ pr]-Top, " pn-Tiop, ora-TOR, Verb.-Stem pe, Fut. ipcj (§ 327, 13). 
^^ Kpi-Tu, " Kpi-Tf')-g, judge, " /Cjot, Pres. fcpiVto (§ 253, 

Ods.). 

-^ocn-ra,-^ ^ocy^-g,poet ) , ^ot.,Pres.7rocaa; (CI. 1). 

Stem and JNomm. 7roir]-Tpia, poetess ) ' ^ 

" avXrj-ra, " av\rirr]-g, Jlute-play-BH, Masc. ) Verbal- Stem avXe, 
" avXrj-Tpid,^'' avXijrpi-g, " Fem. f Pres. auXew (CI. 1). 

Examples of Derived words are : 

Stem TToXl-Ta, Nom. TroXirrj-g, citizen, Nom.-Stem ttoXi, Nom. TroXi-g. 
" oi/ce-ra, " otKgrT^-f, ^Zowes^ic, Masc. ^ Stem oi/co, Nom. 



oiKE-Tid " oiKSTi-g, " Fem. f 



OtKO-jf. 



§ 342. B) Substantives expressing an action are called 
nomina actionis ; the following suffixes are the most com- 
mon for them : 

1. rt, Nom. Ti-g â– ] 

a I, " ffi-e, from rt-c, according to § 60, a [com- I Feminine, 
pare Lat. tio\ | Barytones. 

(J I a, " (Tia J 

All nouns of this kind are Primitives, as : 

TTia-Ti-g, faith, Verb.-Stem ttiO, Pres. Mid. TreiOofiai (Class 2). 

fiifir]-(Ti-g, imitation, " ft i fie, Pres. (Dep.) jut/isojwai (Class 1). 

(TKs\pi-g, contemplation, " (tkctt, " " (rK£7rro/iai (Class 3). 

TTpa^i-g, action, , " Tjoay, Pres. Act. Trpdaaia (Class 4, a). 

yere-(Ti-f, or^^^7^, " ye 1^(0? Pi'es. Mid. yiyvofiai (§ 327, 14). 

doKifia-m-a, examination, " doKi/xad, Pres. doKind^uj (Class 4, b). 

2. /xo, Nom. /tto-c (always oxytone), Masc. 

a7ra-(T-fi6-g, cmm^, Verb.-Stem o-Tra, Pres. trTraw (Class 1), I draw. 
de-(T-fi6-g,dond, " ^e, " dko), " lUnd. 

ddvp-n6-g, wailing, " ddvp, ^'' 6^0jOo/iat (Class 4, d, 05s.). 

05s. — From verbs in euw substantives in ud are derived, which de- 
note the action, and are all paroxytone : Traihvu),! educate, irai- 
Ma, education; (BaffiXeino, I am Tcing, (SaaiXda, lcing''s rule. Com- 
pare § 341, 1, Obs. 

§ 343. C) The result of an action is indicated by : 



214 SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. § 344, 

1. IX ar, Nom. /xa, Neuter (accent, § 340, Ols. 4). 

Trpdy-fxalr], the thing 6Z(9?i€, Verb. -Stem Trpay, Pres. irpaarno (Class 4, a) 
(almost the same as to TreTrpay/xevov, hat. factum). 

pf}-fia[T], word,YeTb.-Stem. pe, Fut. kput (§ 327, 13) (compare to elprjfiE- 
vov, Lat. dictum). 

r/i)7-/ia[r], cw^, Verb.-Stem te/x, Pres. re/ivw (§ 321, 10) (compare to 
TeTfitjfxsvov, the piece cut off). 

2. €c, Nom. oc, Neuter (accent, § 340, Obs. 4). [27). 
Stem X a X - 6 f, Nom. Xaxog, Z(?^, Yerb.-Stem \ a %, Pres. Xayxavw (§ 322, 
." i0-ec, " Wag, custom, " £0, Perf. £(w0a (§ 275). 

" TEK-eg, " TtKog^ child, " r £ k, Pres. n'fcrw (Class 3). 

05s. — The same suffix in derived words denotes a quality : 

(3dpog, weight, Adjective-Stem (3apv, Nom. (3apv-g. 
f5d9og, depth, " /3a0v, " /3a0y-c. 

fxfJKog, length, " fxaKpo, '"'' fiuKpo-g. 

§ 344. D) The instrument or means for an action is 
expressed by : 

Tpo, Nom. Tjoo-v [Lat. ^rw-m] (accent, § 340, Obs. 4). 
apo-Tpo-v,plow, Verb.-Stem a |0o, Pres. apow (CI. 1) [«m-t?'w-m]. 

\v-Tpo-v, redemption money,'"'' \v, " Xuo) (Class 1). 
USuK-Tpo-v, a teacher's fee, " ^t^ax, " ^i^atricw (§ 324, 28). 

05s. — The meaning of the kindred feminine suffix rpa is less fixed : 
^v-(T-Tpa {^v(o,I scrape), scraper, instrument for rubbing; 6pxh-(T-Tpa 
(opxeo/xai, I dance), dancing place ; TraXai-c-Tpa {iraXaiix), I wrestle), 
wrestling school. 

% 345. E) Place is indicated by : 

1. TTjpio, Nom. TT]pio-v, Neuter proparoxytone. 
dicpoa-Tripio-v, audi-toriu-m, Yerb. Stem uKpoa, Pres. ccKpodofiai (CI. 1). 
hKaa-TYipio-v, judgment hall, " hKuS, " ^iKrd^w (CI. 4, b). 

2. E 1 0, Nom. Ho-v, Neuter properispome. 

\oy-(.lo'V, speaJcing place, from the Nom.-Stem Xoyo, Nom. X6yo-g. 
Kovp-i.lo-v,barbef8 shop, " " Kovpev,^'' Kovpev-g. 

M.ov(t-eIo-v, seat of th^ Muses, ^^ " Mov.aa, " Moma. 

3. w v, Nom. wr, Masc. oxytone, 

denotes a place where any thing is in abundance: a/iTreXwv, vineyard; 
dvSpwv, men's room ; olvdjv, icine vault. 



§ 348. SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. 215 

§ 346. F) Substantives of quality are derived from Ad- 
jective-Stems by means of the following suffixes : 

1. TT/r, Nom. Tr]-Q^ Fern. [Lat. tat^ tut^ Nom. tds^ tus\. 

Stem Traxv-rriT, Nom. TraxvTTjQ, thickness, Adj. -Stem ttuxv, Nom. 

TTaxv-g. 
" veo-Tijrj " vsoTijg, youth, " v€o,Nom. v£o-e. 

" lao-TTjr, " hoTTiQ, equality, " Lao, " 1<jo-q. 

2. <Tu va, Nom. <Tw»;, Fem. paroxytone. 

diKaio-(T V V r}, jlCStice, Aclj.-Stcm diKaio, Nom. SiKaio-g. 
ffcj^po-ffvvT], soberness, " awtppov, " adxppwv. 

3. ta, Nom. ta, Fern, paroxytone. 

<TO(l)-ia, wisdom, Aclj.-Stem (TO(po, Nom. (ro(p6-g. 
evdaifjiov-i a, bliss, " evdaifxov,'^'' evSaifioJV. 

The suffix t a, with the vowel £ of the Adjective -Stems 
in -Eg, Nom. -rig, becomes eia ; and when the final o of an 
Adjective-Stem is preceded by another o, it becomes oia, 
oia (proparoxytone); » 

dXr}9E-ia, truth, Adj.-Stem d\r}9e[g], Nom. akr}9f}Q (§ 165). 
evvo-ia,benevole7ice, " svvoo, " evvov-g. 

4. 6c, Nom. og. Neuter, § 343, 3. 

§ 347. G) DiQuinutives are formed from Nominal- Stems 
by the suffixes : 

1. 10, Nom. w-v. Neuter. 

7raid-io-v, little boy, Nom.-Stem rraid, Nom. Trai-g. 
KTfiir-io-v, little garden, " kj^tto, " Kriiro-g. 

Obs. — Other forms of lo are t^io (Nom. idio-v), apio (Nom. apio-v)^ 
vdpio (Nom. vdpio-v), vWio (Nom. vWio-v) : oiKidio-v, a little 
house {oiKo-g)', rrai^dpio-v, a little boy (Tral-g) ', jxeXvdpio-v, a little 
song (jikXog) ; ei6v\\io-v, a little picture (eldog). 

2. Masc. iffKo, Fem. ktku, Nom. laKo-g, ktkij, paroxytone. 
vEav-i a k o-g, adolescen^wZws, Nom.-Stem veavia, Nom. veavm-g, 
7raid-i<TKri,girl, " vaid, " 7raX-g. 
(TTE<pav-i a K o-g, a little garland, " <TTe<pavo, " (TTs<f)avo-g. 

§ 348: H) Patronymics or substantives which denote 
descent from a father (or ancestor) — more rarely the de- 
scent from a mother — are most frequently formed by the 
suffix S a (Nom. ^ri-g) for the Masculine, and only 3 (Nom. 



216 SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. § 349. 

-g) for tlie Feminine. The Masculines are paroxytone, 
the Feminines oxytone. This suffix is added to Stems in 
a without any connecting vowel : 

Masc. Boped-drj-g, Fem. Bopsa-g, Nom.-Stem Bo pea, Nom. Boped-g. 
" Alveid-dr]-g, " Aiveia, " kivda-g. 

The same is affixed to Consonant-^iQm?> by means of 

the vowel i : 

Masc. KeKpo7r-t-dr]-g, Fem. KeKp07r-t-g, Nom.-Stem KEKpOTT, Nom. Ke- 

KpOXJ/. 

Stems in ev and o of the Second Principal Declensiopi 
also adopt the connecting vowel i, before which the v of ev 
is dropped : 

UriXe-i-d r]-g, from the Nom.-Stem UrjXev, Nom. Uri\ev-g. Homeric ad- 
ditional form UriXrjiddii-g (compare § 161, D.). 
Ar}To-i-S r)-g, from the Nom.-Stem Atjto, Nom. ArjTw, son of Leto. 

The Stems of the 0-Declension substitute l for o : 

Masc. TavraX-i-d rj-g, Fem. TavTaX-i-g, Nom.-Stem TavTaXo, Nom. Tdv- 
TaXo-g. 
" Kpov-i-dT]-g, *' K p o v o, Nom. Kpo vo-c. 

Only those in lo (Nom. lo-g) change these letters to m : 

Masc. eecTTid-drj-g, Fem. Oeand-g, Nom.-Stem QEffTio, Nom. Qeano-g. 
" MevoiTid-d r]-g, " Mevo itio, Nom. Mevoi- 

Tio-g. 

01)8. — A more rare sufSx for Patronymics is lov or Xwv, Nom. kov : 
Kpovicov, son of Kp6vo-g. The Poets take many liberties with re- 
gard to the metre. 

§ 349. I) Gentile names, or substantives describing per- 
sons as natives of certain towns or countries, have the suf- 
fixes : 

1. €u, Nom. Evg (compare § 341), oxytone. 

Msyap-ey-g, Nom.-Stem Meya/oo, Nom. rd May apa. 

'EpETpi-ev-g, " 'Epsrpio, " 'Eperpia. 

2. Ta, Nom. TT]-g, paroxytone. 

Tiyed-TT]-g (Teyea), Aiyivr]-Ti]-g {Aiyivrj)^ 'RTreipuj-rri-g {'HTTEipo-g), SiK£' 
Xi(ij-Trj-g (2<K€X(a). 



§ 351. SUFFIXES FOR FORMING ADJECTIVES. 217 

Obs. — The feminine gentile names end in d (Nom. -q) : Meyapi^, 
Nom. Meyap/g ; T £ y e a r i ^, Nom. Teyeartf ; SuceXt wn^, Nom. 2t- 

KtklCjTlQ. 

§ 350. II. The inost imjportant Suffixes for forming 
Adjectives. 

1. I o, Nom. Lo-q (proparoxytone), 
expresses the most general relation to the idea of the sub- 
stantive from which the adjective is formed : ovpav-i o-c, 
heaven-^?/ (ovpavog) ; icjirip-i o-q, belonging to evening {ka- 
TTtpa). The I sometimes combines with the final vowels of 
Vowel- Stems to diphthongs, which then frequently receive 
the circumflex : ayopa-X o-g, forensis {ayopa) ; aiSo-T o-g, 
modest, from the Stem al^o (Nom. ai^wg) ; but ^iKa-io-g, 
just, from, the Stem ^iku (Nom. ^iKrj, justice); so also, 
after rejecting the g, we have from the Stem Os pag {to 
Oipog, sicmmer), 6ipE-i o-g, summer-like. By the suffix i o, 
adjectives are also formed from AdjectiveSteiins : eXevOip- 
lo-g, liher-alis {iXevOepo-g, liber), and gentile adjectives 
(§ 349) from names of places, which, however, are also used 
substantively : MiXri<j-i o-q (for MiX^t-l o-g, from MiXtiro-g, 
according to § 60), 'A9r}va-Xo-g {'AOrivai). 

§ 351. 2. Ko, Nom. Ko-g (always oxytone), 
is mostly affixed to the Stem by the connecting vowel i, 
and, in words derived from Verbal-Stems, denotes ftness :- 
ap^-L-Ko-g, suited for governing ; ypa(f)iK6g, suited for writ- 
ing or painting (picturesque). Many Verbal- Stems insert 
the syllable ri before the suffix ko (§ 342) : at(T0r/-n-Ko-c, 
capable of perceiving • wpa-KTi-Ko-g, suited for acting. 
From Nominal- Stems the suffix ko, Nom. Ko-g, forms ad- 
jectives denoting what is pecidiar, belonging or referable 
to the thing expressed by the noun : ^aaiXiKog, kingly * 
i^vcTLKog, natural ; iroXejuiKog, warlike. 

Obs. — By means of tins sufRx are formed the names of many arts 
and sciences, the Feminine being used substantively, originally 
with the addition of Tix^^rj, art, science; ?/ hovo-i-kt}, music; i) 
K 



218 SUFFIXES FOR FORMING ADJECTIVES. § 352. 

ypanfiar-i-Kr)^ from rd Ypd/xfiaTa, Utterce, grammar, tlie art of writ- 
ing ; r) TUKT-i-Kr), tactics. The corresponding Masculine denotes 
one who is experienced in such art or science : o fiovmKo-g, mu- 
sician ; 6 ypafifiaTiKo-g, grammarian / 6 ruKTiKo-g, tactician. 

§ 352. 3. ivo, Nom. ivo-g, proparoxytone, and 

4. f o, Nom. Eo-g [Lat. eu-s~\, proparoxytone (ovg peri- 
spome, § 183), denote the material of which any thing 
consists : \'S-i v o-q, of stone (XiOo-g) ; ^v\-i v o-g, wood-en 
(^v\o-v) ; ^v(j-i o-g, ^vaovg, gold-en \aur-eu-s\ {^pvao-g), 

Obs. — ivo, Nom. iv6-Q, oxytone, fonns adjectives of time: x0€<T-t»^o-c, 
yesterday' s^irom. xQkg, yesterday ; tap-iv6-£,'Dermis; with enlarged 
suffix : vvKT-ep-i V 6-Q, noct-ur-nu-s, 

5. evT, Nom. Masc. ei-g, Fern, c trtra, Neut. ev, 

denotes abundance : xapi-e i-g, grace-ful {^api-g) ; vXr^-f i-g, 
wood-y (vXri) ; rjfxaOo-e i-g, sand-?/ (afxaOo-g). Compare Lat. 

OSU-S : gV2i\A0SUS, ^WyOSUS, SiYeiiOSUS. 

6. ju o V, Nona. Masc. juwv, Neut. fiov, 

denotes the he7it or inclination to something : iivr]-jjL to v, 
'ini7idful ; t\{\-ii to v, patient ; lTn\i](T-fx w v, forgetful. 

Obs. — Adjective suffixes of less defined meanings are : 
vo, Nom. vo-Q, oxytone, mostly passive : ^u-v6-q, terriible; asfx-vo-g ((7t/3- 

o-nai), venerable. 
Xo, " Xo-g, mostly oxytone and active: dei-Xo-g, fearful ; cnruTri- 

X 6-f , deceitful. 
no, " /io-c, proparoxytone, partly active: ^dx-i-jJio-Q, warlike; and 

partly passive : doid-i-/xo-£, capable of being mng ; akin 

tb it is 
mno, " mixo-Q, proparoxytone : xph^^^o-g, useful; tpv^ifio-g, capable of 

being fled from, avoidable. 
eg, *•' Tjg, Neut. eg : ^pevd-rjg, false, almost exclusively in compound 

words (§ 355). 



§ 353. III. Derived Verbs 
are formed in various ways from ir<?mm«Z- Stems. The 
most important endings of derived verbs, differing little 
from one another in meaning, are the following, arranged 
according to their forms of the Present : 



§ 353, h, DERIVED VERBS. — ADVERBS. 



219 



1. o-w : \xi(jQ6-i))^Iliire 

Xpvao-ijj, I gild 
^yjfiio-io, I jmnish 

2. a-w : Tifid-io, I honor 

aiTid-ofiai^ I Harm 
yoa-w, / wail 

3. €-w : apiOns-io, I number 

evrvxe-<j^, I am fortunate 
icTTopk-u}, I search 

4. sv-(o : (3a<n\ev-(i), I am king 

(3ovXev-o), I advise 

5. iK-b) : cXttj^-w, / hope 

eX\r}vi^-u), I speak Oreeh 
^iXiTTTt^-w, I am inclined 
to Philip 

6. a?-w : ^KaK-ia^ I judge 

tpydK-ofiai, 1 WOrJc 
^id^-ofiai, I use violence 

7. aiv-u) : (TT]fiaiv-iOj I sign 

XevKuiv-oj, I whiten 
Xa\e7ratV-w, / am it 

8. vv-b) : I'jdvv-u), I sweeten 

\an7rpvv-(jj, I brighten 



(ijli<t96-q, hire). 
(xpvao-Q, gold). 
{^T]nia, punishment), 
{rifir], hanor). 
(aHa, hlame). 
{yoo-g, wailing). 
{dpi9fi6-g, number). 
{^vTvxm, fortunate). 
(i(TTiop, searcher). 
{iSamXev-g, king). 
(/3ovXi7, advice). 
(IXTTi-g, hope). 
{"EXXt]v). 

((piXnnro-g). 

(SiKT], justice). 

(tp-yo-v, work). 

(/3ia, violence). 

{(TTJfia, sign). 

{XevKo-g, white). 

(xaXeTTo-g, severe, indignant). 

{r)dv-g, sweet). 

{Xafi7rp6-g, bright). 



Obs. 1.— From a few Nominal-Stems verbs are derived with differ- 
ent endings and with different meanings; thus from SovXo, 
Nom. dovXo-g, slave : dovX6-io, I enslave, dovXev-io, I am a slave ; from 
TroXefxo, Nom. TrdXefio-g, war, TroXe/ue-w and TroXefii^-oj, I make war, 
TToXefio-oj, I make hostile. 

Obs. 2. — A desiderative meaning belongs to verbs in (teioj, as well as 
to several in aw and lau) : yeXaGsiu), I am inclined to laugh; ^pa- 
aeiix), I desire to do; ^ovdio,I want to murder; KXavaidoj, I want to 
weep. The verbs of the last two terminations frequently indicate 
a bodily weakness or illness: wx/oiaw, / am pale; d^OaXnidb), I 
suffer in the eyes. 



IV. Adverbs, 

§ 353, h. On the Adverbs formed from Adjectives, com- 
pare §§ 201-204. 

From Verbal and Substantive-'^iQm^ adverbs are formed 
by the suffixes : 



220 FORM OF COMPOSITION. § 354. 

5dv, oxytone: ava-^av-^6v^<ypenly ; ayE\r]-^6v^gregatim. 

St]v (aSrjv), paroxytone : KpvjS-S r] v, clam ; <Tv\\r](i-S ri v, collectively^ 

hriejly (Stem Xa/3) ; (nrop-ddrjv, scatteredly (Stem airEp)^ o-Treipw, 

/ sow. 
Ti, oxytone : dvofiaa-Ti, h/ name (dvofidi^w) ; iXkr}vi(T-Ti, gr(Bce {eXKrjvi^w). 



B) Composition. 
§ 354. L JPorm of Composition. 

A noun, standing' j^/'^^ in a compound, appears in the 
form of its Stem : aGTv-yuTijjVf neighbor to the city ; x^po" 
^tSacTKaXo-c, teacher of the chorus / aaKiqrTraXog, shaker 
of the shield (to o-aicoc)* 

ConsonatitStems are usually united to the second part 
by the connecting-vowel o : av^piavT-o-iroLO-g (6 av^pia-g), 
maker of statues, statuary; iraTp-o-KTovo-g, murderer of 
a father. This o, farther, is frequently inserted after weak 
vowels : ^u(Tt-o-Xoyo-c, acquainted with nature ; \y^v-o- 
^w^o-q, fish-eating ; and regularly stands in place of a in 
the Stem: i7jU£po-S]0o/zo-c, a runner hy day ; xw/oo-ypa^o-c, 
descriher of a country. The o is dropped before vowels : 
XO/o-Tjyo-c, leader of the choi'us ; 7raTp'a^eX(f>0'g, a father'^ s 
hrother ; it remains, however, where the word originally 
began with digamma (§ 34, D.) ; Hom. drfjULioepyo-g, Att. 
^rjluLovpyogj artisan. 

Obs. — Exceptions to these rules are frequent. Thus Stems in or 
often appear in an abbreviated form in compounds : ^Kpo-KvovoQ^ 
Mlling with tJie sword (Stem ^ i ^ e e) ; Tuxo-naxia, « contest at the 
wall (Stem Teix^Q)i the final vowel of A-Stems is sometimes 
preserved as a or ?; : dpeTd-Xoyog, a speaker about mrtUe; xorj-ipopog, 
hearer of funeral offerings. A case-form seldom occurs instead of 
the Stem-form : vewg-oiKog, shedfm' shijjs; dpEaai-^drrjg, wandering 
on the hills. 

§ 355. The ending of a word is often somewhat altered 
in composition, especially when the compound word is an 
adjective : rt/i//, (piXo-Tijuo-gy amhitious y irpayfia, ttoXv- 
TTpdjfjibJv, 'inuch occujpied. The ending y\ g Masculine and 



§ 358. FOEM OF COMPOSITION. 221 

Feminine, e g Neuter, deserves special notice ; this ending 
occurs : 

a) in many adjectives formed directly from Verbal- 
Stems : a-j5\aj5-r]g, uninjured (/3Xa/3, Pres. /BXaTrrw) ; av- 
rapK-rjg, self-sufficient (avro-g and a/OKtw). 

b) in adjectives, whose second part comes from a sub- 
stantive in £ c (Nom. og) : ^cica-trijc, ten year's old (trog) ; 
KaKo-{]Or]g, of a had nature {^Oog). 

Obs. — Observe also the compound adverbs in e i or t, oxytone : 
avTo-x^ip-i, with one's own hand; d-fxiaO-i, without pay ; 7rav-di]ix-ei, 
with the whole people. 

§ 356. A verb — without changing its nature — can only 
be compounded with a preposition. The looseness of the 
connection in such compounds is the reason for the posi- 
tion of the Augment mentioned in § 238 : a7roj3aXXw, / 
throw away; airijdaXov, I threw away. For the same 
reason, prepositions are frequently separated from their 
verbs in the poets and in Herodotus, and in some cases 
even in Attic prose (compare § 446). This separation is 
called tmesis. 

When any other word is to be compounded with a Ver- 
bal-Stem, a noun is first formed of the two, e. g., from 
\iOo-g and Stem /3 a X, \i6o-f36Xo-g, throwing stones, and 
thence Xt 0o/3oXf-w, I throw stones ; so likewise from vav-g 
hnd fia^^o/iiai comes first vav-ixayo-gi fighting at sea, and 
thence vavixayjihi ; from cu and Stem £ /o y, evipyirrig, hene- 
f actor, ^vepy^ii),! do good. 

§ 357. A substantive of an abstract meaning can only 
be compounded with a preposition without changing its 
termination: irpo and /3ouX/) make Trpoj^ovXri, previous 
consultation. In every other compound the abstract sub- 
stantive must take a derivative ending : XiOog and ^oXit 
make Xt0oj3oXm, throiving stones / vavg and fiaxn, vai>- 
fJLaxia, seafijght / tu and Trpa^ig, evirpa^ia, well-heing. 

§ 358. Compounds having the first part formed directly 



222 MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. § 359. 

from a Verbal- Stem are rarely met with except in the 
poets. They are formed in two ways, viz. : 

1. the Verbal or the Present- Stem is joined directly to 
Stems beginning with a vowel, and to those beginning 
with a consonant by means of the connecting-vowels e, i, 
or o : ^aK-i-Ovfio-g (Pres. ^clkv-oj, Class 5), heart-gnawing/ 
TTud-apxo-Qf obedient to order {TreWojuaL and apxn) ; apx-i- 
TtKTtJv, master-huilder ; fjucr-o-yvvo-g, hater of women (jui- 
(ri(x)). 

2. A form strengthened by o-, and resembling the Weak 
Aorist-Stem, is joined in the same way to the second part 
of the word: Xva-i-rrovo-g, freeing from trouble; 7rXrj|- 
nnro-g {wXridau), Class 4, a), tohipping horses; (Trpeipi-hKO-g 
(orpf^w, Class l),perverter of right. 

§ 359. II. Meaning of Comjpounds, 
In regard to their meaning, compound Adjectives and 
Substantives are divided into three principal classes : 

1. Determinative compounds. In them the second word 
is the principal, which, without in any way altering its 
meaning, is merely defined by the first. These compounds 
may be paraphrased by changing the first part either into 
an Adjective or an Adverb : ajCjOo-TroXf-c, high town, castle^ 
i. e., aKpa TToXig (Hom. iroXig aKpri) ; juea-riiuj^pia, midday, 
i. e., fjLiar] ri/uipa ; ipBv^o-Kripv^, i. e., ^ev^rig Ki]pv^y false her- 
ald ; 6 fio-^ovXo-g, fellow-slave, i. e., 6 fjiov ^ovX^vmv; fieya- 
XoirpeTrrig, grand, properly, ajpjpearing as great ; o^i-yovog, 
late born, L e., 6\ps jevofKvog. This class is the least nu- 
merous. 

2. Attributive compounds. In them the second word is 
indeed also defined by the first, yet so that the latter alters 
its meaning, and, together with the first, forms a new idea, 
which is attributed as a quality to another word. These 
compounds can generally be paraphrased by employing 
the Participle of ix^> ^^ ^ verb akin to it in meaning, and 
adding to this the second word as an object, the first be- 



§ 359. MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. 223 

coming an attribute to the object : jjiaKpo-x^ip, longi-manus, 
long-handed^ i. e., juaKpag x^^P^^ ^'x**^^ (^^^ ^^^ long hand 
itself); apyvp6'To^o-g,j>?'ovided with a silver how, i. e., 
apyvpovv to^ov (^ipuyv ; o/uLo-Tpoiro-g, of the same Jcincl, i. e.^ 
ofxoiov TpoTTov f x^i^ 5 yXavK-ioTTi-g , hri(/ht-ei/ed, i. e.^ ykav 
KovQ ocpdaXjuovg exovcra ; TriKpo-yajuo-g, having a hitter 
wedding y Kov<^6~vov-g, frivolous^ trifling / o-Gj-<^|Owy, of 
sound se?ise, sober ; ^EKa-sTiig, ten years old, i. <?., having or 
lasting ten years j avTo-x^ip, making use of one^s own 
hands. 

Obs. — To these belong the numerous adjectives in -ojdrjg and osiSrjg : 
yvvaiKoJdrjQ := yvvaiKO-eidrjg (ddog), WOmanZi^^, woman^sA, 

3. Ohjective compounds, or those of dependency. In 
them, either the first word is grammatically governed by 
the second or the second by the first, so that in the para- 
phrase one of the two must be put in an oblique case : 
rivi-oxo-g = Ta r]via t'Ywv, ^?^?'<im^ ^A^ reins^ driver ; Xoyo- 
ypa<po-g, speech-writer, i. e., Xoyovg ypa(f>ii)v ; a^io-Xoyo-g, 
worth sj)eaMng, i. e., \6yov a^iog ; (l)iX6-iuiov(To-gy loving the 
Muses, i. e., (j)iX{ov rag Movaag; ^£i(Ti-^aifjiwv, fearing the 
gods, i. e., ^^^iwg Tovg ^ai/uLovag ; x^fjOOTronjroc, made hy 
hand, i. e., Xipai iroir]T6g ; 0wl3\a(^{]g, injicred hy God, i. e., 
viro Oeov jdtjdXapfxtvog ; oiKoytviw, horn in the house, i. e., 
Iv o'/k(^> yevofxevog. 

Obs. 1. — Prepositions may he joined with substantives in any of the 
three principal classes — (1) Determinative : dix<pi-9eaTpov, a round 
theatre, i. e., a theatre extending itself round in a circle; dir- 
eXevOepog, one who has been freed by anothei-, not by himself, i. e., 
a freedman (6 utto nvog IXsvOepog wv) ; (2) Attributive : tv-9eog, 
i. e., Iv tavTtp Bebv txiov, carrying a god in himself, god-inspired ; 
dfx<i>iKi(i)v, viz., vEojg, i. e., Kiovag afi<p' kavrbv ix^v, a temple encom- 
passed around with pillars ; (3) Ol^ective : tyx^piog, i. e., iv ry x^P?- 
^ Mv, at home ; t^iTnnog, i. e., l^' 'iTnrqj wv, being on a Jwrse, belonging 
to a hoarse. 

Obs. 2. — Against the general rule (§ 85), according to which com- 
pound words draw back the accent as far as possible from the 
end, those compounds in -o-g in the Nominative, whose second 
part comes directly from a Verbal-Stem (§ 356), usually accent 



224 MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. § 360. 

this Stem if it has an active meaning. They are paroxytone 
when the last syllable but one is short, oxytone when it is long : 
Xoyo-jpd^o-Q^ speech-writer ; fiijTp-o-KTovog, 7)iotlier-murderer ; Traid- 
aywyo-f, hoy-leader ; fiEXo-Troiog, composer of songs. When the mean- 
ing is passive, the second word remains unaccented : avTo-ypa^o-g, 
written hy one\ self; iirjTp-o-KTovo-Q, murdered hy the mother ; dva- 
dywyogj liard to guide. • 

§ 360. The prefix a v [compare aveu, without, Lat. in-, 
Engl. un-'\, before consonants a [compare Lat. i- in i-gna- 
ru-s], called aljpha jorivative on account of its meaning, is 
found in a very large number of compounds, which belong 
to the determinative ciass if the second part has arisen from 
a verb or an adjective, but chiefly to the attributive if from 
a substantive : a-ypa^og, unwritten, i. e., ov yEypafi/nivog ; 
av-BXevOapog, unfree, i. e., ovk tXtvOepog ; av-ai^ijgy shame- 
less, i. e., al^u) OVK ix^*^ J airai-g, childless, i. e., Trdtdag ovk 
iX^^' Determinatives with a v (a) from substantives are 
rare and poetic: iur]Tr}p ani]Twp, an unmotherly mother, 
%. e., iiy]Ty\p ov fxrjTTip ovcra, 

Obs. — Words originally beginning with digamma (§ 34, D.) have d, 
not dv: d-k-wv, contracted ukov, unwilling ; d-£ifc->ye, contracted 
aiK-rjg, reproachful (Stem e t k, toiKo) ; d-epy6-g, contracted dpyo-g, 
inactive (tpyo-v, work). 

The prefix ^vg corresponds to the English 7nis, and, as 
the opposite to eu, denotes something unfortunate, awk- 
ward, difficult : ^vgapearog (§ 324:, 10), displeased ; ^vg- 
/SouXoc, ill advised, i. e., KUKag (5ov\ag t'xwv (attributive) ; 
cvgaXwTog, hard to capture (§ 324, 17). Here, too, de- 
terminative compounds from substantives are rare : Hom. 
Avgirapig, unfortunate Paris, 



PAET SECOND. 
S Y N T AX. 



Preliminary Hemarhs. 
§ 361. 1. Syntax {avvTa^iq^ arrangement) teaches the 
use of the forms discussed in the first part of the grammar, 
and the way in which words are arranged into sentences, 
and sentences are combined together. 

2. A sentence is either simple or compound. Every 
sentence is simple in which the necessary parts of a sen- 
tence occur only once. 

3. The necessary parts of a sentence are : 

a) the Suhject, i. e., the person or thing about which 
something is stated ; 

h) the Predicate^ i, c, that which is stated. 

Obs. 1. — Every form of the finite verb (§ 225, 4) contains a com- 
plete sentence in itself, in which the personal ending contains 
the Subject and the Verbal-Stem the Predicate : 0?y/«t, / say ; 
t<paixw^ ice said. 

Obs. 2. — In many cases the Subject remains undefined : <paai, they 
say, people say ; or it is not defined, because readily understood 
by the Greeks : vu. Tie rains, i. e., Zeus, for he alone can cause 
rain ; ttraXiriy^e, he Mew the trumpet., i. c, the trumpeter, for it is 
his business. The Subject of the impersonal verbs ^a, xphi ii «« 
iiecessary, is also undefined. 

4. The Predicate is either Verhal or Nominal ; it is 
Verbal when expressed in the form of ^finite verb': Kupoc 
i[5a(TiXev(rey Cyrus rided ; it is Nom,inal when expressed 
in the form of a noun (substantive or adjective)*: Kupoc 
jSamXfvc rfv, Gyrus was king. 

5. The Predicate must agree with the Subject, viz., the 
Verbal Predicate in number, the Nominal in number and 
case, and, when it is an adjective, in gender also : ot TroXt- 

K 2 



226 PRELIMINARY REMARKS. § 361. 

fjLioL £viKri(yav, the enemies conquered / rj juiaxrj fxeyaXt] ^v, 
the battle was great. 

Exceptions, §§ 362-366. 

6. In many cases this agreement alone is sufficient to ex- 
press the relation of a Nominal Predicate to the Subject : 
6 iii'yaq oXjSoc ov ii6vi\xoq, great jprosjperity is not lasting ; 
Aipioi- KaKoi, the Lerians (inhabitants of the island of Le- 
ros) are had. But mostly the Nominal Predicate is more 
clearly connected with its Subject by the verb to he (sub- 
stantive verb) : 6 fieyag oXfiog ov fiovi/uLog IcrriVf Aipioi tcaicoc 
ti(Tiv. This verb, thus used, is called the Copula. 

7. The intransitive and passive verbs, which denote to 
heeome, he 7nade, appear, he named, designated, chosen, and 
the like, in order to produce a complete sentence, often re- 
quire a Nominal Predicate along with the Verbal one. In 
this case also the Nominal Predicate must agree with the 
Subject : Kvpog lyiviTo fiaaiXevg, Gyrus hecarne king^ Cy- 
rus rex foetus est. Compare § 392. 

8. The Greek language expresses many definitions of 
time, order, and kind, less frequently of place, by adjec- 
tives, which are expressed in English by adverbs or prepo- 
sitions with substantives. These adjectives, which must 
agree with the Subject, are to be considered as supple- 
mentary Predicates : rpiToXoi cnrtiXOoVf they ivent away on 
the third day j AaKe^aifiovioi varepoi a<f)iKovTO, the Lace- 
dcemonians arrived later, posterior es advenerunt ; opKiog 
aoL Atyw, / tell you on oath. 

On the similar use of the participle as a supplementary Predicate, 
see ^ 589, etc. 

9. A simple sentence is emiarged by an Object being add- 
ed to tlfe verb. The Object is that to which the action of 
the verb extends : ot 'A0r/vatot a-KkKTiivav tov Sw/c/oarr^v, 

the Athenians killed /Socrates. 

On the different kinds of Objects and the manner in which they 
are indicated, see §§ 395-403. 



§ 361. PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 227 

10. The Active verbs, which correspond in meaning to 
the Intransitive and Passive ones mentioned in 7, i. e., the 
verbs which denote to make^ name, designate, choose, and 
the like, frequently also require a Nominal Predicate. 
But, as this belongs to the Object, it must agree with it : 
Of Yiipaai Tov Kvpov hXovto (iacriXia, the Persians chose 
Cyrus Icing [Per see Cyrum i^egem elegerunt\ Compare 
§ 404. This kind of Predicate is called a Dependent Pred- 
icate. As the Dependent Predicate here appears in the 
Accusative, so it may in other cases appear in the Genitive 
or Dative. Compare § 438 ; Ohs. % 589, etc. 

11. Another enlargement of the sentence is the Attri- 
hiote, i. e., any nominal definition added to a substantive as 
essentially belonging to it and forming with it one idea : 
KoXoQ "iTnroQ, a fine horse j' 6 irapiov Kaipog, the present time 
(the present). 

Obs. — The Greek language in many cases adds an Attribute to the 
designation of a person, expressive of a generic idea : Horn, ripuitg 
Aavaoi, ye heroes Baiiai (ye warring Danai) ; dvdpeg SiKacrTai^ ye 
judges^ judices. 

12. Different from the Attribute is the Apposition. 
Apposition is such a subordinate definition added to a sub- 
stantive as does not exactly form 07ie idea with it, but is 
superadded .rather for describing or illustrating it, and 
hence might generally be expressed in the form of a de- 
scriptive clause : Ylapvaang, 7j tov Kvpov fxrjrrjp, tovtov 
paXXov tcjiiXei fj TOV ^ApTa^tp^riv, Parysatis, the mother of 
Cyrus — who was Cyrus's mother — loved him more than 
Artaxerxes ; IvTsvOev Kvpog l^tXavvti Sm ^pvyiag Hg Ko- 
Xo(T(TOvg, TToXiv olKOvpivrjv, ev^aifiova KaX fAEyaXr)v, fipom 
there Cyrus marches through Phrygia to Colossi, a popu- 
lous, prosperous, and large city (which was a . . . city). 

The Attribute and Apposition must agree with the sub- 
stantive to which they belong, in the same way as the 
Predicate (5, 7). 



228 NUMBER AND GENDER. S 362. 



Chap. XIV. — Number and Gender. 

§ 362. The singular sometimes has a collective sense, de- 
noting a plurality : I <t // Cj clothing^ clothes ; irXlvOo g, 
bric/cs / 77 t TT TT o Cj cavalry; ri atririg, the heavy-armed. 

Sometimes a Predicate or Apposition in the Plural re- 
fers to collective substantives in the Singular : 'A0rjvatwv 
TO TrXrjOog otovTat"l7r7rap\ov rvpavvov ovra airoQavtlv, 
the mass of the Athenians believe Hijpjparchus died as 
ruler; to cPTpaTtvfia tiropiZ^TO gXtov kotttovtsq tovq 
(5ovg KOi ovovg, the army obtained food by killing the oxen 
and asses. 

A Plural is formed in Greek from many words, especial- 
ly abstracts, which have no plural in English, especially 
when the repetition of an idea is to be expressed : ai lir i- 
<P av E I at KOL \a juTT p 6t r) T e g tie twv aywvwv yiyvtadat 
(piXovmv, celebrity and glory usually arise from the con- 
tests ; e/Liol ai aai fxeyaXai EVTV\iai ovk api(TKOV(Tiv,your 
(repeated) great success does not please me ; Hom. iravTig 
OdvaToi aTvyepoi, all kinds of death are hateful. 

Ohs. 1. — Poets frequently use the Plural in a generic sense where 
we employ the Singular with the indefinite article : ovk av ywai- 
Kutv ij(T<roveQ KoKoifxeff dv, I should not like to T)e called inferior to a 
woman ; (piXoi, a friend. • 

'Obs. 2. — The speaker often uses the first person Plural of himself 
[compare Lat. nos]. In this case the Masculine is used even 
when a woman is the speaker. Thus Electra says : TrsffovfieO', 
d xpv, T^aTpl Tifnopov/xevot, I loill fall^ if it must he, as my fathers 
avenger. % 

Obs.^. — In Homer there are many Plurals of abstract ideas, which 
we express in the Singular ; the Plural, however, properly de- 
notes the various manifestations of such ideas : i-KiroavvyQ 
UeKaaro, by horsemanship he icas distinguished ; d(ppadiy<ri vooio, 
in the foolishness (the foolish thoughts) ofJiis mind. 

§ 363. The Neuter Plural comes very near in its mean- 
ing to the Singular. This explains the peculiar Greek 
custom, that the Neuter Plural has the verb in the Sin- 



§ 366. NUMBER AND GENDER. 229 

gular : ttwc ravra iraiKTErai', how is this to end f ra 
TT pay fiara Tavra ^ewa 1(jt l v, these things are terrible. 

Obs. 1. — Some Plural Neuters, which denote a plurality of persons, 
sometimes have the verb in the Plural, as : to. HXr], in the sense 
of the mithorities; ra iOvt], the peoples. 

Obs. 2. — The Homeric and the Common Greek Dialects (Introduc- 
tion, 4) generally allow the Plural Verb with the Neuter Plural : 

Hom. (TTrdpTa XeXvvrai, the ropes are loosed. 

• 

§ 364. With an indefinite Neuter Subject (in English, 
it) the Adjective Predicate is frequently^ in the Plural: 
aSvvaTa Icjtlv awotpvyuvj it is impossible to escape ; this 
is the case especially with the Verbal Adjective in rto-c : 
iTTix^tpvTia r]v,it was to he attemj^ted. 

§ 365. When two persons or things are spoken of, the 
Plural is always admissible as well as the Dual, and both 
numbers may be used in referring to the same thing : 
E'ytXao'arjjv ajucfxi), [5\i\liavT£g elg aWrfXovg, they 
both laughed after looking at one another y' ^6tb^ irapa- 
^aiyfia, tj AaxvQ re kol Nticm, give an exaniple, Laches and 
Nicias ^ w Kayj\q re Kai NtKta, uTrarov, O Laches and 
Nicias say. 

§ 366. The Neuter of an adjective in the Singular as 
well as in the Plural easily becomes a substantive : Iv 
ju £ o" (j>, in medio, in the midst ; iv ri^ irapovr i, at the 
j>rese?it moment, for the present; Ik iroWovyfor a 
long time ; S c t v a, terrible things. 

Hence a Neuter Adjective often stands as Predicate to 
one or more Masculine or Feminine substantives to ex- 
press a class or genus in general : Hom. ovk. ay aObv 
iroXvKoipavirif the government of many is not a good thrnig; 
opOov aXi^OeL aeiy truth is always the right thing ; Beivov 
ol iroXXoi, KaKovpyovg orav t^wm TrpoaTarag, a bad thing 
is the many when they have base leaders; rapaxat ica\ 
araoHQ oXiO pia Ta7g TToXfcrtv, disturbance and disCord 
are ruinous to states. 



230 THE ARTICLE. § 367. 

§ 367. The demonstrative pronoun, instead of being in 
the Neuter as in German, frequently agrees in gender and 
number with the Predicate to which it refers, just as in 
Latin: ovtoi hctiv av^pig, those are men j ovroq opog 
coTt ^iKaioarvvrjg aXr]Ori re Xiyeiv Koi a av \dj3ri rig airo^ido- 
vai, this is the idea of justice, to speak the truth, and to 
give hack what we have received \_haiG notio justitice est']. 

The relative pronoun also often agrees in Gender and 
Number, not with tlie preceding substantive to which it 
refers, but with the substantive following, which is added 
as a Predicate: (ItiXov, 6 luiyicrrov ayaOov lariVf ov (ppov 
TiZovaiVy they do not care for a friend, which is the great- 
est good. 



Chap. XY. — The Article. 

§ 368. The Article 6, 17, to is originally a demonstrative 
jpronoun, and still employed as such in Homer, both in a 
substantive and adjective sense, and frequently also in the 
language of the other poets : Hom. rv\v eyw ov Xvau), 
her / will not give ujp ; poet, tov, ^ Zev irarsp, ^^t'orov, 
uiM, father Zeus, destroy , Hom. (^tdlau as to aov juivog, 
this thy courage will he thy ruin. 

§ 369. The Article in this demonstrative sense is also 
employed in the following cases in Attic prose : 

1. In connection with ixiv and ^£ : 6 /xl v, the one ; 6 ^i, 
the other. 

O&s.*— Used adverbially, to {to) \ikv — to {to) de, mean partly — 
partly. 

2. Sometimes also with Kai and ^i : jcat tov KeXevcTai, 
and that he ordered ; tov koi tov, the one and the other. 

3. In TTjOo r ov, hefore that, formerly. 

§ 370. The real Article generally corresponds to the 
English definite article. It serves to set forth an object. 



§ 374. THE ARTICLE. 231 

either as a single one (the individualizing article) or as a 
class (the generic article). 

Obs. — 6, »7, TO in Homer almost always has a demonstrative power. 
Yet in many cases — compare especially § 379 — the use of these 
forms approaches very near to that of the Attic Article. The 
Article, however, in Homer is scarcely ever necessary, and is fre- 
quently omitted also in the Tragic writers. 

§ 371. 1. The Individualizing Article sets forth a sin- 
gle object above others of the same kind, and that : 

a) as known or having been pointed out before : Herod. 
XaXjcf 8f £c T CLQ Itt ^AprejuLKTito eiKom vrjaQ Trapei^ovTO, the 
Chalcideans furnished the (before mentioned) twenty shij^s 
at Artemision ; IS^ip^rig ayeipag Trjv dvapiOiuLr)TOv (rrpariav 
ijXOev ewl ttiv 'EXXd^a, after having collected the (well- 
known) innumerable army, Xerxes marched against 
Greece. 

Obs. — In this sense proper names also, which in general do not 
need it, may take the Article : o ^oKpdTtjg, Socrates, whom you 
know, or who was mentioned before. 

§ 372. h) A thing as distinguished from others by the 
addition o^ distinguishing circumstances : 6 rwv 'AOrjvaiwv 
^rjl^og, the Athenian j)eople (no othei:) ; 17 woXig rjv noXiop- 
KovfjL^v, the city lohich we are besieging (just this). 

§ 373. The distinguishing circumstance expressed by 
the Article is often indicated in English by the, possessive 
pronoun : cjcaoroc tCjv ^r]iiLOvpyC)v tt) v ri)(yriv KaXtog £$- 
EipydZeroj each of the artisans practised his art well. 

§ 374. In connexion with numerals, the Article some- 
times denotes that the number to which it is added stands 
in a defined relation to another number : rd ^vo julprj, two 
thirds / Twv Tpiy]pii)v rpiaKoaiujv ovaCjv twv iracrwv rag 
^laKomag ii iroXig rrapicTX^To, of the triremes, of which there 
were three hmidred in all, the city furnished two hun- 
dred. The Article has a similar effect with quantitative 
adjectives of a more general kind : iroXXoi, inany — ot ttoX- 



232 THE ARTICLE. § 375. 

Xoi, most; irXtovBgy more — ol nXeoveg, the greater part ; 
aX\oi,alu — ol aXXoi, cceteri / oX[^oi,afew — ol bXLyoi,the 
oligarchs. 

§ 375. 2. The Generic Article indicates a whole class of 
homogeneous objects : ol iroXlrai, all the citizens ; 6 pwwp, 
the orator (by profession) ; ^a tov (TTparitJTr}v top ap\ovTa 
fiaXXov rj Tovg iroXEfxiovg (j)oj5ei(TdaL, the soldier must fear 
his superior rather than the enemy. 

Obs. — Hence the Article may also be used with proper names in 
the plural when a whole class is to be described : o I ArjfioaOeveig, 
. orators like Demosthenes (a Demosthenes, compare § 363, Obs. 1). 

§ 376. The Article is not used when a substantive only 
expresses an idea in general : aydpilyirov xpvxrj tov Ohov 
pETtx^i, man's soul partakes of the divine / so 0f oc de- 
notes the deity ; 6 0£oc, a particular god ; so likewise, in 
many other current expressions, the more ancient method 
of not using the Article has been preserved : wktoq, hy 
night; r}iuifpag,hy day; IttX OaXcKrari, at sea; irpog ckjtv, 
to town; Kar'aypoVfin the country; Kara yfjc, under the 
earth ; Iv ^t^ia, on the right ; l^aiptj X6yov,I exempt. 

% 377. The Article is omitted with a number of sub- 
stantives, which by custom have almost acquired the force 
of proper names : fiaaiXevg, the king (of the Persians) ; 
TrpvTavEig, the presidents (as officials); hv clkpottoXei, i7i the 
Acropolis (Athens). 

§ 378. The Predicate (§ 361, 3, lo) generally has no 
Article : YJjpog tyivETo f^atriXev g rtjv Hepcrwv, Cyrus 
hecame Jdng of the Persians; irovog evKXdag Trarrip, 
labor is father of fame ; ol "AOrjvaloi IlspiKXia eIXovto 
(TT parriy 6v, the Athenians chose Pei'icles general (com- 
pare §§ 387, 392, 403, and 438, Ols. 

§ 379. By means of the Article, any adjective, partici- 
ple, or adverb, as well as the infinitive, may be made a 
substantive : Hom. 6 ylptjjv, the old man ; ol nXoixnoi, 
the rich; 6 Xiywv, the speaker ; 6 TrtXac, the neighbor; ol 



§ 385. THE ARTICLE. 233 

TrapovTsg, those present ; to. koltcj^ the tender (part) ; ot 7ra- 
Xai, the ancients / to julktuv, hating or hatred. 

Obs. — With the Neuter Article, any word, or even a whole sentence, 
may be represented as one object : to dvrjp, the word dvrjp or the 
idea " man ;" to TvutQi aeavTov, the saying or rule " Know thy- 
self." 

§ 380. The Generic Article (§ 375) generalizes the idea 
of a participle, which then is to be translated by a relative 
phrase : tzoihtu) tovto 6 j3ovXo/x£voc, do that, who will; jmij 
t^rireiTS rov ravra Xi^ovra, seeh not (one) who will say this 
(compare § 500). 

§ 381. By the Article, many adverbs, placed between it and a sub- 
stantive, become attributive adjectives: oi tote dv9pu)7roi, the people of 
that time ; i] TrapavTiKu ridovr), the momentary pleasure ; ai evOdde 
yvvdiKEc, the women of this place ; rj dyav iXevOepia, the excessive free- 
dom. 

§ 382. In the same way, a genitive, or a preposition with a substan- 
tive, placed between the Article and another substantive, becomes 
an attributive clause : tu tHjv 'AOrjvaiojv TrpdyfiaTa, the affairs of the 
Athenians ; oi iv Ty iroXu avOpioiroi, the people in the city ; ?) Ka9' rjfikpav 
Tpotpf], the daily nourishment; al dvev XvttCjv r/dovai, the painless pleas- 
ures. 

§ 383. The Article often stands alone, sometimes with 
the Genitive of a substantive (compare §§ 409, 410), some- 
times with a preposition followed by a substantive ; in 
such a construction the Article has the force of a substan- 
tive (§ 379) : ra rwv 'AOr^vaiwv, the affairs (possessions, 
interests) of the Athenians ; o\ Iv ry TToXei, ^/i^ (people) in 
the city; ra /^tra ravra, what JvUows, the later (events). 

§ 384. When a substantive with an attributive (§ 361, 
ll) adjective has the Article, the adjective staiids between 
the substantive and the article : 6 ayaOog avrjp, the good 
man. 

§ 385. If the substantive alone is to be prominent, and 
the adjective to be added as apposition (§ 361, 12), the 
substantive stands first, and the adjective with the article 
follows, thus : 



234 THE ARTICLE. § 386. 

a) The siobstantive without Article, when tlie case is 
such that the substantive, if put alone, would have no arti- 
cle : TL ^la^ipH avdpwTTog aKpaTrjg Or^piov tov aKpars- 
arciTov; in what does an ungovernable man differ from 
the most ungovernable beast f for if Or^piov stood alone it 
would be without Article, dr]piov,from a beast. 

b) The substantive has the Article when by itself, even 
without an adjective, it must have the Article : ol Xloi to 
Tuxog ir^pieiXov to kuivov, the Chians pulled down (their) 
wall— the new one (which they themselves had built) ; for, 
even without the adjective, it would have to be to TCi\oq 
TrepidXov (§ 373). 

§ 386. The same rule holds good with regard to the po- 
sition of the attributive additions mentioned in §§ 381 and 
382 : 6 'A9r}vai(i)v S^/xoc, the Athenian jpeojple ; 6 S^/ioc, 
6 rwv 'A^Tjvatwv, the people, that is, the Athenian ; 6 jueTo. 
TavTa xpovog, the after time / 6 yjpovog 6 jueTo. TavTa, the 
time v^hich followed this. 

§ 387. An adjective which, without the Article, either 
precedes or follows a substantive having the Article, is pre- 
dicative, i. e.^ the character is assigned to the substantive 
only by this word (§ 361, 4, 8, and lo) : ayaOog 6 avr)p or 6 
:^vrjp dyaOog (viz., l(TTiv)ithe 7nan is good; aTravTsg txojuiev 
TO (TWjua OvriToVf we all have a body (which is) mortal. 
The translation may often be effected by a relative clause : 
ol ^A6r]vaLOi riyovvTO avTOVOfxiov to irpCnov GViip.a\wv, the 
Athenians had the lead of allies (who) at first (were) inde- 
pendent / (jjaivoiuai fULeyaXag Tag v7ro(Txi(TEig iroiovfjLivog, I 
seem to onake promises which are great. Compare § 378. 

Obs. — Witli proper names, the use of the Article is very uncertain 
when the class is added to which they belong : b EixppdrrjQ -n-ora- 
fiog or 6 TTOTafibg 6 'Ev^pdrrjg, the river Euphrates ; t) Ahvt] to opog, 
Mount Etna; StKeX/a ?) vrjtrog, the island of Sicily ; r) ttoXiq ol Tap- 
(Toi, the city of Tarsi. 

§ 388. T\\Q possessive pronoun is precededby the Arti- 
cle when a single definite object is referred to : 6 Ifiog 



§ 391. THE ARTICLE. 235 

iraipog, my (particular) friend ; Ifiog haipog, a friend of 
7)iine. 

§ 389. aurocj as ^ jpredicate, ^\xi before or after a sub- 
stantive with the Article, means self: avTog 6 TraTrip or 6 
irarrip avrog, the father himself ipse pater ; but as an at- 
tribute it is put between the Article and the substantive, 
and means sam^e : 6 avrog dvrjp, the same man, idem vir. 

With the demonstrative jpronouns ovrog, 6§c, iKuvogy a 
substantive, not being a predicate, has regularly the Article : 
ovrog 6 dvrip or o dvrip ovrog, this 7nan y Ikhvo rb ^iopov, 
that gift. But when the substantive is a predicate the 
Article is wanting : Iv Uepdmg vo/uog e<jr\v ovrog, atnong 
the Persians this is law. Compare § 367. 

§ 390. TT a c without the Article before a substantive with- 
out the Article means in the Singular every : iraaa iroXig, 
every dty. The Article before irag gives it the meaning 
oi whole : i] ttcktu rroXigythe whole city,' rovg irdvrag onXi- 
rag, the whole of the heavy -armed. Most generally Trac 
as well as o\og without the Article precedes or follows a 
substantive provided with the Article : Trao-av v^iv rrjv 
dXtfOsiav lpCj,I will tell you the whole truth ; rov dpiOfxov 
wdvra St'xa ^isXd(5oiJ.sv, we divided the whole number into 
two parts / rrig rijiipag o\r]g ^iriXOov ov ttXeov irivre KaX 
itKocTi xrradlwv, during the whole^ day they proceeded no' 
more than twenty-five stadia. 

Obs. — iraQ, with the Article added to a numeral, may often be 
translated by " altogether" or " in all :" Aajoaoe llSaaiXevae to. 
Trdvra U Kal TpiaKovra irr], Darius ruled altogether thirty-six years. 

§ 391. Expressions for measures are to be understood differently, 
according to the position of the Article : terxarov to 6pog, the extreme 
end of the mountain ; to ttrxaTov opoQ, the farthest mountain (in contrast 
to other mountains); r) dyopd ixetrrj^the middle (of the) market-place; 
r) ukat} dyopa, the middle market^ that placed in the middle of several 
others. In hsiim, forum medium means both. 



236 THE NOMINATIVE. § 392. 

Chap. XVI. — Use of the Cases. 
A) The Nominative. 

§ 392. The Nominative is the case of the subject and of 
the predicate belonging to the subject (§ 361, 3, 4). 

Hence, as in Latin vfiihfio^dicorjVideoT^creor, etc., so 
in Greek with verbs of the same meaning, 'the predicative 
noun referring to the subject is in the Nominative : Kadi- 
(TTarai Pa(Ti\evg,he is appointed king / ^AXl^av^pog Oeog 
wvojuaZero, Alexander deus appelldbatur. Compare § 361, 
7 ; §§ 378, 403. 

Obs. — cLKovit)^ Ihear^ in tlie sense of lam called [Lat. avdio], also be- 
longs to these verbs : oi Iv 'AOrjvaig (piMTnriKovTEg KoXaicag Kai 
OeoXg ix^pol vKovov,the PMlippizers in Athens were called flat- 
terers and objects of the gods' hatred. 

§ 393. The Nominative is frequently used instead of the Vocative 
in addressing a person, especially in connection with ovj-oq : o 'AttoX- 
\6d(x)poQ ovTog, oh TrEpifievelg ; You I Apollodorus, won't you stop 1 and 
also in exclamations : vrjinog, the fool I , 

B) The Vocative. 

§ 394. The person or thing addressed is in the Vocative. 
In Attic prose w is generally put before it, except some- 
times in animated discourse : fir) dopv^ure, w avdpig 'A0»;- 
vaioi, don^t mahe a disturbance^ Athenians ; aKoveig Al- 
(Txtvrj; do'youhear^^schinesf 

Obs. — The Vocative, like interjections, does not belong to the 
structure of a sentence, whence a word in the Vocative is in- 
closed by commas. 

C) The Accusative. 

§ 395. The Accusative, Genitive, and Dative mark an 
object as dependent, whence they are called cases of de- 
pendence {casus obliqui^ oblique cases). 

The Accusative is the case of the Object, and therefore 
denotes generally the person or thing to which an action 
is directed. 



§ 398. THE EXTERNAL OBJECT. 237 

The Object is either external to the action by which it 
is affected : tutttw tov ^ovXov, I strike the slave, or inter- 
nal, i. <?., already contained in the action itself: tvtttoj wev- 
TYiKovra irXrjyag, I strike Jlfty blows. 

Obs. — The Accusative, therefore, in the great majority of cases, is 
dependent on a verb. Only in a very few cases does it happen 
that a substantive after the manner of a verb is followed by an 
Accusative : ol avjx^axoi reOvaai t<^ Ssei tovq toiovtovq ccTroffToXovg, 
the allies are dead (beside themselves) /rom/e^r of such embassa- 
dors. 

§ 396. 1. The External Ohject 
is expressed by the Accusative with transitive verbs as in 
other languages. Several verbs, however, are treated in 
Greek as transitive which in other languages are intransi- 
tive. Such verbs are : 

. a) Those which signify to benefit or injure, whether it 
be by act or speech : tv or ayaOov Trotew, evEpjETiw, I ben- 
efit {roxjq evfpjETridavTagf my benefactors^ ; 6vivr]fjiif w^eXtw, 
J am xiseful y KUKiog or kukov iroiiii), icaicow, T do ill/ 
a^iK^w, I do wrong ; vj^piZio, I insult ; jSXaTrro), / hurt, 
etc. ; also icoXa/cfuw, I flatter, and TLfxiopio/aai, I avenge my- 
self {tov Ix^pov, on my enemy) ; 6 Sa>jC|oarr/C ovctva twv 
TToXiTwv -n^iKtitjEv, Socrates acted unjustly to none of his 
fellow-citizens. 

§ 397. Not unfrequently the verb of a jDrincipal clause takes as its 
object what should properly be the subject of a subordinate clause : 

Kai fioi TOV vibv eiTre, d /xeixdOjjKS Trjv rexvrjv, more animated than Kai fioi 
dire, d 6 vibg ii£nd9r]Ke ri^v texvtjv, and tell me about my son, whether he 
has learned his trade. Compare § 519, 5, Obs. 2. 

§ 398. b) The Accusative of the external Object is used 
with the verbs : ^^vyw (compare fugio), a7ro^i^pa(TKw, I 
run away from ; <^0avw, / get before ; OtjpaM, OrfpEvcj, I 
hunt after; fxifuLiojuai (compare imito?'), ZrjXoto, T rival ; 
afxhi^ofxaiy I repay, I respond to ; XavOavo) (compare lateo), 
ekXeitto) (compare deficio); IkXeitth jU£ 17 iXirig, spes me 
deficit. 



238 THE INTERNAL OBJECT. § 399. 

§ 399. c) This Accusative is farther used with verbs of 
emotion : al^eoimm, aKTX^vofxaiy I am ashamed {tov iraripa, 
hefore my father) ; ^vXarTojiai, ivXap>iojiai, I am on my 
guard against; Qappiti), I have confidence (rriv i(Txyv,in 
my strength) ; eKirXriTToiuai, KaTairXriTToiuai, I am amazed 
at ; similarly with ojuvvjui, I swear hy {tovq Oeovg, the 
gods). 

Obs. — As witli oiivvfii, so in exclamations, the Accusative is used 
even without a governing verb : vai fia tov Ata, Tes^ ly Zeus ! 
(§ 643, 16). 

§ 399 J. The S^ace and Time over which an action ex- 
tends are often expressed by the Accusative : koivtiv oSoy 
riXOoiuLw, yje came hy a common road ; Horn. KXifiaKa 
v\prj\riv KarefdrjaETo, she came down the high ladder ; 
ir\uv BaXacraav, to navigate the sea ; evravOa Kvpog ifxuvE 
nuipaQ irivre, there Cyrus remained five days. Compare 
§ 405. 

On the Accusative of the aim^ see § 406. 

§ 400. 2. The Internal Object 
is expressed by the Accusative not only with transitive, 
but also with intransitive and passive verbs. 
The internal Object is : 

a^ a word of cognate origin with the verb : Horn. a^Ckoi 
^' h-ii^ aWrjm judxriv Ijulolxovto irvXy^aiv, alii circa alias 
jportas jpugnam jpugnahant ; retx^? ruxCCovTai, they 
wall (build) a wall ; TrojUTrrjv TrifXTreiv, to send an escort, 
make a solemn procession ; KaKiarrjv ^ovXeiav b^ov\ev(T£v, 
he served the worst service (endured the worst slavery) ; 
Hom. rt[» TTEiaeai 6q kev apicTTriv jdovXrfv f^ovXevtr^, you will 
obey him who advises (gives) the best advice; rr\v ivavriav 
voaov vocTovfiEv, we suffer (sicken) from the ojyposite sick- 
ness ; fjLEyaXrjv Tiva Kpimv Kpiverai, he is judged (tried) in 
a great trial ; 

b) or a word akin to the verb in m^eaning / irkriyriv tvtt- 
rsrai /3a/ourarnv, he is struck a very severe blow ; iraaag 



§ 402. DOUBLE OBJECT. 239 

vocTovg KajjLVH, he suffers from all diseases ; poet, o^vpfxara 
yoacrOai, to moan lamentations / ttoXejuov e oTjoarevo-av rov 
hpbv KoXovjULEvoVfthey marched out to the so-called holy 
war ; ypacpriv ^iwKuv, to pursue with a lorit (compare 
ypa(l)rjv ypa^EcrOai) ; 

c) or a substantive defining the verb : ^OXv/xiria vikuv, 
to conquer in the Olympic games ; ydfiovg lormv, to give 
a marriage-feast; Horn. vo(Trov odvpojUBvoi, weeping for 
the return ; fxivm irvHovTEg 'Axato/, the courage-hreathing 
Achceans ; ayyeXiriv eXOnvyto go a message; nvp ocjiOaX- 
fioim ^e^opKtjg, looking fire with the eyes (flashing fiery- 
looks) ; 

d) or the result of the action expressed by the verb : 
IeXkoq ovraaai, to strike a wound (produce by blows) ; op- 
fcm raixvHVyfoedus ferire,i.e.,fo6dus hostiam feriendo ef 
ficere / poet. i\^i. (17 avap\ia) rpoirag Karapprtyvvcn, it (an- 
archy) hreaJcs flight, i. e., produces flight by breaking through 
the ranks. 

§ 401. Often, especially in the poets, a neuter adjective 
or pronoun in the Accusative is added to a verb as a 
special qualification, almost like an adverb (§ 400, c) : 
oXiyov cnrtivat, to he a little way off; jxiy a \pev^eTaif 
he tells a great lie (compare /miya xl^^v^og \pevdsTai) ; tov- 
T o \aip(i), at this I rejoice ; ri ^^prtcrojuiai rovrtoj what 
use shall I make of this f ir avra Trdaofihi, I will ohey in 
all things. 

§ 402. 3. Double Object. 

Many verbs have a double object, consequently a double 
Accusative ; the following, which most frequently occur 
with this construction, may serve as examples : ^^i^ddKii) 
{e^i^a^av tov irai^a rriv fxovmKi]v, docuerunt jpuerum mu- 
sicam) r KpvTTTOjf I hide ; Ipwrdu), I ask ; aiTicj, I demand; 
TrpcLTTOfiai, I acquire {dpyvpiov rovg irapovrag, money from 
those who are present); kukov Xiyto rovg axOpovg, I speak 



240 DOUBLE OBJECT. § 403. 

ill of my enemies ; a(^aipko}xai, cnrocTTepioj, I deprive of/ 
avajuiiuvrjCTKU), I remind of/ Ivtvii), kiK^iivvviii, I put on 
{tlvcl ')(^iTU)va, a coat on some one) ; Tr^pi^aWofxai, I encircle 
{ruxn TYiv itoKlv, the city with walls). Horn. : 17 ^£ jiiyav 
larov vtpaivev ^iirXaKa, she wove a double garment at the 
loom (§ 399, h), 

Obs. 1. — In the passive construction the thing remains in the Accu- 
sative : diSdcTKOfxai ttjv fiovaiKrjV'^ a<pypr}fiaL tov 'ittttov, I am 
robbed of the horse. 

Obs. 3. — ^Many other verbs besides these have a double Accusative, 
by an external object being added to the internal one : Horn. 
ov Zevg (piXei TravToirjv ipi\6Ti]Ta, whom Zeus loved with multiform 
love, i. e., to whom Zeus manifested love in various ways (§ 400, 
a) ; AhxivrjQ Krrjffi^oJVTa ypa^tjv Trapavofiiov ISiioKev, ^schines pros- 
ecuted Ktesiphon with a charge of violating the law (§ 400, b) ; poet. 
TToXXd ere odvpfiara KUTeldov Ttjv 'Hpa/cXetov t^odov yoatfievtjv, many 
tcailings I saw you give vent to about the departure of Heracles 
(§ 400, c) ; Hom, iXkoq fie (ipoTog ovraaev dvrjp, the wauiid which 
a mortal man struck me (§ 400, d). 

§ 404. 4. The Accicsative as a Predicate. 

A dependent Predicate relating to an Object is in the 
Accusative. Hence the verbs mentioned in §§ 361, 10, 
and 392, which signify naming^ deeming^ onahing, appoint- 
ing, choosing, representing, and the like, have a double 
Accusative in the Active — one of the external Object, and 
one of the Predicate : ol KoXa/cec 'A\i^av^pov Oeov tjvo- 
}jLaZ,ov, the flatterers used to call Alexander a god ; alpn- 
adai Tiva or par r]y6v, eligere aliquem ducem / oi> roiig 
irXdcTTa exovrag ev^ai/uLOveaTa t o v g vojiiZii), I do not 
deem those possessing most the happiest ; -Kapi^^ l/uavrov 
evTTBiOriy I show myself obedient ; cXa/Be tovto ^tj pov, 
he received this (as) a gift. 

Obs.— The want of the Article often of itself distinguishes the pre- 
dicative accusative from the objective (§ 378). In the passive 
construction both Accusatives must become Nominative*, accord- 
ing to § 392. 

§ 404. 5. In a freer way the Accusative is joined to 



4®i- 



§ 405. DOUBLE 0BJE®4: 241 

verbs and adjectives, to point out to wliat the idea of 
these words refers, in Teference to what tliey- are to be 
understood : Ka/xvw Tr\v k^(^ a\y]v,I suffer in the head 
(compare § 400, h) ; o^ikoq ircKrav a^iKiav, unjxist in 
every (kind of) injustice (in every way, compare § 400, 
a)\ "EXXrjveg elm to y ivog, they are Greeks in race; 
ev txojuev TO. (Tw fiara, we are well in hody ; Hom. o/x- 
fxar a koX ic £ a X ?) v 'iKeXog Ail repTTiKepavviOf in eyes arid 
head like thunder-loving Zeus ; wapOivog KoXri to tldog, 
a maiden heautiful in form, or of beautiful, form {facie 
pulchra) ; ouSeic avOptJirog avTog tt clvt a aoc^og, no 'inan 
is himself loise in every thing ; 6 Map(Tvag TroTajmog ukocfi 
KCLi irivTe iro^ag hx^ to tv pog, the River Ma/rsyas was 
twenty-five feet in breadth. This Accusative is called the 
Accusative of reference. 

Obs. — Hence a great number of independent, almost adverbial, Ac- 
cusatives : TO ovofxa, in name, by name ; to TrXtjOog^in number; t6v 
TpoTTov, in character ; tovtov tov TpoTrov, in this way ; tyjv <pv<jiv, by 
nature; Trp6^a(nv,on the pretext, ostensibly ; diKT]v,UJce; xapiP,for 
the saJce of (gratia) ; to irav, altogether, on the whole ; ttoXv, by far ; 
Ti, quid, what f why ? tI KXaieig ; why weepest thou ? avrd tuvtu 
ijK(t),for this very reason I have corns. 

§ 405. In regard to the ideas of space and time, the 
Accusative expresses extension (compare § 399, h) : Hom. 
Trav i]ixap (^ipointiv, a whole day I was home along., to- 
turn diem ferebar ; j^amXevg koX "EWrjvEg cnruxov aX- 
XtjXwv TpicLKovTa (TTaSta, the hing and the Hellenes 
were thirty stadia distant from each other ; Hom. XdireTo 
^ovpbg lpu)r]v,he remained a spears throw behind ; tov 
filv tv TraOovTa eel fiefxvr\adai tov tt clvt a X9 ^"^ ^^f ^oy 
Se TTOLTiaavTa Evdvg £7riXe\ri(T0aiy he who has received kind- 
nesses ought to remember them throughout all time, but he 
who has done them immediately to forget them. 

Obs. 1. — An Accusative used with ordinal numerals, in regard to 
time, is to be translated by since before or ago : kjSdSfiriv ijfispav 
rj Ovydrrjp avT<^ iTeTeXevTrjKEi, his daughter had died seven days be- 
fore. â–  ' 

L 



242 THE GENITIVE. § 406, 

Obs. 2. — Freer Accusatives, referable chiefly to time, are : tovtov 
Tov xpovov^ at this time ; to \onr6v,far tlie future, henceforth ; riXogy 
at last; Trporepov, formerly ; dpxnv, up to the beginning, hence en- 
tirely; TYjv Taxi(Trr]v, supply 6d6v,tlie quickest (way); ixaKpdv,far, 
distant. 

§ 406. In the poets, the Accusative joined to verbs of 
motion also denotes the j)lace toward which an action is 
directed : Horn, rov ^l KXiog ov pavov 'ikh, Ms fanfie 
reaches up to heaven ; wCjg riXOeg "A jO 7 o c ; quomodo Ar- 
gos venisti f On the absolute Accusative of participles, 
see § 586. 

D) The Genitive. 

% 407. The Genitive generally denotes a thing helong- 
ing to another. 

Obs. — Hence the Genitive is most commonly dependent on a noun, 
and, even where it is governed by a verb, its use resembles that 
with a noun. 

§ 408. 1. The Genitive with Suhstantives, 

One Substantive may be joined to another in various 
ways ; the most common are : 

1. Sa)ic/oarj]c ^ 'Siw ^ pov i <t kov vlog, Socrates son of 
Sophrokiscus : Origin. 

2. 7] oiKia TOV Tvarpog, the father's house : Possession, 

3. vofiKTiua dpyvpiov,a silver coui : Material. 
Horn, ^iirag olvov,a cup of wine : Contents. 

4. Gt TrXuaTOL t Cj v 'EW ri v w v,7nost of the Hellenes: 
Partitive Genitive. 

5. 6 (}i6f5og tCjv TroXefjiiwVf metus hostiurn, i. e., either 

a) the fear of the enemy .^ i. e., the fear w^hich the 
enemy feels {Subjective Genitive), or, 

h) the fear about the enemy, i. e., the fear of which 
the enemy is the object {Objective Genitive). 

6. ^ovKog irlvre juvwv, a slave worth five Tnince : Value, 

7. ypa^ri Kkowrig, an accusation of theft : Cause. 

8. irokiTov aptTY], a citizen! s virtue : Quality. 



§ 412. THE GENITIVE. 243 

9. Horn. TpoiiiQ TTToXiSpov, the city of (called) Troy : 
Designation. 

Which of the two substantives in any particular case 
has to be expressed by the Genitive is generally quite as 
clear from their meaning as in English. 

But the following special peculiarities in the use of the 
different kinds of Genitives deserve to be noticed : 

§ 409. a) The Genitive denotes descent from a father, 
even without the addition of a Substantive : 2wK|oar»jc o 
1>w(l)povi(7Kov, Socrates, the son of Sojphroniscus ; MiKria- 
^rig KliuLwvo g, Ifiltiades, son ofKimon; poet., At6c*'A/o- 
r^piq, Artemis, daughter of Zeus. 

§ 410. J) The Neuter of the Article with a Genitive has 
very diflferent meanings (compare § 383) : to. tCjv 'EXXr^- 
vb) V, the affairs, interests, possessions of the Hellenes (com- 
pare ra 'EXXr]v«ica) ; to Tr\Q 6\Ljap\iag, the nature of the 
oligarchy y on the other hand, to tov ArjfiocrOivovg, the 
word of Demosthenes ; to. tCjv ^iKijjv Koiva, the property 
of friends is common. 

§ 411. c) The idea of abode is to be supplied in the ex- 
pressions : HQ ^L^aaKoko v <^ofrav, to go to the master's 
(house), i. e., to go to school ; Iv or elg "Ai^ov (Homer, hv 
^Ai^a o ^ofjioig, in Ilades^ dwelling, dominion), in or into 
the lower world. 

§ 412. d) The Partitive Genitive (4)3 denoting a whole 
to be divided, is most common with numerals and superla- 
tives : TT o X X o I TMv ^AOr)vaiwvj multi Atheniensium ; tt o- 
TEpog TLJv aSfX^wv ; which of the two brothers f iravTojv 
apioTOQj omnium optimus ; but also with various adjec- 
tives: 01 (TTTov^aloi Tbjv TToXiTOJVfthe assiduous among 
the citizens. So, more freely in the Homeric poems : ^a 
OEawVf the divine one among goddesses; drijuov avrip, a 
man of the people ; and similarly, a v^j/o rwv pr^Topwv, a 
man from the number of the orators. 



244 THE GENITIVE. § 413. 

The Partitive Genitive with names of places denotes the 
whole territory; e?)]3ai rrig Boiwriag, Thehes in Boeotia ; 
with Neuter pronouns it sometimes denotes a whole which 
is attained by degrees : dq tovto avoiag r}\9ov, eo usque 
insanice progressi sunt. 

Obs. — Adjectives wliicli have a Partitive Genitive sometimes follow 
the gender of the Genitive dependent upon them : 6 rj/xKrvg tov 
Xpovov, the half of the time (instead of to ijixiav tov xpovov) ; ») 
TrXdaTT] TfjQ x<^P«C, '^^^^i of ihe land. 

§ ^13. e) The Objective Genitive (5, e) may be translated 
by various prepositions: wvoia tCjv (I}l\ix)v, benevolence 
tovmrd friends ; airopia aiTovyWant of food; Hom./f^oc 
l^x\rvoq i\^\ iTOTr\To Qy eagerness for food and drinh ; riavxia 
Ix^P^ ^y J9^(2C6 from enemies ; ayihvig Xoyw v, contests in 
speeches ; cKpopfxri Epytjv, stimulus to deeds; aTrocrramc T(i>v 
^AOrivaiwv, defection from the Athenians ; Xvmg OavaTov, 
deliverance from death ; j3/g iroXirw v, with violence against 
the citizens, in spite of the citizens. 

2- Genitive loith Adjectives and Adverbs. 
% 414. The Genitive is joined to many relative adjec- 
tives and their adverbs, i. e., to such adjectives and adverbs 
as are conceivable only in reference to something, and 
points out the person or thing they refer to. The most 
important adjectives of this kind are : 

1. KoivoQy common; l^iog, olKHog, own, peculiar, and oth- 
ers which imply property or belonging to, as : vaog hpbg 
TOV 'AttoXXwvoc, ^ temple sacred to Apollo (possession, 
compare § 408, 2). 

2. Adjectives denoting j^Z^wi^^/ ^^^ want (contents, § 408, 
3), as: iuL£GT6gftiunr\sii)g,TrX7] prig, full; ifKovaiog, rich ; Iv 
^BTig, wivrig, necessitous ; farther, the adverb aXig, enough : 
iravTa EV(l)pO(Tvvr}g irXia i]v, all was full of joy. 

3. Those signifying acquainted or imacquainted with : 
llxiTupog, peritiis ; aireipog, imperitus ; lTri(TTrifxu)v, sldlled 



§ 416. THE GENITIVE. * 245 

(rixvv^, in o^Ti art)\ fjLvyjjudJv, ajuvrjjuwv, mindftd and un- 
mindful. 

4. a^ioQy worthy j ava^ioQy unworthy ; TrXeUrov a^iov, 
worth most, the worthiest thing (§ 408, 6); 

5. Adjectives implying participation (§ 408, 4), whether 
it be positive or negative: fiiroxog tov 7r6vov,particeps 
laboris; ajxoipog, without a share j' ainog, author, guilty, 
reus. . 

Obs. — To these belong many adjectives compounded with dv (d, 
§ 360) privative, which, especially in poets, are joined with the 
genitive : poet. aio)v kukCov dyevarog, a life which has not tasted of 
misfortunes ; cpiXbJv uKXavrog, unwept ty friends. 

6. Adjectives in -iKog (§ 351) denoting capability or fit- 
ness for (compare 3) something : ^L^aGKokiKoq jpa/uiuaTiKrig, 
capable of teaching grammar ; TrapacTKevaariKbg tcjv ug rbv 
TToXcjuoy, skilled in obtaining the necessaries for war. 

§ 415. Many Adverbs of Place are joined with a Geni- 
tive, which is mostly of a Partitive nature (compare § 412): 
TTou yfie; where on earth? so with IvTog, within ; aW, 
inside; iKTog, without ; t^oj, outside/ o.yxi) lyyvgy nXtj- 
aiov, near; Trpoo-w or ir 6 ppto, forward ; iripay beyo'nd ; 
evOv, straight towards ; irporrOev, tjULTrpocrOev, in front; om- 
(rOeVf behiiid; djKliOTipwdiv, on both sides; avh), upward 
(TTora/xwi', up-stream^) \ and corresponding with these also 
some adverbs of time and manner : TrrjvUa Trjg rjl^epag ; 
at what time of the day f iruig 'i^^ig rfjc yvh)fxr)g ; what do 
you think? XaOpa ra>y yoviwv, secretly from the parents. 

§ 416. The Comparative may have the object with which, 
any thing is compared in the Genitive (as in the Abla- 
tive in Latin) : iulh^wv tov d^eX(l>ovj major fratre, i. e., rj 
6 d^iX(l)6gy than the brother; ov irpogmu rbv apxovra 
TMV dpxo/mhujv irovrfpOTepov uvai, i. e., rj rovg dpxofiivovg, 
it is not becoming that the governor should be worse than 
the governed. 

Obs. 1. — This Genitive is used most frequently where it represents 



246 THE GENITIVE. § 417. 

y with the Nominative or Accusative ; yet it may also more 
freely represent ?/ with the Dative : poet. TrXejwv xp^^^^Qi '^^ ^^'^ /^' 
apkcTKuv ToiQ KCLTio Tuiv tvOd^E (tj Tolg tvOdSe), longer is the time that 
I must please those below than tJmt I must please those here. 

Obs. 3. — Like th6 Comparative, the Superlative is sometimes joined 
with the Genitive of the things with which any thing is com- 
pared : poet. <l)doQ KoXXi arov twv Trporspwv, a light most beautiful 
in comparison with the former ones, where we might have expected 
(pdoQ KdWiov riov Trporepujv, lux prioj^bus pulchrior, or (pdoQ KdWt- 
GTov Trdvrwv, omnium pulcherrima. 

Obs. 3. — All adjectives expressive of a comparison follow the rule 
of Comparatives : hTrXdaiog, doubly (as great as) ; hvT^poQ (ovdevog), 
second {to none) ; vonpoQ, later than ; 'irepoQ, another than. _ 

3. The Genitive with Verbs. 
Very many verbs are joined with the Genitive on the 
general principles mentioned in § 408. 

§ 417. 1. The Genitive represents a Predicate (§ 361 > 7 
and 10) with verbs which denote being., becoming^ making., 
deeming.^ in order to predicate something of a substantive, 
as originating from, possessing, consisting of, or in any 
other way qualifying it, § 408 : SwK/oarTjc ^(i)(l)povi(Ticov rjv, 
Socrates was Sojphroniscus' s son (§ 408, i); i] oiKia rov 
irarpog tyivtroy the house became the fathers jpro^erty 
(§ 408, 2); TO rCiyoq \iOov TTfTrotrjraf, the wall has been 
made of stone (§ 408, 3) ; ol eEcro-aXoi rwv 'EXX?}vwv naav, 
the Thessalians belonged to the Hellenes (§ 408, 4) ; TroXt- 
Tov ajaOov vojuiZeTai Oappuv, to be courageous is deemed a 
good citizen! s quality (§ 408, 8). 

Obs. — The Genitive often occurs with verbs of perception and ob- 
servation in such a way that it is properly dependent on a noun 
or pronoun : tovto vfiajv ndXiara Oavixd^oixev, this we most admire in 
you (properly : this of you we most admire). 

§ 418. 2. The Genitive of Material (§ 408, 3) is also 
used with verbs oi plenty and want (compare § 414, 2): 
iripnrXrijiL, ir\r]p6ii),I fill ^' irXi^Bw, y^jjib), I a7n full ; ^eojuai 
(Sti poi), I need ; ra wra iviirXridav ^aipoviag aocpiag, they 
filled the ears with wondrous wisdom; 6 irapwv Katpbg 



§ 419. THE GENITIVE. 247 

TToXXijc (ppovTi^og KaX j3ouXr/c ^iiTai, the jpresent time is in 
need of much reflection and advice. 

% 419. 3. The Partitive Genitive (§ 408, 4) is used with 
many verbs which only jpartially affect the object of the 
action : 

a) With all verbs which contain the idea of sharing : 
luieTi\u) {jiiTiiGTL fjiQi), I have a share in ^ jmeTaXajildavti),! 
take a share in ; jueTa^iEufxi, I give a share (rJjc Atmc, of 
the booty) \ KOLvijjviw, I share (compare § 414,5); Hom. 
aiTOv 8' al^oiT] rafiir} TrapiOr^Ke ^apiZ^Ofxivr] Trapaovrtuv, the 
modest stewardess brought bread sujpjplying from the store. 

*Obs. — oCo),I smell, also belongs to these: jivpojv 6K^i,he smells of 
myrrh. 

b) With verbs which denote touching^ laying hold of 
seizing : airroixai, xpavw, I touch ; txofiaiy I hold by, border 
{Tivoq) on something^' avTi\oiJiai, l-rriXafiptavofiaL, I lay 
hold of; Xafij^avu) Tiva T7}g ^iLpog,! seize one by the 
hand ; ap\o\mi, I begin (r ^ c tt a t ^ 1 1 a c, with the educa- 
tion)-, poet, ^avovrtiiv ov^lv aXyog airrf^rai, no jpoAn 
touches the dead. 

c) With verbs which denote striving, aiming at : oro- 
Xa^ofxai Tov gkottov,! aim at the- goal ; optyoimai, /strive; 
^ixpaw, I thirst,; rvy\aviii, I hit, attain (fVux^ twv aOXwv, 
he wo?i the prizes); l(lnKvovnai, I reach, attain; r'lKw, I 
have attained (Herod, ^vvafxiog, power). 

d) With verbs which denote enjoying : laOiw, I eat ; 
irivw,! drinJc ; y^vu),! give a taste; k(jTiab), I entertain; 
aTToAaww, / enjoy {imeyifTTwv ayadwVf the greatest blessings); 
tvog av^pog iv (Ppovriaavrog TroXAot av diroXavaEiav, 
inany %oould enjoy a man who has thought sensibly. 

e) With verbs denoting the opposites of the ideas enu- 
merated under a — d, that is, the exclusion from a share in 
something: a-i\o^ai, I refraiii {gltov , abstineo cibo); x!^- 
pitii) , I separate ; upyw^I keep off; aripicsKM , I deprive ; 
TTavojuai, I cease; tiKw, Trapa\iopi(x), I yield ; Xuw, / loose ; 



248 THE GENITIVE. § 420. 

IXevOepou), I free j t^u^o^xai, I sjpare ^ afiapTavii), cnrorvy- 
yavu),I miss,' \piv^opai, ac^iaWofxaiy I aon deceived {rrig 
IXiri^ogy in my ho])e). 

Obs. — Many of these verbs are also joined with an Accusative 
when an object is to be expressed as wholly encompassed by the 
action : irXdarov fispog rivog /zfrixetv, to Jiave the greatest part in 
any thing; irivio oJvov, I drinJc wine; qivov, some wine; Xayxavio 
ri, I attain something; rtvog, a share in something. 

§ 420. 4. The Genitive is joined with many verbs de- 
noting a sensuous or m^oral jyerception or emotion (com- 
pare § 414, 3), as: aKOvtj, aKpoaofiai, I hear j aKrOavofiai, 
I perceive ; iiifxvy]<jKOfiaiy I rememher {rov (^i\ov, memini 
amici); imXavdavofJLai, I forget ,' fxiXn fioi TLvoqylTrip.^Xi- 
ofiaif I am concerned about sonnetliing^ I care ; Ivrpinoiuai, 
Hom. aXiytjy aXeyiZtjj, I concern myself; ajULsXtio, I neg- 
lect ; oXiyiopiu), I care little about ; Ipad), I love (§ 419, c); 
iTriOvjuioj, I desire ; irvvOavofiaL ri Tivog, I learn something 
about one. 

Obs. — The Accusative also is admissible with several of these 
verbs : with ukovu), if the object is directly audible : ^96yyov, a 
sound, but tov didauKoXov, the teacher. 

§ 421. 5. With verbs of estimating, buying, selling, etc., 
the Genitive denotes the value or price (compare § 408, 6, 
and § 417) : 6 dovXog Trivre p.vu)v TifiaTai, the slave is valued 
at five mince; iroXXov wveiaOai, magni emere; raXdvTov 
airo^oaOai, to sell for a talent. 

§ 422. 6. With verbs of judicial proceedings the Geni- 
tive denotes the cause (§ 408, 7, § 414, 5): kXott^c ypa^^- 
adai aiaxpoVffurti occusari turpe est ; (povov ^itoKsiv, to 
prosecute for murder; (pEvyn irapavofiwvyhe is charged 
with violating the law ; airi^vye KaKtjyopiag, he was ac- 
quitted of libel; kaXhiaav Ttpo^ocjiaq, proditionis condem- 
nati sunt. 

Obs. — With verbs of emotion the Genitive likewise expresses the 
cause, as : QavfidZo) o-e rrjg aojtppoavvrjg, I admire thee for thy mod- 
eration ; Hom. xw6/i£voe ywaiKoq, angry about the woman. 



§ 425. THE GENITIVE. 249 

§ 423. 7. The Genitive is also joined with verbs which 
imply the meaning of a Comparative (§ 416), as : Kpariuj 
{icpHTT(i)v el/JLi), cLp\ii) {Kpoiaog AuSwv ^Vx^^> Crmsus ruled 
over the Lydians) ; jSao-iXeuw, / ride ; iripiup.i, -rrepiyiyvo- 
fxaijlam sicperior ; -nrraoimaL {inTwy ufxi), I am inferior; 
Xdiro/bLai, v(TTepi(ij,Iam behind; ^ta^apw TivoQfdiffero ab 
aliquo ; fiap^aptov "EXXrjvag apx^tv aicoc, '^t is reasonable 
that Hellenes should rule over barbarians. 

§ 424. 8. The Genitive is joined with verbs compounded 
with prepositions, which either always, or in the sense 
which they have in the compound verb, require the Gen- 
itive (compare Chapter XVII.) : £ic/3aXXw tlvcl rifxrig, I 

eject sotne one from office ; irpoaraTzvu rf)(,* iroXzwQ, he pre- 
sides over the state ; 1<jxvv tov ^lkuiov irpoTiOrjGiv, he pre- 
fers might before right ; Kara(l>povuv nvog, to desjpise any 
one; Karriyopdv tl tivoq^Io accuse one of a thing ; Trarpiov 
yv rri ^AOrjvaiiov woXei TrpoeGravai tu)v 'EXXr/vwv, it VMS a 
hereditary custom for the city of the Athenians to be at 
the head of the Hellenes. 

4. Freer use of the Genitive. 
§ 425. The Genitive, without immediate connection with 
a noun or verb, expresses : 

1. Place (local Genitive), almost exclusively in the lan- 
guage of poetry, and that eithei^ the place fro7n which 
something is removed : '[(rraaOe [5adpo)Vf get up from the 
stej)s; virayuv rf/c oSou, to go out of 'the way (compare 
§ 419, e) ; — or the space within which something takes 
place (compare §§ 412, 415) : rfjc 'Iwvmc tovto ai(s\pov 
vevo/uiiaTai, within Ionia that is considered disgraceful; 
Hom. i;f<^oc oh (^taiv^To iraariq yairig, no cloud ajppeared 
within the com/pass of the whole earth ; ip^ovTai ir^^ioio, 
they go through or within thej^lain (compare the German 
ich gehe des Weges). 

On another local Genitive, see § 412. 

L2 



250 THE DATIVE. § 426. 

§ 426. 2. Time (temporal Genitiv^),in which case it is 
a Partitive Genitive expressing the whole of a space of 
time (§ 412) within which something takes place: rpig 
Tov IviavTov, thrice in the yeai* j i]fxipag,hy day j vvKTog, 
hy night y tov avTov yiifjLwvoQf in the same winter j tov 
XoLTTovyfor the future ^' \p6vov av\vov,for some timej 
iKaaTov tTovg, each year. 

§ 427. 3. Cause (causal Genitive, compare § 408, 7, 
§ 422), in exclamations : otjuoi Trig rvyr\g^ alas ! for my 
fortune (compare the German O des Leides) ; and in In- 
finitives with the Genitive of the Article (in order to). 
§ 574, 3, Ohs, 

§ 428. 4. Occasion, time, circumstances, etc., as an al>so- 
lute Genitive, in connection with participles, just like the 
absolute Ablative in Latin : Kvpov (iamXevovTog, Gyro reg~ 
nante, § 584 (compare the German : stehenden Fusses), 

Obs. — The absolute Genitive very rarely occurs, like the absolute 
Ablative of the Latins, without a participle ; when the verb to le 
occurs in the clause the participle u)v is to be used : te jpuero^ aov 
Traiddg uvtoq. 

E) The Dative. 
§ 429. The Dative denotes, in general, the person or 
thing more remotely connected with an action. 

Obs. — The Dative, therefore, depends just as often on verbs as on 
adjectives (adverbs), but very rarely on a substantive. 

§ 430. 1, Dative <di iha person concerned. 
As in Latin and English, so in Greek, the person more 
remotely affected by something is in the Dative, and : 

a) with transitive verbs it is the so-called indirect oh- 
ject : ^om. kwTa ^i ol Swo-w svvaiojLieva TTToXUOpa, and I 
will give him seven flourishing cities. 

h) with intransitive verbs it expresses the person or a 
thing conceived as a person to which the action refers : 



§ 435. THE DATIYE. 251 

iTpiiTu fjLoi Tij a thing hecomes me / Stt [loi nvog, I need 
something ; IjuoX ovrw ^okeT bx^iv, it seeUis to me to he so ; 
/3orj0w rote (J\)iilio.yoiq, SUGCurro sociis / ireiOov rolg vo/moLc;, 
ohey the laws ; fux^o'^e rote Oioig,pray to the gods; fxifM- 
^ofxai Toiq fxadr]Taig,I rej[)roach the scholars. 

Obs. — Substantives derived from such verbs are sometimes followed 
by the Dative : j? Iv n^ TroXefiq) roTg avmidxoiQ (3oT]9Ha, the help to 
the allies in the war. 

c) with Adjectives : 6 ayaOog tio ayaOc^ fxovog (plXog, the 
good alone is dear to the good. 

431. 2. Dative oi interest. 

The Dative denotes the person for whom — for whose 
interest — something is or takes place ; hence 

a) the person henefited or injured {dat. commodi, incom- 
modi) : irag avrjp avrto irovu, every man toils for himself; 
(l>d6vog /mijKTTov kukov Toig i)(ov(Tiv avTov, envy IS the great- 
est evil to them that have it. 

432. h) the possessor with tt/xf, yiyvoimai, and similar 
verbs: iroXXoi fioi cjiiXoi daiVy I have many friends. 

Obs. — The possessive Dative is sometimes, like the Genitive, joined 
with a Substantive : Herod., 61 a^t /Sdee, their oxen. 

• § 433. c) the symjpathizing person (ethical Dative) : poet, 
w tLkvov, y\ f3l(5wsv r\iiLv 6 ^ivog ; O child, has the stranger 
left us f ri yap Trarfip juoi irpia^vg Iv ^o/ulokti ^pa ; for what 
is my aged father doing in the house f 

§ 434. d) the acting person with passive verbs (common- 
ly vTTo with the Genitive), which is then to be viewed as 
one interested in the action : Hom. iroXUg ^ajuev "Eicro/ot 
S/q>, many were overcome by godlike Hector ; ri TriirpaKraL 
Toig aXXoig ; what has been done by the rest f This Da- 
tive is regularly joined with the Verbal Adj. in -Tiog : t/uoi 
TToXejUY^Ttov Igtiv, miM 2)ugrvaiyJiiim est. 

§ 435. e) the person remotely connected with an action : 
riOvTix ^H-'^v TToXai, he died to you long ago-; Hom. wcktiv 



252 THE DATIVE. § 436. 

Ksv TpwecTGi Kv^og apoio, thou mightest get thee fame with 
all Trojans ,' Horn. toIglv avtcrrr}, among them arose ; vtto- 
Xafi^avHv ^a ti^ toiovtm on tv{}Or}g laTiv, in regard to such 
a one we must su^pjpose him simjple. 

Obs. — In this manner participles are most frequently used, partly 
with, partly without, an accompanying noun : Hom. 77/tiTv dvarog 
i(TTi 7repiTpo7rsu)v iviavroQ IvOdde fiifivovreaffiv, it is tJie ninth year 
Jar us lingering here; r) diaj3dvTi tov Trorafibv irpbg koTrkpav 6d6g, 
the road westward when you have crossed the river ; yiyverai n tfioi 
(3ovXofisv(p, something ha/ppens to me as I wish; crweXovrt. or mq 
avv^XovTi eiTreiv, to spealc briejly. 

§ 436. 3. Dative of community. 

With verbs, adjectives, and adverbs, which denote com- 
munity, agreement, friendly or hostile meeting, the person 
or thing with which such a community, agreement, or such 
a meeting takes place, is in the Dative. 

a) Verbs of this kind are : Koivajvuv, I share {rivi rtvoc, 
something with one) ; crvfKJiwviu), o/uioXoyiu}, <tuvo[Sw, ojulo- 
voiu), I agree ; u/bioioofiaiy I resemble ; o/unXia), I associate 
with; ^laXiyoiiaiy I converse ; ^icK^lpofxaiy I differ ; juaxo- 
fiaif I fight ; Ipi^io , I dispute ; ra tpya ov av/uKpoyvH roTg 
Xoyoig, the deeds do not harmonize with the words ; poet. 
KaKoiaiv \xy] npogojuiXei av^pdaiVy aXX alei tCjv ayaOiov t'x^o, 
with bad men do not associate, but always hold to the 
good. 

b) Adjectives : \(jog, like / ofioiog, TrapaTrXrjcriog, simi- 
lar / 6 avTog, the same ; oiKuog, ^^log, j[>eculiar ; Koivog, 
common (compare 414, l); vjuivvv/Liog, of like name; cruv- 
wvvjuog, of like meaning; ^ta<popog, different; IvavTiog, 
ojpposite : wirXiaiuivoi rjtjav roig avroTg Kvpi^ oirXoig, they 
were armed with the same weapons as Cyrus. 

c) Adverbs : besides those derived from the adjectives 
just mentioned, especially afia, at the same time; ojuov, 
together : afxa t^I} halpoj, at the same time with his friend. 

§ 437. The Dative is used with many verbs which, com- 



§ 440. THE DATIVE. 253 

pounded with prepositions, denote a contact, or union, es- 
pecially with such as are compounded with h, avv, liri, 
yet also with those compounded with irpog, irapa, irspi, 
VTTO, as : iTnaTi]p.r]v Ifnroiuv ry x^vxy, to bring knowledge 
into the soul ; i-KiKua^ai nvi, to press tcpon, to tirge, orle ; 
iTTiTifxuv Tivt TL, to rejproack one with something * irpogdvai 
Tt[) ^i)iu(jt)y to come before the jpeojple / TraptcrTaaOai, irapelvai 
Tivt, to suj>port one; TrspiiriTrTstv nvi, to meet one. 

§ 438. 4. The Instrumental Dative, answering to the 
Latin Ablative, denotes that hy or hy means of which an 
action is brought about ; hence 

«) the "means or instrument (compare Sta, § 458) : Horn. 
rov fjilv Kara GTrjOog f3a\s ^ovpi, the one he struck on the 
breast with the spear; optjfxev To1g o^daXpoXg, we see with 
the eyes ; ov^ug iiraivov ri^ova7g licr/jo-aro, 7io one gained 
praise by pleasures ; Zvimiovv nva Qavarix), to punish one 
loith death ; Horn. Tiauav Aavaol t/za ^aKpva aolm jScXeo-- 
mv, may the Danai pay for my tears by thy darts, 

Obs. — Hence the Dative is used with xp>l(TOai, to make use of; as the 
Ablative with uti in Latin. A second predicative Dative is often 
added (§ 361, 10) : tovtojv nai (pvXa^iv txpn'^'o, some of them he used 
as guards. 

. § 439.^) the operating power or cause from which an 
action proceeds : avOpioirog (pvcreL ttoXitikov, man {is) by 
nature fitted for the state ; iroXXaKig ayvoia a/uLapravoiuev, 
we often err from ignorance ; (j)6(5uj, from fear. 

Obs. — With verbs of emotion, the Dative expresses the ground or 
occasion of the emotion : tjdofiai, x«'P<^ ^y ixovaiKy, I delight in 
music; XvTTovfiai, I am grieved; %aX£7ratVw, / am angry; arkpyM^ 
ayaTrCJ^iI am satisfied (with something); aiaxvpofiat, lam ashamed 
(about something). 

§ 440. c) the measure, by which a thing is measured, 
by which one thing surpasses another, by which it is dis- 
tinguished : TO. fxiXXovTa Kpivofiav Tolg y^'yzvr]fxivoig, thefu- 



254 THE DATIVE. § 441. 

ture we judge ofhy the jpast ; dUa treat irpo rrig ev ^a\a- 
fjiivt fxa\r]g ot ^ Adr]vaioi Iv MapaOiovL fy/jcrjcrav, te?l years 
hefore the hattle of Salamis the Athenians conquered at 
Marathon; noXXi^) /ndZivv, multo major (also ttoXv, § 404, 
Ohs^\ ^ia(piptiv Tivog ^povi]<TUf to differ from any one in 
insight. 

§ 441. 5. The, freer use of the Dative expresses: 
a) the way and manner, or an accompa;nying circum- 
stance : TovTio rtp TpoTTM, iu tMs way ; ^'la, by force; 
(Tirov^y, with seal; aiyy, in silence; tpyc^, in fact ; r([) 
ovTi, m truth ; l^ia, privatim ; Zmxoma, puhlice ; Hom. 
vrjTriirjm, in his folly (§ 362, Obs.). 

Obs. — The Dative with avrog should be particularly noticed : 6 
<^i\nnroQ TrevTaKOcriovg tTnreag iXafSev avrolg toIq ottKoiq, Philip took 
Jive hundred horse together with their armor. (Compare the Dative 
of community, § 436.) 

§ 442. b) The j^ted? where something happens is ex- 
pressed by the Dative more rarely in prose than in poetry : 
MapadCjvif at Marathon; Hom. 'EXXa^t oiKia vainjv, in- 
habiting his house in Hellas ; Hom. rof wjjLoiaiv e'xwv, 
having the bow on his shoulders ; poet. 68o7c, on the way. 

§ 443. c) Time is expressed by the Dative as definitely 
limited in answer to the question when : r^Sf rij vvkti, hac 
node; ry vGTipaia,on the following day ; TerapTa) lTu,in 
the fourth year ; ^OXv/uLwioicat the Olympic ' games ; poet. 
Xsijuspiii) voTt^y in a stormy south wind. 

05s.— Notice the diflference between the Accusative (§ 405) and the 
Genitive (§ 436), in their application to relations of time. 



447. THE PREPOSITIONS. 255 



Chap. XYII. — The Prepositions. 

§ 444. Prepositions have a double use. Either they are 
combined with a verb, to define the direction which the 
action of the verb takes, or they are used independently, 
and serve, in connection with different cases, to point out 
the relation of single words in a sentence to one another 
more distinctly than could be done by the cases alone. 

§ 445. Obs. 1. — As the name prcepositio (TrpoOacrig) points to tlie first 
of these uses, those prepositions which are not combined with verbs, 
such as: dvev, without (poet, â– ^t'xa, xwjo/c) ; dxpi, f^^XPh ^^^^^' f^^Ta^v, be- 
tween ; svEKa^ on account of; irXqv, besides, are called spurious. They 
are all used with the Genitive (compare § 415), except wg, to, which 
has the Accusative. 

§ 446. Obs. 2. — All Prepositions were originally adverbs ; many of 
them are still used as such in poetry, and a few even in prose : irepi, 
beyond, very ; fierd, later; irpog, in addition. On account of this ori- 
gin, their position jn Homer is very free ; they may be separated 
from their verb as well as from their substantive : Hom. iv S' avrbg 
tcv(7ETo vuipoira xa^Kov, and he himself put on the glittering brass ; dn<pi 
Se xcti'''<^'^ cjfioig aXaaovTai, and the manes wave around the shoulders. On 
the anastrophe in placing the Prepositions behind, see § 90. In prose 
only TTEpi is sometimes thus used. 

§ 447. With regard to the cases joined with Prepositions, 
the following general rules are to be noticed : 

1. The Accusative with Prepositions expresses the object 
upon which, over which, toward which an action extends 
(§§ 395, 405), and with many Prepositions the goal of an 
action itself (§ •406). 

2. The Genitive frequently denotes iho^ jplace from which 
an action proceeds (§ 425), often also a moral relation 
(§ 408, etc.), while it depends on other Prepositions in the 
same way as on the adverbs mentioned in § 415. 

3. The Dative denotes a more external connection (§§ 435, 

442). 



256 prepositions with the accusative. § 448. 

General View of the Prepositions. 
§ 448. I. Prepositions which can have only one case : 

A) the Accusative : uq, wq. 

B) the Genitive : avri, airo, Ik (c^, tt/oo — aviv, a-\pi, 

C) the Dative : Iv, gvv (Svv). 

II. Prepositions which can have two cases : 

A) the Genitive and Accusative : 3m, Kara, virip. 

B) the Dative and Accusative : ava. 

III. Prepositions which can have all the three oblique 
cases : ajuipi, Itti, /uL^ra, irapa, Trepi, irpog, vtto. 

I. Prepositions which can have only one Case. 

§ 449. A) Prepos-ltions with the Accusative. 

1. elg or £c (Lat. in, c. Accus., and inter), to, into, points 
out the goal toward which the action is directed. The 
opposite is t^, oict. tig is used : 

a) of jplace : ol AaKt^aifiovioi Eiglj3a\ov elg rrjv 'Arrfjcr/v* 
the Zacedcemonians invaded Attica; elg ^iKaarripiov slg- 
livai, to come into court; Xiyeiv elg to nXriOog, to speak to 
the multitude ; elg avdpag eyypa(^eiv,to enroll among men. 
Compare lv,% 456, a. 

h) of time : elg rrjv vaTepaiav, in diem proximum, for 
the next day ; elg ernrepav, toward evening; poet. eTog elg 
hog, year hy year ; elg Kaip6v,for the right time. 

c) of measure and number : elg ^laKomovg, tip to two 
hundred; elg ^vva/miv, up to one^s power, as much as is iii 
one'' s power. 

d) of purpose : xpv<riiuLov elg tov iroXejuiov, useful for the 
war'; elg ro^e r\KOfiev,for that we have come. 

In compounds it is to be translated by into, in, to. 

% 450. 2. wg (compare § 631), to, only of persons : Horn. 



§ 453. PKEPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE. 257 

aUX Tov bfioXov ayu Oiog ojg tov ofxoTov, God always brings 
like to like. 



§ 451. B) Prepositions with the Genitive. 

1. avTi (compare Horn, avra, avTr]v, avriKpv), originally 
opposite to (compare Iv-avri-og), then instead of, for : 
Hom. avxi Kaariyvy^TOv ^dvog 9' iKtTrig re rirvKTai, a stranger 
and a suppliant is instead of a brother (like a brother) ; 
avTi dvr\TOv aivjuarog aOdvarov ^o^av aWa^aaSai, to ex- 
change a 7/iortal body for immortal glory. 

In compounds it signifies against. 

§ 452. 2. ctTTo (Lat. ab, a, Engl, off), frorn, in the sense 
of separation, severance, and origin : 

a) of place : Hom. a(^' ^l-mriov oXto xa/maZe, he sprang 
of the chariot to the ground. 

b) of time : from, since: air lKHvr\g rrig r]ixipag,from 
that day. 

c) of cause : by, from, through : avrovofiog awo rrig upr}- 
vrjg, independent through the peace. 

Phrases: airo aKoirov, far from the goal; ano yvtofxrig, 
contrary to expectation ; awo (TTOfxaTog Xlyeiv, to speak 
from memory ; ot Il-ko aKy\vr\g, those of the stage, the act- 
ors. 

In compounds it signifies ^c>m, off, away, 

§ 453. 3. Ik, before vowels e? (Lat. ex, e), out of (op- 
posed to Etc), denotes removal from within or from among : 

^) of place : Ik. ^iraprrig (pEvyei, he is banished out of 
Sparta. 

b) of time : Ik iTal^b)v,from boyhood {a pueris). 

c) of origin,: Ik warpbg xprjaTov lyiveTO,he sprang from 
a brave father ; seldom with a Passive verb: rifiacfOai ek 
Tivog, to be honored by any one. 

d) close connection and conformity with : after, secun- 
dum : Xoyov Ik Xoyov Xtyeiv, to deliver speech after speech; 



258 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE. § 454. 

tK tC)v o/jtoXoyovjuhwv, according to the agreement (Lat. 
-secundum). 

Phrases : Ik ^t^iag, on the right ; l^ 'laov, egtially; ^ricrai, 
Kptfxaaai tl Ik rivog, to fasten^ to hang one thing to another 
(Lat. ^endlre ex, ah aliqua re). 

In compounds : out, away. 

§ 454. 4. 7rp6ilLi2ii.j>rd), for, before, instead. 

a) of place, before : irpo OvpCJv, before the door. 

b) of time : irpo Tr\q /xa^rjc, before the battle. 

c) of preference : irpo tovtwv TsOvavai fxaXXov av 'iXoiro, 
he would choose death before this, i. e., rather than this. 

d)for, a rare use : ir-pb irai^wv fxaxecrdai, to fight for the 
children. 

Phrase : irpo ttoXXoO iroidaOai (c), to prefer greatly. 
In compounds: before, forth, beforehand, forwa7'd. 

§ 455. The spurious Prepositions : 

5. ay£v, without (poet. X(i)pig, ^ixa, arep), 

6. a\pi, fiixpif until. 

7. pera^v, between. 

8. 'ivEKa, also evtKev, tiveKa (poet. ovviKo), for the sake of 
an object to be attained (Lat. causa): rfjc vyieiag evsKa 
Xpwp^Qa rq> larpiio, we employ a physician for the sahe of 
health. (Compare ^m with Ace, § 458, B.) 

9. 7rX?)v, besides {proeter). 

Obs. — Tr\r]v is often used quite adverbially without governing a 
case : poet, ovk ap 'AxaioXg dv^peg dai ttXtiv oh ; huTe then the 
Achmns no men hut this ? It might be TrXrjv roUe, besides this ? 

§ 456. C) Prepositions tvith the Dative. 

1. Iv (Hom. Ivi, Iv, Lat. in, c. Ablat., and inter), in, an- 
swers to the question where ? 

a) of place: Iv ' AOrjvaig, in Athens ; also a77iong (inter) : 
tv TovToig, among them; Iv ^po) XijEiv, to speak before the 
people (compare § 449, o). 



§ 458. prepositTions with the gen. and acc. 259 

. h) of time : Iv tovtoj r^i tVff, in that year. 

c) a moral relation : with : Iv to} Otoj to ttiq fxaxnQ riXog, 
the result of the hattle rests vnth God. 

Phrases: 77 Iv MapaOtJvL juaxn^ihe hattle at Marathon ; 
Iv Toiq TTpCjTog, first hy far j iv KaipCjt, at the right time ; 
iv 7rpoqdi]K.r]Q jiipu,in addition^' iv xt^pGi Ti9ivai,to put 
into the hands (compare Lat. in mensa ponere). 

In compounds : in, into, on. The accented ivi — tveaTi 
signifies it is in, it exists, it is possible. 

§ 457. 2. avv or ^vv (Lat. cum), with, denotes compan- 
ionship (opposed to av^v, compare fx^Ta with Gen., § 464, 
B) ; (Tvv 'A9{}vy syt/crjo-cv, he conquered {with the help of) 
Athene y avv v6p.i^)yin accordance with the law (opposed 
to irapa with Acc, § 465, C, h). . 

In compounds : with, together. 



11. Prepositions which can have two Cases. 

The Genitive and Accusative. 

Obs. — Here, as every where in what follows, that use of a Preposi- 
tion is placed first in which its original meaning is most mani- 
fest. 

§ 458. 1. ^la (akin to Sue, as between is to two [twai^i]), 
originally between, then through. 

A) with the Genitive : 

a) of space : most frequently throtcgh (Lai. per) : Hom. 
Sm fxlv cKTTTi^og ffXOe (jtaeivrjg oj^pi^ov ij^OQ, through the 
glittering shield pierced the mighty lance. 

b) insti'umental : by or vnth : Sm rwv oc^tdaXjuiiov opw/mev, 
by (by means of) the eyes we see (compare § 438). 

c) of space and time : a^nong {inter), during, in : ^la 
yjiipC)v 'ix^iv, to have in hand j 3(a vvKTog, during night y 
^la (piXiag livai, to be on friendly terms. 

• Phrases : ^la aTo/xaTog tx^iv, to have in the motcth, to 



260 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GEN. AND ACC. § 459. 

be talking about; ^i' ovdsvog iroLuaQai, to deem as nothing ,' 
^la fxaKpov, after a long interval^ interruption. 

B) with the Accusative : 

a) of space and time, almost exclusively in the poets : 
through, during : Horn. Sm Stj/maTa, through the rooms / 
diet vvKTa, during night. 

h) usually causal : on account ^(the operating cause) 
(compare f vfica, § 455, 8) : ^m tr\v voaov xptJjueOa t(^ larpt^, 
we employ the physician on account of the illness. 

Phrases : avroq St kavrov, by himself; Sia tl ; why f 

In compounds, Sta is through, or denotes separation, like 
Lat. dis' : ^ia(^ipii)=differre, diaipio), I sever. 

§ 459. 2. Kara (compare Adv. icarw, dow7i), originally 
downward, down (the opposite to avd). 

A) with the Genitive : 

a) of space : down from : Hom. /3r) ^t icar OvXviuiroio 
Kap{]VLov, he came down from the heights of Olympus ; 
helow {sub) : to. kuto. yrig, things below the earth. 

b) tropically : about, against : Xtytiv Kara nvog, to speak 
about, against one. 

Phrases : ttoXlv kut uKpag eXuv, to capture a city com- 
pletely ; Kara vljtov, behind. 

B) with the Accusative it denotes in its most general 
sense extension over, relation to, direction toward some- 
thing : 

a) of place : Kara poov, down a stream ; Kara yriv koX 
OdXatraav, by land and sea ; Hom. Zeitg t/Br? Kara ^aiTa, 
Zeus went to the feast. 

b) of time : kut Ikhvov tov xp^^^^f ^^ ^^^^ time; -ol 
KaO' i7Mac, Our contemporaries. 

c) of other relatio